[~ iz||~ lZi h
~ l~Z h
~ l~ fz}~ ^z &RQILJXUDWLRQ *XLGH 5HOHDVH & lZi ez{E b|G 3DOR $OWR &DOLIRUQLD \ © 2001 by SAP AG. All rights reserved. Neither this documentation nor any part of it may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means or translated into another language, without the prior consent of SAP AG. ]|
z~ SAP AG makes no warranties or representations with respect to the content hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. SAP AG assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. SAP AG reserves the right to make any such changes without obligation to notify any person of such revision or changes. SAP AG makes no commitment to keep the information contained herein up to date. mz}~z SAP, the SAP logo, mySAP.com, R/2, R/3, ABAP, and other SAP-related products mentioned herein are registered or unregistered trademarks of SAP AG. All other products mentioned in this document are registered or unregistered trademarks of their respective companies. R/3 Simplification Group SAP Labs, Inc. 3475 Deer Creek Road Palo Alto, CA 94304 ZZZVDSODEVFRPVLPSOH VLPSOLI\U#VDSFRP Printed in the United States of America. ISBN 1-893570-89-4 &217(176 Z|
~}~~ b}| h~~ ^F\~|~ z} lZi@ h
~ l~ GGGG `~ lz~} [~ iz||~ lZi h
~ l~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG 'RZQORDGV [[Y pz [~ iz||~ lZi h
~ l~ b|
}~ GGGG l|~z ~ h
~ l~ i~|z GGGGGGGG i~|~} _|z
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG Z}}Fh _|z
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG Z{ m `}~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG :KR 6KRXOG 5HDG 7KLV %RRN" [[[ +RZ ,V ,W 2UJDQL]HG" [[[ i}| gz GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG \~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG 6DPSOH 5 5HOHDVH 6FUHHQ [[[LL 6SHFLDO ,FRQV [[[LL Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C iz JS e~z ~ [z| G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G J iz h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGK \z~ JS h
~ l~ i~|z m~||z
h~~ N h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGO p~{ l~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGO b~~ mzz| l~~ AbmlB GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGP :HE *DWHZD\ :*DWH $SSOLFDWLRQ *DWHZD\ $*DWH ,QWHUQHW $SSOLFDWLRQ &RPSRQHQWV ,$& 6HUYLFHV 7KHPHV +70/ 7HPSODWHV 0,0( )LOHV kHL l~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGR a b p GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGR k~~~|~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJI \z~ KS i~| i
z JJ h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJK i~| i
z z \
~~ b
~~z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJK i~| i
z b
~~ l~
Fl}~ bZ\ z z Z}}Fh GGGGJL f \ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJM :KDW :H 'HOLYHU m~ \ z} m~ m~
z~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJM :KHUH WR 2EWDLQ WKH 7HPSODWH k~~~|~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJN iz KS \z kHL G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G JP iz h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJQ Contents \z~ LS \~z ~ h
~ l~ ~ \zz
KJ h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKK :KDW :H 'HOLYHU fz b az~S m~ h
~ l~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKL $FFHVVLQJ WKH 2QOLQH 6WRUH fz~ ]zz kHL l ~ h
~ l~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKN &UHDWH D 3URGXFW &DWDORJ &UHDWH WKH 3ULFHV IRU <RXU 3URGXFWV &UHDWH D 5HIHUHQFH &XVWRPHU 0DVWHU 5HFRUG &UHDWH WKH 2XWSXW 7\SH 0DVWHU 5HFRUG IRU 2UGHU &RQILUPDWLRQV &UHDWH WKH 2XWSXW 7\SH 0DVWHU 5HFRUG IRU 'HOLYHU\ &RQILUPDWLRQV &UHDWH WKH 2XWSXW 7\SH 0DVWHU 5HFRUG IRU %LOOLQJ &RQILUPDWLRQV (QVXUH &RUUHFW 3DUDPHWHUV $UH (QWHUHG LQ WKH ,76 8VHU¶V 3URILOH \z l ~ h
~ l~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLL &RQILJXUH WKH $SSOLFDWLRQ 7\SHV IRU ,PDJHV LQ WKH 2QOLQH 6WRUH &RQILJXUH WKH 3URGXFW 3UHVHQWDWLRQ 3URILOH &RQILJXUH WKH &RXQWU\ 6HOHFWLRQ 3URILOH &RQILJXUH WKH &XVWRPHU $GPLQLVWUDWLRQ 3URILOH &RQILJXUH WKH 4XRWDWLRQDQG2UGHU 3URILOH &RQILJXUH WKH 2QOLQH 6WRUH &RQILJXUH 6DOHV 'RFXPHQW 7\SHV 8VHG IRU WKH ,QWHUQHW &RQILJXUH DQ $GGLWLRQDO ,WHP &DWHJRU\ IRU WKH ,QWHUQHW &RQILJXUH %LOOLQJ 7\SHV 8VHG IRU WKH ,QWHUQHW &RQILJXUH 3ULFLQJ 3URFHGXUHV 8VHG IRU WKH ,QWHUQHW &RQILJXUH WKH 2XWSXW 'HWHUPLQDWLRQ IRU (0DLO 2UGHU &RQILUPDWLRQ &RQILJXUH WKH 2XWSXW 'HWHUPLQDWLRQ IRU (0DLO 'HOLYHU\ &RQILUPDWLRQ &RQILJXUH WKH 2XWSXW 'HWHUPLQDWLRQ IRU (0DLO %LOOLQJ &RQILUPDWLRQ &RQILJXUH WKH 2XWSXW 6$3VFULSW )RUP &KHFN WKH 6$3 1RWHV \z~ MS \~z ~ i}| \zz
NJ h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGNK :KDW :H 'HOLYHU fz b pS m~ i}| \zz
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGNL 3URGXFW &DWDORJV LQ 5 3URGXFW &DWDORJ 6WUXFWXUH $VVLJQLQJ 3URGXFWV WR WKH &DWDORJ $FFHVVLQJ WKH 3URGXFW &DWDORJ fz~ ]zz kHL l ~ i}| \zz
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGNN &UHDWH 'RFXPHQWV LQ 5 WKDW 5HIHUHQFH ,PDJH DQG 'DWD )LOHV $GG 'DWD WR 0DWHULDO 0DVWHU IRU $XWRPDWLF &RS\LQJ LQWR 3URGXFW &DWDORJ Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C &UHDWH WKH 3URGXFW &DWDORJ 0DVWHU 'DWD :LWKLQ 5 \z l ~ i}| \zz
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGPI &RQILJXUH WKH 1XPEHU 5DQJHV IRU WKH 'RFXPHQW 7\SH &RQILJXUH WKH 'RFXPHQW 7\SH 8VHG IRU WKH 3URGXFW &DWDORJ &RQILJXUH WKH 'DWD &DUULHU WKDW /RFDWHV )LOHV RQ WKH :HE 6HUYHU &RQILJXUH WKH :RUNVWDWLRQ $SSOLFDWLRQV &RQILJXUH WKH 3URGXFW &DWDORJ 7\SH /LQN WKH 3URGXFW &DWDORJ 0DVWHU 'DWD WR DQ 2QOLQH 6WRUH &KHFN WKH 6$3 1RWHV ]zz ez} ~ i}| \zz
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGPN 3UHUHTXLVLWHV 'DWD /RDG 3URJUDP %$3,V IRU 'DWD /RDG \z~ NS i|~ ~ i}| \zz
PR h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGQI :KDW :H 'HOLYHU i|~ ~ i}| \zz
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGQJ m~ o~ b}~ \z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGQK fz b az~S i| ~ i}| \zz
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGQM 'HWHUPLQH WKH 3ULFLQJ 3URFHGXUH &XVWRPHU6SHFLILF 'LVFRXQWV )UHLJKW &DOFXODWLRQ 7D[ &DOFXODWLRQ fz~ ]zz l~ i| GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGQP 3ULFHV DQG 'LVFRXQWV IRU <RXU 3URGXFWV %DVLF 'DWD LQ 3URGXFW &DWDORJ ZLWK &RUUHFW 'RFXPHQW 3ULFLQJ 6FKHPD 5DWHV IRU WKH ,QFRWHUPV IRU WKH )UHLJKW &DOFXODWLRQ 'HIDXOW ,QFRWHUPV IRU WKH 3URGXFW &DWDORJ¶V 5HIHUHQFH &XVWRPHU i| \z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGRI 6XEWRWDOV LQ 3ULFLQJ 3URFHGXUHV WR :RUN ZLWK ,QWHUQHW 3UHFRQILJXUDWLRQ 6XSSRUWLQJ &RQILJXUDWLRQ IRU 3ULFLQJ 3URFHGXUH 3ULFLQJ 3URFHGXUH 'HWHUPLQDWLRQ IRU 3URGXFW &DWDORJ DQG ,QWHUQHW 2UGHU 7\SH ,QFRWHUPV WR EH 8VHG IRU )UHLJKW ,76 7HPSODWHV 0XVW 6XSSRUW WKH 3ULFLQJ %UHDNGRZQ ::B(1+75& 0RGLI\ &RGH WR $OORZ ,QFRWHUPV WR EH &KRVHQ IURP WKH ,QWHUQHW 9HULI\ WKH ,76 7HPSODWHV &RQWDLQ &RGH WR 6XSSRUW ,QFRWHUP 0RGLILFDWLRQ ::B(1+75& &KHFN WKH 6$3 1RWHV Contents \z~ OS e Z||~ i}| ` p z i}| \zz
RR h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJII :KDW :H 'HOLYHU fz b az~S e Z||~ i}| ` p ~ \zz
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJII :KDW ,V WKH &ODVVLILFDWLRQ 6\VWHP" 8VH &ODVVLILFDWLRQ WR )LOWHU 3RUWLRQV RI WKH 3URGXFW &DWDORJ fz~ ]zz k~~} e Z||~ ~ \zz
GGGGGGGGGGGGJIL &UHDWH D &KDUDFWHULVWLF WKDW &RQWDLQV WKH &XVWRPHU 7\SHV &UHDWH D &ODVV 7\SH IRU &XVWRPHU 0DVWHU 5HFRUGV /LQN WKH &XVWRPHU &ODVV WR WKH &XVWRPHU 0DVWHU 5HFRUGV &UHDWH D &ODVV 7\SH . IRU WKH 3URGXFW &DWDORJ /LQN WKH /D\RXW &ODVV WR WKH /D\RXW $UHDV LQ WKH &DWDORJ \z e Z||~ i}| ` p ~ \zz
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJJO 'HILQH DQ (DUO\ /RJRQ LQ WKH 2QOLQH 6WRUH 'HILQH WKH )LOWHU &ULWHULD LQ WKH 3URGXFW 3UHVHQWDWLRQ 3URILOH 'HWHUPLQH :KHWKHU WR 0RGLI\ WKH )LOWHULQJ /RJLF WR 6HOHFW &XVWRPHU &KDUDFWHULVWLFV 'HWHUPLQH :KHWKHU WR 0RGLI\ WKH )LOWHULQJ /RJLF &KHFN WKH 6$3 1RWHV \z~ PS \~ ~ h
~ l~ JJR h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJKI :KDW :H 'HOLYHU b~~ \~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJKI m~ o~ b}~ r \z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJKJ \~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJKK h~Fm~ \~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJKK fz b az~S \~ ~ h
~ l~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJKM fz~ ]zz k~~} \~z \~ ~ h
~ l~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJKO &UHDWH D 5HIHUHQFH &XVWRPHU 0DVWHU 5HFRUG /LQN WKH 5HIHUHQFH &XVWRPHU WR WKH 3URGXFW &DWDORJ /LQN WKH 5HIHUHQFH &XVWRPHU WR WKH 2QOLQH 6WRUH /LQN WKH 5HIHUHQFH &XVWRPHU WR WKH &RQVXPHU 'HIDXOW &UHDWH D 2QH7LPH &XVWRPHU /LQN WKH 2QH7LPH &XVWRPHU WR WKH &XVWRPHU $GPLQLVWUDWLRQ 3URILOH \z l \~ fz~ \~z ~ h
~ l~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJLI . QWHUQHW &XVWRPHUV <:(% ± P\3&& .QWHUQHW 6ROG7R 3DUWLHV &UHDWH DQ .QWHUQHW 6ROG7R 9HULI\ $OO &XVWRPHU $FFRXQW *URXSV 8VH . Configuration Guide | Release 4.QWHUQHW 8VHU IRU (DFK (PSOR\HH &UHDWH WKH &XVWRPHU +LHUDUFK\ &UHDWH D 'LVFRXQW IRU WKH &RUSRUDWLRQ \~ a~z| \z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJNQ &UHDWH D &XVWRPHU +LHUDUFK\ 7\SH &UHDWH 1HZ 3DUWQHU )XQFWLRQV IRU WKH &XVWRPHU +LHUDUFK\ $VVLJQ 1HZ 3DUWQHU )XQFWLRQV WR &XVWRPHU $FFRXQW *URXSV &UHDWH 1HZ 3DUWQHU 'HWHUPLQDWLRQ 3URFHGXUHV IRU 6DOHV 'RFXPHQWV $VVLJQ 3DUWQHU 'HWHUPLQDWLRQ 3URFHGXUH WR .6C 9HULI\ 6HWWLQJV LQ WKH 2QOLQH 6WRUH 9HULI\ WKH 6HWWLQJV LQ WKH &XVWRPHU $GPLQLVWUDWLRQ 3URILOH &UHDWH D 1XPEHU 5DQJH IRU WKH .QWHUQHW 2UGHU 7\SH $GG 1HZ 3DUWQHU )XQFWLRQV WR 'HOLYHU\ 3DUWQHU 'HWHUPLQDWLRQ 7\SH $GG 1HZ 3DUWQHU )XQFWLRQV WR %LOOLQJ +HDGHU 3DUWQHU 'HWHUPLQDWLRQ 7\SH 'HWHUPLQH $FFRXQW *URXSV 7R %H 8VHG IRU &XVWRPHUV 6SHFLI\ $FFRXQW *URXSV $OORZHG LQ WKH &XVWRPHU +LHUDUFK\ 7\SH 6SHFLI\ 6DOHV $UHDV $OORZHG LQ WKH &XVWRPHU +LHUDUFK\ 7\SH $VVLJQ +LHUDUFK\ 7\SH WR WKH .QWHUQHW &XVWRPHUV &UHDWH D &XVWRPHU $FFRXQW *URXS IRU .QWHUQDO 1XPEHU $VVLJQPHQW &UHDWH 8VHU ([LW IRU &RUUHFW 'HWHUPLQDWLRQ RI &XVWRPHU¶V 7D[ -XULVGLFWLRQ &RGH &KHFN WKH 6$3 1RWHV \z~ QS f
~ ^
~~ fz i|z~ h~ \z JML h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJMM :KDW :H 'HOLYHU m~ o~ b}~ r \z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJMN fz b az~S f
~ iz} h~ \~ GGGJMO 6WUXFWXUH RI WKH +LHUDUFK\ 2QOLQH 6WRUH 6FHQDULR 3ULFLQJ fz~ ]zz l~ ~ \~ a~z| GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJMR &UHDWH WKH &RUSRUDWLRQ DV D 6ROGWR 3DUW\ &UHDWH WKH (PSOR\HHV DV .QWHUQHW 6DOHV 2UGHU 7\SH IRU 3ULFLQJ &KHFN WKH 6$3 1RWHV . 'V &UHDWH D 8VHU .V (QWHUHG LQWR WKH 'HOLYHU\ 'RFXPHQW (QVXUH &RUUHFW 3DUDPHWHUV $UH (QWHUHG LQ WKH .Contents \z~ RS \~} \z} Zz z} l~
~~ JOP h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJOQ :KDW :H 'HOLYHU fz b az~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJOR &UHGLW &DUG $XWKRUL]DWLRQ 6HWWOHPHQW 3D\PHQW &DUG .76 8VHU¶V 3URILOH (QVXUH WKH &XVWRPHU ([LVWV LQ 5 DQG +DV %HHQ $VVLJQHG D 3DVVZRUG lz
~ h}~ lz \z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJQP 9HULI\ 'HOLYHU\ 7\SH 3DUWQHU 3URFHGXUH &RQWDLQV 3DUWQHU 7\SH &5 (QWHU DOO 85/V IRU WKH )UHLJKW &DUULHUV LQ 7DEOH 7&$85/ (QVXUH DOO 9DULDEOHV LQ 85/V $UH 5HDG IURP 'HOLYHU\ 'RFXPHQW 'HWHUPLQH /RJRQ 0HWKRG IRU WKH 6DOHV 2UGHU 6WDWXV &KHFN WKH 6$3 1RWHV \z~ JJS Zz
z{
~FFi~ JRJ h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJRK :KDW :H 'HOLYHU 'HWHUPLQH 3URGXFW $YDLODELOLW\ .QWHUIDFH iz~ \z} \z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJPJ 'HWHUPLQH &DUG &DWHJRULHV $VVLJQ $FFRXQWV 6HW $XWKRUL]DWLRQV DQG 6HWWOHPHQW $FFRXQWV \ ~ \|z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJPK 'HILQH D 3K\VLFDO 'HVWLQDWLRQ 6SHFLI\ $XWKRUL]DWLRQ DQG 6HWWOHPHQW )XQFWLRQV 0DLQWDLQ 0HUFKDQW .' \z~ JIS lz
~ h}~ lz JPR h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJQI :KDW :H 'HOLYHU fz b az~S lz
~ h}~ lz i|~}~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJQJ 'HOLYHU\ 3URFHVVLQJ WR 6XSSRUW 2UGHU 7UDFNLQJ 'HILQH WKH 85/ RI WKH )UHLJKW &DUULHU ]zz kHL l lz
~ h}~ lz mz| GGGGGGGGGGGGGJQL &UHDWH D 9HQGRU 0DVWHU IRU HDFK )UHLJKW &DUULHU (QVXUH &RUUHFW 'DWD . V $YDLODEOH" $73 :KLFK &RQILJXUDWLRQ .V 8VHG RQ WKH .QVXIILFLHQW 6WRFN 0RGLI\ WKH -DYD $SSOHW &RQILJXUDWLRQ &KHFN WKH 6$3 1RWHV \z~ JKS \~ Z|| bz KIL h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKIM :KDW :H 'HOLYHU \~ Z|| bz GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKIM m~ o~ b}~ r \z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKIO 'LVSOD\ WKH &RUUHVSRQGLQJ 2SHQ .QYHQWRU\ .WHPV LQ 5 fz b az~S \~ z} Z|| k~|~z{
~ bz ~ b~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKIP fz~ ]zz kHL l \~ Z|| bz GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKIQ (QVXUH $OO 'DWD .B'(%725B&+(&.76 8VHU¶V 3URILOH (QVXUH WKH &XVWRPHU ([LVWV LQ 5 DQG +DV D 3DVVZRUG Zmi \z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJRP 9HULI\ WKH $YDLODELOLW\ &KHFNLQJ 5XOH IRU <RXU 3URGXFWV &KHFN WKH 'HIDXOW &KHFNLQJ 5XOH 8VHG E\ WKH .V &RUUHFWO\ (QWHUHG LQWR WKH &XVWRPHU 0DVWHU 5HFRUG (QVXUH WKH &XVWRPHU ([LVWV LQ WKH 5 6\VWHP DQG +DV D 3DVVZRUG \~ Z|| bz \z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKJK &RQILJXUH WKH /LQN %HWZHHQ <RXU (0DLO 6\VWHP DQG 5 f}|zS \z ~ \~ m~ bdZJ GGGGGGGGGGGGKJK 3URJUDP &KDQJHV %$3.$& &KHFN WKH 'HIDXOW $73 6HWWLQJV 8VHG E\ WKH .3$66:25' %$3.B'(%725B&+$1*(3$66:25' &KHFN WKH 6$3 1RWHV .6C m~ o~ b}~ r \z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJRL 'LVSOD\ WKH &RUUHVSRQGLQJ 6WRFN 5HTXLUHPHQWV /LVW LQ 5 fz b az~S Zz
z{
~FFi~ i|~}~ GGGGGGGGGGGJRM $73 +RZ 0XFK .$& IRU . Configuration Guide | Release 4.QWHUQHW" fz~ ]zz kHL l Zmi GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGJRN &UHDWH WKH 3URGXFW &DWDORJ LQ 5 *HQHUDWH WKH 3URGXFW &DWDORJ 'DWD IRU WKH :HE 6HUYHU 3ODFH WKH 3URGXFW &DWDORJ )LOHV RQ WKH :HE 6HUYHU (QVXUH WKH &RUUHFW 3DUDPHWHUV $UH (QWHUHG LQ WKH . Contents \z~ JLS bml m~
z~ KJN h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKJO fz kHL l|~~ p~{ m~
z~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKJP lZiYp~{} h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKJQ 6$3#:HEVWXGLR 6FUHHQ 6HUYLFH )LOH +70/ 7HPSODWH )LOH /DQJXDJH5HVRXUFH )LOH 0.0( )LOH m~ l` m~
z~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKKJ 7KH +HDGHU )UDPH &KDQJLQJ DQ .PDJH .PDJH 7KH %RG\ )UDPH &KDQJLQJ WKH %DFNJURXQG &RORU RI WKH 7HPSODWHV &UHDWLQJ 1HZ *UDSKLFV ([FKDQJLQJ WKH ' *UDSKLFV ZLWK ¶6SDFH. 76 8VHU¶V $XWKRUL]DWLRQV &UHDWH RU &KDQJH WKH 8VHU IRU WKH .¶ $UFKLWHFWXUH RI WKH %XWWRQV &XUUHQW 6KRSSLQJ %DVNHW &UHDWLQJ DQG &KDQJLQJ *UDSKLFV &UHGLW &DUG 'DWD .76 8VHU LQWR WKH $SSURSULDWH 6HUYLFH )LOH &KHFN WKH 6$3 1RWHV .QSXW f i
~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKKQ $FFHVVLQJ 0\ 3URILOH &KDQJLQJ WKH )RUP RI $GGUHVV 0XOWLSOH &UHGLW &DUGV l
~ lFh GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKLL \z~ JMS m~ bml n~S e kHL KLN h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKLO :KDW :H 'HOLYHU e h kHL n ~ bml GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKLO .76 8VHU 'HIDXOW /DQJXDJHV DQG 3DUDPHWHUV 6FHQDULRV IRU 0XOWLODQJXDJH :HE 6LWHV fz~ ]zz e ~ bml n~ Zz GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKMI &UHDWH WKH 5ROH WKDW /LPLWV WKH *HQHULF .76 8VHU WR WKH 5ROH 3ODFH WKH .76 *HQHUDO /RJRQ $VVLJQ WKH . 76 6HUYHU 7KH %DFNHQG 5 6\VWHP b~~ mzz| l~~ AbmlB GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKPJ 2SHUDWLQJ 6\VWHPV 0LFURVRIW :LQGRZV 17 /..QWHUQHW 8VHUV iz LS m~||z
bz|~ G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G KON iz h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKOO \z~ JOS bml bz
z z} \z b~ KOP h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKOQ l GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKOQ ([SHFWHG :HE 7UDIILF 6HDVRQDOLW\ 7KH %DFNHQG 5 6\VWHP %URZVLQJ 9HUVXV 3XUFKDVLQJ 5DWLR %HQFKPDUNV DQG 6L]LQJ 7KH .6C \z~ JNS b~~ n~S iz} \~ KNL h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKNM :KDW :H 'HOLYHU \~ z b~~ n~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKNN b~~ n~ fz~ ]zz GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKNQ &UHDWH DQ . .76 .QIRUPDWLRQ LQWR WKH &XVWRPHU 0DVWHU 5HFRUG 'DWD /RDG 3URJUDP IRU .QVWDOODWLRQ 2SWLRQV 6LQJOH +RVW 'XDO +RVW 9LUWXDO .76 5RRW 'LUHFWRU\ .QVWDOO WKH .6 .. Configuration Guide | Release 4.76 9LUWXDO :HE 6HUYHU )LOH $GPLQLVWUDWLRQ &RQQHFWLQJ WR D 6SHFLILF 9LUWXDO :HE 6HUYHU bml bz
z i|~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKPN &UHDWH 9LUWXDO :HE 6HUYHUV RQ 0LFURVRIW .18. DQG 81.QWHUQHW 8VHU IRU ([LVWLQJ &XVWRPHUV (QWHU &XVWRPHU (0DLO $GGUHVV . QVWDOODWLRQ 1RWHV IRU 'XDO +RVW .QVWDOO 6$3 ([FKDQJH &RQQHFWRU \z~ JRS h| KRN h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKRO p h|~X GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKRO )LQDQFLDO 6DYLQJV 3HUVRQQHO .V D )LUHZDOO" 2WKHU 6RXUFHV RI *HQHUDO )LUHZDOO .QWHJUDWLRQ RI 6$3RIILFH DQG 0LFURVRIW ([FKDQJH 8VLQJ 6$3FRQQHFW .QVWDOODWLRQ 3RVWLQVWDOODWLRQ k~~~|~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKPP \z~ JPS bz|~ l~| KPR h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKQI _~z
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKQI :KDW .Contents .76 .QWHUIDFH mz \z
|
z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKQR _~ \z
|
z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKRI :KHQ WR &DOFXODWH )UHLJKW $W 7LPH RI 6DOH &KDUJH )UHLJKW $IWHU 3DFNHG IRU 6KLSSLQJ 6HWWLQJ 8S WKH 6\VWHP IRU )UHLJKW &DOFXODWLRQ ^Ffz
z} _z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKRK .QIRUPDWLRQ +RZ WR &RQILJXUH <RXU )LUHZDOO 3ODFLQJ WKH 3URSHU )LUHZDOOV )LUHZDOO )LUHZDOO )LUHZDOO ^| GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKQM 3URWHFW WKH &XVWRPHUV 'DWD RQ WKH .QWHUQHW 3URWHFW WKH 'DWD :LWKLQ <RXU 1HWZRUN k~~~|~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKQN \z~ JQS b~z| m}Fiz \~ KQP h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKQQ \~} \z} o~|z z} Zz GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKQR 6HW XS WKH &UHGLW &DUG . Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C ^z{
^~ e|z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKRP l~ ez}|z~ h|~ h GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGKRQ 3DUWLDO 2XWVRXUFH ± :HE 6HUYHU DQG :*DWH 3UREOHPV DQG .VVXHV `~~z
i{
~ z} b~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLII k~~~|~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLII \z~ KIS l~ Z}z [~ iz||~ lZi h
~ l~ LIJ h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLIK lZi lz}z} ]|~z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLIK bml Z}z p~{ b~z|~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLIL .76 $GPLQLVWUDWLRQ 7RRO f GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLIM 6HFXULW\ $XWRPDWHG $OHUW )LUHZDOO /RJV 3HUIRUPDQFH DQG 6WDWLVWLFV :HE 6HUYHU ]|~ fzz~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLIP nz}~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLIP \z~ KJS i~z|~ LIR h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLJI lZi lz}z} ]|~z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLJI i~z|~ m i|~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLJI mz~ \~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLJJ 3HUIRUPDQFH IRU &RQVXPHUV 3HUIRUPDQFH IRU %XVLQHVVHV p~{ iz~ i~z|~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLJK *UDSKLFV 3DJH 6L]H 6HFXULW\ 7UDIILF .QVWDOODWLRQ /RJ 2Q WR WKH .76 $GPLQLVWUDWLRQ 7RRO 8VLQJ WKH .VVXHV 2XWVRXUFLQJ (YHU\WKLQJ 3UREOHPV DQG .VVXHV 3DUWLDO 2XWVRXUFH ± :HE 6HUYHU :*DWH DQG $*DWH 3UREOHPV DQG . VVXHV 'HGLFDWHG 5 .QFRPLQJ 2UGHU 5HSRUW .VVXHV 6FDOH WKH $*DWH .QFRPSOHWH 6DOHV 'RFXPHQWV /LVW RI $OO 2XWERXQG 'HOLYHULHV .VVXHV 6FDOLQJ 6XPPDU\ k~~~|~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLJR iz MS k~ G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G GLKJ iz h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLKK \z~ KKS lz
~ Z| k~ LKP h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLKQ Zz
b~~ lz
~ kHLS k~ ]~ GGGGGGGGGGLKQ /LVW RI 6DOHV 2UGHUV %ORFNHG 6DOHV 2UGHUV %DFNRUGHUV .Contents l~ \z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLJM 6L]LQJ RI WKH %DFNHQG 5 6\VWHP l|z
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLJM (YDOXDWH WKH &XUUHQW 6HUYHUV 8SJUDGH WKH 6HUYHUV 5HSODFH WKH 6HUYHUV l|z
~ l~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLJN 6HSDUDWH WKH :*DWH IURP WKH $*DWH 6FDOH WKH :*DWH .VVXHV 6FDOH 5 .QYRLFHG 6DOHV 5HSRUW 6KLSSLQJ 3RLQW 7HUULWRU\ 6DOHV 5HSRUW 'DLO\ :HHNO\ 0RQWKO\. Zz
z{
~ k~S j| k~~~|~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLLI 'RFXPHQW $QDO\VLV 6WDWLVWLFDO $QDO\VLV ]|~ Zz
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLLK /LVW RI 6DOHV 2UGHUV %ORFNHG 6DOHV 2UGHUV . QFRPLQJ 2UGHU 5HSRUW . Configuration Guide | Release 4.QYRLFHG 6DOHV 5HSRUW 6KLSSLQJ 5HSRUW k~ [z~} n~F]~~} bz l|~ GGGGGGGGLNR 7HUULWRU\ 6DOHV 5HSRUW 'DLO\ :HHNO\ 0RQWKO\.6C 'LVSOD\ %ORFNHG 6DOHV 2UGHUV E\ &XVWRPHU DQG 0DWHULDOV %DFNRUGHUV 'LVSOD\ 7RWDO 9DOXH RI %DFNRUGHUV IRU D 3DUWLFXODU 0RQWK 'LVSOD\ 7RWDO 9DOXH RI %DFNRUGHUV 3HU 0RQWK IRU &XVWRPHUV DQG 0DWHULDO .QFRPSOHWH 6DOHV 'RFXPHQWV /LVW RI $OO 2XWERXQG 'HOLYHULHV lz|z
Zz
S lz
~ bz l~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLNK k~ [z~} lz}z} b l|~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLNK . 76 &DSWXUH $3..QIRUPDWLRQ 6WUXFWXUHV &UHDWH 8SGDWH 5XOH &UHDWH 8SGDWH 5XOH $FWLYDWH 8SGDWH IRU .QIR 6WUXFWXUHV \z~ KLS ^F[~ Zz
LPL h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLPM e lz| m
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLPM ^F[~ Zz
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLPN m~ m~ze~z l
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLPO fz b az~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLPP 2YHUYLHZ 'HOLYHU\ +RZ . /.(11= &UHDWH D )LHOG &DWDORJ &UHDWH . \z l~
F]~~} bz l|~ GGGGGGGGGGGLOM &UHDWH $GGLWLRQDO )LHOGV LQ $SSHQG 6WUXFWXUHV 7DEOHV 9%$.3 DQG 9%5. &UHDWH $GGLWLRQDO )LHOGV LQ WKH 7DEOH 0&9.W :RUNV $FWLYDWH WKH . &UHDWH (YHQW )UDPHZRUN LQ 6$3 5 0RGLI\LQJ WKH 2QOLQH 6WRUH k~~~|~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLQL . QFOXGH 3URJUDP ZLWK /RJLF WR 'LVSOD\ WKH 6KRSSLQJ %DVNHW ([WHQG WKH 2QOLQH 6WRUH 3URJUDP WR .76 7HPSODWHV WR :RUN ZLWK WKH 0RGLILFDWLRQV 0RGLILFDWLRQV LQ WKH .Contents iz NS Z~}~ G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G GLQN Z~} ZS lZi g~ ~ lZi l~|~ fz~
z|~ LQP h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLQP i}| \zz
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLQQ i}| \zz
b~z i|~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLQQ h
~ l~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLQQ lz
~ h}~ lz GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLQR Zz
z{
~FFi~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLRI `~~z
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLRI Z~} [S Z}}Fh Zmi ~ i}| \zz
LRJ h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLRJ \~ ^~~|~S ]
z i}| Zz
z{
~ h
~ l~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLRK h ]
z Zz
z{
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLRL 'LVSOD\ WKH $YDLODELOLW\ IRU 2QH 3ODQW RU $FURVV $OO 3ODQWV 8VLQJ D 6WDWLF RU D '\QDPLF $YDLODELOLW\ &KHFN b
~~z ~ f}|z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGLRN 7KH 2QOLQH 6WRUH 3UHFRQILJXUDWLRQ 3DUDPHWHUV 7KH 'HOLYHU\ 3ODQW LQ WKH $SSURSULDWH 0DVWHU 'DWD ([WHQG WKH 0DWHULDO 0DVWHU ZLWK WKH 7KUHVKROG 4XDQWLW\ )LHOG &DOFXODWH DQG 7UDQVSRUW 6WRFN $YDLODELOLW\ WR :HE 3DJHV IRU 'LVSOD\ 'HWDLOHG 'HVFULSWLRQ :RUNIORZ IRU 3URFHVVLQJ DQ 8QFRQILUPHG 2UGHU 'HWDLO 6SHFLILFDWLRQ 0RGLILHG .76 7HPSODWHV .QFOXGH 3URFHVVLQJ IRU 'LVSOD\LQJ WKH 6KRSSLQJ %DVNHW 8SGDWH WKH .76 7HPSODWHV WR :RUN ZLWK WKH 0RGLILFDWLRQV Z~} \S Z}}Fh ~ l [z~ MIL h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMIL \~ ^~~|~S ]
z \~ l [z~ \~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMIM b
~~z ~ f}|z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMIO . 76 7HPSODWHV 0RGLILFDWLRQV LQ WKH /DQJXDJH5HVRXUFH )LOH Z~} ^S Z}}Fh f i
~ l~|~ MKJ h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMKJ ^z{
~ ~ f i
~ l~|~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMKL Z~} _S f|~
z~ n
~ MKN h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMKN s_mi`^m GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMKN _~
} m~ f}|z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMKP a \z~ f~z~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMKR a \z~ ~ m~ ~ [ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMLJ ]
z ~ [
Fm Z}}~ z ~ ]~
~ Z}}~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGMLM .6C 0RGLILFDWLRQV LQ WKH /DQJXDJH5HVRXUFH )LOH lz ~ l [z~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMIP &XVWRPHU ([SHULHQFH 6DYLQJ DQG 5HWULHYLQJ WKH 6KRSSLQJ %DVNHW b
~~z ~ f}|z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMJI 7KH &XVWRP 7DEOH WR 6WRUH WKH 6KRSSLQJ %DVNHW LQ 6$3 $ 3URJUDP WR 0DLQWDLQ WKH 6$3 6KRSSLQJ %DVNHW 7DEOH 'HWDLO 'HVFULSWLRQ ([WHQVLRQ IRU WKH 6WRUH DQG 5HWULHYH 6KRSSLQJ %DVNHW )XQFWLRQ 8SGDWH WKH .76 7HPSODWHV WR :RUN ZLWK WKH 0RGLILFDWLRQV 'HWDLOHG 'HVFULSWLRQ RI WKH )XQFWLRQDOLW\ `~~z
_
e| GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG MJJ \~ i|~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG MJK _| \}~ s[kh i|~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG MJK _| \}~ s[lZ i|~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG MJL Z~} ]S Z}}Fh i|z~ h}~ ^ MJN h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMJN \~ ^~~|~S ^ i|z~ h}~ g{~ GGGGGGGMJN b
~~z ~ f}|z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMJQ 7KUHH 6XEURXWLQHV 3URFHVV WKH 3XUFKDVH 2UGHU 'DWD /LQN WKH 6XEURXWLQHV WR WKH 2QOLQH 6WRUH 3URJUDP 0RGLI\ WKH $SSURSULDWH )ORZ /RJLF 0RGLI\ WKH 6RXUFH &RGH RI $OO 5HTXLUHG 3URJUDPV 8SGDWH WKH .76 7HPSODWHV WR :RUN ZLWK WKH 0RGLILFDWLRQV 0RGLILFDWLRQV LQ WKH . Configuration Guide | Release 4. QRZ %HIRUH <RX 3URFHHG ^~| ~ m~ \zz
GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMLP 7KH 2QOLQH 6WRUH 7HVW &DWDORJ ^~| z \Zmm GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMMI ^~| z \Zmm ozz GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMML \Zmm i|~}~ ]~
~~} ~ h
~ l~ i~|z GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMMO &$77 DV D ³7UDQVSRUW +HOSHU´ &$77V LQ WKH .Contents Z~} `S b}| \~FZ}~} m~ m
A\ZmmB MLN h~~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMLN pz b z \ZmmX GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMLO 6RPH 7KLQJV WR .76 8VHU &$77V WKDW 6XSSRUW 6DOHV 2UGHU 3URFHVVLQJ LQ WKH 2QOLQH 6WRUH k~~~|~ MNP p~{ l~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMNP h~ k~~~|~ GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGMNQ b}~ MNR .QVWDOODWLRQ &DWDORJ &$77V LQ WKH 7HVW &DWDORJ &$77V IRU WKH 3URGXFW &DWDORJ &$77V IRU 3URGXFW &DWDORJ $XWKRUL]DWLRQV &$77V IRU 0XOWLSOH (PSOR\HHV 3XUFKDVLQJ &$77V WKDW 6XSSRUW 6DOHV 2UGHU 3URFHVV&$77V IRU 3ULFLQJ &$77V IRU 6DOHV 2UGHU 6WDWXV &$77V IRU WKH . 6C . Configuration Guide | Release 4. material. Hanumachastry Rupakula. Miklos Szorenyi Also contributing: Jacqueline Charles. Nihad Al-Ftayeh. Jennifer Vigil Documentation and production: Scott Bulloch. Irmgard Stenger. Ramon Balagot. Kurt Wolf Customers and partners: Nicole Papa (TeaLeaf Technology). Christian Zbinden (TeaLeaf Technology) The Simplification Group SAP Labs. Usha Nair. April 2001 . expertise. and resources that helped make this guidebook possible: Contributing authors: Jaideep Adhvaryu. “Willie“ Beng Giap Lim.. Marie-Laurence Poujois. Gary Nakayama. J Z|
~}~~ We wish to express appreciation to the following individuals who provided the time. Birgit Starmanns. Cathrin Barsch. Inc. 6C . Configuration Guide | Release 4. In addition to shopping. such as checking order status or maintaining customer data. The CRM solution includes the SAP Internet Sales product.1752'8&7. and the customer interaction center. the web shop is integrated as an important component of the site. A web shop does not overrun the site. including the Internet. This trend does not mean that traditional corporate information is no longer available on these sites. Instead. or in response to pressure from their competitors who already have e-commerce sites running. To attract their customers by providing an additional sales channel.21 h~~ ^F\~|~ z} lZi@ h
~ l~ Kb}| As more consumers use the Internet not only for communication and entertainment. A company web site in the past only contained corporate data. which strategically manages all aspects of customer interaction through different sales channels. SAP has two solutions for companies who sell on the Internet: the SAP Online Store and SAP Internet Sales (an element of mySAP Customer Relationship Management (CRM)). many companies are expanding their sales channels. contact details. these sites often integrate other customer services. and similar types of information. personal meetings with a sales representative using mobile sales. The SAP Online Store is ideal for customers who already have an R/3 System up and running.. many of these companies now include e-commerce components. as well as other services. Established companies have also entered the arena. either as Internet pioneers in their industries. The “dot-coms” are not the only ones without physical stores that offer products on the web. and who would like to have an e-commerce component of their site running as quickly as possible. . press releases. but for conducting business. customized programs and documentation gives you everything you need to perform essential selling processes on the Internet. as part of the preconfiguration. California—provides a preconfigured system for quickly and easily implementing a fully operational sell-side Internet solution based on Internet Application Components (IACs). This complete package of preconfigured settings. g~ n h
~ l~ fz}~ ^zS bz
z `}~ This guide provides detailed instructions about the installation of Best Practices for SAP Online Store and describes its technical architecture. This guidebook provides a good starting point. Intended Audience: Business consultants and project team members responsible for customizing the business processes. is included in the download with the transport files and cannot be downloaded on its own. `~ lz~} [~ iz||~ lZi h
~ l~ Best Practices for SAP Online Store—developed by the Simplification Group at SAP Labs in Palo Alto. describing what the Best Practices for SAP Online Store solution can do and how it works. The documentation consists of three manuals. Configuration Guide | Release 4. and uses the master data and configuration settings available within the R/3 System. each covering different subject matter related to Best Practices for SAP Online Store. The guidebook explains the configuration settings required to enable you to conduct business online. . and explains the different components of the Best Practices for SAP Online Store solution. The guide includes an installation checklist to help you monitor the progress of the installation and ensure you perform all steps in the proper The installation guide. The Internet Transaction Server (ITS) technology facilitates this integration. The IACs enable customers to integrate their Internet and intranet processes with their core R/3 functionality. called Internet Application Component (IAC). An Internet-enabled transaction. we suggest familiarizing yourself with the comprehensive documentation delivered with Best Practices for SAP Online Store. It is not part of the printed guidebook series.6C The SAP Online Store has been available since Release 3. contains the business logic for selling products on the Internet. The SAP Online Store is directly integrated into a backend R/3 System. To start.1. The guidebooks are: n h
~ l~ fz}~ ^zS \z `}~ This guidebook forms the foundation for the SAP Online Store's business activities. Second.The install shield that puts the ITS templates into the appropriate directory .exe -All transport files BPOS46Cxx_Install.Contains the Online Store Made Easy: Business Processes for Demos and Testing guide BPOS46Cxx_Config.The Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide and Install Checklist BPOS46Cxx_intro.zip • • • • BPOS46Cxx. the scripts can be used to demonstrate and teach the business processes to end users and others interested in seeing how the system works. and security issues. g~ You can download the following ZIP files: n n n In the file name.exe . In addition to the guidebooks.com/simple. establishing the system landscape.Overview of Best Practices for SAP Online Store BPOS46Cxx_ITS.saplabs.pdf . The guide also includes the ITS Installation Supplement. end users who want to familiarize themselves with the business scenarios. The scripts serve two purposes. You can download project and cost planning templates to facilitate the planning of your e-commerce project from the Simplification Group web site at http://www. Intended Audience: Technical consultants responsible for installing the software components. configuring the communication parameters between the software components. which describes how the Internet Transaction Server (ITS) fits into the Best Practices for SAP Online Store landscape.com/simple. BPOS46Cxx_Guide.Introduction order. Intended Audience: Consultants and project team members responsible for validating the configuration of Best Practices for SAP Online Store. n h
~ l~ fz}~ ^zS [~ i|~~ ]~ z} m~ This guide provides descriptions and execution instructions for the delivered test scripts. First. ]
z} The Best Practices for SAP Online Store solution consists of transport files and documentation that can be downloaded from the Simplification Group web site at http://www.saplabs.zip . we provide templates that help you manage your e-commerce project. and presales professionals who want to demonstrate Best Practices for SAP Online Store functionality to prospective customers. xx represents the specific version of each of these files. successful execution of the scripts ensures that the installation and configuration steps have been done correctly.zip .Contains the Online Store Made Easy: Configuration Guide BPOS46Cxx_Test.pdf . Contains project and cost planning templates pz [~ iz||~ lZi h
~ l~ b|
}~ Best Practices for SAP Online Store allows customers to quickly implement sell-side Internet solutions. k~G This section addresses how to analyze the business generated by the Online Store.6D BPOS_Project. This package enables customers to be up and running quickly with the SAP Online Store. performance considerations.zip . The Online Store Made Easy: Configuration Guide is divided into five sections. The guide also indicates which steps are already included in the preconfiguration. e~z ~ [z|G This section provides an overview of the ITS. Configuration Guide | Release 4. The guidebook describes all the steps necessary to implement the Online Store.6C • n BPOS46Cxx_ITSmissing.6C. monitoring. and cost tracking. . The Online Store preconfiguration provides additional functionality over what is offered in the standard R/3 Online Store IAC. covering the basic concepts of how an IAC functions. Release 4. The information can therefore be used to manually configure the R/3 System or supplement the preconfiguration transports. The configuration also addresses how the sales functions carried out through the Online Store integrate with order fulfillment processing in the R/3 System.com/ecommerce. and security issues that need to be addressed in an implementation of the sell-side processes. each of which covers a particular aspect of an implementation. while reporting that captures user behavior is available outside of R/3. The preconfiguration includes: n n n R/3 transports for configuration ITS templates with a new look and feel Add-on functions The Online Store Made Easy: Configuration Guide accompanies the Online Store preconfiguration available from our web site www. application hosting options.saplabs. \z kHLG This section covers the configuration within R/3 that allows the business functionality of the Online Store and the related sell-side functionality to be implemented. m~||z
bz|~G This section covers the landscape. This section focuses on the systems and parameters on the SAP side. and how the Online Store on a web site communicates with the R/3 System. A project management chapter addresses issues outside of the R/3 System and covers project planning. and related functionality. Sales volume reporting is available within R/3.zip .Missing ITS files for ITS 4. In addition. . a different type of customer master record. is created. encompassing the decisions that need to be made as part of the implementation. and delivery. The customer can then place items into a shopping basket. consumer master records contain personal data. The customer can then browse the catalog and place items in shopping baskets. the types of customers to be created. To reduce the size of the master records in R/3. l~
\~G A customer may browse the product catalog without logging on. customers are only rarely expected to return to the site. payment. For this reason. l|~z ~ h
~ l~ i~|z The Online Store preconfiguration includes four preconfigured scenarios. how customers should be allowed to pay for their purchases. However. However. l~
h~Fm~ \~G A customer may browse the catalog and place orders.Introduction Z~}~G The first appendix collects all the technical information about the SAP Notes in the SAP Service Marketplace. These appendixes supplement the functional information in the configuration section. a customer hierarchy allows employees to make purchases. and other issues. Customers must reenter their information each time when visiting the site. A new customer can register with an e-mail address. l~
[~ iz~G A customer must already have a valid ID and password before being able to access the product catalog. l~
\~G The business process is the same as in selling to customers. a customer master is not created. but do not contain sales area data. called a consumer. while still being linked to their corporation for discounts. explained in detail. The only available payment option is by credit card. Payment options include credit cards and invoices. based on the customer who logged on to the site. Different portions of the catalog can be hidden or displayed. When the customer is ready to order. and customer information is stored within the order. an existing customer can log in with an ID (email address) and password. The rest covers add-ons provided by the Online Store preconfiguration. such as the path that customers should take through the Online Store. Both credit cards and invoices are allowed in this preconfiguration. the e-commerce portion is not the only piece that must be considered. For this reason. In addition to normal corporate data. they may wish to present their products. and is the central topic of this guide. The Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide explains. accounts receivable information is available. and place an order through the Internet. User exit programs and function modules transport this add-on functionality into your R/3 System. Customers may enter a quantity and date. This IAC allows customers to track the order on the web site. we facilitate the implementation of business intelligence by capturing the customer experience on the web site. and then obtain the date on which the product(s) will be available. \~ Z|| bzG Certain business partners may be allowed to view their customer master and banking information. i}| \zz
G Some companies may not allow customers to place orders on the Internet. In addition. customers like to track the status of their delivery. step by step. together with TeaLeaf Technology ™. Zz
z{
~FFi~G Certain business partners may be allowed to obtain availability information about the products in the catalog. A link to freight carriers’ tracking sites is also provided once the delivery has been processed. such as open and cleared invoices. Z}}Fh _|z
The Online Store preconfiguration includes add-on functionality developed in response to what surveyed customers found most important for their implementations. lz
~ h}~ lzG After an order has been placed. . other services may be offered to customers on a site. register as a customer. several IACs have been preconfigured as part of the Online Store preconfiguration. The Online Store allows customers to browse a product catalog. The delivered add-ons include: k~G Three new SIS (Sales Information System) structures have been created to facilitate reporting within R/3. Instead. h
~ l~G The Online Store is the central IAC most often implemented. and then provide a number for customers to call for placing orders. Configuration Guide | Release 4. Some of these services are handled by IACs. how the standard code of the Online Store must be modified to call the user exits and function modules.6C i~|~} _|z
As part of an integrated web site. attach multimedia files and specifications to the catalog. In addition. No standard programs are transported. l
~ lFhG Because several different IACs have been preconfigured. and for Internet users (that store customer passwords). \ z l f~}G On most sites. ^~ i|z~ h}~ ]zzG In a business partner scenario. This functionality is accomplished using a memory cookie that is deleted as soon as the browser session is closed. To accompany this functionality. In addition. save a default shipping type. we include the ability to display the contents of the shopping basket while browsing with a running total of the items in the basket. You can use either a “traffic light” indicator or display the actual quantity in stock on the web page. many customers require the ability to enter a purchase order number and date to allow simpler reconciliation with their own systems. Either real-time ATP (available-to-promise) information or the unreserved stock level can be displayed. In addition. we provide a single sign-on capability. In addition. ¡f i
~¯ l~|~G The “My Profile” service is a new IAC. such as overnight or standard ground shipping. It provides a central location to allow the customer to register. a customer can choose the type of shipping desired. written for this Online Store preconfiguration. and the customer is required to log on to each IAC when it is first called. save default credit card information. My Profile can be called directly. or from any of the existing services. and obtain a password reminder. ]zz ez} z} n
~G Data load programs are provided for the product catalog. . change a password.Introduction Zz
z{
~ i}| \zz
G This add-on allows you to display the availability of products in the product catalog. l [z~ ^z|~~G The ability to save and retrieve a shopping basket has been added. the choice of the shipping method drives the selection of different freight pricing in the R/3 System. using Incoterms. change address information. utilities are provided to change the text of buttons displayed on the site to FTP data. the default credit card and default shipping type can be accessed from the Online Store. The IACs provide a tight integration into the backend R/3 System processes in SD. and addresses the parameters that must be set within the SAP products. The chapters indicate which procedures have been preconfigured. sales order processing. The technical infrastructure section illustrates the system landscape. deliveries. The basics section gets you started with a brief discussion of ITS architecture and project planning. Because there are many vendors of related products. Most of the appendixes follow a similar format. The configuration section covers the master data and configuration required to implement the Online Store and related sell-side applications. . and billing Used the condition technique in configuring pricing and output determination A good base knowledge of Materials Management (MM) and the material master as it relates to SD a b b hz~}X The guidebook describes the business issues surrounding an implementation of the Online Store and related sell-side applications. such as networking and security. if the transports are used in conjunction with the guidebook. Some programming knowledge is required to follow the detailed program specifications of the add-ons. The Online Store Made Easy: Configuration Guide focuses on the Online Store and related sell-side applications. This book is not intended to include a thorough discussion of basic SD functionality within R/3.6C Z{ m `}~ p l
} k~z} m [X This guide is written for business consultants and project team members responsible for customizing the business processes. individual solutions are not addressed. Configuration Guide | Release 4. We assume the reader has: n n n Experience in the SD configuration required for master data. They should have at least one to two years of experience with the R/3 System—preferably in the Sales and Distribution (SD) component—but may not have knowledge of the IACs and ITS. and explains the technical configuration settings and considerations that must be a part of the implementation. While we have done our best to ensure uniformity in naming throughout the book. your resulting screen names would reflect your selection of Sold-to party).6C... or e-Shop in this book refer to the current release. any references to AIS. 4. We use angle brackets in place of a screen name or other screen text that is derived from steps within an adapted procedure (for example. the solution offered by the Simplification Group is titled Best Practices for Online Store. and Name2 is an item on the menu Command syntax Replace the information within the angle brackets (< >) with wording specific to your task. etc. Accelerated Internet Selling..) User input. Text Convention Italic fonts Courier bold Name1 → Name2 $ULDO PRQRVSDFH ..Introduction i}| gz As of Release 4. Therefore. if you were to choose Sold-to party instead of Ship-to party as shown in the screenshot. text the user types verbatim Menu selection Name1 is the menu name.6C. . fields. screen text. it was known as Accelerated Internet Selling (AIS) and e-Shop. Prior to this release. we use angle brackets to reflect screen items that may differ from the example screenshots.! Description Screen names or on-screen objects (buttons. \~ The table below explains the text conventions used throughout this guide. 6A/B. TechTalk . ♣ Navigation menu: Depending on your authorizations. depending on your GUI release and the support package level. Depending on your authorizations. l~|z
b| Throughout this guide. Release 4. some of the buttons on your application toolbar may not be available. see the Authorizations Made Easy guidebook. The User menu and SAP standard menu buttons provide different views of the navigation menu. To learn how to build user menus. Below are brief explanations of each icon: Exercise caution when performing this task or step. An explanation of why you should be careful is included.6C lz
~ kHL k~
~z~ MGO l|~~ Your screens and on-screen icons may look different than those pictured in this book. Caution Information within a TechTalk helps you to understand the topic in greater technical detail. your navigation menu may look different from screenshots in this guide that are based on SAP_ALL. Configuration Guide | Release 4. Menu bar Standard toolbar Screen title ♦ Application toolbar User menu SAP standard menu ♣ Navigation menu Work area Status bar ♦ Application toolbar: The screenshots shown in this guide are based on full user authorization (SAP_ALL). special icons indicate important messages. You need not know this information to perform the task. Tips & Tricks g~ This information clarifies a statement in the accompanying text.Introduction These messages provide helpful hints and more detailed information to make your work faster and easier. . Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C . 3$57 21( Z e~z ~ [z| . the application gateway ( AGate) and the web server gateway (WGate). also resides in R/3. The MIME files (product thumbnails.6C iz h~~ In an integrated Internet scenario. without having to fill in a myriad of fields. images. and how the Internet orders and received sales and distribution processes are handled. The files that control the look and feel of the Online Store. Web Server ? The R/3 System. Web Server ? Application: •ABAP R/3: Inside •Dynpro screens Business Logic •Customization MIME Files: Service Files: •images •service definitions Outside R/3: •videos •HTML templates HTML Visualization •language resources •sounds •etc. For this reason. and spec sheets) are stored on the WGate of the ITS. and the orders taken are ready for the remaining fulfillment and invoicing processes. The logic of the transaction resides within R/3. In turn. Instead. the R/3 screens must be generated into an HTML format that can be understood by the browser. are stored on different parts of the ITS. . the customer should be able to purchase products from the Internet without knowing the order is being directly entered into an R/3 System. but are available on the same server accessed by the Internet customer. it is not enough to Internetenable a normal R/3 transaction. because the image and sound files do not need to be retrieved from R/3. The benefits include no duplication of data. however. Too many fields exist that require knowledge of how the system is configured. something needs to interpret the HTML and make it understandable to R/3. are stored directly on the ITS’s AGate. For this reason. The Internet Transaction Server (ITS) is therefore needed to allow the R/3 System and browser to understand one another. The service files. These files are the mechanism by which the R/3 data and the look and feel of the web browser are merged. The configuration of the Online Store.K Configuration Guide | Release 4. unique to the ITS. cannot understand the HTML sent from the browser. for example. the look and feel should allow the customer to place an order as easily as possible. The ITS has two parts. These two portions contain different files that allow the interaction between R/3 and the web browser to take place. This location improves performance. Part One: Learning the Basics L The ITS brings together the look and feel with the R/3 logic of the Online Store. The chapters in this section provide an overview of the ITS and project planning recommendation for a successful installation. . 6C .M Configuration Guide | Release 4. & + $ 3 7 ( 5 L h
~ l~ i~|z m~||z
h~~ . Other illustrations build upon this one. Chapter 16.O Configuration Guide | Release 4. consisting of two components: • • WGate AGate n R/3 System The following graphic highlights the three major (logical) components in gray with the detailed components that compose them. where your web site is located. The sections within this chapter describe the conceptual layout of these components. Please see the ITS web site at www. In this chapter.6C h~~ This chapter introduces and discusses the following three major components of the Online Store: n n Web server Internet Transaction Server (ITS). Web users connect to your web server. we use the Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS). This diagram serves as the basis for most of the diagrams in “Part Three” of this guidebook.saplabs. you learn about these major technical components and their significance to the configuration of your Online Store. . For the purposes of this guide. “ITS Installation and Configuration Issues” on page 267 describes the physical layout and installation. see the SAP@Web Installation Guide. p~{ l~~ The web server is the interface between the Internet and the ITS. For more detailed information on the ITS.com/its for information related to compatible web servers. and MIME files. We recommend the format <SID>_<client> (for example DEV_100). the service ww20 is used to enter an order. The ITS is made up of the: n n Web Gateway (WGate) Application Gateway (AGate) p~{ `z~z Ap`z~B The WGate connects the web server (for example. Microsoft IIS) to the main component of the ITS. The IACs consist of service files. using the Internet browser. the main component of the ITS: n n n Manages communication from the ITS to and from the backend R/3 System Converts HTML from the web page into SAP GUI to communicate to the R/3 System and back again Dynamically generates the HTML pages seen by the end user. templates. The current version of the ITS can be downloaded from SAP at www. Z
|z `z~z AZ`z~B The AGate. l~|~ The services file contain the parameters that determine how a service runs. The examples in this book use the directory <virtual ITS>.com/its. . the AGate. For example. language resources. The ITS thus allows a user on the Internet or intranet to connect to R/3.Chapter 1: Online Store Preconfiguration Technical Overview P b~~ mzz| l~~ AbmlB The Internet Transaction Server (ITS) program functions as a gateway between the web server and the backend R/3 System. and data from R/3 b~~ Z
|z \~ AbZ\B IACs allow Internet and intranet users to start specific R/3 transactions from a web browser. flow files. The ITS allows communication between the web server and the R/3 System.saplabs. HTML templates. overcoming their technical differences. jpg avi wav . However. and video elements that are included in services for the multimedia functions. File Type image video sound Extension gif. For example. The templates are located in: c:\Program Files\SAP\ITS\2. the services file for the service ww20 is: c:\Program Files\SAP\ITS\2.6C The services files are located in the following directory: c:\Program Files\SAP\ITS\2.srvc m~~ Each service can be divided into one or more themes. the functionality of the service is usually identical. layout or language). amfe m~
z~ The HTML templates map the R/3 transaction screen to a web page.Q Configuration Guide | Release 4. Themes are instances of services that may differ in look and feel (appearance. Thus each service subdirectory may contain theme subdirectories.0\<virtual ITS>\template\ The template directory contains a subdirectory for each service.0\<virtual ITS>\services\ww20. For example. language resources.0\<virtual ITS>\services For example. sound. and MIME files. for the service ww20 is: c:\Program Files\SAP\ITS\2.0\<virtual ITS>\template\ww20\SG fbf^ _
~ MIME files contain the image. flow files. These files control the look and feel of the transaction when accessed from the web. for the theme SG provided in the Online Store preconfiguration installation under the service ww20. the directory is: c:\Program Files\SAP\ITS\2. Each of them has its own set of HTML templates. graphics.0\<virtual ITS>\template\ww20 Each service may also contain themes. 3. The WGate sends the request to the AGate.gif kHL l~ The R/3 System provides the backend functions for the Online Store preconfiguration. The web customer sends a request to the web server. The web server calls the WGate. to the backend R/3 System. such as: n n n Sales order processing Accounting and finance Shipping and delivery processing a b p The following sequence describes how the data from a web customer goes from the Online Store.Chapter 1: Online Store Preconfiguration Technical Overview R The MIME files are located in: c:\itspub\<virtual ITS>\wwwroot\sap\its\mimes\<service>\<theme> For example: c:\itspub\<virtual ITS>\wwwroot\sap\its\mimes\ww20\SG\en\ image\shop. . 1. 2. and back to the web customer. Release 4. The AGate loads the service file. The results or output is sent from the R/3 System to the AGate. 11. k~~~|~ SAP@Web Installation Guide. and videos included in the web page are retrieved from the web server. 9. 6. The result is sent to the backend R/3 System.6D. 10. sounds. SAP AG. The HTML template is a map or translation of the R/3 transaction to a web page. 7. 2000 . 5. 8. and then to the web customer. The backend R/3 System processes the transaction.6C 4. to the web server. Any images. The AGate loads the HTML template and language resources. The HTML page goes from the AGate to the WGate.JI Configuration Guide | Release 4. The AGate generates the HTML page. & + $ 3 7 ( 5 M i~| i
z . The project plan provided by Accelerated SAP does not go into component-level detail. such as the SAP Online Store. In this approach. and the texts and images that should be displayed in the SAP Online Store. the SAP Online Store implementation is a new phase of an R/3 implementation. the scope of the project must be defined. initial familiarity with the R/3 System and training. timeline. and thus becomes part of the entire implementation. web server. and additional firewalls must be considered.JK Configuration Guide | Release 4. Such planning requires careful consideration of the scope. change management—have already been addressed. In this case. many of the larger issues—R/3 landscape. n . enough time should be spent on determining which products will be sold on the Internet. Considered a small implementation. The additional areas that need to be considered beyond the normal R/3 implementation include: n n When determining the technical landscape. In the material master configuration and data transfer. the ITS server. additional views for customer and material master need to be created. the scope includes the SAP Online Store and the sales and distribution processes that support the Internet order and order fulfillment processes. an additional distribution channel may be used. Essentially. If you use a new distribution channel. the SAP Online Store is part of the scope of the R/3 implementation. and available resources and skills of your project team. the normal project plan provided by Accelerated SAP should be used. Online Store implementations fall into two categories: n Companies who are implementing the R/3 System and the SAP Online Store at the same time. As part of the implementation. In this situation. and only the incremental changes require more planning. To identify orders placed through the Internet. n i~| i
z z \
~~ b
~~z Companies who do not currently have an R/3 System may wish to include the SAP Online Store as part of their initial scope. must be thoroughly planned. This plan contains all the phases and tasks that are part of an R/3 implementation.6C h~~ Implementation of an e-commerce solution. Companies who already have an R/3 System and now wish to add the SAP Online Store functionality. The company may also choose to use a project plan that addresses only the SAP Online Store implementation in a more detailed manner. However. and cuts out some of the extensive organizational issues that should have been addressed when R/3 was first implemented. If a company chooses to use the Accelerated SAP project plan. additional conditions or pricing procedures may be required. There is a 6month and 9-month implementation plan. intended for use by companies implementing the SAP Online Store in a subsequent phase. or define a new. As part of the Online Store preconfiguration. The benefit of such a plan is it immediately addresses the tasks at a more detailed level.saplabs.Chapter 2: Project Planning n JL As part of Best Practices for SAP Online Store. If products sold on the Internet will be priced differently than those sold through other distribution channels. and an Online Store. we provide a copy of the Accelerated SAP project plan templates for small and medium-sized businesses. . i~| i
z b
~~ l~
Fl}~ bZ\ z z Z}}Fh Companies who already have a live implementation of an R/3 System may wish to expand their system to include the SAP Online Store and related sellside applications on the Internet. we provide an implementation plan for companies implementing the SAP Online Store as an add-on to an existing R/3 System. For the look and feel of the SAP Online Store.com/ecom in the download section. Such detailed tasks are not included in the Accelerated SAP project plans. We provide an outline of such a detailed plan. The project plans have not been changed.com/ecom in the download section. since going forward with an Internet presence. additional time needs to be allocated to incorporate your corporate identity into the HTML Business templates. The implementation time needs to be condensed. requires rethinking the strategic direction of the company. The plan is in Microsoft Project format and can be downloaded at no charge from our web site at www. see the separate project plan provided for companies implementing the SAP Online Store in a subsequent phase. and to integrate the store into any existing web site you may have.saplabs. more limited project plan. it may still be necessary to address these issues. n For details on the tasks that must be considered during an SAP Online Store implementation. since many of the larger issues of an R/3 implementation have already been addressed. The benefit of using the Accelerated SAP plan is that all phases of a business and IT project are considered. in Microsoft Project™ and Microsoft Excel™ format. However. These files can be downloaded at no charge from our web site at www. the scoping should be defined to include only the SAP Online Store. These companies can use the Accelerated SAP project plan. because these high-level plans are only used as a starting point for all companies. This plan should be used as a starting point for an add-on implementation of the SAP Online Store. the plan may be too all-encompassing for what is essentially an expansion to a company’s current R/3 implemented functionality. too enamored by the technology. By properly tracking and actively managing costs. IT organizations can get the most from their investments and partnerships if they effectively track and manage ongoing costs. not just by-products. pz p~ ]~
~ Together with the Online Store preconfiguration. companies could lay the groundwork for continuous planning and improvement. The vast majority of potential respondents declined to participate because they had not tracked costs and therefore could not provide detailed information. The Cost&Time template allows you to perform these calculations. we provide a template that enables you to record the time and money planned versus spent per task and application area. . this section introduces a template based on the ASAP for Small and Midsize Businesses (SMBs) project plan that allows proper cost and time recording for the Online Store preconfiguration implementation project. and increased revenues will be the driving force behind your implementation. This lack of cost tracking is alarming. Many companies fail to make hard return-on-investment (ROI) calculations for ERP applications projects.JM Configuration Guide | Release 4. The purpose of this section is to point out the importance of proper cost and time recording. This well-known research institution had a hard time finding suitable participants for its analysis.6C f \ When investing in e-commerce solutions. given that best practice suggests organizations that track such information are better equipped to manage. Hopefully. contain. Consulting firms now advocate that a business justification be a critical success factor for enterprise-wide IT projects. and reduce costs.saplabs. The META Group also stresses the implications of not tracking costs in one of its latest reports. To assist you.com/ecom. productivity gains. The Cost&Time template is provided in Microsoft Project™ format and can be downloaded from our web site at www. and to raise awareness among the project management team. one of the most important tasks is to make all returnon-investment calculations and business justifications. cost reduction. We recommend you embark on implementations by taking into consideration the total cost of the implementation (TCI) or total cost of ownership (TCO). m~ \ z} m~ m~
z~ Prior to implementation. and return on investment (ROI) or net present value (NPV) calculations. The purpose of new technologies should be to support business needs. business process improvements. Jeff Sweat. . and dramatically reduces the number of lines.3 Sign Contract (including all subtasks) p~~ h{z ~ m~
z~ The Cost&Time Template can be downloaded from the Simplification Group’s web page at www.1 Prospect Qualification (including all subtasks) 1. 2 August 1999.” Informationweek. These tasks are: n n n 1. g~ The project plan from ASAP for SMBs includes several tasks for the sales cycle of the Value Added Reseller (VAR) or Certified Business Solutions (CBS) Provider.4.Chapter 2: Project Planning JN The Cost&Time template has been developed based on the 4.Savvy Companies Apply the Painful Lessons Learned from Implementing Enterprise Resource Planning Software to Next-Generation Applications.” META Group.6B ASAP project plan for SMBs.1 Sign Professional Service Engagement for Blueprint (including all subtasks) 2. These tasks—shaded in purple—can be disregarded by customers using this plan and template.2. k~~~|~ n n “Enterprise Application Ongoing Support Costs Unveiled. 1999. “Learning Curve .com/ecom. No changes have been made to the project plan intact since the VARs and CBS Providers also use this tool.saplabs. This project plan is a trimmed-down version of the standard ASAP project plan. 6C .JO Configuration Guide | Release 4. 3$57 7 :2 [ \z kHL . including the configuration of the sales processes and the master data. because it is no longer necessary to update several data sources. These IACs are actually transactions coded within the R/3 System. The IACs illustrate an “inside-out” approach. n No duplication of data Not only is the configuration and process logic maintained in one system. the master data also resides in one place. All information resides within R/3. To check the order status. However. These sell-side IACs use existing Sales and Distribution (SD) configuration and processes. Configuration is also faster. n Faster order fulfillment Since the data is updated in R/3 immediately. because much of the existing configuration of internal sales processes can be used. Business users are also not required to know HTML in order to update a product catalog. no additional updates on the web server are required to allow the customer to see the status of an order. . regardless of how the order was taken. n Real-time information Because the product availability information resides within R/3. in which order fulfillment takes place the same way.6C iz h~~ The sell-side Internet functions available with R/3 are referred to as Internet Application Components (IACs). a customer can immediately know whether a product is available. This approach has the following advantages: n The sales processes used on the Internet can use the same configuration used for existing SD processes within R/3 Using the same configuration allows for a more homogeneous process. The margin for error and inconsistencies is also reduced. periodic interfaces to replicate the order into R/3 delivery and billing.JQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. there is no need for complex. This structure allows for faster updates to the available products and prices. meaning that the logic of the sales processes carried out on the Internet is inside R/3. these IAC transactions are intended for use only on the Internet. enters the quantity of items required. The structure of the product catalog is maintained within R/3. The ATP configuration within R/3 informs them when these items are available. Customer account information – A customer can verify that all account information is correct and can display all financial transactions. The chapters in “Part Two” discuss the following sell-side IACs: n Product catalog – This IAC allows customers to browse the product catalog. Sales order status – A customer can check on the status of any order placed. Different order. Online Store – A shopping basket is added to the product catalog that allows customers to place orders on the Internet. usually a business partner. sound files. Available-to-promise (ATP) – A customer. make that change in R/3 and the change appears immediately on the Internet. determine the prices. A link to the freight carrier web site allows real-time tracking of deliveries. and spec sheets.Part Two: Configuration in R/3 JR The following example shows how the product catalog displays on the Internet. If the text of a portion of the catalog should be changed. regardless of whether it was placed through the Internet. and display images. customer. n n n n . and product profiles are used to determine the business processes available on the Internet. KI Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C . & + $ 3 7 ( 5 N \~z ~ h
~ l~ ~ \zz
KK Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C h~~ The SAP Online Store uses the product catalog and adds shopping capability. Customers can browse the product catalog, add items to their basket, and place an order. A registration process for new customers can be included as part of the Online Store. After the order has been placed, an e-mail confirmation goes out to the customer who placed the order. As an Internet Application Component (IAC), the Online Store is tightly integrated with the backend R/3 System, meaning that all transactions occur in real-time. The product catalog is maintained in R/3. If a new product is added to the catalog, the customers can immediately see the change. No duplication of data occurs between systems, reducing the chance for errors, such as a customer ordering a product that is no longer available. When a customer registers in the Online Store, a customer master record is instantly created in the R/3 System. When a customer places an order, that order is immediately available for fulfillment processing. Delays in the delivery processing of the order are avoided, allowing you to get your products to the customer more quickly. After the order is created, normal delivery, invoicing, payment card processing, and clearing processes within the R/3 System apply to the order. You must make several decisions while setting up your Online Store. These questions include: n n n Will you allow customers to browse your product catalog before identifying themselves, or will you require an early logon? Will you allow customers to log on with an e-mail address or with a customer number? Do you have existing customers that will want to access your web site? If so, you need to collect e-mail addresses and create passwords for these customers. How much customer data do you wish to capture? Reporting needs determine the types of customers you create within R/3 when new customers register on the Internet. What types of payment options will you allow your customers to use? How will you handle the reporting of your Internet business data? For example, do you wish to use additional distribution channels, additional sales document types, or additional customer account groups? n n n The answers to these questions determine to what extent you need to change the setup of your current Sales and Distribution (SD) functions, and how you choose to configure your Online Store. Chapter 3: Creating the Online Store with the Catalog KL pz p~ ]~
~ In the Online Store preconfiguration, we provide the following deliverables: n n n n Preconfiguration of Online Store and related profile settings Preconfiguration of SD settings to support the Online Store Preconfiguration of the ITS look and feel Documentation of Online Store functionality The transaction WW20 accesses the Online Store. For more detailed documentation on topics surrounding this user experience, see the following chapters: n n n n n Chapter 4 details the product catalog navigation. Chapter 5 explains pricing in the product catalog and orders created from the Online Store. Chapter 6 describes limiting a customer’s authorization to display the product catalog. Chapter 7 explains customer creation during registration. Chapter 8 describes the scenario in which multiple customers from the same company shop at your store. fz b az~S m~ h
~ l~ The Online Store uses the product catalog master data and adds profiles that determine how the product catalog is processed during browsing and shopping. The Online Store contains a link to the product catalog variant that should be displayed when the Online Store is accessed. The product catalog variant determines the stores’s language and currency. The same product catalog and variant can be used in multiple stores. A series of profiles contained in the Online Store determine how the products, customers, and orders are handled. The following profiles determine how the Online Store is processed: n The product presentation profile determines which product data displays, how many products can be displayed on one web page, and how searches take place. The customer administration profile determines the type of customer created during registration in the Online Store, and how that customer logs on in the future. The order and quotation profile determines the order type used for Internet orders and the payment types allowed. n n KM Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C Various add-ons have been developed as part of the Online Store preconfiguration. The designated chapters describe in detail these add-ons. n Four scenarios are delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration: n Selling to customers A customer may browse the product catalog without logging on. The customer can then place items into a shopping basket. When the customer is ready to order, an existing customer can log on with an ID (e-mail address) and password. A new customer can register with an e-mail address. The only available payment option is by credit card. Availability information for products within the catalog (appendix B, “AddOn for ATP in the Product Catalog” on page 391) Saving the shopping basket, and displaying the contents of the basket while shopping (appendix C, “Add-On for the Shopping Basket” on page 403) A “My Profile” service is accessible, which allows the maintenance of personal data, such as a default credit card (chapter 12, “Modification: Changing the Customer Type for IKA1” on page 212) Entering a purchase order number (appendix D, “Add-On for Purchase Order Entry” on page 415) Choosing a shipping option (chapter 5, “Prices in the Product Catalog” on page 79) n n Selling to consumers The business process is the same as the selling-to-customers scenario. However, a different type of customer master record, called a consumer, is created. To reduce the size of the records in R/3, consumer master records contain personal data, but do not contain sales area data. n n Selling to business partners A customer must already have a logon (e-mail) and password before being able to access the product catalog. The customer can then browse the catalog and place items into shopping baskets. Payment options include credit cards and invoices. n n Selling to one-time customers A customer may browse the catalog and place orders. However, customers are only rarely expected to return to the site. For this reason, a customer master record is not created, and customer information is stored within the order. Customers must reenter their information each time when visiting the site. Both credit cards and invoices are allowed in this preconfiguration. n Z||~ ~ h
~ l~ An Internet customer chooses a link from a list of available Online Stores. After customers choose one store, they cannot switch to another store, unless they start from the beginning. YGUIDES-A YGUIDES-B YGUIDES-C YGUIDES-D Link to List of Online Stores Catalog: Guides Variant: EN/USD Hyperlink http://<homeURL>scripts/wgate/ww20/!?~language=EN Likely only one Online Store, or product catalog, will be active at a time. In that case, the link provided from the company web site to the store should link directly to the Online Store. Chapter 3: Creating the Online Store with the Catalog KN Link Directly to One Store YGUIDES-C Hyperlink http://<homeURL>scripts/wgate/ww20/!?~okcode=START&ostore=STORENAME&~language=EN There may be cases in which an item from the catalog should be displayed directly, instead of forcing the customer to scroll through the catalog levels to find it. This option is especially useful if the company web site promotes an item with a press release or product review. By providing a direct link to the item, the customer is encouraged to take a more detailed look and purchase that item. Link Directly to Item in Store YGUIDES-C Area 3, Item 1 Hyperlink http://<homeURL>/scripts/wgate/ww20/!?~okcode=STARTITE&ostore=YGUIDESC&selected_area=3&selected_item=1&~language=en fz~ ]zz kHL l ~ h
~ l~ To set up master data in R/3 to support the Online Store, you need to perform the following procedures as described in the next sections. You must: n n n n n Create a product catalog Create the prices for your products Create a reference customer master record Create the output type master record Ensure that correct parameters are entered in the ITS user’s profile All of these topics are covered in detail in other chapters in this guide. \~z~ z i}| \zz
You must create a product catalog that includes products, prices, and documents with references to the images and data files displayed on the web. For details about creating a product catalog, see chapter 4, “Creating the Product Catalog” on page 51. KO Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C In the Command field, enter transaction WWM1 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu, choose Logistics → Materials Management → Product Catalog → Product Catalog → Create). \~z~ ~ i|~ r i}| For each product linked to the product catalog, you must create a price to be displayed on the web. The price may be the same as the prices that already exist in your R/3 System, or you may wish to create discounted prices for your Internet customers. For details about pricing the products in the catalog and in the orders created using the Online Store, see chapter 5, “Prices in the Product Catalog” on page 79. In the Command field, enter transaction VK31 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu, choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Conditions → Create). \~z~ z k~~~|~ \~ fz~ k~|} Because customer master records are created though the Online Store, you must create a reference customer, consumer, or one-time customer. The customer master records are then used to create the master records for customers who register on the Internet. For details about creating customers, see chapter 7, “Customers in the Online Store” on page 119. In the Command field, enter transaction XD01 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu, choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partners → Customer → Create → Complete). \~z~ ~ h m~ fz~ k~|} h}~ \z When a customer creates an order over the Internet, the condition records for the output type must be created so an e-mail confirmation can be sent to the customer. The steps below illustrate how the condition record is created. This procedure has been preconfigured for you when you run CATT procedure ZESHOP_OUTPUT_RECORDS. These steps do not need to be performed unless you choose to create additional condition records. See appendix G, “Introduction to Computer-Aided Test Tools (CATTs)” on page 435, for details about the CATT procedure. mz &UHDWH RXWSXW PDVWHU UHFRUG IRU WKH ,QWHUQHW VDOHV RUGHU JG In the Command field, enter transaction VV11 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu, choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Output → Sales Document → Create). Chapter 3: Creating the Online Store with the Catalog KG On the Create Output - Condition Records screen: KP zG In Output type, enter YEWO. This output type has been preconfigured. {G Choose Key combination. LG On the Key Combination dialog box, choose Only one combination has been configured. Sales Organization/Order Type defaults as selected. . MG On the Create Condition Records (e-Shop: order conf.): Fast Entry screen: zG Under Sal (sales document type), enter YWO. This sales document type has been preconfigured. {G Under PartF (partner function), enter SP, which represents the sold-to party. |G Under M (medium), enter 5, which means an external send. }G In Time, enter 4, which means to send immediately upon saving the order. ~G Choose Communication. KQ Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C NG On the Create Condition Records (e-Shop: order conf.): Communication screen: zG In Comm. strategy (communication strategy), enter CS01 for Internet/Letter. CS01 is delivered with the standard R/3 System. g~ {G In Output device, enter a printer. |G Choose . Entering a printer in Output device is required even though the output will be sent by e-mail. OG Repeat steps 1–5, using sales order type YWB instead of YWO. \~z~ ~ h m~ fz~ k~|} ]~
~ \z When an order created over the Internet is delivered, the condition records for the output type must be created so an e-mail confirmation can be sent to the customer when the order ships. The steps below illustrate how the condition record is created. This procedure has been preconfigured for you when you run CATT procedure ZESHOP_OUTPUT_RECORDS. These steps do not need to be performed unless you choose to create additional condition records. See appendix G, “Introduction to Computer-Aided Test Tools (CATTs)” on page 435 for details about the CATT procedure. mz &UHDWH RXWSXW PDVWHU UHFRUG IRU WKH GHOLYHU\ FRQILUPDWLRQ JG In the Command field, enter transaction VV21 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu, choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Output → Shipping → Create). Chapter 3: Creating the Online Store with the Catalog KG On the Create Output - Condition Records screen: KR zG In Output type, enter YEWD. This output type has been preconfigured. {G Choose Key combination. LG On the Key Combination dialog box, choose Only one combination has been configured. Sales Organization/Delivery Type defaults as selected. . MG On the Create Condition Records (e-Shop: dlvry conf.): Fast Entry screen: zG Under Del (delivery type), enter LF. This delivery type is standarddelivered with the R/3 System. {G Under PartF (partner function), enter SP, which represents the sold-to party. |G Under M (medium), enter 5, which means an external send. }G In Time, enter 4, which means to send immediately upon saving the order. ~G Choose Communication. LI Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C NG On the Create Condition Records (e-Shop: dlvry conf.): Communication screen: zG In Comm. strategy (communication strategy), enter CS01 for Internet/Letter. CS01 is delivered with the standard R/3 System. g~ {G In Output device, enter a printer. |G Choose . Entering a printer in Output device is required even though the output will be sent by e-mail. \~z~ ~ h m~ fz~ k~|} [
\z When an order created over the Internet is billed, the condition records for the output type must be created so an e-mail confirmation can be sent to the customer. If the customer uses a credit card, the e-mail represents an electronic receipt. If the customer should be billed, the e-mail acts as an electronic invoice. The steps below illustrate how the condition record is created. A confirmation has also been preconfigured for credit memos. This procedure has been preconfigured for you when you run CATT procedure ZESHOP_OUTPUT_RECORDS. These steps do not need to be performed unless you choose to create additional condition records. See appendix G, “Introduction to Computer-Aided Test Tools (CATTs)” on page 435 for details about the CATT procedure. mz &UHDWH RXWSXW PDVWHU UHFRUG IRU ELOOLQJ FRQILUPDWLRQV JG In the Command field, enter transaction VV31 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu, choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Output → Billing Document → Create). This output type has been preconfigured. G Choose Communication. . G Select the first row (you will return to this step to select each of the following rows). enter 5. which means an external send. }G Under Time. enter 4. ~G In the next row. . Sales Organization/Billing Type defaults as selected. {G Under PartF (partner function).Condition Records screen: LJ zG In Output type. |G Under M (medium). LG On the Key Combination dialog box. which means to send immediately upon saving the order. which represents the sold-to party. choose Only one combination has been configured. enter SP. enter YWI. This billing document type has been configured for returns.Chapter 3: Creating the Online Store with the Catalog KG On the Create Output . MG On the Create Condition Records (e-Shop: inv/receipt): Fast Entry screen: zG Under Bill (billing document type). {G Choose Key combination. enter the same parameters for billing type YWRE. enter YEWI. This billing document type has been preconfigured. {G In Output device. “The ITS User: Logging on to R/3” on page 235 for details on the ITS user. See chapter 14.LK Configuration Guide | Release 4. ^~ \~| izz~~ Z~ ^~~} ~ bml n~@ i
~ To access the Online Store from the Internet. CS01 is delivered with the standard R/3 System. To double-check the ITS user’s profile parameters. }G Choose . enter transaction SU01 in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu.6C NG On the Create Condition Records (e-Shop: inv/receipt): Communication screen: zG In Comm. The ITS user that logged on to the R/3 System in the background during the Online Store transaction must have the correct sales area parameters in the user profile. the correct parameters must be entered in the ITS user’s profile. enter a printer. select another row. . enter CS01 for Internet/Letter. strategy (communication strategy). OG Return to step 4f. This entry is required even though the output will be sent by e-mail. |G Choose to access the previous screen and enter the same parameters for the second entry. and complete the rest of the steps. choose Tools → Administration → User Maintenance → Users). Repeat for all rows on the Create Condition Records (e-Shop: inv/receipt): Fast Entry screen. choose Logistics . You should also check the SAP Notes in the SAP Service Marketplace.Chapter 3: Creating the Online Store with the Catalog LL \z l ~ h
~ l~ The configuration steps listed below for supporting the Online Store are described in detail in the following sections. This procedure is standarddelivered in R/3. “ITS Templates” on page 215. mz 'HILQH WKH DSSOLFDWLRQ W\SHV IRU LPDJHV LQ WKH 2QOLQH 6WRUH In the Command field. and for instructions on how to make changes to the ITS HTML Business templates. You must configure: n The application types for images in the Online Store (standard delivery) The product presentation profile (preconfigured) The country selection profile (preconfigured) The customer administration profile (preconfigured) The quotation and order profile (preconfigured) The Online Store (preconfigured) Sales document types used for the Internet (preconfigured) An additional item category for the Internet (preconfigured) Billing types for the Internet (preconfigured) Pricing procedures for the Internet (preconfigured) Output determination for e-mail order confirmation (preconfigured) Output determination for e-mail delivery confirmation (preconfigured) Output determination for e-mail receipt/invoice confirmation (preconfigured) Output SAPscript form (preconfigured) g~ n n n n n n n n n n n n n For changes that we deliver for the look and feel of the Online Store functionality. .General → IAC Product Catalog and Online Store and choose next to Determine Pictures and Sound Files for Web Server). the types of files expected are defined in configuration. see chapter 13. enter transaction WCPC and choose Enter (or in the IMG. \~ ~ Z
|z m~ bz~ ~ h
~ l~ To support the image and data files displayed in the Online Store. The table below shows the primary settings in the two preconfigured product presentation profiles. Usage WS carrier type WA large WA small WA sound file Application Type WS (Webserver) LIM (Large Image) SIM (Small Image) SND (Sound) \~ ~ i}| i~~z i
~ The product presentation profile determines how the products in the catalog display. mz &RQILJXUH WKH SURGXFW SUHVHQWDWLRQ SURILOHV In the IMG. and how searches of products are handled.6C The table below shows the workstation applications expected in the Online Store. different (usually less technical) texts are available. material numbers and descriptions display on the Internet. For the business-to-consumer scenario. For the business partner scenario. No changes have been made to the R/3 standard-delivered settings. The profiles are: n n YPCB – Selling to business partners YPCC – Selling to consumers YPCB Off On On 20 Off On Off 100 Off On YPCC On Off Off 10 Off On Off 100 On Off Fields Display product with catalog header Display product with material number Display product with material short text Lines per page Product group hierarchy: expanded Product group hierarchy: dynamic Product group hierarchy: step-by-step Limit for product search Search catalog heading Search material number . how access to the catalog is controlled. to view the product presentation profiles. choose Logistics next to General → IAC Product Catalog and Online Store and choose Profiles for Product Presentation.LM Configuration Guide | Release 4. Two profiles have been preconfigured for you. If different search logic is required.Chapter 3: Creating the Online Store with the Catalog LN Fields Search material short text Search price Search long text Search all shops Display additional documents: list Display additional documents: detail YPCB On Off Off On Off On YPCC Off On On On Off On In addition to the settings above. A country schema has been preconfigured to limit the countries available for selection. see chapter 6. additional configuration is required to activate the Alta Vista search functionality. in the IMG choose Logistics . even when no entry is made. IAC_SEARCH_ALTAVISTA is also available. The U. However. For additional details. the filter criteria for both profiles is set to CUSTOMER_FILTER_CHAR_READ to allow a limit on customer access to portions of a catalog. a different function module must be delivered. All other fields are either blank or relevant only to IS-Retail installations. \~ ~ \ l~
~| i
~ When a new customer is created within the Online Store. “Limiting Access to Product Groups Within a Product Catalog” on page 99.General → next to Country IAC Product Catalog and Online Store and choose Selection for Customer Address. The Alta Vista search functionality has not been preconfigured. is the selected country that defaults into the address screen. R/3 uses the function module IAC_STANDARD_SEARCH as the standard search function module. You can limit the selection to the countries with which you expect to do business.S. mz &RQILJXUH WKH FRXQWU\ VHOHFWLRQ SURILOH To view the country selection profile. all countries available for selection are sorted alphabetically. Country CA (Canada) US (USA) With regions Yes Yes Default No Yes . The table below shows the countries included in the preconfigured country selection profile. LO Configuration Guide | Release 4. and how logon is handled. A parameter is set in the ITS service file to allow customers to log on with an e-mail address in this transaction as well. Logistics General → IAC Product Catalog and Online Store and choose next to Customer Administration Profiles. the configuration for customer logon is not within R/3. customers can browse the catalog online. For a customer to log on with an e-mail address and check the Sales Order Status (VW10). The table below shows the primary settings in the four preconfigured customer administration profiles: n n n n YPCB – Selling to business partners YPCC – Selling to consumers YPCN – Selling to consumers (consumer master) YPOT – Selling to one-time customers The configuration in the customer administration profile specifies that a customer will log on with an e-mail address. customers are required to log in before browsing the product catalog. See chapter 10. E-mail logon is not available for the available-to-promise (CVAK) and customer account information (IKA1) IACs. New customers cannot register online. in the IMG choose. not a customer number.6C \~ ~ \~ Z}z i
~ The customer administration profile determines how customers are created in the R/3 System when they register in the Online Store. and only need to sign in immediately prior to obtaining a quote and ordering. “Sales Order Status” on page 179. Field Early registration (logon) No customer registration Customers cannot create a new customer number online Allow SSL (off for our delivery. For the business partner scenario. This configuration applies to the Online Store (WW20) and product catalog (WW10) Internet Application Components. but should be turned on for live sites) Allow one-time customers One-time customer reference Customer logon Country default Customers are created as consumers YPCB On On YPCC Off Off YPCN Off Off YPOT Off On Off Off Blank E-mail YUS1 Off Off Off Blank E-mail YUS1 Off Off Off Blank E-mail YUS1 On Off On 2000000 E-mail YUS1 Off . mz &RQILJXUH WKH FXVWRPHU DGPLQLVWUDWLRQ SURILOHV To view the customer administration profile. for details. For the business-to-consumer scenario. in the IMG choose Logistics General → IAC Product Catalog and Online Store and choose next to Profiles for Quotation and Order Control. For the one-time customer. and a requested delivery date may be entered. whether delivery dates may be entered. and sales orders. The table below shows the primary settings in the three preconfigured customer administration profiles: n n YPCB – Selling to business partners YPCC – Selling to consumers YPOT – Selling to one-time customers YPCB YWB On On On Off Off On 30 days YPCC YWO On On Off Off Off Off Blank YPOT YWO On On On Off Off Off Blank The configuration in the quotation and order profile is set to display a quote for the customer before the order can be placed.S. n Field Order type Creation quotation before order Payment by credit card allowed Payment by invoice allowed Payment by cash-on-delivery allowed Credit card with SET (Secure Electronic Transaction) Requested delivery date entry allowed Maximum requested delivery time \~ ~ h
~ l~ The Online Store contains links to the product catalog master data and to configuration that determine handling procedures for products. mz &RQILJXUH WKH TXRWDWLRQDQGRUGHU SURILOHV To view the quotation and order profiles.Chapter 3: Creating the Online Store with the Catalog LP \~ ~ jzFz}Fh}~ i
~ The order profile determines the screen progression for creating an order. a breakdown of discounts. payment by invoice and credit card is allowed. both credit cards and invoices are allowed. R/3 generates a quotation before a customer places the order. and which payment methods are allowed. We recommend you not change this setting for doing business in the U.. freight. because the displayed subtotals. For the business-to-consumer scenario. and tax). This setting is necessary if you desire a display of a price breakdown (that is. In all cases. For the business partner scenario. customers. The Online Store preconfiguration delivers four different . This breakdown is not available if the quotation is not generated first. customers may only pay with credit cards. are only available using quotation processing. including discounts and freight. although you may wish to change this setting in your installation. “Customers in the Online Store” on page 119. since no customer master record is created. Each of these stores uses the same product catalog as master data. for details. and may pay by invoice or with credit card. This scenario assumes the customer to be a close business partner who must log on before being allowed to browse the product catalog. No customer master record is created. see chapter 4. The only type of payment allowed is credit card payment. but is not required to log on until ready to place an order. a customer can browse the product catalog. Both invoices and credit cards are allowed as payment options. The table below shows the primary settings in the four preconfigured customer administration profiles: n n n n YGUIDES-B: SAP Labs Guidebooks: Bus. However. One store is configured to create a complete customer master record. The fourth store supports one-time customers. The Online Store also contains the configuration profiles previously described. in the IMG choose Logistics next to General → IAC Product Catalog and Online Store and choose Online Stores. This procedure has been preconfigured for you. The other store is configured to create a “minimal” customer master record or consumer master record. Customers can browse the catalog. In terms of subsequent services available on the Internet. “Creating the Product Catalog” on page 51. if you are not using the Online Store preconfiguration in conjunction with the Preconfigured Client.6C Online Stores. Two stores supports a “selling to the consumer” scenario. Partners YGUIDES-C: SAP Labs Guidebooks: Customers YGUIDES-CN: SAP Labs Guidebooks: Consumers YGUIDES-OT: SAP Labs Guidebooks: One-Time Customers . In this scenario. the sample product catalog is not delivered and you must create a catalog manually. All customer information is stored in the order.LQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. For details on creating product catalogs. mz &RQILJXUH WKH 2QOLQH 6WRUHV To view the configuration of the Online Stores. one-time customers cannot check their order status. A third store supports the “selling to a business partner” scenario. A full customer master record is created in this scenario. See chapter 7. and select an additional language in which the texts should be maintained. and YWRE have been preconfigured for Online Store orders and returns. Additionally. enter transaction VOV8 and choose Enter (or in the IMG. mz &RQILJXUH WKH VDOHV GRFXPHQW W\SHV In the Command field. YWB. choose Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Header and choose next to Define Sales Document Types). choose Utilities → Choose languages. . YESHOP-B Off YESHOPB2C 001 YPCB YPCB 0010 YPCB Blank YESHOP-C Off YESHOPB2C 001 YPCC YPCC 0010 YPCC Blank YESHOPCN Off YESHOPB2C 001 YPCB YPCB 0010 YPCN Blank YESHOP-OT Off YESHOPB2C 001 YPCC YPOT 0010 YPOT Blank If the Online Store descriptions should be maintained in multiple languages. the new order types facilitate reporting of Internet orders.Chapter 3: Creating the Online Store with the Catalog LR Field Use as prod cat only (no shopping basket functionality) Product catalog Variant Product profile Order profile Sales office Customer profile Reference customer (overrides the customer in the product catalog basic data) All other fields are blank. These new order types have been created according to requirements for a different pricing procedure and credit handling. \~ lz
~ ]|~ m~ n~} ~ b~~ The new sales order types YWO. Then choose Edit → Translation to enter the text. MI Configuration Guide | Release 4. The table below shows the primary settings in the three preconfigured sales document types. YWO C (order) 01 02 10 10 2 (error) On On Off Blank Off 100 V1 AU (sales order) 11 (standard order) 0 (sales order) X UALL UER1 A (dialog) LF YWI YWI IV Off EK02 01 (standard) YWB C (order) 01 02 10 10 2 (error) On On Off Blank Off 100 V1 AU (sales order) 11 (standard order) 0 (sales order) X UALL UER1 A (dialog) LF YWI YWI IV Off EK02 01 (standard) YWRE H (returns) 01 02 10 10 Blank Off On Off Blank Off 100 V1 RE (returns) 14 (credit memo) 0 (sales order) X UALL UER1 Off LR YWRE YWRE IG 08 Blank 01 (standard) .6C Order types YWO and YWB are the same. See chapter 10. Field SD document category Internal number range External number range Item increment Subitem increment Check division Item division Read info record Check credit limit Credit group Enter PO number Probability Output application Screen sequence group Incompletion procedure Transaction group Document pricing procedure Display criteria Function code: overview screen Product attribute messages Delivery type Delivery-relevant billing type Order-relevant billing type Intercompany billing type Billing block Costing cond. “Sales Order Status” on page 179 for details. YWB is configured to use the customer hierarchy delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration. type for line items Payment guarantee proc. with the exception of the partner determination procedure. YWO and YWB are copied from order type OR and YWRE is copied from order type RE. Field Relevant for billing Schedule line allowed Returns Weight/volume relevant Determine cost Pricing Incompletion procedure Partner determination procedure Text determination procedure Item category statistics group Screen sequence group All other fields are left blank. The table below shows the primary settings in the preconfigured item category YREN. choose Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item and choose next to Define Item Categories. Note that the copy rules have been adjusted as necessary to reflect the new document types. since the standard-delivered REN handles only order-based returns. The new item category handles delivery-based returns. Value A (delivery-related) On On On On X (standard) 20 N 01 2 N . Item category YREN was copied from item category REN. \~ z Z}}z
b~ \z~ ~ b~~ The new item category YREN is preconfigured for Online Store orders and returns. mz &RQILJXUH WKH LWHP FDWHJRU\ In the IMG.Chapter 3: Creating the Online Store with the Catalog MJ Field Payment card plan type Checking group Propose delivery date YWO YWB YWRE 03 (payment card) 03 (payment card) 03 (payment card) 01 (standard) On 01 (standard) On 01 (standard) Blank All other entries are blank. 6C mz $VVLJQ WKH LWHP FDWHJRU\ WR WKH UHWXUQV VDOHV GRFXPHQW W\SH In the Command field. Types and choose The table below shows the primary settings in the two preconfigured sales document types.MK Configuration Guide | Release 4. These billing types have been created according to requirements for a different pricing procedure in the originating order. The table below shows the assignment made for the item category. enter transaction VOFA (or in the IMG. Sales Document Type YWRE Item Category Group NORM Usage Blank Higher-level Item Default Item Category Group Category Blank YREN \~ [
m~ n~} ~ b~~ The new billing types YWI and YWRE are preconfigured for Online Store orders and returns. Field Internal number range SD document category Transaction group Statistics Invoice list type Relevant for rebate Cancellation billing type Account determination procedure Document pricing procedure Account determination for payment cards YWI 19 M (invoice) 7 (billing documents) On LR On S1 KOFI00 X A00001 YWRE 19 O (credit memo) 7 (billing documents) On LG On S2 KOFI00 X A00001 . and YWRE is copied from order type RE. choose Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item and choose next to Assign Item Categories). select Define Billing Choose). mz &RQILJXUH WKH ELOOLQJ W\SHV In the Command field. Then on the Choose Activity dialog box. choose Sales and next to Define Distribution → Billing → Billing Documents and choose Billing Types. YWI is copied from billing types F2. enter transaction VOV4 (or in the IMG. R/3 sends an e-mail to the customer with details about the items ordered.Chapter 3: Creating the Online Store with the Catalog ML Field Output determination procedure Application Output type Header partners Item partners Text determination procedure Text determination proc. enter transaction V/08 (or in the IMG. .QWHUQHW VDOHV RUGHUV In the Command field. a simple pricing procedure is appropriate. \~ ~ h ]~~z ^Ffz
h}~ \z The new output type YEWO is preconfigured for e-mail order confirmation. For details on configuring the technical e-mail integration. select Maintain Pricing Procedures and choose Choose). If you plan to sell to business partners on the web. When the customer saves the order on the Internet. choose Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Pricing → Pricing Control and choose next to Define and Assign Pricing Procedures. For details about pricing in the Online Store and the delivered preconfiguration. (item) YWI V10000 V3 RD00 FK FP 03 04 YWRE V10000 V3 RD00 FK FP 03 04 All other entries are blank. \~ i| i|~}~ n~} ~ b~~ If the majority of customers with whom you plan to do business on the Internet do not have established business relationships with your company. you may choose to use your existing pricing procedures for selling on the Internet. the cost. mz &RQILJXUH WKH SULFLQJ SURFHGXUHV XVHG IRU WKH SURGXFW FDWDORJ DQG . and the order number. see chapter 18. Note that the copy rules are adjusted as necessary to reflect the new billing types. Then on the Choose Activity dialog box. “E-Mail and Fax” on page 292. see chapter 5. “Prices in the Product Catalog” on page 79. In the Command field. enter transaction V/32 and choose Enter (or in the IMG. choose Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Output Control → Output Determination → Output Determination Using the Condition Technique → next to Maintain Output Determination for Sales Documents and choose Maintain Output Types). The table below shows the primary settings in the preconfigured output type.6C mz &RQILJXUH WKH RXWSXW W\SH IRU RUGHU FRQILUPDWLRQ The output type determines when and by which method output is generated for the order. R/3 generates output through e-mail after the order is saved. The new output type is added as the last step in the procedure. mz .MM Configuration Guide | Release 4. Step 99 Counter 0 Condition Type YEWO (e-Shop: order conf. The standard-delivered output determination procedure V10000 is used.) Requirement 2 (order confirmation) Manual only Off . This step has been preconfigured for you. enter transaction V/30 and choose Enter (or in the IMG. For the Internet order. Field Access sequence Access to conditions Dispatch time Transmission medium Partner function Communication strategy Archiving mode Document type Print parameter Setting 0004 (sales organization/sales order type) On Send immediately (when saving the application) External send SP (sold-to party) CS01 (Internet/letter) Print only SDORDER Sales organization All other fields are left blank. choose Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Output Control → Output Determination→ Output Determination Using the Condition Technique → next to Maintain Output Determination for Sales Documents and choose Maintain Output Determination Procedure).QFOXGH WKH RXWSXW W\SH LQ WKH RXWSXW GHWHUPLQDWLRQ SURFHGXUH The output type must be assigned to an output determination procedure. In the Command field. select Allocate sales document header and choose Choose). Review the settings below for assigning the form to the transmission medium.) V1 (sales) 5 (external send) RVADOR01 ENTRY YPCC_ORDCONF_WEB \~ ~ h ]~~z ^Ffz
]~
~ \z The new output type YEWD is preconfigured for e-mail delivery confirmations. This step has been preconfigured for you. For details on configuring the technical e-mail integration. enter transaction V/43 and choose Enter (or in the IMG. . in Output type enter YWEO and in Application enter V1. choose Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Output Control → Output Determination→ Output Determination Using the Condition Technique → next to Maintain Output Determination for Sales Documents and choose Assign Output Determination Procedures. Sales document type YWO mz Output procedure V10000 Output Type YEWO $VVLJQ WKH 6$3VFULSW IRUP WR WKH RXWSXW PHGLXP The correct SAPscript form must be assigned to the output type to ensure the correct information is sent to the customer. When the delivery of an Internet order is created. Field Output type Application Transmission medium Program FORM routine Form Setting YEWO (e-Shop: order conf.Chapter 3: Creating the Online Store with the Catalog MN mz $VVLJQ WKH RXWSXW GHWHUPLQDWLRQ SURFHGXUH WR WKH VDOHV RUGHU W\SH The output determination procedure is now assigned to the sales order type used for the Internet. enter transaction V/G7 and choose Enter. “E-Mail and Fax” on page 292. In the dialog box. see chapter 18. This step has been preconfigured for you. Then on the Choose Activity dialog box. R/3 sends an e-mail is sent to the customer with details about the items shipped and the order number. In the Command field. In the Command field. For the delivery of an Internet order. The new output type is added as the last step in the procedure. choose Logistics Execution → Shipping → Basic Shipping Functions → Output Control → Output Determination → Maintain Output next to Maintain Output Determination for Sales Activities and choose Determination Procedure). Field Access sequence Access to conditions Dispatch time Transmission medium Partner function Communication strategy Archiving mode Document type Print parameter Setting 0004 (sales organization/delivery type) On Send immediately (when saving the application) External send SP (sold-to party) CS01 (Internet/letter) Print only SDODELNOTE Shipping point All other fields are left blank. Activities and choose The table below shows the primary settings in the preconfigured output type.6C mz &RQILJXUH WKH RXWSXW W\SH IRU GHOLYHU\ FRQILUPDWLRQ The output type determines when and by which method output is generated for the delivery. mz . choose Logistics Execution → Shipping → Basic Shipping Functions → Output Control → Output Determination → Maintain Output Determination for Sales next to Maintain Output Types).QFOXGH WKH RXWSXW W\SH LQ WKH RXWSXW GHWHUPLQDWLRQ SURFHGXUH The output type must be assigned to an output determination procedure. This step has been preconfigured for you. The standard-delivered output determination procedure V10000 is used. Step 99 Counter 1 Condition Type YEWD (e-Shop: order conf.) Requirement 1 (delivery GI posted) Manual only Off . In the Command field. R/3 generates output through e-mail after the delivery with goods issue is saved.MO Configuration Guide | Release 4. enter transaction V/34 and choose Enter (or in the IMG. In the IMG. the cost. mz &RQILJXUH WKH RXWSXW W\SH IRU ELOOLQJ FRQILUPDWLRQ The output type determines when and by which method output is generated for the billing document. see chapter 18. This step has been preconfigured for you. When the invoice created for the Internet order is saved. enter transaction V/40 and choose Enter (or in the IMG. “E-Mail and Fax” on page 292. R/3 generates output through e-mail after the order is saved. Then choose . Field Output type Application Transmission medium Program FORM routine Form Setting YEWD (e-Shop: dlvry conf. In the Command field. enter transaction V/G7 and choose Enter. and the order number. choose Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Output Control → Output Determination→ Output Determination Using the Condition Technique → next to Maintain Output Determination for Billing Documents and choose Maintain Output Types). For details on configuring the technical e-mail integration. For the billing document created for an Internet order. The settings for assigning the form to the transmission medium are documented below. In the Command field. In the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box. . R/3 sends an e-mail to the customer with details about the items ordered.Chapter 3: Creating the Online Store with the Catalog MP mz $VVLJQ WKH 6$3VFULSW IRUP WR WKH RXWSXW PHGLXP The correct SAPscript form must be assigned to the output type to ensure that the correct information is sent to the customer.) V2 (shipping) 5 (external send) RVADDN01 ENTRY YPCC_PACKLST_WEB \~ ~ h ]~~z ^Ffz
[
\z The new output type YEWI is preconfigured for e-mail billing confirmation. in Output type enter YWED and in Application enter V2. This step has been preconfigured for you. In the IMG.QFOXGH WKH RXWSXW W\SH LQ WKH RXWSXW GHWHUPLQDWLRQ SURFHGXUH The output type must be assigned to an output determination procedure.MQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. mz . . Step Counter 199 mz Condition Type YEWI (e-Shop: inv/receipt) Requirement 62 (BillDoc: ReleasePost. The new output type is added as the last step in the procedure. The standard-delivered output determination procedure V10000 is used.) Manual only Off 1 $VVLJQ WKH RXWSXW GHWHUPLQDWLRQ SURFHGXUH WR WKH ELOOLQJ W\SH The output determination procedure is now assigned to the billing type used for the Internet. Field Access sequence Access to conditions Dispatch time Transmission medium Partner function Communication strategy Archiving mode Document type Print parameter Setting 0002 (sales organization/billing type) On Send immediately (when saving the application) External send SP (sold-to party) CS01 (Internet/letter) Print only SDOINVOICE Sales organization All other fields are left blank. This step has been preconfigured for you. choose Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Output Control → Output Determination→ Output Determination Using the Condition Technique → Maintain Output Determination for Sales Documents and choose next to Maintain Output Determination Procedure).6C The table below shows the primary settings in the preconfigured output type. Then choose . and credit memos mailed to the customer. This step has been preconfigured for you. YPCC_PACKLST_WEB is used for the e-mail confirmation sent to the customer when the delivery is shipped. The settings for assigning the form to the transmission medium are documented below. YPCC_INVOICE_WEB is used for receipts. if the customer uses a credit card.Chapter 3: Creating the Online Store with the Catalog MR In the Command field. please visit our web site at www.saplabs. choose Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Output Control → Output Determination→ Output Determination Using the Condition Technique → next to Maintain Output Determination for Sales Documents and choose Assign Output Determination Procedures). enter transaction V/25 and choose Enter (or in the IMG. In the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box. Field Output type Application Transmission medium Program FORM routine Form Setting YEWI (e-Shop: inv/receipt) V3 (billing) 5 (external send) RVADIN01 ENTRY YPCC_INVOICE_WEB< \~ ~ h lZi| _ The Online Store preconfiguration includes three SAPscript forms: n YPCC_ORDCONF_WEB is used for the e-mail confirmation sent to the customer when the order is saved. a receipt prints instead of an invoice.saplabs. in Output type enter YWEI and in Application enter V3. For initial invoice processing.com/forms. Sales document type YWI YWRE mz Output procedure V10000 V10000 Output Type YEWI YEWI $VVLJQ WKH 6$3VFULSW IRUP WR WKH RXWSXW PHGLXP The correct SAPscript form must be assigned to the output type to ensure that the correct information is sent to the customer.com/pcc. invoices. For details and documentation about the preconfigured SAPscript forms in general. In the Command field. or the Preconfigured Client (PCC) at www. n n . enter transaction V/G7 and choose Enter. choose Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Output Control → Output next to Define Determination→ Process Output and Forms and choose Forms). . \~| ~ lZi g~ Information from SAP Notes is also essential to the configuration. can be found online in the SAP Service Marketplace.6C mz &RQILJXUH WKH 6$3VFULSW IRUPV In the Command field. SAP Notes. See appendix A. formerly OSS Notes and SAPNet – R/3 Frontend Notes. enter transaction SE71 and choose Enter (or in the IMG. “SAP Notes in the SAP Service Marketplace” on page 387 for informational notes related to this chapter.NI Configuration Guide | Release 4. & + $ 3 7 ( 5 O \~z ~ i}| \zz
. from your web site? Do you wish to offer different prices and price breaks to your Internet customers? In how many languages will you need to maintain your product catalog? The most critical and time-consuming effort in creating your product catalog is to determine the data you want your customers to see on the web. In the Online Store preconfiguration. Customers can browse the catalog. and operating your web site. it must be linked to an Online Store profile in configuration.6C h~~ The product catalog presents your products to your existing and potential customers on the Internet.NK Configuration Guide | Release 4. even if online shopping is not allowed. without allowing shopping basket functionality. the more accurately you can present your products and use the store on your web site as a true marketing tool. pz p~ ]~
~ The transaction that supports the browsing of the product catalog. maintaining this information. there are several decisions that must be made. In collecting the data you wish to present. is WW10. The earlier you begin the process of collecting data for your product catalog. Before the product catalog can be displayed on the web. you may have a starting point. you likely do not have all the appropriate images and descriptions ready for use. requiring a different layout. either purchasing products directly from the Internet or calling your customer service department to place an order. because the Internet is a different medium. you likely will not be able to convert all your existing data without making modifications. For example: n n n n n n n Should customers have the ability to purchase products directly from your web site. or should the catalog only be used for product presentation? What is the short description of each product that you want to display on the web? How detailed should you present the descriptions and specifications of each product to your customers? Which images and graphics will you use to illustrate your products? Will you allow customers to download additional data. we provide the following deliverables: n n n n Preconfiguration of product catalog and document management system settings ITS “look and feel” preconfiguration Data load program for the product catalog Documentation on the functionality of the product catalog . However. If you have a print catalog. such as detailed product specifications. If you have never done business on the web. The product catalog resides within R/3. i}| \zz
l|~ Product Catalog Basic Data Shop Product Group Product Group Document Document Material Master Product Group Document Material Price Shop The basic data of the product catalog describes the data used when displaying products and when placing orders from within the Online Store.Chapter 4: Creating the Product Catalog n NL Documentation of the BAPI programs available for the data load of the product catalog fz b pS m~ i}| \zz
i}| \zz
kHL The product catalog allows customers to browse a company’s product offerings on the web. making it simpler to find particular products. graphics. no HTML work is required to add a new product to the catalog. The catalog is organized into several categories. since the master data comes from the R/3 System. Additionally. The reference customer master record is copied when a new customer registers on the Internet. The product catalog basic data also contains the sales area. A variant is the combination of language and currency in which the products can be displayed. similar to store departments. descriptions. One or more variants is maintained within the basic data. For each product. . and a reference customer. and other types of multimedia files can be accessed on the web. sound files. The advantage is that data does not need to be maintained in multiple locations (R/3 and the web server). a pricing schema determination procedure. The data that can be copied includes any text in the material master and any documents linked to the master record. the product catalog divides into shops. . data from the master record may be copied into the product catalog. which may themselves have subordinate product groups. together with products. because they cannot be displayed on the web. After a material has been linked to a product group. from the classification system. At the lowest level of the catalog structure. but small images are not displayed at this level. The rules that determine the data copied are defined by the product catalog type.NM Configuration Guide | Release 4. Products should not be linked to the catalog at this level. Z i}| ~ \zz
The product catalog structure is most often created manually. the structure. It is also possible to copy the catalog structure. material master records are linked to the product groups. and other data files to be accessed from the web.6C After the basic data is in place. On the first level. A document from the Document Management System (DMS) can be linked to a shop in the product catalog layout. The materials linked to the product group use the prices already maintained in the R/3 System. The document contains information that references images to be displayed. sound files to be played. is built. The shops are further divided by product groups. You can automate this process by copying materials into the catalog from a class in the classification system or from a material group. Documents are again used to reference the images and other files on the web server that should be displayed for each material master record. Documents can also be linked to the product groups. material master records can be manually assigned to the product catalog. When you assign a material to a product group. or layout. subordinate product groups can no longer be created. Once the catalog structure has been created. This example demonstrates how the location of these files is identified. choose Logistics → Materials Management → Product Catalog → Environment → Document Management → Document → Create). See chapter 3. The steps below describe how to create a document in the Document Management System. Any changes made to the material master after the data has been copied are not automatically reflected in the product catalog. Z||~ ~ i}| \zz
When the product catalog is ready for use. After the data has been copied. mz &UHDWH GRFXPHQWV IRU ILOHV WR GLVSOD\ D SURGXFW RU SURGXFW FDWDORJ VWUXFWXUH JG In the Command field. you need to perform the steps as described in the next sections. but are stored on the web server. The copy procedure is a one-time occurrence. and data files related to the products in the catalog. it is linked to an Online Store in configuration. enter transaction CV01N and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. . using the document type delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration. sound. manual changes can be made in the product catalog. Multiple Online Stores may be displayed on the web. Selecting an Online Store displays the product catalog structure and its materials. You can use the same product catalog as the base master data for several different Online Stores. or vice versa. “Creating the Online Store with the Catalog” on page 21. These files do not reside within R/3. fz~ ]zz kHL l ~ i}| \zz
To set up the master data in R/3 for supporting the product catalog. for details about the links between the product catalog and the Online Store profiles. You must: n n n Create documents in R/3 that reference image and data files Add data to the material master that can be copied automatically into the product catalog Create the product catalog master data within R/3 \~z~ ]|~ kHL z k~~~|~ bz~ z} ]zz _
~ Documents from the Document Management System (DMS) within R/3 are needed to display image and other files on the web in the product catalog.Chapter 4: Creating the Product Catalog NN The data copies to the product catalog when you assign the material master record to a product group. A document is used to reference the location and filename of the graphics. {G At the bottom of the screen.6C KG On the Create Document: Initial Screen: zG In Document. the system assigns a number. {G In Document type.NO Configuration Guide | Release 4. If you leave this field blank. |G In the Document part. Use to reach the next screen. enter 00.This description does not display on the Internet. you may enter a document ID. Enter a description to later help you locate the document. under the Originals group box. choose . ~G Choose . LG On the Create Document: Basic Data e-Shop Prod Catalog (Y01) screen: zG In Description. enter a brief description of the document. . g~ Zeros are used in steps c and d because this document type does not use status and version functionality. }G In Document version. enter Y01. enter 000. This data carrier points to the ITS WGate directory on the web server. SIM is a “small image” displayed in the product lists in the catalog. at the bottom of the screen choose . The new entry displays. provided the PC carrier type has been configured. select it and choose . LIM references a GIF or JPG graphic).Chapter 4: Creating the Product Catalog MG On the Create Document dialog box: NP zG In Applic. enter the filename you wish to reference on the web. |G In Original. by selecting the line and choosing . If you need to change the entry. }G Choose . g~ LIM is a “large image” displayed on the product detail screen. {G Choose . g~ The data carrier entry is case sensitive. Note that the actual image may be displayed. enter YESHOP. The entire filename. . OG On the Create Document dialog box: zG Follow the instructions in step 4 to complete the data. including the file extension. {G In Data carrier.. enter the application of the file (for example. NG Returning to the Create Document: Basic Data e-Shop Prod Catalog (Y01) screen. must be entered. the system uses the internal number range to assign the document number. while large images and other data files display on the product detail screen on the web. Another file is linked to the document.NQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. Since no document ID was specified at the beginning of this transaction. g~ Only two documents can be assigned to this document type. an additional document needs to be created to store the file links. QG The document ID number appears in the status bar. If additional files need to be linked to the same product or product group in the product catalog. Documents can also be created using the Data Transfer Workbench (transaction SXDA). . Small images display in the product list. this time a small graphic. choose . using object type 190.6C PG Returning to the Create Document: Basic Data e-Shop Prod Catalog (Y01) screen. the appropriate master data settings are delivered in the sample products created by the CATT procedure ZESHOP_PROD_CATALOG. If you implement the Online Store preconfiguration together with the Preconfigured Client in a fresh install. it must be manually added directly in the product catalog. “Introduction to ComputerAided Test Tools (CATTs)” on page 435 for details about the CATT procedure. . enter transaction MM02 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu.Chapter 4: Creating the Product Catalog NR Z}} ]zz fz~z
fz~ Zz| \ i}| \zz
This procedure is optional. enter the material number you wish to link to a product group in the product catalog. thus allowing for an easier product catalog setup. data copies from the material master records into the catalog. KG On the Change Material (Initial Screen): zG In Material. choose Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately). See appendix G. If the appropriate data is maintained in the material master. The material master records need to be updated to include the information that should be copied into the catalog. a one-time copy occurs to the product catalog when the material master is assigned. This section only discusses the data in the material master record that can be automatically copied into the product catalog. When you link the product to a product group in the catalog. mz &KDQJH WKH PDWHULDO PDVWHU WR LQFOXGH DOO GDWD JG In the Command field. {G Choose Select view(s). If this data is not maintained. . If you are not using the PCC. the material needs to be extended with these new views. substitute your own organizational structures.S. such as a new distribution channel for your Internet business. using the “create” functionality. If you choose to create new organizational structures.6C LG On the Select View(s) screen: zG Select the Basic Data 1 and Sales Text views. {G In Sales org. Channel. . zG In Plant. |G In Distr. enter the sales organization you are using for Internet orders. }G Choose . MG On the Organizational Levels dialog box: g~ These organizational structures are used with the Preconfigured Client (PCC) U.OI Configuration Guide | Release 4. enter the distribution channel you are using for Internet orders. enter the primary delivery plant of the material for Internet orders. {G Choose . choose the Documents data tab. number. The product catalog type determines whether or not this copying function occurs. . OG On the Document data tab: g~ These documents automatically copy into the product catalog when you link this product to the catalog layout. including the type.Chapter 4: Creating the Product Catalog NG On the Change Material <XXXXX> (Semifinished products) screen: zG Choose Additional data. zG Enter the documents that reference the image and data files on the web server. version. The complete document data. OJ {G On the revised screen. {G Choose Main data. and status. and for which document type. must be entered. PG Choose on the Change Material <XXXXX>(Semifinished products) screen. choose Logistics → Materials Management → Product Catalog → Product Catalog → Create).OK Configuration Guide | Release 4. If you implement the Online Store preconfiguration together with the Preconfigured Client in a fresh install. {G Choose . mz &UHDWH WKH SURGXFW FDWDORJ PDVWHU ZLWKLQ 5 JG In the Command field. See appendix G. for details about the CATT procedure. . enter the sales text. “Introduction to ComputerAided Test Tools (CATTs)” on page 435. enter transaction WWM1 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu.6C QG On the Sales text tab: The sales text should automatically copy into the product catalog when you link this product to the catalog structure. The product catalog type determines whether this copying function occurs and for which long text. a sample product catalog is delivered by running the CATT procedure ZESHOP_PROD_CATALOG. Some product catalog types may be configured to copy the basic data or purchase order text. \~z~ ~ i}| \zz
fz~ ]zz p kHL The product catalog master data needs to be created within R/3 before it can be displayed on the Internet. zG In the box on the lower portion of the screen. G Under Var. ~G In Display currency. Usually. |G Under Sales area. enter the appropriate information for the Sales org. g~ In step 3b. Only the data entered by the customer on the Internet is replaced. g~ In step 3f. in which case the text must be maintained in all languages available here. and Division you will use for your Internet business. enter the reference customer.. enter the catalog you wish to create. All sales orders created from the product catalog will be created using this sales area. products. the schema is treated as the document procedure for determining the pricing procedure. such as address data. Distr. |G Choose . }G Select Display prices. in Document schema. This selection does not affect whether prices are displayed on the Internet. The same catalog can have multiple variants. All customers. a new distribution channel is used only to differentiate Internet orders. The catalog type determines which texts and documents copy from the material master record when you link products to the catalog structure.chl. or one in the Online Store configuration. the data from this customer is copied to create the new customer. enter the currency in which you wish to display prices during product catalog maintenance within R/3. enter the product catalog type. g~ In step 3a. (variant). when a new Internet customer registers. {G In Ref. This selection does not affect the currency displayed on the Internet. g~ OL {G In Catalog type. In configuration. This checkbox allows you to see the prices for the products as you maintain the product catalog links within R/3. the variant defines the combination of the language and currency of the product catalog for display on the Internet. . LG On the Product Catalog: Create Basic Data screen: zG Under Data relevant to prices.. customer. you can determine whether this customer. The pricing procedure is used to find the prices displayed on the web while browsing the catalog. is used as a base for creating the new customer. enter the document schema. enter the variant number.Chapter 4: Creating the Product Catalog KG On the Create Product Catalog: Initial Screen: zG In Catalog. and prices need to be created for this sales area. into the product catalog. The Hier. MG On the Exit basic data processing dialog box.6C G Under L (language). with associated materials. enter the currency for the variant. (currency). NG On the Product Catalog: Maintain Layout screen: zG The highest layout level appears. G In Curr. Suggestion button may be used to manually copy a class from the classification system. . G Choose Layout. Select it with your cursor. {G Choose . enter the language for the variant. choose Yes to save the product catalog before continuing.OM Configuration Guide | Release 4. each area is numbered sequentially in the order it is created. or data file should be accessible from the web for this shop. At this level. or double-click on the Documents checkbox. The Layout number is unique to the entire product catalog.Link to Documents dialog box: zG In the Typ (type). . the layout is referred to as a “shop.Chapter 4: Creating the Product Catalog OG On the Product Catalog: Maintain Base Layout Area screen: zG In Area. ON {G If an image. enter the document number(s) you wish to link to the shop. sound. This description does not display on the Internet. In the standard system. enter a description. the document part (DPt) and document version (Vs) funtionality is not used and should contain zeros. g~ In the Online Store preconfiguration. |G Choose . within the layout. A new layout is created that is subordinate to the prior layout. enter document type Y01. {G Under Document.” The Area specifies the shops and product groups within the catalog layout. column. place your cursor on the description and choose Documents. PG On the Layout area . indicating that a document has been linked. indicating that text has been maintained. The Documents checkbox is now automatically selected. RG On the Product Catalog: Maintain Texts screen: zG Review the information on screen. {G Choose The short text. HTML tags (such as <br> for line breaks. All text wraps regardless of how it is entered in the Long txt field. Note that the text must be maintained in all languages for which variants are defined in the catalog’s basic data. . JIG On the Product Catalog: Maintain Base Layout Area screen. double-click on the Texts checkbox.6C QG On the Product Catalog: Maintain Base Layout Area screen. The Long txt appears on the shop’s overview screen on the web. The Texts checkbox is now selected.OO Configuration Guide | Release 4. or <font color> for highlighting certain text in a different color) must be used. choose . appears on the web as the short description. For formatting. . or Title. to maintain the text displayed on the web for this shop. the same steps should be taken to create text and link documents for this layout area: g~ Mat. material group. first place. . or layout module into the product catalog. OP JKG On the Create Layout Area dialog box: zG Choose whether to create a new: • • Shop – Select same place. {G Choose . zG In the Material column. {G Choose JLG On the Product Catalog: Maintain Base Layout Area screen. enter the material numbers of the products that should be linked to this product group. . suggestion can be used to manually copy materials from a class. below.Chapter 4: Creating the Product Catalog JJG On the Product Catalog: Maintain Layout screen: zG Select the newly created shop. Product group – Select lower level. Note that these changes do not affect the material master. and are displayed in the currency from the Basic data screen. These documents are copied from the material master. The checkbox in column D (Document) is automatically selected. future changes to the material master are not automatically reflected in the product catalog. select the product from the list and choose the Documents button. indicating that text is already maintained for the product. and any existing documents and texts are copied from the material master at this time. Also. The SD prices of the material are determined based on the pricing procedure found through the document schema of the basic data. choose . JMG On the Layout area items . |G To display the document. The text is copied from the material master. The assignment can now be manually changed within the product catalog. The prices of the materials are found. . or double-click on the checkbox under column T. based on the configuration of the product catalog type.6C {G Choose . The documents from the material master record have been copied. select a product and choose Texts. indicating that one or more documents are already linked to the product.OQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. The checkbox in column T (Text) is automatically selected. or double-click on the checkbox in column D. based on the configuration of the product catalog type. To display the text displayed on the web for this product.Link to Documents screen. JPG The product group displays. Using a manual process.Chapter 4: Creating the Product Catalog JNG On the Product Catalog: Maintain Texts screen. choose OR . Note that text changes at this stage do not affect the material master. along with the number of products linked to the layout area. as described in the previous section Using the product catalog data load provided with the Online Store preconfiguration Using the standard-delivered BAPIs for your data load (see the end of this chapter for details about data loads) Copying from the classification system for the product catalog structure and material assignments Copying from material groups for material assignments Copying from layout modules for material assignments n n n n Note that copying from promotions is only possible in an IS-Retail installation. JOG From the Product Catalog: Maintain Base Layout Area screen. The text from the material master record has been copied. choose You can create the product catalog by either: n n . Also. The text can now be manually changed within the product catalog. . future changes to the material master are not automatically reflected in the product catalog. choose . Number Range 01 02 From Number 00000000000000000001 00000000010000000000 To Number 00000000000000999999 00009999999999999999 External Indicator X (external) Blank (internal) \~ ~ ]|~ m~ n~} ~ i}| \zz
To support the product catalog. choose Cross-Application Components → Document Management next to Define document types. an internal sequential number is assigned. enter transaction OD00 and choose Enter (or in the IMG. see chapter 13. choose Cross-Application Components → Document Management System → next to Define document types). This step is preconfigured for you. No changes have been made to the R/3 standard-delivered number ranges. If you do not enter a document number. If you enter a number.6C \z l ~ i}| \zz
g~ For changes that we deliver for the look and feel of the product catalog functionality. System → Control Data and choose KG On the Change View “Define document types”: Overview screen.PI Configuration Guide | Release 4. mz &RQILJXUH WKH GRFXPHQW W\SH XVHG IRU WKH SURGXFW FDWDORJ JG In the IMG. In the Command field. “ITS Templates” on page 215. The table below Control Data and choose shows the number ranges to which the document type is assigned. . The configuration steps listed below for supporting the product catalog are described in detail in the following sections. and instructions on how to make changes to the ITS HTML Business templates. the document type used for the product catalog needs to be configured. the system checks to see whether it is in the correct number range. You must configure the: n n n n n n n Number ranges for the document type (standard-delivered) Document type used for the product catalog (preconfigured) Data carrier that locates the files on the web server (preconfigured) Workstation applications (preconfigured) Product catalog type (preconfigured) Link the product catalog master data to an Online Store Check the SAP Notes in the SAP Service Marketplace \~ ~ g{~ kz~ ~ ]|~ m~ The number ranges for the documents in the DMS (document management system) allow both internal and external ranges. Chapter 4: Creating the Product Catalog LG On the Change View “Define document types”: Details screen: PJ zG With the deselection of the Status change checkbox. the authorization group. For document type Y01. version management is turned off. checkbox. the following descriptions have been defined: Language DE EN Description e-Shop Layoutdoku e-Shop Prod Catalog ~G In the navigation menu. }G In the navigation menu. {G With the deselection of the Version assign. . and the two workstation (WS) applications are optional. The document type delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration is shown on this screen. The most critical configuration settings are described. status management is turned off. the system assigns one automatically. For the field selection. choose Define language-dependent descriptions. The user creating the document. the class data will display. All other fields will be suppressed. If the user does not enter a document number. choose Define object links. the following links are allowed: Object MARA TWGLV TWML WLBM Object Description Material master Layout area Layout module Layout area item Screen Number 201 229 230 228 All other options for the object links are blank. |G An internal and external number range is assigned. For document type Y01. or not activated. Field Frontend Computer Data carrier type Network address Description Value Default PC DEFAULT Default for local PC . LG Double-click the node Define data carrier type “server. front end. Data Carrier YESHOP Carrier Type WS . and double-click on the node Define servers and files or folders.6C \~ ~ ]zz \z~ z e|z~ _
~ ~ p~{ l~~ To support the product catalog. choose . KG On the Information dialog box. This step is preconfigured for you. Description Data carrier for e-commerce NG Choose OG Select carrier type PC. The data carrier is case-sensitive. PG Choose . Two data carriers have been preconfigured: n n WS – Defines the web server directory on which the image and data files are located PC – Allows the image and data files from the web server to be accessed from within the R/3 document in the Document Management System (DMS) mz &RQILJXUH WKH GDWD FDUULHU WR ORFDWH ILOHV RQ WKH ZHE VHUYHU JG Use the following path in the IMG: Cross-Application Components – Document next to Define data Management System → General Data and choose carrier.” Carrier Type PC WS Description PC workstation Webserver Path c:\ MG Select carrier type WS. the data carrier that locates the files on the web server must be configured.PK Configuration Guide | Release 4. and double-click on the node Identify frontend computers. and double-click on the node Define workstation application in network. “Creating the Online Store with the Catalog” on page 21). Data Carrier YESHOP YESHOP Carrier Type PC WS Path j:/y_images/ /sap/its/y_images/ The ITS configuration automatically finds the path for data carrier WS. KG Select LIM. This step is preconfigured for you. since WS is designed as the appropriate data carrier in the Online Store configuration (see chapter 3. mz &RQILJXUH ZRUNVWDWLRQ DSSOLFDWLRQV JG In the IMG. The path for data carrier PC only locates the files on the web server if a mapping has been made to the web server using the local Microsoft Windows® or Microsoft Windows NT® Explorer. This configuration is not required for the appropriate files to be accessed on the web server. PDF. the workstation applications must be configured. provided a network link to the web server exists. PC allows for the multimedia files to be displayed during the creation of a document in R/3. Data Carrier Type PC PC PC PC PC PC Application LIM LIM LIM SIM SIM SIM Description Large Image Large Image Large Image Small Image Small Image Small Image Application Type 1 (display) 2 (change) 3 (print) 1 (display) 2 (change) 3 (print) Application Path %auto% %auto% %auto% %auto% %auto% %auto% . choose Cross-Application Components – Document Management System → General Data and choose next to Define workstation application. Linking the workstation applications to the PC data carrier allows you to display the graphics you plan to use in the product catalog while creating each document.Chapter 4: Creating the Product Catalog PL QG Double-click on the node Define mount points/logical drive. and SND. The settings under this option define the directory of the location of the ITS WGate on the web server. This configuration is not required for the appropriate files to be accessed on the web server. \~ ~ pz Z
|z To support the product catalog. SIM. . and are therefore not discussed here. SIM.O. Note that LIM. This step is preconfigured for you. Field Copy heading Copy long text Adoption of document links at creation YPCB On 4 (copy PO text) Document type Y01 YPCC On 2 (copy SD text) Document type Y01 The other settings in this table are only relevant to IS-Retail installations. The product catalog type determines which fields are populated automatically in the catalog when you link the products to the catalog layout. These fields include the P. \~ ~ i}| \zz
m~ To support the product catalog. additional settings can be configured by doubleclicking on Adoption of Document Links at Creation. Two product catalog types are preconfigured for the following scenarios: n n YPCB – Selling to business partners YPCC – Selling to consumers mz &RQILJXUH WKH SURGXFW FDWDORJ W\SH JG In the IMG. no other changes have been made to the standard-delivered workstation applications. KG Configure the basic parameters for the node Maintain Product Catalog. For each product catalog type.PM Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C Data Carrier Type PC PC PC PC PC PC Application PDF PDF PDF SND SND SND Description Acrobat Reader Acrobat Reader Acrobat Reader Sound Sound Sound Application Type 1 (display) 2 (change) 3 (print) 1 (display) 2 (change) 3 (print) Application Path %auto% %auto% %auto% %auto% %auto% %auto% The image files are defined for JPG and GIF images only. and SND have been translated in the Online Store preconfiguration. number determination. the product catalog type must be configured. choose Logistics – General → Product Catalog Basic Data and choose next to Maintain Product Catalog Type. promotions. and generic articles. Other than the link to the PC data carrier. you need to consider data load in the following areas. you also need to extend your customer and material master data. such as a new distribution channel. for details about this configuration. SAP Notes. even if the shopping basket functionality will not be used on the Internet.Chapter 4: Creating the Product Catalog PN e ~ i}| \zz
fz~ ]zz z h
~ l~ The product catalog must be linked to an Online Store in configuration to be visible on the Internet. See appendix A. Materials Management (MM). Use the following path in the IMG to view the configuration of the Online Stores: Logistics .General → IAC Product Catalog and Online Store and choose next to Online Stores. \~| ~ lZi g~ Information from SAP Notes is also essential to the configuration. “Creating the Online Store with the Catalog” on page 21. you need to consider a data load for document management before the product catalog can be created. . This is true. “SAP Notes in the SAP Service Marketplace” on page 387 for informational notes related to this chapter. ]zz ez} ~ i}| \zz
i~~~ The product catalog data load assumes that all necessary master data has already been created. formerly OSS Notes and SAPNet – R/3 Frontend Notes. See chapter 3. all of which are handled in the Data Transfer Workbench: n n n n Material master Customer master Material prices Document Management System If you are already live with your system using Financial Accounting (FI). can be found on the SAP Service Marketplace. and are using the Online Store preconfiguration as an add-on. as well as your prices. If you choose a different organizational area within SD. If you have not yet implemented the SAP R/3 System. and Sales and Distribution (SD). LG On the main Data Transfer Workbench screen: zG Under Application server.PO Configuration Guide | Release 4. mz 8VH WKH GDWD ORDG SURJUDP WR GLUHFWO\ FUHDWH WKH SURGXFW FDWDORJ WDEOHV JG In the Command field. This load program directly updates the product catalog tables and is therefore much faster than other techniques. This program should be used as a one-time load of the catalog. BAPIs in the standard delivery of the R/3 System. enter transaction SXDA_OLD and choose Enter to start the Data Transfer Workbench. this load program performs minimal validations and expects that the data input file provided is accurate.The program documentation describes the technical details. as object number 0320.6C The data load can be accomplished in two ways. {G Choose |G Choose . in Phys file name. ]zz ez} iz The product catalog load program has been integrated in the Data Transfer Workbench. with either: n n A data load program provided by the Online Store preconfiguration package. . However. enter a filename. KG On the next screen: zG In Data transfer object. enter the product catalog number 0320. such as the structure of the input file. . {G Choose . This method should be used if ALE and IDoc scenarios will be implemented. . choose twice. Use either third-party tools or the LSMW workbench. The details of the structures and format of the data to be provided is documented in program documentation of ABAP report YPCC_PRODCAT_DILOAD. in which the product catalog data has to be provided.Chapter 4: Creating the Product Catalog MG On the File: _Transactions screen. downloadable from the SAPNet. NG After reviewing the structures on the Generic structure editor screen. choose PP . to convert your product catalog into the input file format required by the load program. we recommend you use the load program. The corresponding IDoc is PCHEAD. Items information – SaveItemsReplica creates the items in the product catalog with the long text. the product catalog in the target system is first deleted and then the new product catalog—based on the input file—is created. To make use of BAPIs directly or through ALE scenarios. or if you want to integrate third-party search engines such as Alta Vista. enter that name in Phys file name under Application server.com/dx. For details about the Data Transfer Workbench.6x. Please note that the documents are linked with this BAPI and therefore have to be a separate task. You can find out more information at www. However. {G Choose . The corresponding IDoc is PCITEMS. Look up the methods supported by the “DRAW” object.saplabs. The whole process takes two steps—first for the basic data and the structure. The two provided BAPIs create the product catalog: n n Header information – SaveHeadReplica creates the basic data and structure of the product catalog. Reenter and choose to load. and second for the items. BAPIs and ALE scenarios have been provided that can also be used for data load of the product catalog. Please note that the product catalog load program supports “create mode” only.PQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. . If the target system has a product catalog with the same name as the input file. see the Data Transfer Made Easy Guidebook. you need to convert the legacy data in the IDoc formats.6C OG On the Data Transfer Workbench screen: zG After creating the input file. PG On the ProdCat: Load program using Direct Input screen. It is much easier to complete in fewer steps. the system asks you to confirm the filename. [Zib ]zz ez} If you need to create the product catalog only once. you should consider ALE scenarios if you need to exchange the product catalog with other systems. As of R/3 Release 4. & + $ 3 7 ( 5 P i|~ ~ i}| \zz
. The prices displayed on the Internet use the normal pricing functionality within the R/3 System. the customer can look at descriptions of the features and the currently valid prices for each product.QI Configuration Guide | Release 4. The price of each product displayed in the catalog may be a standard price or a current sales price. since this method of advertising and selling a product frees up customer service representatives and reduces the transactional cost of placing orders. we provide the following deliverables: n n n n n n Preconfiguration of pricing procedures that work with the Internet Instructions on how to change your pricing procedures (for existing installations) Incoterms and sample rates for the freight calculation Preconfiguration of the ITS look and feel and the service file parameter to incorporate pricing structures Modifications to the R/3 System and ITS templates to support the selection of a shipping method in the Online Store Documentation on the pricing functionality of the product catalog . Each company has the choice of using either the same pricing valid for all orders. or special discounted prices for Internet sales. It may be advantageous to offer discounts on products if customers purchase them through the web.6C h~~ While browsing the product catalog on the web. pz p~ ]~
~ In the Online Store preconfiguration. The first product is currently on sale. as indicated by the Special Offer icon. display. The taxes may be calculated using R/3 or an external tax package. the complete price breakdown. the prices display on the Internet. This discount is not displayed while scrolling the product catalog. . including sales prices. If the customer decides to order the product. An additional discount being applied to the order also displays. Freight is calculated based on the chosen shipping method (Incoterms) and the weight of the products. The reduction represents a discount specific to the customer or to all customers as a special promotion. A list of the 4. including freight and taxes.5x Made Easy Guidebooks product group displays.Chapter 5: Prices in the Product Catalog QJ i|~ ~ i}| \zz
While browsing the product catalog. The screen displays the price of the ordered products. These values are the same ones calculated for the sales order created in R/3. The price reduction is not a customerspecific price or a sale price. all price conditions for the items are summarized. . not by line item. and tax values display for the entire order. The Total Tax (subtotal 5) and Total (subtotal 6) are calculated to be the same as the values on the Internet. The Tax value corresponds to the Tax line on the Internet. so that these values can be captured by SIS in the preconfiguration. The header pricing information in a sales order has been created through the Online Store.6C m~ o~ b}~ \z g~ The same prices that display on the Internet are viewable from inside your company as pricing elements in R/3. The discount. The prices displayed on the Internet are the same prices saved in the R/3 order.QK Configuration Guide | Release 4. subtotal 3 is configured to display the discounts on the Internet. In the pricing procedure. This information corresponds to the total amounts displayed on the Internet. These values from the web are added together based on the value of the line items. freight. Subtotal 4 is configured to display the freight. At the header level. The total displayed on the Internet is calculated by adding the Net and Tax values. The Net value corresponds to the Total without tax line on the Internet. displays. The normal price.Chapter 5: Prices in the Product Catalog QL The item pricing data shows the pricing elements per sales order item. is the price used for further calculations. subtotal 2 is entered for this condition type. The sales price. This price is designated as the normal price because in the pricing procedure. The Incoterms of the sales order that are copied from the customer master may be overwritten by choosing the shipping method from the Online Store. This price represents the sales price. These Incoterms help calculate the freight charges and are copied from the header level to each item of the sales order. The freight calculates based on the Incoterms copied from the header to each line item. The rate created for each Incoterm is per unit of weight of the product. The Incoterms within the sales order correspond to the shipping type on the Internet. represented by condition type VKP0. In the pricing procedure. It overrides the normal price. represented by condition type PR00. subtotal 1 is entered for this condition type. . The second pricing procedure is based on the document schema in the sales order type. the pricing procedure is determined in the following situations: n When a customer browses the product catalog and prices are displayed This option includes all browsing and the display of the final list of products before the customer begins the quotation process. so the catalog can be displayed on the web. The following sections provide a high-level overview of changes you should make to allow for effective use of these prices in your business on the Internet. freight. or tax calculations for performance reasons. the quotation and order profile contains the order type used to create any customer order.S. This chapter is not intended to be a thorough discussion of how SD pricing should be configured in your system. freight. Different document schemas are used.6C fz b az~S i| ~ i}| \zz
Implementation of the Online Store preconfiguration depends upon either prior installation of the Preconfigured Client (PCC) U. In the basic data of the product catalog. This pricing procedure determines the prices displayed for a customer on the Internet. . The pricing procedure in the product catalog is leaner. a document schema is entered that determines the pricing procedure for the product catalog.QM Configuration Guide | Release 4. and no discounts. The product catalog is linked to an Online Store in configuration. or previous implementation of a working Sales and Distribution (SD) configuration. the pricing procedure that displays the product prices should be as lean as possible for performance reasons. Within the Online Store. The same pricing logic used for sales orders input manually into R/3 is also used for pricing on the web. The first pricing procedure is based on the document schema in the product catalog.. The two options in configuring this scenario are as follows: n n Both the product catalog and the sales order type used for the orders determine the same pricing procedure. n When the customer simulates an order and later saves it during checkout Before the simulation and creation of the order. or tax calculation only displays during quotation and ordering during checkout. ]~~~ ~ i| i|~}~ While in the Online Store. containing only prices and sales prices. The information on discounts. unless you set up the product catalog for an early logon. contains its own document schema for pricing. In the standard system. in turn. \~Fl~|| ]| Product Catalog Logged On? No Yes Reference Customer Logged on Customer Some pricing conditions rely on the use of a customer master record. such as customer-specific prices.Chapter 5: Prices in the Product Catalog QN The order type. If a different pricing procedure is used. These customer-specific prices are the base prices created for an individual customer. Pricing Procedure A Product Catalog Basic Data Document Schema Pricing Procedure B Online Store Quote/Order Profile Sales Order Type Document Schema Pricing Procedure C Based on the document schemas used in the product catalog and sales order type. the prices could be different in the order than those displayed in the product catalog. make sure the resulting prices and sales prices are the same during browsing and checkout. After the customer chooses to display the quotation. Such inconsistencies could cause customers to avoid placing orders in the future. If a product catalog is set up for a late logon. In this case. If the schema used in the product catalog is not the same one used to create the sales order. the customer about to place the order is used for . This reference customer is the customer entered in the Online Store in configuration. In this case. either the same pricing procedure may be determined or a different one. The document type’s schema determines the pricing procedure used to calculate the prices for the sales order. the reference customer in the product catalog is used. If no customer is maintained there. the reference customer is used for all price determination until the order quotation is reached. the detailed price breakdown displayed includes all customerspecific pricing. the reference customer is used for all price determinations. a customer may browse the products before logging on. 6C the price determination. A company must make several decisions in determining the freight pricing. For early logon scenarios. especially if a weight-based method is chosen: n Material master records must contain the accurate weight of the product. if there is little difference in the weight of the different items available in the product catalog. because the Internet customer expects that the same amount displayed on the Internet will be charged to the credit card used for the purchase. However. If you estimate freight accurately. This option may not be possible if the weight difference between the products. the freight charged to the customer will not be accurate. n For the accurate estimation of freight to take place. Also. This means that if customer-specific prices exist. if a customer shopping for a commodity item searches for the lowest price without taking the freight into account. However. the following data must be correctly maintained. The standard pricing condition used for the Incoterms is based on the weight of the material. such as customer-specific discounts. cover too large a spread. a customer may pay a little more than the actual freight cost. such as: n Should the freight calculation be based on the value of the product ordered or on the weight? Most freight carriers charge by weight. the prices are already displayed in the product catalog. Essentially. Additional discounts applied to the order. Customer confidence increases if the freight charges are close to the perceived freight value. especially if the type of packaging necessary to deliver the product safely is not taken into account. This inaccuracy may result in a company paying more than expected on freight. These discounts are typically valid for a shorter term than a customer-specific price. adjustments to this value should not be made after the customer has agreed to the prices by placing the order. By estimation. a value-based method could be used. the value of the write-offs will be reduced. However. in relation to their prices. only display after the customer requests a quotation on the web. “Free” shipping has been used in advertising in many Internet stores. The exact freight carrier charge may not be available at that time. the sale may still be lost. If the gross and net weights of the material are not maintained accurately. the logged-in customer is used for pricing. The difference between the freight charged on a sales order and the actual payment made to the freight carrier is usually written off. _~ \z
|
z Freight is calculated when the sales order is created.QO Configuration Guide | Release 4. Should the base prices of the products be raised with no extra charges for shipping. but may also pay a little less the next time an order is placed. the freight must be estimated as accurately as possible. the additional discount may be based on the total value of the order so that it does not apply to a specific product. . as indicated in the customer master and material master records. Default Incoterms for the reference customer in the product catalog must have been maintained.Chapter 5: Prices in the Product Catalog n QP Condition records must be maintained with the most current rates.S. The logic behind this process is unique to each company and their tax status. keep in mind that the master record of the reference customer is copied to all Internet customers who register on the web. based on the ship-to information of the order. the customer master record must be set to taxable. Rates for the Incoterms for the freight calculation (preconfigured) must exist. based on which software is used for tax calculations. mz \z
|
z If an external tax package is used. fz~ ]zz l~ i| The following master data must exist in your system to support the pricing described in the initial scenario in this chapter. not within R/3. Keep in mind that rates change regularly. The prices for the products must be created as master data in the system. If taxes are to be collected appropriately. The taxes may be calculated with the logic within R/3. n n n i|~ z} ]| r i}| A prerequisite of the Online Store preconfiguration is either the Preconfigured Client (PCC) U. The pricing procedure is configured differently. A product being purchased is taxed if both the customer and product are taxable. is configured within these packages. n Appropriate prices and discounts for your products (preconfigured with the PCC or assumed to exist within your current implementation) must exist. . or by an external tax package such as Taxware or Vertex. or a working SD configuration has already been implemented. You need the most up-to-date prices to calculate the freight correctly in the sales order. a user exit must determine which customers registering on the web are truly taxable. is being implemented at the same time. If you can use an internal R/3 calculation. The rules about which customers are truly taxable. Keep in mind that customers may not log on to the Online Store until the end of the ordering process. Basic data in the product catalog with the correct document pricing schema must exist. It may be possible to write an interface with the freight carrier’s system to facilitate this integration. and that some product catalogs on your web site may not have ordering capability and would not require a customer to log on. chl. a sample product catalog is created that contains the settings shown below. In Distr. . you need to create your product catalog manually. for order creation. for details on the product catalog. g~ n n n The sales area used for the price determination and. In Sales org. [z| ]zz i}| \zz
\~| ]|~ i| l|~z The document schema is entered into the product catalog basic data. The only exception is if an early logon is configured.6C Unless you configure an early logon in the Online Store. is also entered in this screen.. In this case.QQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. If you use the Online Store preconfiguration in conjunction with the PCC. the distribution channel used in the Online Store preconfiguration is 11. This indicator does not affect whether prices display on the Internet. the division used in the Online Store preconfiguration is 10. the sales organization used in the Online Store preconfiguration is 0010. This field does not determine the currency displayed on the Internet. The Display crrncy (currency) determines the currency in which prices display while maintaining the product catalog. The Display prices indicator determines whether prices are displayed in R/3 while maintaining the product catalog. See chapter 4. your prices should be based on the materials linked to the product catalog. Turning this indicator off would increase performance of product catalog maintenance. n The Document schema used in the Online Store preconfiguration is X. ultimately. The Var (variant) contains the language and currency combination in which prices display on the Internet. The variant linked to an Online Store in configuration determines the currency displayed on the web. “Creating the Product Catalog” on page 43. not on customer-specific prices. Tips & Tricks If you use the Online Store preconfiguration as an add-on. In Division. customer-specific prices already display in the product catalog. also contain these Incoterms. ]~z
b|~ ~ i}| \zz
@ k~~~|~ \~ The default Incoterms that most customers choose should be maintained in the reference customer. since many companies have individual agreements with the freight carriers they choose for the majority of their business. Refer to the installation guide for more information on how to create condition records and Incoterms. “Introduction to Computer-Aided Test Tools (CATTs)” on page 435. therefore. for details about the CATT procedure. This choice is an add-on provided by the Online Store preconfiguration. see the Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide. For further information on how to change the default Incoterms for the reference customer.Chapter 5: Prices in the Product Catalog QR kz~ ~ b|~ ~ _~ \z
|
z Incoterms have been preconfigured and are created by a CATT during installation. See the configuration section below for details. Because the reference customer is copied each time a customer from the Internet registers. The Incoterms with the Online Store preconfiguration do not reflect different freight carriers. . All Internet customers. The Online Store installation assigns the reference customer to the sample product catalog. unless the customer chooses a different shipping method. See appendix G. These Incoterms copy into the sales order created on the Internet. the Incoterms corresponding to the customer’s most commonly required shipping method should default into this customer master record. The Incoterms are then copied into each newly registered customer master record. l{z
i| i|~}~ p b~~ i~|z A prerequisite of the Online Store preconfiguration is either the Preconfigured Client U. If you are not using the PCC. . The ITS templates must contain the code to support the Incoterm’s modification.RI Configuration Guide | Release 4. Pricing procedure determination for the product catalog and Internet order type (preconfigured) must be defined. Incoterms to be used for freight (preconfigured) must be created. These subtotals may be entered for individual condition types or for subtotal lines.S. three pricing procedures are delivered that already contain the appropriate subtotals for pricing and the SAPscript forms used to print the receipt and e-mail confirmation messages. Within the Online Store preconfiguration. or a working SD module has already been implemented. when used in conjunction with the PCC. The ITS templates must contain the code to support the pricing breakdown (preconfigured). these pricing procedures are used with document pricing procedure X and sales area 0010-11-10. (PCC) is being implemented at the same time. Supporting configuration for the pricing procedures (preconfigured) must be created. the subtotals below must be used in order to display the correct prices within the product catalog and price breakdowns during the quotation and order confirmation processes. If implementing the PCC.6C i| \z The steps involved in setting up pricing for the product catalog and the orders created using the Online Store include: n n n n n n n The subtotals in the pricing procedures to work with the Internet preconfiguration (preconfigured) must be defined. The code to allow Incoterms to be chosen from the Internet (Online Store preconfiguration add-on) must be created. if no sale price exists 2 Display of sale price in the product catalog Display of sale price in the order quotation for a line item 3 Display of customer discounts in the order quotation (These discounts are offered to customers in addition to any customer-specific prices and sale prices) 4 5 6 In the order quotation and price breakdown on the Internet. 0 Accruals Counter From To . Subtotal 1 Use Display of gross price in the product catalog Display of gross price in the order quotation for a line item. “Sales Activity Reports” on page 327 for details on reporting. Display of freight based on the weight of the product in the order quotation Total taxes Total value The Online Store transaction logic for browsing the product catalog requires subtotals 1 and 2.Jurisd. All subtotals are used to update the preconfigured Sales Information System (SIS) structures. CondBase Val Condition Type Manual Mandatory Statistical Print Subtotal Requirements Alt. price grp. See chapter 22. Pricing Procedure ZWAJUS ZWAXUS ZWASUD Description e-Shop www US w/ Jurisdiction e-Shop www US w/extern.Jurisd. e-Shop www USextern. Subtotals 3 and 4 are configured for the Online Store preconfiguration for this purpose. the ITS templates must also be changed. the logic now allows the discounts and freight to be broken out separately from the item totals. If these subtotals are changed. type Step Number Account Key ERL ERS ERS ERS ERS ERS ERS Description 11 12 100 101 102 104 105 106 108 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PR00 VKP0 KA00 K032 K007 K004 ZDP1 K030 Price Sales Price Gross Value Sales deal Price Group/Material Customer Discount Material Discount Mat.NEW i| i|~}~ spZcnlG This pricing procedure is applied when R/3 is used for the tax calculation.Grp. The following three pricing procedures are delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration.Pr. These subtotals also allow the Special Offers icon to display.Chapter 5: Prices in the Product Catalog RJ . in % 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X X X X X X X X X X 1 2 2 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Customer/Mat. calc. Alt. type Step Number Account Key ERL ERS ERS ERS ERS ERS ERS ERS ERS ERL Description 11 12 100 101 102 104 105 106 108 111 112 300 320 800 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PR00 VKP0 KA00 K032 K007 K004 ZDP1 K030 HI01 HI02 PMIN Price Sales Price Gross Value Sales deal Price Group/Material Customer Discount Material Discount Mat. in % Hierarchy Hierarchy/Material Total Discount Minimum Price Net Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 299 0 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X S X S 1 2 2 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Customer/Mat.Grp. type Step Number Account Key ERS ERS ERL ERF ERS Description 111 112 300 320 800 815 880 890 900 910 911 912 913 914 915 919 920 921 940 950 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HI01 HI02 PMIN KF00 SKTV UTXJ JR1 JR2 JR3 JR4 DIFF Hierarchy Hierarchy/Material Total Discount Minimum Price Net Value Freight Total Freight Cash Discount Net Value 2 Tax Jurisdict. CondBase Val Condition Type Manual Mandatory Statistical Print Subtotal Requirements Alt. calc. calc. price grp. Code Tax Jur Code Level 1 Tax Jur Code Level 2 Tax Jur Code Level 3 Tax Jur Code Level 4 Rounding Off Total Tax Total Total 0 0 101 0 0 0 812 0 800 900 900 900 900 900 0 910 0 0 0 0 0 0 299 0 0 0 816 0 812 0 0 0 0 0 0 916 0 0 0 0 X X X X X X X X X S X S S 4 3 2 2 0 2 0 0 0 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 301 302 303 304 16 0 4 4 0 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 16 16 16 4 0 0 0 0 0 S 5 6 A B 0 0 0 4 0 VPRS Cost Profit Margin (Net minus cost) i| i|~}~ spZqnlG This pricing procedure is applied when an external tax package is used for the tax calculation. This procedure is used with an older calculation method. CondBase Val Condition Type Manual Mandatory Statistical Print Subtotal Requirements Alt.RK Configuration Guide | Release 4. 0 3 0 2 0 Accruals Counter From To Accruals Counter From To . Alt.Pr.6C Alt. calc. CondBase Val Condition Type Manual Mandatory Statistical Print Subtotal Requirements Alt. The tax condition types need to be configured appropriately. price grp.S. CondBase Val Condition Type Manual Mandatory Statistical Print Subtotal Requirements Alt. at www. in % Hierarchy Hierarchy/Material Total Discount Minimum Price Net Value Freight Total Freight Cash Discount Net Value 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 101 0 0 0 812 0 800 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 299 0 0 0 816 0 812 X X X X X X X X X X X X S X S S X 1 2 2 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Customer/Mat.com/pcc for details on available preconfiguration for these tax packages.Chapter 5: Prices in the Product Catalog RL Alt. type Step Number Account Key ERL ERS ERS ERS ERS ERS ERS ERS ERS ERL ERF Description The taxes can be configured using either the R/3 logic or an external tax package. calc.saplabs. type Step Number Account Key ERF ERS Description 815 880 890 900 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 919 920 921 940 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 KF00 SKTV UTXJ XR1 XR2 XR3 XR4 XR5 XR6 DIFF Freight Total Freight Cash Discount Net Value 2 Tax Jurisdict. such as Taxware or Vertex. This procedure is used with the newest calculation method. i| i|~}~ spZqn]G This pricing procedure is applied when an external tax package is used for the tax calculation. 0 3 0 2 0 0 4 0 14 0 Accruals Counter From To Accruals Counter From To . See the PCC U. Code Tax Jur Code Level 1 Tax Jur Code Level 2 Tax Jur Code Level 3 Tax Jur Code Level 4 Tax Jur Code Level 5 Tax Jur Code Level 6 Rounding Off Total Tax Total Total 0 812 0 800 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 0 910 0 0 0 0 816 0 812 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 916 0 0 0 X X X X X X X X S 5 6 A B X S 4 0 0 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 301 302 303 304 305 306 0 0 0 0 0 16 16 16 16 16 16 4 0 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 4 16 0 4 4 0 VPRS Cost Alt.Pr.Grp. 11 12 100 101 102 104 105 106 108 111 112 300 320 800 815 880 890 900 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PR00 VKP0 KA00 K032 K007 K004 ZDP1 K030 HI01 HI02 PMIN KF00 SKTV Price Sales Price Gross Value Sales deal Price Group/Material Customer Discount Material Discount Mat. a new condition type has been created that supports a percentage discount on products. CondBase Val Condition Type Manual Mandatory Statistical Print Subtotal Requirements Alt.6C Alt. based on the material pricing group in the material master record. select Maintain Pricing Procedures and choose Choose). These materials are grouped using the material pricing group field that is maintained in the Sales: Sales org. create. and check the pricing procedures by entering transaction V/08 in the Command field and choosing Enter (or in the IMG. type Step Number Account Key ERS Description 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 920 921 922 940 950 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 UTXD UTXE XR1 XR2 XR3 XR4 XR5 XR6 DIFF US Tax per document US Tax per document Tax Jur Code Level 1 Tax Jur Code Level 2 Tax Jur Code Level 3 Tax Jur Code Level 4 Tax Jur Code Level 5 Tax Jur Code Level 6 Rounding Off Total Tax Total Total 0 0 900 900 900 900 900 900 0 910 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 916 0 0 0 0 X X X X X X X X X 0 0 0 0 0 0 500 510 301 302 303 304 305 306 0 0 16 16 16 16 16 16 4 0 0 0 0 0 13 S 5 6 A X B 0 0 0 4 0 16 0 4 4 0 11 VPRS Cost Profit margin (Net minus cost) Tips & Tricks You can change. enter transaction OVSJ in the Command field and choose Enter (or in the IMG. select Define Material Groups and choose Choose). l \z i| i|~}~ To create the material pricing group. Material Pricing Group 10 Description e-Shop materials A condition type has been created using the material pricing group that allows you to enter a percentage discount. On the Choose Activity dialog box. The material pricing group allows a discount to be created for a group of materials. The configuration of condition type ZDP1 is documented below. To support the pricing procedures delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration. choose Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Pricing → Pricing Control and choose next to Define And Assign Pricing Procedures. On the Choose Activity dialog box. These steps have been preconfigured for you. choose Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Pricing and choose next to Maintain PriceRelevant Master Data Fields. calc. Accruals Counter From To . 2 view of the material master record.RM Configuration Guide | Release 4. Condition class Calculation type Plus/minus Scale basis Header condition Item condition Delete Amount/percent Value Quantity relation Calculation type Setting A (discount or surcharge) A (percentage) X (negative) B (value scale) Off On On On Off Off Off i| i|~}~ ]~~z i}| \zz
z} b~~ h}~ m~ To view the assignment of the pricing procedure for the Internet. select Maintain Condition Types and choose Choose). choose Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Pricing → Pricing next to Control and choose Define and Assign Pricing Procedures.Chapter 5: Prices in the Product Catalog RN Field To create the condition type. the quotation and order profile contains the order type. . in turn. enter transaction OVKK in the Command field and choose Enter (or in the IMG. The document procedure for determining the pricing procedure used for both the Online Store and Internet order type is X. Both the product catalog and the order type used for the Internet contain a document schema for the pricing procedure determination. During the installation process a CATT checks whether an external tax system is connected to the R/3. On the Choose Activity dialog box. This document schema should be the same schema used for the basic data of the product catalog. choose Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Pricing → Pricing Control and choose next to Define condition types. The Online Store is accessible from the Internet. select Define Pricing Procedure Determination and choose Choose). During the configuration of the Online Store. The order type. The product catalog is master data that is linked in configuration to an Online Store. On the Choose Activity dialog box. assigns the appropriate preconfigured pricing procedure. contains the document schema for pricing determination. Sales Organization 0010 Distribution Channel 11 Division Document Procedure 10 X Customer Procedure 1 Pricing Procedure ZWAJUS or ZWAXUS or ZWAXUD The proposed condition type column is blank. and depending on this input. enter transaction V/06 in the Command field and choose Enter (or in the IMG. The template files in the AGate directory structure of the ITS have been modified to allow customers to display a price breakdown.HTML SAPMWWMJ_4235. the language-resource file has been changed so variables can be added for the new pricing descriptions.HTML WW20_EN. The condition records are currently only based on the first part of the Incoterms listed above. Your ITS templates must contain the code to support pricing breakdown. This step has been preconfigured for you. changes need to be made in the ITS templates. the Incoterms to be used for freight must be created. where the <its_root> is your virtual ITS installation and sg is the theme delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration. see chapter 13.HTRC Change Display the discounts and freight totals Display the discounts and freight totals Variables for descriptions of the new prices The following changes have been made in templates SAPMWWMJ_4230.HTML and SAPMWWMJ_4230. The second portion of the Incoterms is not filled while ordering from the Internet.HTML as the line items and total of the items in the basket are built. The template files are located in the ITS AGate directory under the directory structure <its_root>\templates\ww20\sg. n n The price displayed for each product. g~ For more information about ITS templates. A line that contains discounts applied during ordering. choose Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partners → Customers → Billing Document and choose next to Define Incoterms). The second part is a free-form text field.6C b|~ {~ n~} _~ To view the Incoterms created for freight. In addition. enter transaction OVSG in the Command field and choose Enter (or in the IMG. which is only displayed when the value is not zero has been added. “ITS Templates” on page 215. has been changed. from the net price to the gross price. These Incoterms are used as a key when creating freight rates for the condition type KF00. The following files are modified to support the display of price breakdown: Template SAPMWWMJ_4230. To set up the pricing configuration for the freight calculation. .RO Configuration Guide | Release 4. Incoterms Y2D YOV YST Descriptions 2-Day Delivery Overnight Delivery Standard Delivery Location Mandatory Location Mandatory means that the second part of the Incoterms is required when these Incoterms are used. bml m~
z~ f l ~ i| [~z} For discounts and freight price breakdowns to be visible on the Internet. This step has been preconfigured for you. MWWMJF03_ORDER_CREATE MWWMJF03_QUOTATION_CREATE MWWMJF03_TRANSPORT_ITEMS_OUT MWWMJTOP MWWMJF03_USER_COMMAND_4000 o~ ~ bml m~
z~ \z \}~ l b|~ f}|z For Incoterm modification to be usable on the Internet. our modification allows Internet customers to choose the freight they prefer for their orders. In order to view these programs you can enter transaction SE38 in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. ppKIx^gGamk\ The file ww20_en. they are modifications to the R/3 System. The following programs must be changed to incorporate the Incoterms functionality into your Online Store. The detailed code is documented in the Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide delivered with the preconfiguration transports.htrc (located under the directory structure <its_root>\templates\ww20\sg) is the language-resource file that contains values for the language-specific variables used for the IACs. After saving your modifications. which only displays when the value is not zero. . changes need to be made in the ITS templates. it is not possible to choose different Incoterms and thereby estimate a different freight cost.Chapter 5: Prices in the Product Catalog n RP A line that contains the freight calculated during ordering has been added. This line includes a description (from R/3) of the shipping method (Incoterms) chosen previously. you need to remove this code. In the standard functionality of the Online Store. If you choose not to use this modification. The following variables have been added to support the price breakdown: Parameter _z_4230_freight _z_4230_discounts Value Freight Discount f} \}~ Z
b|~ {~ \~ ~ b~~ Five programs must be changed. Please thoroughly document and test these changes if you choose to apply them. However. This step has been preconfigured for you. you must activate and generate the following programs: n n n n n Note that these changes to the function modules are not configuration changes. choose Tools → ABAP Workbench → Development → ABAP Editor). The Incoterms are used to calculate the freight charged to the customer. The template files are located in the ITS AGate directory under the directory structure <its_root>\templates\ww20\sg. formerly OSS Notes and SAPNet – R/3 Frontend Notes.HTML SAPMWWMJ_4235. can be found online in the SAP Service Marketplace.HTML SAPMWWMJ_4230.RQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. “ITS Templates” on page 215. The following templates are modified to support the Incoterms logic: Template SAPMWWMJ_4220. “SAP Notes in the SAP Service Marketplace” on page 387 for informational notes related to this chapter.HTML WW20_EN. see chapter 13. The following variables are added to support the selection of Incoterms: Parameter _4220_shipping _standard _twodays _overnight _colon Value Shipping type: Standard 2 days Over night : \~| ~ lZi g~ Information from SAP Notes is also essential to the configuration. See appendix A. .HTRC Change Logic to choose the shipping method Display the description of the shipping method Display the description of the shipping method Text for the new freight selection function For more information about ITS templates.HTML: n n Selection radio buttons so the customer can select the shipping method Logic to pass the selected value to R/3 ppKIx^gGamk\ The file ww20_en. The following changes have been made in the template SAPMWWMJ_4220. where the <its_root> is your virtual ITS installation and sg is the theme delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration.htrc is the language-resource file that contains values for the language-specific variables used for the IACs.6C g~ The template files in the AGate directory structure of the ITS have been modified to allow customers to choose a shipping method. SAP Notes. The shipping methods reflect the Incoterms in the R/3 System. & + $ 3 7 ( 5 Q e Z||~ i}| ` p z i}| \zz
. It may be undesirable to create several different product catalogs. See the Authorizations Made Easy guidebook at www. such as for a specific customer or industry. it may be beneficial to limit customer access to different portions of a product catalog. Since authorizations within R/3 use an R/3 user ID. However. Authorization groups are available to determine which users can manage the content of the catalog within R/3. If no values are assigned to a particular product group within the catalog. Instead. a customer number or an e-mail address is used for identification. This situation requires that the customer logs on before the product catalog can be browsed. A distributor may have several different product lines. you would not want your customers to search for their catalog from a list. all customers may display these products. . and for the product groups in the catalog layout. These authorization groups are available for the catalog as a whole.JII Configuration Guide | Release 4. This need may occur when you create a product catalog for a particular purpose. these authorizations cannot be used to limit what a customer can see while browsing the catalog on the Internet. One way of limiting access to an entire product catalog may be addressed with unique hyperlinks for each catalog. Maintaining only one catalog requires less effort than maintaining multiple product catalogs.com/auths. Instead. When doing business on the web. while only specific customers have access to their own product group. you might prefer that all customers have access to several of the product groups. this customer identification is not an R/3 user that can log on to the system directly. For additional information about authorizations. with a corresponding characteristic for limiting access to portions of a product catalog Documentation on how to limit access to portions of the product catalog n fz b az~S e Z||~ i}| ` p ~ \zz
The classification system in R/3 limits the access to product groups within the catalog. the customer can see the products in that group. If the customer’s characteristic values match a product group’s characteristic values. especially if these catalogs contain many common products. The classification system allows a company to create characteristics that describe their customers and their product groups. pz p~ ]~
~ In the Online Store preconfiguration. or for offering unique promotions or products to a particular group. Some of these products are common to all customers of the distributor. a classification system provides the functionality for these authorizations to limit access to product groups. If multiple product catalogs are maintained for different audiences.saplabs.6C h~~ g~ The functionality described in this chapter does not address limiting access to an entire catalog. When a customer browses a product catalog on the Internet. we provide the following deliverables: n Preconfiguration of customer and product catalog classes. while others are special brands only sold to particular customers. blue. . The values of the customer type characteristic determine which product groups the customer can see within the catalog. user-defined fields can be added to master data records. we created a characteristic called customer type that describes the customer’s relationship to the company. partner. silver. Product Catalog Shops Product Group Class Class Product Group Product Group Product Group Product Group Class Shops A class containing the customer type is linked to a customer master record. For example. n~ \
z|z _
~ i ~ i}| \zz
Classification values between the product catalog and the customer master record are compared using a filter mechanism. In essence. or to individual material master records. a class called CARS may include characteristics that define a car. This class cannot be linked to the product catalog as a whole. white. and black. In our example. such as COLOR. Each characteristic contains a list of valid values that can be assigned to each master record. The characteristic CUSTOMER_TYPE contains values that define the customer. If no class is linked. The values of the customer type characteristic determine which customers can see the product group and the materials (or lower-level product groups) within it. and public. A class containing the characteristic CUSTOMER_TYPE is linked to a shop or to any product group level. Sample values for customer type include internal. valid values for the characteristic COLOR may be red. ENGINE_SIZE. This customer type limits access to documents that should not be publicly accessible. and TRANSMISSION. For example.Chapter 6: Limiting Access to Product Groups Within a Product Catalog JIJ pz b ~ \
z|z l~X The classification system allows you to define characteristics that describe master data. or if the characteristic value is blank. all customers can see the product group. A class is an umbrella used to group together similar types of characteristics. green. the product group displays on the Internet. the product group does not display.6C . After the customer logs on. “Creating the Online Store with the Catalog” on page 21. Public Product Group: Guidebooks 4.6x Class: Customer Type Class: Product Type Characteristic: Cust. Type: PUBLIC Characteristic: Cust. . In the standard R/3 System. If you allow the customer to browse the catalog before logging in. The function module CUSTOMER_FILTER_CHAR_READ activates the logic.JIK Configuration Guide | Release 4. See chapter 3. the system can recognize the identity of the customer. this validation does not take place. for information about configuring early logons. early logon to the product catalog must be configured. The table below documents the result of different combinations of customer types. Type: INTERNAL PUBLIC = INTERNAL do not display If the customer type in the product group and the customer master match. Customer Master: Mr. If these values do not match. the comparison occurs between all characteristic values of all classes linked to the customer and the product catalog layout. Customer Master PUBLIC PUBLIC INTERNAL PUBLIC BLANK BLANK PUBLIC PARTNER PARTNER Product Group PUBLIC INTERNAL PUBLIC BLANK PUBLIC BLANK PARTNER PUBLIC PARTNER Displayed on Web? YES NO NO YES YES YES NO NO For this scenario to function correctly. Chapter 6: Limiting Access to Product Groups Within a Product Catalog JIL fz~ ]zz k~~} e Z||~ ~ \zz
The classes and characteristics are master data records within the R/3 System. KG On the Characteristics screen: zG In Characteristic. choose Logistics → Central Functions → Classification → Master Data → Characteristics). See appendix G. mz &UHDWH D FKDUDFWHULVWLF ZLWK FXVWRPHU W\SHV JG In the Command field. a characteristic containing the customer types must be created. you must: n n n n n Create a characteristic that contains the customer types (preconfigured) Create a class (type 011) for customer master records (preconfigured) Link the customer class to the customer master records Create a class (type 060) for the product catalog (preconfigured) Link the layout class to the layout areas (shops or product groups) in the catalog \~z~ z \zz|~| z \z ~ \~ m~ To limit access to product groups within a catalog. “Introduction to Computer-Aided Test Tools (CATTs)” on page 435 for details about the CATT procedure. enter transaction CT04 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. This procedure is preconfigured for you by a CATT when you run the Online Store preconfiguration installation catalog. enter the name or code of the characteristic. . The steps below illustrate how the characteristic is created. {G Choose . To limit access to the product catalog. These steps do not need to be performed unless you choose to create another characteristic. choose the data format (for example. enter a short text for the characteristic. {G In Status. MG On the revised Basic data tab: zG In Number of chars.. The class can only be used once the status is set to Released. g~ After the selection of Character format in step 3c. {G Under Value assignment. Character format so text will be entered as the characteristic values). |G In Data type. enter the number of characters allowed for the characteristic codes.6C LG On the Create Characteristic screen: zG In Description. select Multiple values. .JIM Configuration Guide | Release 4. choose the status of the characteristic. the options in the Format section change. New values can be added to the list of allowed values at any time. The Case sensitive checkbox is not selected by default. or values. The default value in the characteristic is Single values. This setting means that characteristic values must be chosen from this list. but only if it has not been assigned. enter the codes. Selecting this checkbox would allow ad hoc entry of values for customers and product groups. The option of not assigning any characteristic values. Existing text can be changed. |G Choose the Addnl data tab. The Additional values checkbox defaults to deactivated.Chapter 6: Limiting Access to Product Groups Within a Product Catalog |G Choose the Values tab. would no longer be available if this checkbox were activated. In the Value assignment group box. The Entry required checkbox is not selected by default. It should only be selected if the characteristic codes should be case-sensitive. which allows all access. which allows a customer to be assigned more than one characteristic value. NG On the Values tab: zG Under Char. {G Under Description. for example to a customer or to a product catalog. Selecting this checkbox would require an entry for all assignments to customers and the product catalog. JIN Additional fields appear in the Format group box after the data type has been chosen. of the characteristic. the Multiple values radio button is selected. value. . A value can be deleted. making the coordination between customers and the product catalog difficult. enter the corresponding description of each value. JIO Configuration Guide | Release 4. you must first delete this assignment before you can delete the characteristic value. this table can be referenced by entering the table and field into the Table name and Field name fields. . mz &UHDWH D FODVV IRU FXVWRPHU PDVWHU UHFRUGV JG In the Command field. a class (type 011) must be created and later linked to customer master records. This step has been preconfigured for you when you run the Online Store preconfiguration installation catalog.6C OG On the Addnl data tab: zG If a table containing the values to be used for customer types already exists. choosing Logistics → Central Functions → Classification → Environment → Reporting → Characteristic Values List). {G Choose . These steps do not need to be performed unless you choose to create another class. enter transaction CL02 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. This option is available in place of manually entering the list of values on the previous screen. The steps below illustrate how the class is created. \~z~ z \
z Am~ IJJB \~ fz~ k~|} To limit access to product groups within a catalog. Table name and Field name fields If a value is used in a customer or product catalog assignment. choose Logistics → Central Functions → Classification → Master Data → Classes). You can display existing assignments by entering transaction code CT11 in the Command field (or from the navigation menu. {G In Status. enter a short text for the class.Chapter 6: Limiting Access to Product Groups Within a Product Catalog KG On the Change Class screen: zG In Class. LG On the Create Class screen: zG In Description. The validity date for the class defaults to the current date. |G Choose the Char. choose the status of the class. enter the name or code of the class. The class can only be used once the status is set to Released. tab. enter 011. . |G Choose . which is a class that can be assigned to customer master records. JIP {G In Class type. {G Choose . which goes across companies and sales areas. choose Extras → Classification. enter the characteristic created previously. tab: zG Under Characteristic. {G Choose . KG On the Change Customer: Initial Screen: g~ zG In Customer. LG On the Change Customer: General data screen. mz /LQN WKH FXVWRPHU FODVV WR FXVWRPHU PDVWHU UHFRUGV JG In the Command field. e ~ \~ \
z ~ \~ fz~ k~|} The next step to limiting access to product groups within a catalog is to link the customer class to the customer records. The values for the company code and sales area are not required for entering classification data. choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partners → Customer → Change → Complete). . enter transaction XD02 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu.6C MG On the Char.JIQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. enter the customer number. The class is linked to the customer master at the basic data level. You need to perform this step manually for your customer master records. to select the characteristic Use this button to select the characteristic value. enter the class created for customers. in the Value column. use value. JIR NG On the General tab. .Chapter 6: Limiting Access to Product Groups Within a Product Catalog MG On the Change Customer: Classification screen: zG Under Class. {G Choose . from the initial customer screen.6C OG On the Cust.com/dx. PG Back on the Change Customer: Classification screen: zG Choose {G Choose |G Choose .JJI Configuration Guide | Release 4. . {G Choose . For additional information about the Data Transfer Workbench. The ID (for example. Classification) can be used to link a class to customer master records. see the web site www. . INTERNAL).saplabs. INTERNAL) displays in the Value column until you choose in step 7a. type for product catalog dialog box: zG Select the checkboxes for one or more values that apply to this customer (for example. The Data Transfer Workbench (object 130. The steps below illustrate how the class is created.Chapter 6: Limiting Access to Product Groups Within a Product Catalog JJJ \~z~ z \
z Am~ IOIB ~ i}| \zz
Limiting access to product groups within a catalog also requires that a class (type 060) be created and linked to product groups. These steps do not need to be performed unless you choose to create another class. mz &UHDWH D FODVV IRU WKH SURGXFW FDWDORJ VKRS RU SURGXFW JURXS OHYHO. This step has been preconfigured for you when you run the Online Store preconfiguration installation catalog. JG In the Command field. which is a class that can be assigned to layout records in the product catalog. |G Choose . KG On the Change Class screen: zG In Class. enter 060. choose Logistics → Central Functions → Classification → Master Data → Classes). . enter transaction CL02 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. enter the name or code of the class. {G In Class type. . tab. The validity date for the class defaults to the current date. enter a short text for the class. The class can only be used once the status is set to Released. tab: zG Under Characteristic. |G Choose the Char.6C LG On the Create Class screen: zG In Description. choose the status of the class. {G In Status. {G Choose . enter the characteristic created previously.JJK Configuration Guide | Release 4. MG On the Char. enter transaction WWM2 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. KG On the Change Product Catalog: Initial Screen: zG In Catalog. choose Logistics → Materials Management → Product Catalog → Product Catalog → Change). mz /LQN WKH OD\RXW FODVV WR OD\RXW DUHDV JG In the Command field.Chapter 6: Limiting Access to Product Groups Within a Product Catalog JJL e ~ ez \
z ~ ez Z~z ~ \zz
To limit access to product groups within a catalog. LG On the Product Catalog: Maintain Layout screen: g~ zG Select the shop for which you would like to add an authorization check. {G Choose . You can place the authorization check at any layout level (shop or product group) within the product catalog. . {G Choose Layout. You need to perform this step for the product groups in your product catalogs. you must link the layout class to the layout areas (shops or product groups) in the catalog. enter the product catalog. 6C MG On the Product Catalog: Maintain Base Layout Area screen.JJM Configuration Guide | Release 4. {G Choose . enter the class created for layout areas (product catalogs). NG On the Product Catalog: Classification screen: zG Under Class. g~ You cannot limit access by material number within a product group in the catalog. . choose Classification. . PG On the Cust. INTERNAL). type for product catalog dialog box: zG Select the one or more customer types allowed to see the products in this product group (for example. use value. JJN to select the characteristic Use this button to select a characteristic value. {G Choose . in the Value column.Chapter 6: Limiting Access to Product Groups Within a Product Catalog OG On the General tab. see the web site www.saplabs.6C QG Back on the Product Catalog: Classification screen: zG Choose {G Choose |G Choose . You must: n n n n Define an early logon in the Online Store (preconfigured) Define the filter criteria in the product presentation profile (preconfigured) Determine whether to modify the filtering logic to select customer characteristics Determine whether to modify the filtering comparison logic ]~~ z ^z
e ~ h
~ l~ The filtering functionality can only be supported if the Online Store requires an early logon. . The ID (for example. Classification) can be used to link a class to layout records in the product catalog. The Data Transfer Workbench (object 130. This step has been preconfigured for you. from the initial product catalog layout screen.JJO Configuration Guide | Release 4. . For additional information about the Data Transfer Workbench. INTERNAL) displays in the Value column until you choose in step 7a.com/dx. \z e Z||~ i}| ` p ~ \zz
The steps involved to ensure that characteristic values are taken into account are described in the following section. Profile for Product Presentation YPCB (Selling to business partners) YPCC (Selling to consumers) FM Filter Criteria CUSTOMER_FILTER_CHAR_READ CUSTOMER_FILTER_CHAR_READ ]~~~ p~~ f} ~ _
~ e| l~
~| \~ \zz|~| In the standard-delivered CUSTOMER_FILTER_CHAR_READ function module. in the IMG choose Logistics next to General → IAC Product Catalog and Online Store and choose Profiles for Product Presentation. You can then code your own filtering mechanism. To access the product presentation profile. all characteristic values associated with the customer (for all characteristics and classes) are selected for comparison to all characteristic values associated with the product group in the catalog. for a detailed description. The FM filter criteria specifies the function module used for authorizations to the product catalog. and is included in the preconfigured product presentation profiles. ]~~ ~ _
~ \~z ~ i}| i~~z i
~ To support limited access to product groups within the catalog. you need to copy the standard-delivered function module CUSTOMER_FILTER_CHAR_READ. the filter criteria must be defined in the product presentation profile. choose Tools → ABAP Workbench → Development → Function Builder). To copy and change your own function module. If you wish to use a different mechanism to filter the characteristic values in the customer master. enter transaction SE37 in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. For your own function module. The function module used in the Online Store preconfiguration is standard-delivered with the R/3 System. “Creating the Online Store with the Catalog” on page 21. See chapter 3.Chapter 6: Limiting Access to Product Groups Within a Product Catalog JJP To view the product presentation profiles. in the IMG choose Logistics – next to General → IAC Product Catalog and Online Store and choose Profiles for Product Presentation. After programming your own filtering mechanism. This step has been preconfigured for you. you need to enter your function module into the product presentation profile as previously described. . make sure you do not change the interface structure. 63/$< 7$%/(6 &+$5$&7B9$/8(6 3. Remember that a change to this function module is a modification to the R/3 System. if necessary. SAP Notes. It may be more desirable to create characteristic values in a way that a modification is not necessary. a modification must be made to the function module IST_AREA_FILTER. Make sure you thoroughly test and document any changes you make. the area does not display. If a different comparison between the customer and product catalog characteristics is required. If only one mismatch occurs between the customer and product catalog characteristic values.B7B&+$5 3. This function is called using the following function: )81&7.B/$<287 3.B$5($ '.67B$5($B).6C ]~~~ p~~ f} ~ _
~ e| In the current functionality. “SAP Notes in the SAP Service Marketplace” on page 387 for informational notes related to this chapter.21 ¶. .1* The function returns the values 1 (display) or 0 (do not display)./7(5· (. If all values are equal. can be found online in the SAP Service Marketplace.JJQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. then that portion of the product catalog displays on the Internet. so that those changes can be made again. enter transaction SE37 in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. choose Tools → ABAP Workbench → Development → Function Builder). or if the customer or product catalog class is not maintained. See appendix A. Any change in this logic needs to be made in this function module.1* /$<95 6257) '. \~| ~ lZi g~ Information from SAP Notes is also essential to the configuration.63/$< 03257.3257. formerly OSS Notes and SAPNet – R/3 Frontend Notes. Modifications can be overwritten during an upgrade. To access the function module. all values in the customer class are compared with all values in the product catalog class. & + $ 3 7 ( 5 R \~ ~ h
~ l~ . If it is not expected that many repeat customers will visit the site. If many repeat customers are expected.6C h~~ When Internet customers visit your web site. The customer record created in the R/3 System may be either a normal customer. or the address information is stored directly in the sales order created in R/3. you should consider one-time customers. Additionally. making order processing possible. and credit card data can be verified. pz p~ ]~
~ In the Online Store preconfiguration. they must register before placing an order. they may not have the patience to enter their address information each time they order. an e-mail address. When a customer registers on the Internet. consumer.JKI Configuration Guide | Release 4. you enter all the address information. we provide the following deliverables: n n n Preconfiguration of the customer account group Preconfiguration of a user exit to correctly determine the customer’s tax jurisdiction code Documentation on the options for creating the customer master record In the Online Store scenario. which are transferred to R/3 System and saved as a customer master record. taxes can be calculated based on the shipping address. the customer must be created before an order can be processed. and the password. Whether a customer master record is created depends on how much data should be available for reporting. . after the customer has been identified. The customers must be identified so that customer information can be created in the system. this must be considered when sizing the R/3 database. a customer master record is either created within R/3. You may want to consider the following points: n n n If each customer that visits the site creates a master record. Having all the information available immediately facilitates the order fulfillment process. detailed reporting of these customers will be available and trends can be analyzed. and how often customers are expected to repeat their visits to the site. b~~ \~ If you register a new customer in the Online Store. or one-time customer. If each customer visiting the site creates a master record. m~ o~ b}~ r \z When a customer registers on the Internet.Chapter 7: Customers in the Online Store JKJ g~ If the customer has visited the web site before. Address information E-mail address entered on the web . The customer number can be found using the matchcode. the combination of zip code. an e-mail address and password may be used to log on. with the exception of the customer-specific address and contact data. However. If you use an external tax package. All data is copied from a reference customer. transaction XD03 displays the address information entered by the Internet customer. and city is validated. In the R/3 System. During the online registration process only one address can be maintained for the customer. a different shipping address can always be added during online order entry. a customer master record is immediately created in R/3. state. g~ The customer number does not display on the web (e-mail addresses are used). The customer address determines the tax jurisdiction code. the customer number must be used to display the customer master in the R/3 system. 6C \~ If a consumer master record had been created instead of a normal customer master record. In the R/3 System. Under Personal data. the customer master would display differently. . No contact data view is available for consumers.JKK Configuration Guide | Release 4. g~ This screen shows the personal data of the customer. all customer information would be contained in the order. The sales views are not created for a consumer. since consumers are not expected to be corporations with multiple contact names. The address information entered for the one-time customer can be seen within the sales order on the Display e-Shop Web Order <XXXXX>: Header Data screen under the Partner tab. The sales view of the reference customer is used for order processing. h~Fm~ \~ If one-time customers are used instead of customer master records. the personal data is only created for the consumer master record. transaction VA03 displays an order created on the Internet. . All other addresses are filled with the delivery address. An individual customer record is not created in this scenario. is used as the customer master in the Partner column. Double-clicking on the bill-to party displays the one-time customer address details. the reference one-time customer record. The bill-to address is the original address entered. Bill-to party g~ E-mail addressed are not maintained for one-time customers.Chapter 7: Customers in the Online Store JKL g~ The same customer number. The R/3 System first checks the Online Store customer. The first option. is being implemented at the same time. and how customers and partner functions should be configured.JKM Configuration Guide | Release 4. or a working Sales and Distribution (SD) configuration has already been implemented. If a reference customer is not maintained there. the customer in the product catalog is used. Only the address and contact data is replaced with the customer-specific data.6. either the Preconfigured Client (PCC) U. The following sections provide guidelines related to how customers are used within the Online Store. in which a full customer master record is created. a reference customer is copied. any customer master records that have been created can also be used on the Internet for processing. The customer in the basic data of the product catalog is a mandatory entry. The reference customer can be stored in the Online Store or the product catalog. . To create the new master record for each newly registered Internet customer.6C fz b az~S \~ ~ h
~ l~ As a prerequisite to implementing the Online Store preconfiguration.S. This prerequisite means that the configuration that supports the customer master record creation is already complete. was the only option available until Release 4. in which the customer data is stored only in the sales order and not as a separate master record You may want to create a different customer account group to identify these customers in reporting. The different types of customers that can be created through the Online Store are: n n n Full sold-to customer master Consumer. which is a minimal customer master with personal and company code data One-time customer. This chapter is not intended to be a thorough discussion of customer master records. If an existing SD configuration has already been implemented. In addition. and customers will need to reenter their address data each time they order. ship-to. using one-time customers greatly reduces the amount of data stored in the R/3 System. a consumer record is created. copies to the consumer master record. a one-time customer can be used. and payer) also copy from the reference customer during order processing. The consumer is a customer master record with limited data. since it is stored in the sales area data of a customer master record. When the Internet customer registers. thus reducing the amount of data entry required for order fulfillment. When used in the Online Store. the company code data. and this view is not created for consumers. a reference customer is designated for all consumers. Storing customer information in an order makes it more difficult for reporting. This onetime customer is used to create the sales order. However. . but is not copied directly into the consumer master record. The carrier used should be the primary carrier you use for the majority of your Internet business. All information entered by the Internet customer is stored directly in the order. The sales area data comes from the reference customer during order processing. The one-time reference customer is stored in the customer administration profile of the Online Store. The carrier is then copied to all sales orders placed by the consumer.Chapter 7: Customers in the Online Store JKN In the second option. a default shipping type cannot be maintained for consumers. The address is updated in the personal data of the consumer. which makes it possible to store the forwarding carrier for deliveries in the reference customer. Therefore. bill-to. Finally. such as accounting and payment information. any partners (other than sold-to. In the “My Profile” add-on provided by the Online Store preconfiguration package. the amount of data that needs to be stored for the consumer is very limited. The following customers may need to be created: n A reference customer Link the reference customer to the: • • • Product catalog Online Store (see the Configuration section) Consumer default n A one-time customer Link the one-time customer to the customer administration profile. you may be using normal customer master records. reference customer data must already exist. Execute program RINTCON_P. Depending on your configuration of the Online Store. For more information. a different reference customer must be created. Execute program RINTCON_C. consumer records. fz~ ]zz k~~} \~z \~ ~ h
~ l~ To allow customers on the Internet to register. 2.JKO Configuration Guide | Release 4. If the delivery address is changed for full customers and for consumers. The alternate delivery address is stored only within the order created from the Online Store. The views of the customer master record are not shown below. it is not stored in the partner data of the customer master. If you wish to convert all of your customers into consumers. which creates personal addresses from existing Internet customer master records. you must perform the following steps: TechTalk 1. See chapter 14. For each of these scenarios.6C In addition to creating the customer master record. “The ITS User: Logging on to R/3” on page 235. see “Configuration to Support Customer Master Creation in the Online Store” on page 130. for details on the Internet user created for customers. an Internet user is created for customers and consumers that store the password for the customer master record. No password is created if the one-time customer option is chosen. . which converts customers to consumers. or one-time customers. taxation indicator. Either a normal sold-to customer or a consumer is created that uses this reference customer’s data. enter transaction WWM2 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. for details about the product catalog. The freight carrier is copied into all consumers’ sales documents created using this reference customer.Chapter 7: Customers in the Online Store JKP \~z~ z k~~~|~ \~ fz~ k~|} Because customer master records are created though the Online Store. . A sold-to party should be used as the reference customer. you must create a reference customer that can be used as a base for creating records for customers who register on the Internet. e ~ k~~~|~ \~ ~ i}| \zz
After you create the reference customer. The reference customer is a required field within the product catalog. choose Logistics → Materials Management → Product Catalog → Product Catalog → Change). its assignment to an example product catalog. The procedures below describe the manual process of the configuration and master data setup. This reference customer is used if no customer is specified in the Online Store configuration. In the Command field. The customer master record is not discussed in detail in this section. mz /LQN WKH UHIHUHQFH FXVWRPHU WR WKH SURGXFW FDWDORJ JG In the Command field. and the Online Store are all created by the Online Store preconfiguration installation catalog. it can be linked to the product catalog. See chapter 4. a forwarding agent (freight carrier) should be entered into the Partner functions view. The Incoterms used will be the default shipping type copied into all master records for customers that register on the Internet. The following data is critical to this customer master: n n n The accounting information. will be used for all Internet customers that register on the Internet. Remember that the customer master record must be created using the sales area used on the Internet. The reference customer. “Creating the Product Catalog” on page 51. and sales area data. If the customer should be used as a reference for consumers. enter transaction XD01 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partners → Customer → Create → Complete). Example master data and all the needed assignments described below are preconfigured. JKQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. enter the reference customer. customer. |G Choose . . replaces the reference data. All customers. Distr.6C KG On the Change Product Catalog: Initial Screen: zG In Catalog. such as address and contact data. e ~ k~~~|~ \~ ~ h
~ l~ For more information. {G Choose Basic data. enter the appropriate information for Sales org.. products.chl. However.. and Division that you will use for your Internet business. In configuration. the data entered by the customer on the Internet. enter the product catalog code used in the Online Store. LG On the Product Catalog: Change Basic Data screen: g~ zG In Ref. see “Configuration to Support Customer Master Creation in the Online Store” on page 130. {G In the Sales area group box. you can determine whether the reference customer is used as a base for creating the new Internet customers during registration. All fields are copied from this reference customer. and prices need to be created for this sales area. Because only one reference customer can be created for the R/3 client. . customer). . it can be designated as the reference customer for all consumers. This screen displays the sales areas and company codes for which the reference customer is maintained. customer. choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business partners → Customer → Assign consumer – ref. enter the customer to be used as the reference for all consumer data. The sales area of this reference customer is used for all processing for consumers. The one-time customer master record is then used as the base for creating orders. enter transaction VD07 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. {G Choose |G Choose . and customer-specific information is updated only in the sales order. Only one reference customer can be designated as the consumer reference for the client. KG On the Maintain Reference Customer for Consumer screen: zG In Ref. \~z~ z h~Fm~ \~ Because customer master records are created though the Online Store. you must create a one-time customer if you choose not to store customer information. The standard account group CPD is used for one-time customers.Chapter 7: Customers in the Online Store JKR e ~ k~~~|~ \~ ~ \~ ]~z
After you create the reference customer. additional sales areas and company codes may need to be maintained if the reference customer should be used for consumers in other organizational areas. mz 'HVLJQDWH WKH FXVWRPHU DV WKH UHIHUHQFH IRU DOO FRQVXPHU PDVWHU UHFRUGV JG In the Command field. you must: n n n n n n Verify the settings in the Online Store (preconfigured) Verify the settings in the customer administration profile (preconfigured) Create a number range for the Internet customers (preconfigured) Create a customer account group for Internet customers (preconfigured) Verify that all account groups for customers use internal number assignment (preconfigured) Create the user exit that allows the correct determination of the tax jurisdiction code of the customer (preconfigured) o~ l~ ~ h
~ l~ The Online Store contains links to the product catalog master data and to configuration that determines product. For details about Online Store customization. “Creating the Online Store with the Catalog” on page 21. enter transaction XD01 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu.General → IAC Product Catalog and Online Store and choose next to Online Stores. and sales orders handling. choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partners → Customer → Create → Complete). Four different Online Stores are delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration. customer. You must choose whether you wish to enter a reference customer in the Online Store directly. mz 9HULI\ WKH FRQILJXUDWLRQ RI WKH 2QOLQH 6WRUH In the IMG. choose Logistics . an example one-time customer is created in your system. e ~ h~Fm~ \~ ~ \~ Z}z i
~ See the next section. see chapter 3.6C When you install the Online Store. In the Command field. \z l \~ fz~ \~z ~ h
~ l~ To ensure the customers are correctly created for your Internet business.JLI Configuration Guide | Release 4. . None of these stores contain a reference customer. and no customer master record is created. see chapter 3. a consumer is created as the customer master record. the following settings must be made for the creation of particular customer master records: Customer Created Normal customer Consumer One-time customer No Registration Either on or off Either on or off On Allow OTA Off Off On OTA Customer Off Off Customer # Consumer Off On Off \~z~ z g{~ kz~ ~ b~~ \~ Customers are created from the Online Store during registration. For the one-time customer scenario. Then on the Choose Activity dialog box. mz 9HULI\ WKH FRQILJXUDWLRQ RI WKH FXVWRPHU DGPLQLVWUDWLRQ SURILOHV In the IMG.Chapter 7: Customers in the Online Store JLJ o~ ~ l~ ~ \~ Z}z i
~ The customer administration profile determines how customers are created in the R/3 System when they register in the Online Store. where the customer is not given the opportunity to enter a customer number. enter transaction OVZC and choose Enter (or in the IMG. the customer number range for customers created from the Internet must be internal. a reference CPD customer is used. For the first business-to-consumer scenario. A new number range has been created to support the new customer account group created in the next step. customers register online and a normal customer master record is created. For this reason. In the customer administration profile.General → IAC Product Catalog and Online Store and choose next to Customer Administration Profiles. new customers cannot register online. For details about the customer administration profiles. choose Logistics . Number Range YE Number From 0004000000 Number To 0004999999 External Indicator Off . mz &UHDWH DQ LQWHUQDO QXPEHU UDQJH IRU FXVWRPHU DFFRXQW JURXSV In the Command field. For the second business-to-consumer scenario. For the business partner scenario. choose Logistics .General → Business Partner → Customer → Control and choose next to Define and Assign Customer Number Ranges. select Define Number Ranges for Customer Master and choose Choose). because normal customer master records are expected for customers who log on. and how logon is handled. “Creating the Online Store with the Catalog” on page 21. required. The field status settings are documented below.O. city Street Location Region P. The primary settings in the account group table are documented below. rp^[ § i\\ b~~ l
}Fm YWEB – myPCC Internet Sold-to Party General Data – Address Data g~ Suppressed Required Optional Display Only Name 1/last name Form of address Search term A Name 2/first name Name 3. mz &RQILJXUH WKH FXVWRPHU DFFRXQW JURXS IRU . the table indicates whether it is suppressed. Field Number range One-time account Central text determination procedure Text determination procedure SD Customer pricing procedure Partner determination procedure Value YE Off 01 01 1 (standard) AG (sold-to party) All other entries are blank. optional.QWHUQHW XVDJH In the Command field.JLK Configuration Guide | Release 4. box X X X X X For each field. choose Logistics .General → Business Partner → Customer → Control and choose next to Define Account Groups and Field Selection for Customers).6C \~z~ z \~ Z|| ` b~~ \~ A new customer account group may be created for the Internet customers. X X X X X . or display only. Account group YWEB has been preconfigured. This account group allows fields not populated during the customer creation process to be turned off. name 4 Postal code. enter transaction OVT0 and choose Enter (or in the IMG. box postal code Transportation zone Tax jurisdiction P.Chapter 7: Customers in the Online Store JLL YWEB – myPCC Internet Sold-to Party General Data – Address Data P.O. academic title 2nd prefix Name at birth Nickname Name affix Initials Country for format Format name Suppressed Required Optional Display Only X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X . Box city Search term B c/o name Street 2 Street 3 Street 5 Buildings Floor Room number Company postal code Comments Time zone Delivery district Street 4 Regional structure group Sex Date of birth Marital status Academic title Name prefix 2.O. box without number PO box country PO Box Region Suppressed Required Optional Display Only X X X X YWEB – my PCC Internet Sold-to Party General Data – Communication Telex.O. City Code Tax code 2 Suppressed Required Optional Display Only X X X X X X X X X X X X X X . Type Internet mail address Suppressed Required Optional Display Only X X X X X X X YWEB – my PCC Internet Sold-to Party General Data – Control Vendor Corporate group Tax code 1 Sales equalization tax International location number Fiscal address Industry Location code Train station/express train station Authorization VAT registration number Trading partner County Code.6C YWEB – myPCC Internet Sold-to Party General Data – Address Data Alternative place of re P. fax. Teletex Telebox Data line Internet address Standard comm.JLM Configuration Guide | Release 4. tel. Chapter 7: Customers in the Online Store JLN YWEB – my PCC Internet Sold-to Party General Data – Control Taxes on sales/purchases Natural person Reference account group (OTA) Business place Tax type CFOP category Tax number 3 Tax number 4 Brazilian taxes: ICMS.I Tax categories Suppressed Required Optional Display Only X X X X X X X X X X YWEB – my PCC Internet Sold-to Party General Data – Marketing Nielsen ID Regional market Customer class Industry sectors Sales Employees Business form Fiscal year Hierarchy allocation Suppressed Required Optional Display Only X X X X X X X X X YWEB – my PCC Internet Sold-to Party General Data – Payment Transactions Bank details Alternative payer account Alternative payer in doc DME details Suppressed Required Optional Display Only X X X X . 6C YWEB – my PCC Internet Sold-to Party General Data – Unloading Points Unloading Points Suppressed Required Optional Display Only X YWEB – my PCC Internet Sold-to Party General Data – Contact Person Contact Person Suppressed Required Optional Display Only X YWEB – my PCC Internet Sold-to Party General Data – Foreign Trade Foreign Trade Suppressed Required Optional Display Only X YWEB – my PCC Internet Sold-to Party Company Code Data – Account Management Reconciliation account Cash management group Previous account number Sort key Head office Authorization Preference indicator Interest calculation Buying group Personnel number Release approval group Gross income tax Value adjustment key Suppressed Required Optional Display Only X X X X X X X X X X X X X .JLO Configuration Guide | Release 4. Charges term Payment block Payment methods Alternative payer account Clearing with vendor Bill of exchange limit Next payee Indicate payment history Tolerance group House bank Known/negotiated leave Lockbox Payment advice via EDI Payment advice notes Single payment.Chapter 7: Customers in the Online Store JLP YWEB – my PCC Internet Sold-to Party Company Code Data – Payment Transactions Terms of payment Bill of exch. payer in document Accounts receivable factoring indicator Suppressed Required Optional Display Only X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X . group key. PMs Credit memo terms of payment Diff. w/h t Withholding tax code (2) Withholding tax number Withholding tax types Suppressed Required Optional Display Only X X X X .JLQ Configuration Guide | Release 4.tax deduction.6C YWEB – my PCC Internet Sold-to Party Company Code Data – Correspondence Payment notices Accounting clerk’s communication Dunning data Account statement Local processing Collective invoice variant Account at customer Accounting clerks Users at customer Account memo Suppressed Required Optional Display Only X X X X X X X X X X YWEB – my PCC Internet Sold-to Party Company Code Data – Insurance Export credit insurance Suppressed Required Optional Display Only X YWEB – my PCC Internet Sold-to Party Company Code Data – Withholding tax data W/hold. /POD relevant Default plant Partial deliveries/tolerance Order combination Delivery priority Suppressed Required Optional Display Only X X X X X .Chapter 7: Customers in the Online Store JLR YWEB – my PCC Internet Sold-to Party Sales and Distribution Data – Sales Sales group Statistics group Customer group Sales district Pricing procedure Price group Price list type Units of measure group Currency Our account with customer Order probability Cust. scheme product proposal Default product proposal Sales office Authorization Exchange rate type Switch off rounding for cu ABC class Agency business Suppressed Required Optional Display Only X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X YWEB – my PCC Internet Sold-to Party Sales and Distribution Data – Shipping Shipping cond. Taxes and licenses Rebate/pricing Suppressed Required Optional Display Only X X X X X X X X YWEB – my PCC Internet Sold-to Party Sales and Distribution Data – Partner Usage Business Partner Assignment Suppressed Required Optional Display Only X YWEB – my PCC Internet Sold-to Party Sales and Distribution Data – Documents Documents Suppressed Required Optional Display Only X o~ Z
\~ Z|| ` n~ b~z
g{~ Z~ Customers are created from the Online Store during registration.JMI Configuration Guide | Release 4. the customer number range for customers created from the Internet must be internal.6C YWEB – my PCC Internet Sold-to Party Sales and Distribution Data – Billing Account assignment group Terms of payment Incoterms Subsequent invoice process Billing period Hedging and credit contr. For this reason. so this account group is reassigned to the newly created internal number range. . The standard-delivered number range for consumers is external. where the customer is not given the opportunity to enter a customer number. To deactivate the user exit. a user exit allows the correct determination of the tax jurisdiction code for Internet customers to take place. A standard R/3 function module is called to populate these fields. mz &UHDWH WKH XVHU H[LW In the Command field. error handling is coded in the user exit. and a more detailed tax jurisdiction code determination is necessary. choose Logistics . We tested the external tax functionality with Taxware and Vertex. Project YE_TAX Enhancement WWCC1001 (function exit for WWW component customer) Function Exit EXIT_SAPLWWCC1_001 Include ZXWC1U01 .Chapter 7: Customers in the Online Store JMJ mz 9HULI\ WKH FXVWRPHU DFFRXQW JURXS¶V QXPEHU UDQJHV In the Command field. The project is active in the Online Store preconfiguration. The level of detail in the tax jurisdiction code determination corresponds to the same level of detail as the taxes delivered with the Preconfigured Client (PCC). If internal taxes are active. Customer account group YWEB (e-Shop Internet sold-to party) 0170 (consumer) Number range assignment YE YE \~z~ n~ ^ \~| ]~~z \~@ mz c}| \}~ Using SAP enhancement functionality. the user exit determines a tax jurisdiction code based on the user’s state of residence. The error handling sends a warning message to the web notifying the customer to correct their address information when the tax jurisdiction code cannot be determined due to inconsistent address fields. simply deactivate the enhancement project. choose Tools → ABAP Workbench → Utilities → Enhancements → Project Management). In addition.General → Business Partner → Customer → Control and choose next to Define Account Groups and Field Selection for Customers). If external taxes are active. If you use tax processing within R/3. while still leaving the entry fields open to changes. The changes made to implement the user exit are described below. changes need to be made to the user exit. the tax jurisdiction code and district (county) are determined. again using a standard R/3 function module. enter transaction CMOD and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. enter transaction OVT0 and choose Enter (or in the IMG. . See appendix A. formerly OSS Notes and SAPNet – R/3 Frontend Notes. “SAP Notes in the SAP Service Marketplace” on page 387. SAP Notes.JMK Configuration Guide | Release 4. for informational notes related to this chapter. can be found online in the SAP Service Marketplace.6C \~| ~ lZi g~ Information from SAP Notes is also essential to the configuration. & + $ 3 7 ( 5 JI f
~ ^
~~ fz i|z~ h~ \z . which is the corporation. Most often the corporation. Because the corporation remains the bill-to and payer for these orders. Partner determination can be configured to send the bills directly to the company. instead of the individual purchaser. and the ordered items should be shipped to the corporation. you cannot maintain multiple passwords for the same customer account and provide tracking. At the same time. and these CATTs in particular. we deliver this configuration using a CATT for customers who have this requirement. as this would make tracking the total number of purchases difficult. we provide the following deliverables: n Preconfiguration of a new customer hierarchy type and associated partner determination. many employees may be authorized to make purchases. Using the customer hierarchy. in reporting. is done by the Online Store preconfiguration installation catalog. since it is then no longer possible to track who made a particular purchase. These corporations are often hesitant to provide the same customer number and password to all of their employees. Documentation covers the use of the customer hierarchy for creating multiple passwords for one customer (corporate) account. “Introduction to Computer-Aided Test Tools (CATTs)” on page 435. you can consolidate. Each employee of the corporation has a separate customer number and password. . which includes the orders placed by all customers (individuals). see appendix G.JMM Configuration Guide | Release 4. pz p~ ]~
~ In the Online Store preconfiguration. should be billed for the purchase. not the individual employee. In the Online Store scenario. use a customer hierarchy.6C h~~ In larger corporations. The customer hierarchy then links these employees to a higher-level customer. Because this scenario is optional. A business process must be put in place in which the employee master record is created in the R/3 System and linked to the corporation. many corporations do not wish to have multiple customer numbers for each employee of a business partner without a way to tie them together. To solve this problem. which allows the tracking of the person who actually placed an order. n For information about executing CATT procedures in general. billing and accounts receivable (A/R) processes are consolidated as well. the total purchases of the corporation. it must be verified that this employee is authorized to make purchases on behalf of the corporation. At the same time. based on the partner determination configuration. a corporate discount can be applied. On the Display e-Shop Web Bus. . This discount results from the customer hierarchy. you can see the customer who placed the order and the corporation who receives the goods and pays for them. even if an employee placed the order. The sold-to party is the employee who made the purchase. Order <XX>: Header Data screen. Because a business partner made the purchase. under the Partners tab. The discount—assigned to the corporation and not to the individual employee—is still valid for the employee.Chapter 8: Multiple Employees Making Purchases for One Corporation JMN m~ o~ b}~ r \z Transaction VA03 can be used to display any sales order created over the Internet. All other partner functions point to the corporation. This verification is a manual process. a verification that an employee has purchasing authorization from their employer should take place before creating master data. for details about the customer profile in the Online Store.6C The discount can be seen on the pricing screen of the sales order. For this reason. The system determines the customer hierarchy by starting with the customer who placed the order. configuration within the R/3 System must first be carried out. because this action would create a new customer number. Discount fz b az~S f
~ iz} h~ \~ If multiple employees of a corporation need to make purchases on behalf of their corporation. See chapter 7. the Online Store customer profile used in this scenario should be configured to require an early logon. and YD) for the Online Store. YB. without the option of creating a customer master record online. Additionally. The system then determines . “Customers in the Online Store” on page 119. then working its way up the customer hierarchy. l|~ ~ a~z| The illustrations below show the preconfiguration-delivered partner functions (YA. YC.JMO Configuration Guide | Release 4. Customers who purchase on behalf of a corporation should not be allowed to register as a new customer online. The customer hierarchy needs to be configured before any purchases should be allowed through the Online Store. The account groups in the hierarchy levels are the sold-to party (the corporation). the higher-level customer—or the corporate customer—is determined based on the customer hierarchy. creates the order on the Internet. If additional levels are required. an Internet Sold-to party (account group YWEB) can only be linked to a higher-level “regular” sold-to party (account group 0001).Chapter 8: Multiple Employees Making Purchases for One Corporation JMP each higher level above the customer master records. Hierarchy nodes can only be linked to higher-level hierarchy nodes. they must be configured during the implementation. Level 1 YA SAP AG Level 2 Level 2 YB SAP Labs SAP America Level 3 Level 3 YC Chicago Palo Alto Level 4 Level 4 YD Simplification Group Dept. which is the lowest hierarchy level configured with the delivered partner functions. The sold-to party can only be linked to a higher-level hierarchy node (account group 0012). an Internet sold-to party (an employee). In each sales order. The right half of the figure below shows how the levels may be implemented. This determination allows reports to be generated that provide consolidated information for the . and a hierarchy node (grouping levels). The partial hierarchy displayed below illustrates this linking order. Y Customer Customer Peter Smith Mary Jones In the delivered configuration. The delivered hierarchy type Y points to customer hierarchy level YD. three customer account groups may be mapped to each other in the delivered hierarchy. represented by the employee. In the Online Store preconfiguration. Hierarchy Node Hierarchy Node Hierarchy Node Sold-To Sold-To Sold-To for the Internet Sold-To for the Internet h
~ l~ l|~z The customer. a higher level sold-to party. or YA. starting with YD. i| Discount pricing can be associated with the customer hierarchy. As the system uses the logic in configuration to work its way up.6C corporate customer. to which bills and shipments are sent (account group 0001). See chapter 22. The employees that make the purchases can also be tracked. for information on these reports. “Sales Activity Reports” on page 327. In the scenario above. the last code (highest) to be checked. Our delivered scenario provides a one-level hierarchy. If the employees of SAP Labs should also receive this . which is only valid if an “SAP Labs” user purchases a product. and so on. Only one hierarchy level exists above these customer master records. SAP Labs). you can create a discount for the company (for example. SAP Labs YA John Doe Mary Jones Peter Smith If there are fewer than the four preconfigured hierarchy levels. is used. We do not use the hierarchy node (account group 0012) in our example. the Internet sold-to customers (account group YWEB). the system works its way up from the bottom of the partner functions shown previously.JMQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. YB the second-highest. The Internet soldto customers represent a corporation. Therefore. The lowest hierarchy level comprises the employees of the business partner who purchase products. YA is always the highest level of the hierarchy. not just with individual customers. and ship-to parties. the corporate customer is designated as the bill-to. Description Percentage discount based on the customer hierarchy node Quantity discount based on the material and customer hierarchy node In processing the customer hierarchy. In the scenario and the associated configuration delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration. such as the bill-to. In processing the customer hierarchy for pricing. based on the access sequence delivered with R/3. If you require a different logic. this customer hierarchy must be the same hierarchy used for partner determination. payer. In this way. and ship-to party. You must create: n n n n n The corporation as a sold-to party The employees as Internet sold-to parties An Internet user for each employee The customer hierarchy A discount for the corporation \~z~ ~ \z z z l
}F iz The customer master can be created as usual. the customer hierarchy must have the same structure for price determination and for determining partner functions. only one hierarchy level exists above the employee’s customer master record. The following condition types are standarddelivered with R/3 for customer hierarchy pricing: Condition Type HI01 HI02 For the customer hierarchy to function consistently in partner determination and pricing. The employees in this scenario should not be configured for pricing relevance for the customer hierarchy. the hierarchy should be balanced. In this way. fz~ ]zz l~ ~ \~ a~z| The following sections describe procedures involved in setting up the customer hierarchy.Chapter 8: Multiple Employees Making Purchases for One Corporation JMR discount. the access sequence must be changed in configuration. then it should be created as a discount for the customer in the higher level of the hierarchy. The following procedure shows the parameters relevant to pricing. payer. Additionally. After finding a valid hierarchy discount. the price is accepted. only the corporate discounts are taken into account in pricing determination. the system works its way from the bottom up. . to find the first valid discount on the hierarchy level. choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business partners → Customer → Create → Complete). }G Choose .6C mz &UHDWH WKH FRUSRUDWLRQ DV D VROGWR SDUW\ JG In the Command field. enter transaction XD01 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu.JNI Configuration Guide | Release 4. enter the sales area information. KG On the Create Customer: Initial Screen: zG In Account group. . 0001 delivered with the PCC). enter the account group of the customer (for example. |G Under Sales area. {G In Company code. enter the company code. |G Choose Sales area data. in all screens normally completed for a customer in your company. {G Enter the remaining customer information. JNJ Sales area data button . enter the name of the corporation.Chapter 8: Multiple Employees Making Purchases for One Corporation LG On the Create Customer: General data screen: zG In Name. choose . select Price determin. . The following procedure shows the parameters relevant to pricing. |G If corporation-level discounts are to be given in the customer hierarchy. Rebates and Price determin. }G When you finish entering all relevant information for the customer. mz &UHDWH HPSOR\HHV DV .JNK Configuration Guide | Release 4.QWHUQHW VROGWR SDUWLHV JG In the Command field. choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business partners → Customer → Create → Complete). select Rebates. checkboxes \~z~ ~ ^
~~ z b~~ l
}Fm iz~ The customer master can be created normally. {G If rebates are relevant to this customer.6C MG On the Create Customer: Sales area data screen: zG Choose the Billing document tab. enter transaction XD01 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. enter the name of the employee to be linked to the corporation. enter your company code. Sales area data button . }G Choose . the e-mail address must be maintained. YWEB delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration). {G In Company code. LG On the Create Customer: General data screen: zG In Name. For the employee log on with an e-mail ID and receive e-mail confirmations of the order and its associated delivery. enter the account group of the customer (for example.Chapter 8: Multiple Employees Making Purchases for One Corporation KG On the Create Customer: Initial Screen: JNL zG In Account group. {G Scroll down to display additional information. enter your sales area information. |G Under Sales area. enter the employee’s e-mail address. ~G Choose Sales area data. g~ |G In E-mail. }G Enter the remaining customer information in all screens usually completed for a customer in your company. “The ITS User: Logging on to R/3” on page 235. See chapter 14. checkboxes \~z~ z b~~ n~ ^z| ^
~~ An Internet user that stores the password for a customer number should be created for the employee. {G Deselect Rebates. |G Deselect Price determin. Discounts should be given at the corporation level in the customer hierarchy. Rebates should not be relevant to an individual employee. choose . not for the corporation. but instead to the corporate customer. . choose Tools → Administration → User Maintenance → Internet User). }G When you have completed entering all relevant information for the customer.6C MG On the Create Customer: Sales area data screen: zG Choose the Billing document tab.JNM Configuration Guide | Release 4. Rebates and Price determin. enter transaction SU05 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. not for an individual employee. In the Command field. for details on creating an Internet user. }G In the Sales organization. mz &UHDWH WKH FXVWRPHU KLHUDUFK\ JG In the Command field. If you changed the hierarchy type code. enter the corporation in the Cust. enter transaction VDH1N and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. ~G Choose . field. ~G Choose Transfer. LG On the Maintain Customer Hierarchy. field. Date: <XX/XX/XXXX>: zG Choose . choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business partners → Customer hierarchy → Edit).. fields. We preconfigured the hierarchy type Y. Hier. . e-Shop Cust. |G In Customer. KG On the Process Customer Hierarchy screen: zG In Customer hierarchy type. enter the employee in the Cust. |G In the Higher-level customer group box. and Divis. enter your sales area information. enter your hierarchy type. enter your sales area in the Sales organization. and Division fields. {G In the Higher-level customer group box. }G In the Customer group box. {G The Validity date defaults to the current date. DistrChannel. enter Y. enter the number of the corporation.Chapter 8: Multiple Employees Making Purchases for One Corporation JNN \~z~ ~ \~ a~z| The two types of customers should now be linked within the customer hierarchy. Distribution channel. Customer group box MG To display and edit the information on each employee in the right frame.6C G In the left frame. G Choose . .JNO Configuration Guide | Release 4. G Repeat the steps 3a–3e for any additional employees you wish to add to the customer hierarchy. The employee assignment to the higher-level customer (company) has been made. open the folder of the customer hierarchy. double-click on the folder of the employee. Higher-level customer group box The top level of the hierarchy appears in the left frame. . |G Under Rate. enter the percentage discount. next to the first LG On the Create Condition Records: Fast Entry screen: zG Under Co. CnTy Sorg DChl Dv Customer. enter condition type HI01. The Valid on and Valid to dates fill in automatically. mz &UHDWH D GLVFRXQW IRU WKH FRUSRUDWLRQ JG In the Command field. choose line. enter the corporation. {G Under Customer. This configuration allows the employees to receive this discount as well.Chapter 8: Multiple Employees Making Purchases for One Corporation JNP \~z~ z ]| ~ \z The discount for the corporation is created using a hierarchy condition type. }G Choose ~G Choose . choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Conditions → Create. . enter transaction VK31 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. KG On the Create Condition Records: Overview screen. Then choose Conditions → By Customer Hierarchy). . During installation. The CATTs allow the keys. to be changed. CATT procedure ZESHOP_CUSTOMER_HIERARCHY delivers the preconfiguration for this scenario. the CATT procedure ZESHOP_CUSTOMER_HIERARCHY creates the correct entries. \~z~ z \~ a~z| m~ This step has been preconfigured for you. Therefore you must: n n n n n n n n n n n Create a customer hierarchy type (preconfigured) Create new partner functions for the customer hierarchy (preconfigured) Assign the new partner functions to customer account groups (preconfigured) Create new partner determination procedures for sales documents (preconfigured) Assign the partner determination procedure to the Internet order type (preconfigured) Add the new partner functions to the delivery partner determination (preconfigured) Add the new partner functions to the billing header partner determination (preconfigured) Determine the account groups to be used (preconfigured with the PCC) Specify the account groups allowed in the new hierarchy type (preconfigured) Specify the sales areas allowed in the customer hierarchy type (preconfigured) Assign hierarchy type to the Internet sales order type for pricing (preconfigured) g~ If you installing the Online Store using the Online Store preconfiguration installation catalog. all the objects described in this chapter are created with preconfigured. The hierarchy type code can be changed during the execution of the CATT. . thus allowing this configuration to fit with existing SD configuration more easily. Although you can use the standard-delivered customer hierarchy type in R/3. for several reasons: n n Not all customers require this scenario.6C \~ a~z| \z The following list describes the procedures involved in setting up the customer hierarchy. such as sales area and the sales order type.JNQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. we configured a new hierarchy type so that existing customer hierarchies would not be affected. default values. Hier. YB. Hier. During installation. or customer. The partner function codes can be changed during the execution of the CATT. Hierarchy Type Y (e-Shop Cust. enter transaction VOPA and choose Enter (or in the IMG. In this way. Hier. On the Maintain Partner Determin.Chapter 8: Multiple Employees Making Purchases for One Corporation JNR In the Command field. regardless of the number of levels used.) Partner Function YD (e-Shop Cust. the next subsequent higher level is YC. choose Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partners → next to Set Partner Customers → Customer Hierarchy and choose Determination for Hierarchy Categories). Hier. the following settings are the same for each partner function: n n n The Partner Typ is KU. screen. 4 YA YB YC Higher-Level Function CustHTyp (Customer Hierarchy Type) Y Y Y Y Additionally. This configuration allows for four levels in the customer hierarchy above the actual customer who is placing the order. The Error Group is 07. and so on. 2 e-Shop Cust. 1 e-Shop Cust. The partner functions YA. The highest level of the hierarchy. and YD have been created with the following settings: Function YA YB YC YD Description e-Shop Cust. . Hier. the entire customer hierarchy is stored in the sales order document. The Unique In cust. according to this configuration. or customer. The lowest level is YD. Hier. choose Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partners → Customers → Customer Hierarchy and choose next to Define Hierarchy Types). YC. 4) YD is the lowest level of the hierarchy or the level immediately above the customer. In the Command field. enter transaction OVH1 and choose Enter (or in the IMG. is always YA. the CATT procedure ZESHOP_CUSTOMER_HIERARCHY creates the correct entries. \~z~ g~ iz~ _| ~ \~ a~z| This step has been preconfigured for you.mast checkbox is deselected. choose Partner functions. 3 e-Shop Cust. Your own account groups may be used instead. Account groups 0001 and 0012 are available in the standard R/3 System. The partner determination type can be changed during the execution of the CATT. YC. and the details are included by choosing Procedure details. the CATT procedure ZESHOP_CUSTOMER_HIERARCHY creates the correct entries. YD) Entry for each hierarchy level (YA. YB. enter transaction VOPA and choose Enter (or in the IMG. the CATT procedure ZESHOP_CUSTOMER_HIERARCHY creates the correct entries.JOI Configuration Guide | Release 4. YA. YB. choose Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partners → next to Set Partner Customers → Customer Hierarchy and choose Determination for Hierarchy Categories). choose Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partners → next to Set Partner Customers → Customer Hierarchy and choose Determination for Hierarchy Categories). screen. enter transaction VOPA and choose Enter (or in the IMG. YD) Account Group 0001 (sold-to party) 0012 (hierarchy node) YWEB (sold-to used for the Internet) The YWEB account group is delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration. These account groups can be changed during the execution of the CATT.6C Z g~ iz~ _| \~ Z|| ` This step has been preconfigured for you. YD) Entry for each hierarchy level (YA. Entry YWO has been created. YB. YB. YC. On the Maintain: Partner Determin. screen. YC. On the Maintain: Partner Determin. Then choose Environment → Acct grp assignment. In the Command field. select Sales document header and choose Partner procedures. During installation. choose Partner functions. . During installation. Partner Function Entry for each hierarchy level (YA. The following assignments were made for all four delivered partner functions. \~z~ g~ iz~ ]~~z i|~}~ lz
~ ]|~ This step has been preconfigured for you. In the Command field. and YD. YC. 4 X X YA (highest level) B (customer hierarchy) B (customer hierarchy) B (customer hierarchy) B (customer hierarchy) 1 Not Mandatory Source Changeable X X X X YA (highest level) YA (highest level) 1 1 Sequ. On the Maintain: Partner Determin. 2 X e-Shop Cust.Order) . the sold-to party is determined as the bill-to party. screen. and choose Partner procedures. 3 X e-Shop Cust.Hier. If a customer hierarchy exists. If no customer hierarchy exists.Hier. In the Command field. Sales Document Partner Determination Procedure YWB (e-Shop Web Bus.Order) Sales Document Type YWB (e-Shop Web Bus. choose Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partners → next to Set Partner Customers → Customer Hierarchy and choose Determination for Hierarchy Categories). and ship-to party. the CATT procedure ZESHOP_CUSTOMER_HIERARCHY creates the correct entries. The sales document type can be changed during the execution of the CATT.Chapter 8: Multiple Employees Making Purchases for One Corporation JOJ Partner determination procedure YWB has been created. and ship-to party from the customer hierarchy. payer.Hier.Hier. choose Procedure assignment. enter transaction VOPA and choose Enter (or in the IMG. 1 X e-Shop Cust. Z iz~ ]~~z i|~}~ b~~ h}~ m~ This step has been preconfigured for you. During installation. On the next screen. The following partner functions have been assigned: Function Description SP BP PY CR SH YA YB YC YD Sold-to Party Bill-to Party Payer Forwarding Agent Ship-to Party e-Shop Cust. the system determines the bill-to party. payer. You may add these partner determination functions to your own sales document partner procedure instead. select Sales document header. 1) YB (e-Shop Cust. During installation. the CATT procedure ZESHOP_CUSTOMER_HIERARCHY creates the correct entries.Hier.JOK Configuration Guide | Release 4. enter transaction VOPA and choose Enter (or in the IMG. screen. the CATT procedure ZESHOP_CUSTOMER_HIERARCHY creates the correct entries. Place your cursor on entry LF.6C Z}} g~ iz~ _| ]~
~ iz~ ]~~z m~ This step has been preconfigured for you.Hier.Hier. 2) YC (e-Shop Cust. Place your cursor on entry FW. and the choose Procedure details). The billing determination type can be changed during the execution of the CATT. Z}} g~ iz~ _| [
a~z}~ iz~ ]~~z m~ This step has been preconfigured for you. During installation. . choose Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partners → Customers → Customer Hierarchy and choose next to Set Partner Determination for Hierarchy Categories). In the Command field. On the Maintain: Partner Determin. The Online Store preconfiguration adds partner functions to the billing partner determination procedure LF. 4) Not Changeable X X X X Mandatory You may add these to your own delivery partner determination procedure instead.Hier. choose Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partners → next to Set Partner Customers → Customer Hierarchy and choose Determination for Hierarchy Categories). select Billing header. and the choose Procedure details). The billing determination type can be changed during the execution of the CATT. Partner Function YA (e-Shop Cust. and choose Partner procedures. and choose Partner procedures. screen. enter transaction VOPA and choose Enter (or in the IMG. In the Command field. On the Maintain: Partner Determin. select Delivery. 3) YD (e-Shop Cust. and for the employees who purchase on behalf of a corporation. 3) YD (e-Shop Cust. . In the Command field. l~| Z|| ` Z
~} ~ \~ a~z| m~ This step has been preconfigured for you. Standard-delivery was modified in the PCC. 2) YC (e-Shop Cust.Hier. Used for customers who register through the web. You may wish to use your own account groups instead. 4) Not Changeable X X X X Mandatory You may add these to your own billing partner determination procedure instead. Account group YWEB is delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration. May be used for hierarchy nodes.Chapter 8: Multiple Employees Making Purchases for One Corporation JOL The Online Store preconfiguration adds partner functions to the billing partner determination procedure FW. Your own account groups may be assigned instead. The account groups used can be changed during the execution of the CATT.Hier.Hier. enter transaction OBD2 and choose Enter (or in the IMG. Account groups 0001 and 0012 are available in the standard R/3 System. ]~~~ Z|| ` m [~ n~} \~ This step has been preconfigured for you. Partner Function YA (e-Shop Cust. the CATT procedure ZESHOP_CUSTOMER_HIERARCHY creates the correct entries. Standard-delivery with R/3.Hier. This guidebook does not discuss additional configuration of account groups. 1) YB (e-Shop Cust. During installation. Delivered with the PCC. The Online Store uses the following account groups for customer hierarchy processing: Group 0001 0012 YWEB Name Sold-to party Hierarchy node Sold-to party Purpose Used for the corporation for which purchases will take place. choose Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable → Customer Accounts → Master Records → Preparations for Creating Customer next to Define Account Groups with Screen Master Records and choose Layout [Customers]). the CATT procedure ZESHOP_CUSTOMER_HIERARCHY creates the correct entries. In the Command field. choose Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partners → Customers → Customer Hierarchy and choose next to Assign Account Groups). Hierarchy Sales Distribution Types Organizations Channel Y 0010 11 Division Higher Level Sales Organization 10 0010 Higher Level Distribution Channel 11 Higher Level Division 10 This sales area is delivered with the PCC. enter transaction OVH2 and choose Enter (or in the IMG.and higher-level customer. Z a~z| m~ ~ b~~ lz
~ h}~ m~ i| This step has been preconfigured for you. This guidebook does not discuss additional configuration of account groups. During installation. The sales areas used can be changed during the execution of the CATT. During installation. . choose Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partners → next to Assign Sales Areas). the CATT procedure ZESHOP_CUSTOMER_HIERARCHY creates the correct entries. Your own sales areas may be assigned instead.6C In the Command field. Customer Hierarchy Type CustHType Y (e-Shop Business) Y (e-Shop Business) Y (e-Shop Business) Account Group (lower level) Acct group 0001 (Sold-to Party) 012 (Hierarchy Node) YWEB (Internet Sold-to Party) Account Group (higher level) HgLvAcctGr 0012 (Hierarchy Node) 0012 (Hierarchy Node) 0001 (Sold-to Party) These account groups were also assigned to the partner procedures in a prior step. Your own account groups may be assigned instead. enter transaction OVH3 and choose Enter (or in the IMG.JOM Configuration Guide | Release 4. Customers → Customer Hierarchy and choose These settings determine the sales areas that can be used in the customer hierarchy for the lower. The sales document type used can be changed during the execution of the CATT. l~| lz
~ Z~z Z
~} ~ \~ a~z| m~ This step has been preconfigured for you. Chapter 8: Multiple Employees Making Purchases for One Corporation JON g~ The order type configured with the customer hierarchy partner determination is linked to the Online Store through the profile for quotation and order control.Order) Sales order type YWB is delivered with the Online Store. can be found online in the SAP Service Marketplace. Hierarchy Type Y (e-Shop Cust. \~| ~ lZi g~ Information from SAP Notes is also essential to the configuration. SAP Notes. “Creating the Online Store with the Catalog” on page 21. enter transaction OVH4 and choose Enter (or in the IMG. choose Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partners → Customers → Customer Hierarchy and choose next to Assign Hierarchy Type for Pricing By Sales Document Type). Hier. See chapter 3. See appendix A.) Sales Order Type YWB (e-Shop Web Bus. formerly OSS Notes and SAPNet – R/3 Frontend Notes. In the Command field. . for details of the profile and of the sales order type. “SAP Notes in the SAP Service Marketplace” on page 387. Your own sales order type may be assigned instead. for informational notes related to this chapter. 6C .JOO Configuration Guide | Release 4. & + $ 3 7 ( 5 JJ \~} \z} Zz z} l~
~~ . pz p~ ]~
~ g~ In the Online Store preconfiguration. and prevents the shipment of a product if the bank does not honor the charge. the FI module requests settlement of the transaction from the merchant bank through the service provider. the information can be immediately passed to the customer before completing the sales process. When the billing document is released to the Financial Accounting (FI) component. billing amount. we provide the following deliverables: n n n Configuration of the settings to establish communications between R/3 and external credit card service providers is not provided in the Online Store preconfiguration. the system copies the credit card information.6C h~~ Credit card authorizations and settlement provide an efficient and convenient way to process payments in an online store.JOQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. and authorization information into the resulting financial accounting document. SAP provides a flexible and secure Payment Card Interface program that works together with the software of selected partners that provide merchant processing or clearinghouse services. this guidebook does provide guidelines for configuring this area. payments arrive more quickly than by sending and processing invoices. For the online merchant. This immediate verification reduces manual authorization handling. The customer can then use a different card. On the basis of this information. With a verification and authorization component. greatly increasing the likelihood of payment. However. If any authorization problems occur. A settlement program creates a financial document that clears the open items and creates open items on a cash clearing account. Preconfiguration of the payment card functionality in Sales and Distribution (SD) Documentation covering the credit card authorization and settlement processes Documentation covering the R/3 communication settings required to work with credit card authorization processing software . the web customer’s credit card and payment information can be forwarded to a clearinghouse for authorization while the customer is online. The cash clearing account is then cleared once the money has been credited to your account. R/3 creates an order and sends the order number to the web. R/3 then communicates with the clearing house. the system checks whether a valid authorization exists. the following information is copied from the sales order to the financial accounting document: n n n n n Payer Card number Amount Transaction number Authorization number l~
~~ The financial documents created during the billing process result in debit entries to an accounts receivable account from the merchant bank. the order request is sent to the R/3 System. If the authorization is denied.Chapter 9: Credit Card Authorizations and Settlement JOR fz b az~ \~} \z} Zz The credit card authorization process is integrated with standard Sales and Distribution (SD) sales order processing. When a customer pays for goods and services with a credit card. Use settlement transaction FCC1 (or from the navigation menu. the sales order provides the following information to the clearinghouse for authorization: n n n n n Credit card number Cardholder address Amount to be authorized Card expiration date Card type When the customer places the order from the Internet. General Ledger (G/L) account 125300 (Accounts Receivable – Payment Card) has been established for this purpose. When a goods issue posts for the delivery. The customer accounts receivables are automatically cleared in the same accounting documents. When the billing document is forwarded to FI. the system again checks for a valid authorization. If the authorization is approved. which either approves or denies the amount. R/3 sends a message to the customer on the Internet informing the customer of the denial. A request for payment through the clearinghouse initiates the settlement process. choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable → Periodic . When a sales order delivery is created with a credit card payment. choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable → Periodic Processing → Payment Cards → Display logs). a settlement document is created. Five partners are currently certified: CyberCash. For each package. TrustMarque. and XI Technologies. The Payment Card Interface is described in detail in a document entitled “Payment Card Interface to R/3 – Integration Scenarios. G/L account 113034 has been established as a subledger account under the merchant bank account. In the Command field. A report can be run that shows all of the accounting documents included in a settlement batch. clearing the open items in the receivables account (125300). choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable → Periodic Processing → Payment Cards → Standard reports). Trintech. and posting a credit entry in a cash clearing account (113034). The clearinghouse software subsequently “calls back” R/3 to log a response. Detail logs of the settlement batches can be viewed using transaction FCC4 (or from the navigation menu. It provides Remote Function Call (RFC) communication between R/3 and external financial institutions such as banks. This transaction creates settlement packages (batches) per company code.6C Processing → Payment Cards → Settle). enter transaction FCCR and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. G/L account. The item clears from the clearing account when payment is made to the merchant’s bank account. credit services. The batches are transmitted to the clearinghouse for settlement. Receives output data from R/3 Converts R/3 data to the requested format of the financial institution Sends data to the service provider Obtains a response from the service provider Maps the response message back to R/3 The credit card processing vendor is responsible for: n n n n n Correct interpretation of R/3 data Conversion to and from the financial institution’s data structure Communication protocols between application software and financial institutions Transfer of data back to R/3 Technical communication between computer systems .JPI Configuration Guide | Release 4.” This document can be found in SAPNet. g~ The interface program performs the following functions: n n n n n SAP has a certification procedure to ensure that partners meet the requirements for successful connection of their systems to R/3. Paylinx. iz~ \z} b~z|~ The authorization and settlement functions described above are integrated processes with an external (non-R/3) system. The Payment Card Interface is application software that acts as a bridge between SAP’s R/3 System and a third-party credit card processing vendor. and transaction currency. or merchant services to support the authorization and settlement of credit card payments. You can specify a range of acceptable numbers for each credit card. such as P-cards. On the Choose activity dialog box. refer to the IMG. Procurement cards (P-cards) are not configured. and American Express use a checking algorithm to validate the card numbers. ]~~~ \z} \z~~ From the IMG. choose Sales and Distribution → Billing → Payment Cards and choose next to Maintain Card Categories. MasterCard. For consistency. Type VISA MC Seq Ops Payment Cards from 1 BT 1 BT 40000000000000000 50000000000000000 30000000000000000 Payment Cards to 49999999999999999 59999999999999999 39999999999999999 Card Cat Description 01 01 01 Credit Card Credit Card Credit Card AMEX 1 BT Z Z|| In the Command field.Chapter 9: Credit Card Authorizations and Settlement JPJ iz~ \z} \z Much of what is necessary for credit card processing to work with Visa. g~ Although a function exists for Diner’s Club. enter transaction OV87 and choose Enter (or from the IMG. and choose Sales and Distribution → Billing → Payment Cards. and American Express payment cards is included in R/3. all standard-delivered cards are linked to a single G/L account. This section only describes those tables that require configuration additions or changes for credit card processing. In this scenario. the Diner’s Club card is not a standard-delivered card type. we set a range of numbers acceptable to standard card types. For all credit card configurations. A receivables account must be defined and linked to each of the payment card types available. This table is more important for those cards that do not have these checking functions. Applicatio n VD VD VD Condition Type A001 A001 A001 Chart of Accounts 0010 0010 0010 Sales Organization 0010 0010 0010 Card Type Visa MC Amex G/L Account 125300 125300 125300 . Card types Visa. choose Sales and Distribution → Billing → Payment Cards → Authorization and Settlement → Maintain Clearing House → Account Determination and choose next to Assign G/L Accounts). MasterCard. select Determine card categories and choose Choose. and so it is not included in the preconfiguration at this time. it simulates a call to an RFC server that effectively returns an acceptance of the authorization. \ ~ \|z This section describes the communication settings that must be configured in R/3 to work with a credit card authorization and payment product. The Online Store preconfiguration uses the delivered functions to simulate credit card authorizations. choose Sales and Distribution → Billing → Payment Cards → Authorization and Settlement → Maintain Clearing House and choose next to Set Authorization/Settlement Control Per Account. You must create an RFC destination that specifies the communication type and installation . and for credit card settlement are specified.6C l~ Zz z} l~
~~ Z|| g~ SAP delivers the function modules CCARD_AUTH_SIMULATION and CCARD_SETTLEMENT_SIMULATION so you can test the authorization process without integration to your clearinghouse’s software. SAP delivers simulation functions in R/3 that must be replaced with functions in RFC destinations. Because the simulated authorization and settlement functions in the preconfigured system do not actually perform a remote function call. These simulations can be done without having to configure the communication between R/3 and the third-party service provider. Chart Of Accounts 0010 Receivable 125300 Clearing 113034 Authorization Function/Destination CCARD_AUTH_SIMULATION Settlement Function CCARD_SETTLEMENT_SIMULATION The function modules CCARD_AUTH_SIMULATION and CCARD_SETTLEMENT_SIMULATION simulate remote function calls to a third-party vendor’s RFC server ID. a receivables account and clearing account are assigned for each chart of accounts. ]~~ z i|z
]~z Communications between R/3 and credit card payment processing software are established using SAP Remote Function Calls (RFC). After receiving the software from your clearinghouse. The following section describes how you would change these settings when integrating R/3 with a third party’s software product. For credit card transactions. From the IMG.JPK Configuration Guide | Release 4. These steps can be followed when integrating any certified credit card payment processing software product. When a sales order is saved in the Online Store. the names of the functions called for credit card authorizations. In addition. replace the simulated function names with ones that match the external RFC server program names. the RFC destinations in the authorization and settlement controls have not been entered. mz 'HILQH D SK\VLFDO GHVWLQDWLRQ JG In the Command field. LG On the RFC Destination screen: zG In RFC destination. enter T. {G In Connection type. . choose Basis Components → System Administration → Management of External Security Systems → Secure Network Communications → Communication → RFC Remote Function Call and choose next to Define RFC destination).Chapter 9: Credit Card Authorizations and Settlement JPL directory path for the authorization service executable. {G Choose Create. KG On the Display and maintain RFC destinations screen: zG Select TCP/IP connections. enter a user-defined name. enter SM59 and choose Enter (or in the IMG. Set up the RFC destination as a TCP/IP communication protocol. enter a short description text. The destination name is user-defined. |G Under Description. JPM Configuration Guide | Release 4. MG On the RFC Destination PAYMENTCARD screen.6C }G Choose . select Registration. Registration button . and enter the RFC destination created in the previous section. where the instance is the system number of your R/3 System (in this example. enter the gateway service name.K. OG On the RFC Destination PAYMENTCARD dialog box: zG In Gateway host. l~| Zz z} l~
~~ _| You should replace the standard-delivered functions with the external RFC function modules appropriate for your service provider. choose Destination → Gateway options. enter the appropriate program ID for the authorization service provider (for example. the Cybercash program that handles authorization and settlement requests is called PAYCARD). {G In Gateway service. the R/3 System is 00).Chapter 9: Credit Card Authorizations and Settlement NG On the RFC Destination PAYMENTCARD screen: JPN zG In Program ID. . enter the IP address of the RFC gateway computer. |G Choose O. The name should be in the format SAPGW<instance>. {G From the menu bar. {G In Settlement. In both fields.6C mz 6SHFLI\ DXWKRUL]DWLRQ DQG VHWWOHPHQW IXQFWLRQV JG From the IMG. enter the authorization function module for the credit card processing software (for example. choose Sales and Distribution → Billing → Payment Cards → next Authorization and Settlement → Maintain Clearing House and choose to Maintain Merchant IDs. PAYMENTCARD). From the IMG. RFC destination of functions fields fzz f~|z b] If you specifically use Cybercash. for Cybercash enter CC_AUTHORIZATION). you must maintain the merchant IDs. for Cybercash enter CC_SETTLEMENT). . The number defined in R/3 must match the merchant ID number configured in the WebAuthorize server. |G An RFC destination of functions field resides under both Authorization control functions and Settlement control functions. }G Choose . The ID number must be defined in R/3 and assigned to an A/R account.JPO Configuration Guide | Release 4. enter the RFC destination name you entered for step 3a in the previous procedure. “Define a Physical Destination” on page 172 (for example. A merchant ID is a unique number assigned by the merchant bank to ensure that payment is credited to the appropriate merchant during settlement. choose Sales and Distribution → Billing → Payment Cards → next Authorization and Settlement → Maintain Clearing House and choose to Set Authorization / Settlement Control Per Account. enter the settlement function module for the credit card processing software (for example. KG From the Change View "Clearing account/external functions": Details screen: zG In Authorization. you must create a user ID. The ID and password are specified as parameters in a configuration file required for defining the RFC server. . after a settlement request is made through the WebAuthorize. Therefore. To create the user ID. WebAuthorize processing server must establish a connection to R/3 through an SAP user ID before communicating the settlement results. a response is sent back to R/3.Chapter 9: Credit Card Authorizations and Settlement JPP \~z~ z n~ b] In Cybercash. choose Tools → Administration → User Maintenance→ Users. from the navigation menu. 6C .JPQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. & + $ 3 7 ( 5 JK lz
~ h}~ lz . The sales order status check is an Internet Application Component (IAC) that allows customers to see the status of all of their orders in the delivery process. They will need to know whether the order has been shipped and when they can expect to receive it.JQI Configuration Guide | Release 4. The tracking information appears in a separate browser window. 24 hours a day. customers may wish to track the order’s status. pz p~ ]~
~ In the Online Store preconfiguration. If you permit partial deliveries of an order. including orders not generated through the Internet. we provide the following deliverables: n n n n Preconfiguration of the URLs of the most common freight carriers Preconfiguration of the ITS look and feel Sample master data for freight carriers (if the Online Store preconfiguration is implemented in conjunction with the PCC) Documentation on the functionality of the freight carrier tracking integration If the First delivery/tracking column contains a hyperlink. order number. If freight carrier information is maintained in the delivery document. Customers can track any of their orders. The sales order status check is carried out using the information in the delivery document within R/3. By providing this data on the Internet. The sales order status check then reads the delivery document and displays the order and delivery information. customer service representatives can spend less time researching information that customers can access electronically. the freight carrier web site can be directly accessed. They can track all their orders.6C h~~ After placing an order. This works only if a real tracking number is entered in the delivery document. a hyperlink to the freight carrier’s web site is also available. The freight carrier and tracking number are entered at the header level of the delivery document. and purchase order number. product number. . Only one delivery can be tracked for a sales order. the customer can only access the first of these deliveries from the sales order status check. and multiple packages are sent. since the tracking information is entered at header level. or limit the display by date. On the web through sales order entry using transaction VW01. If you want the customer to use a link to the freight carrier web site. First delivery/tracking column fz b az~S lz
~ h}~ lz i|~}~ ]~
~ i|~ l h}~ mz| For an order to reach the R/3 System. A delivery is typically created from the sales order. the following information must be entered into the delivery document: n n The freight carrier as a partner in the header The tracking number in the Bill of lading field of the delivery header . the order may be entered: n n n Directly into R/3 using transaction VA01. On the web through the Online Store using transaction WW20.Chapter 10: Sales Order Status JQJ The details of the selected order appear in the right frame of the browser. Normal sales order processing takes place after the information reaches R/3. the first variable is usually the tracking number. Portions of the URL are specific to each delivery. replacing the variable. If the delivery document contains the appropriate information.dhl. the function module for the first variable reads the specific information from the delivery document. For example.com/track/track.post-track?awb=9999999999&origin=<COUNTRY> R/3 table TCAURL contains the URL for each freight carrier. ]~~ ~ nke ~ _~ \z~ TCAURL http://www.6C Web Sales Order Entry VW01 Online Store WW20 Sales Order Status VW10 Order VA01 Order R/3 Delivery The sales order status process selects the delivery documents associated with the selected customer order.post-track?awb=<AWBN>&origin=<COUNTRY> TCAVAR AWBN: WS_READ_AIRWAYBILLNUMBER Delivery LIKP-BOLNR http://www. These portions of the URL are stored as variables in table TCAURL. a URL must be built by the R/3 System to allow access to the freight carrier’s web site. such as an individual tracking number.dhl. Then .com/track/track. it is inserted into the URL. these variables must be filled with details from the delivery document. Each variable defined in table TCAVAR is linked to a function module.JQK Configuration Guide | Release 4. After the tracking number is read from the delivery document. When a customer accesses their sales order status. As the URL is built. must then be read from the delivery document. but only if you use the Online Store preconfiguration in conjunction with the Preconfigured Client (PCC) in a fresh installation. destination country. you need to create a vendor master record for each freight carrier manually. such as the country.Chapter 10: Sales Order Status JQL the second variable. enter transaction XK01 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. Postal Service – Tracking number Airborne Express – Tracking number Emery Worldwide – Type of tracking number (hard-coded in our delivery document as shipping number) and tracking number ]zz kHL l lz
~ h}~ lz mz| The following sections describe the steps involved in setting up sales order tracking. The following information needs to be read from the delivery document for each of the carriers: n n n n n n Federal Express – Tracking number.S. and shipping date UPS – Tracking number DHL – Tracking number and destination country U. choose Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Master Data → Vendor → Central → Create). You should only create a vendor master for those freight carriers with whom you do business. as described below. . You must: n n n n Create a vendor master for each freight carrier (preconfigured if using the Online Store preconfiguration with the PCC) Ensure that all data is correctly entered into each delivery document Ensure that the correct parameters are entered in the ITS user’s profile Ensure that the customer exists in the R/3 System and has been assigned a password \~z~ z o~} fz~ ~z| _~ \z~ CATT procedure ZESHOP_FREIGHT_CARRIERS creates sample master data. and the entire hyperlink to the freight carrier has been built. Otherwise. mz &UHDWH D YHQGRU PDVWHU UHFRUG IRU HDFK IUHLJKW FDUULHU JG In the Command field. This process continues until all variables in the URL have been replaced. {G Enter all other information as it pertains to the freight carrier for your company. choose . zG In Company code. enter the purchase organization of the vendor. {G In Purch. . enter the freight carrier. |G In Account group.JQM Configuration Guide | Release 4. please substitute the values of your own organizational elements in these fields. }G Choose . organization. The technical name for the Name field is LFA1-NAME1. enter the company code for which you wish to create the vendor. This name should correspond to the object ID entered in table TCAURL in configuration. on this and all other screens in the vendor master record. |G When you are done. LG On the Create Vendor: Address screen: zG In Name. If you are not using the PCC.6C KG On the Create Vendor: Initial Screen: g~ The field values shown are only available if you use the Online Store preconfiguration with the PCC. enter the account group of the vendor. choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation → Outbound Delivery → Display). enter transaction VL03N and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. KG On the Display Outbound Delivery screen: zG In Outbound delivery. .Chapter 10: Sales Order Status JQN ^~ \~| ]zz b ^~~} ~ ]~
~ ]|~ The next step to support sales order tracking is to ensure that the correct data is entered into the delivery document. {G Choose . The items included in this delivery appear. LG On the Outbound delivery <XXXXX> Display: Overview screen: zG Review the items included in the delivery. enter the delivery document number displayed on the Internet. {G Choose the menu path Goto → Header → Shipment. This transactional data must be entered on all delivery documents for the freight carrier tracking integration to function correctly. mz 9HULI\ WKH GDWD LQ WKH GHOLYHU\ GRFXPHQW JG In the Command field. choose Goto → Header → Partners. only one delivery can be displayed in the sales order status tracking on the web. (partner function) column. for details on consumer master records. “Customers in the Online Store” on page 119. or freight carrier. The Incoterms default from the sales order created on the web. NG Back on the Outbound delivery <XXXXX> Display: Overview screen. funct. {G Choose . g~ Because the bill of lading is a headerlevel field. The BillOfLad (bill of lading) field contains the tracking number assigned by the carrier (the number is disguised here). g~ The freight carrier may be entered manually. OG On the Outbound delivery <XXXXX> Display: Header Details screen.6C MG On the Outbound delivery <XXXXX> Display: Header Details screen: zG Review the information. the CR partner type designates the forwarding agent. review the information. See chapter 7. .JQO Configuration Guide | Release 4. the vendor number specifies the freight carrier used for the delivery. In the Partn. In the Partner column. or default from the reference for consumer master records. To double-check the ITS user’s profile parameters. “ITS Templates” on page 215. enter transaction SU05 in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business partners → Customer → Create → Complete). as defined in table TCAVAR (standard-delivery) Determine the logon method for the sales order status (preconfigured) . See chapter 14. choose Tools → Administration → User Maintenance → Internet User). for details about customers in IACs. enter transaction SU01 in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. the correct parameters must be entered in the Internet Transaction Server (ITS) user’s profile.Chapter 10: Sales Order Status JQP ^~ \~| izz~~ Z~ ^~~} ~ bml n~@ i
~ In the next step to supporting sales order status. The ITS user that is logged into the R/3 System in the background during the sales order status transaction must have the correct sales area parameters in the user profile. for details on the ITS user. “The ITS User: Logging on to R/3” on page 235. lz
~ h}~ lz \z The following sections describe the steps involved in setting up the sales order status configuration. and for instructions on how to make changes to the ITS HTML Business templates. See chapter 14. The Internet user must be created using object type KNA1. To create the customer master record. You must: g~ n n n n For the changes we deliver to the look and feel of the sales order status functionality. enter transaction XD01 in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. for details about the Internet user. “The ITS User: Logging on to R/3” on page 235. To create the Internet user. Verify that delivery type partner procedure contains partner type CR (standard-delivery) Enter all URLs for the freight carriers in table TCAURL (preconfigured) Ensure that all variables in the URLs are read from the delivery document using a function module. The customer master record must already exist for the sales area used for the Internet. The customer must already have a customer number with a valid e-mail address and password. See chapter 7. ^~ ~ \~ ^ kHL z} az [~~ Z~} z iz} New customers may not register using the sales order status IAC. “Customers in the Online Store” on page 119. choose Tools → Administration → User Maintenance → Users). see chapter 13. com/cgibin/track_it?trk_num=<AWBN>&dest_cntry=<DES_CTRY>& ship_date=<SHIPDATE> . Object Type TRACK_URL TRACK_URL TRACK_URL Object ID AIRBORNE DHL FEDEX URL http://www. The following entry should be configured as part of your partner determination procedure.airborne. enter transaction SM30 in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. choose Sales and Distribution → Basic next to Define Partner Functions → Partner Determination and choose Functions). Select the partner determination procedure you use in your system.dhl. The table below lists the table entries. and choose the Procedure details button. and choose the Partner procedures button. DHL and FEDEX are standarddelivered entries.com/track/track.posttrack?awb=<AWBN>&origin=<COUNTRY> http://www. enter transaction VOPA in the Command field and choose Enter (or in the IMG. choose System → Services → Table maintenance → Extended table maintenance).6C o~ ]~
~ m~ iz~ i|~}~ \z iz~ m~ \k To configure sales order status. Choose partner object Delivery.JQQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. This step is preconfigured for you only if you are using the partner determination for delivery documents LF (standard-delivered) or ZLF (PCC-delivered) in your delivery types. If you changed the settings for this delivery partner determination. the first step is to verify that the delivery type partner procedure contains partner type CR.com/cgibin/AirbillTrace?ShipmentNumber=<AWBN> http://www. or created your own. All other freight carriers are added by the preconfiguration. To display these settings.fedex. To check for partner type CR. The entry for UPS has been changed in the Online Store preconfiguration. This step has been preconfigured for you. In Table/view enter TCAURL and choose Display. you must make sure the following settings are configured in your system. Partner Function CR (forwarding agent) Not Changeable (blank) Mandatory Functions (blank) ^~ z
nke ~ _~ \z~ mz{
~ m\Znke The second step in configuring sales order status is to enter freight carrier URLs in the table TCAURL. cgi?tracknum=<A WBN> http://www. . enter transaction SM30 in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. ]~~~ e f~} ~ lz
~ h}~ lz The next step in sales order status configuration is to determine the logon method. This change makes the processing consistent for all sellside applications. The service file in the AGate directory structure of the ITS has been modified to allow a customer to log on with an e-mail address instead of with a customer number. These function modules read data from the delivery document.ups. To display these settings.OBJID <AWBN> <COUNTRY> <DES_CITY> <SHIPDATE> Function Name . Object Type . The service files are located in the ITS AGate directory under the directory structure <its_root>\services. choose System → Services → Table maintenance → Extended table maintenance).com/cgibin/track.cgi?submit&tracknbr=<AWBN> http://www1.OBJTYPE URL URL URL URL Object ID .cgi?TYPE=SHIPNUM&PRO1=<AWBN> The Object ID must be used as the vendor name for the forwarding agents. The standard-delivered functions are used in this table. you must also ensure that all variables in the URLs are read from the delivery document.FUNCNAME WS_READ_AIRWAYBILLNUMBER WS_READ_COUNTRY_OF_ORIGIN WS_READ_DEST_COUNTRY WS_READ_SHIPDATE The Object ID corresponds to the variables in the URL of table TCAURL. where the <its_root> is your virtual ITS installation.usps.emeryworld. This step has been preconfigured for you.Chapter 10: Sales Order Status JQR Object Type TRACK_URL TRACK_URL TRACK_URL Object ID UPS USPS EMERY URL http://wwwapps. The data is then used to build the URL that accesses the freight carrier’s web site. In Table/view enter TCAVAR and choose Display.com/tracking/tracking. The Function Name field specifies the function module to which each variable is linked. ^~ z
ozz{
~ nke Z~ k~z} ]~
~ ]|~ To configure the sales order status.gov/cgibin/cttgate/ontrack. SAP Notes. \~| ~ lZi g~ Information from SAP Notes is also essential to the configuration.6C In the service file vw10. . “SAP Notes in the SAP Service Marketplace” on page 387.srvc.JRI Configuration Guide | Release 4. can be found online in the SAP Service Marketplace. See appendix A. delete this parameter from the service file. for informational notes related to this chapter. the following parameter has been added to allow customers to log on using their e-mail addresses: Parameter Name ~customeridentification Value email If you prefer customers to log on using a customer number. formerly OSS Notes and SAPNet – R/3 Frontend Notes. & + $ 3 7 ( 5 JL Zz
z{
~FFi~ . based on either the unreserved stock of a product or the ATP rules. we provide the following deliverables: n n Preconfiguration of the ITS look and feel Documentation on the functionality of the ATP functionality TechTalk In the standard R/3 System.JRK Configuration Guide | Release 4. pz p~ ]~
~ In the Online Store preconfiguration. we assume your company’s product catalog information has been generated in a text version and is located on the web server. A customer can log in. a sample product catalog is delivered. To use this product catalog. see appendix B. such as other order commitments. If the Online Store preconfiguration is used in conjunction with the Preconfigured Client (PCC) in a fresh install. “Add-On for ATP in the Product Catalog” on page 391. . As part of the Online Store preconfiguration. For additional details. If it is not. and the date on which the remainder of the requested quantity of the product will be available. and enter the desired quantity and delivery date of the product. is accessible from the Internet. The information returned is the quantity currently available.6C h~~ Customers may wish to know whether the product they wish to buy is in stock. the steps in the master data section must still be processed manually during installation. search a text-based product catalog. The available-to-promise (ATP) information. the product catalog only provides a very high-level availability check at the time the order is submitted on the web. a separate IAC (Internet Application Component) is provided. we provide an add-on that allows you to display item availability within the product catalog. ATP can be configured to include or exclude anticipated events that influence inventory levels. The real-time data from R/3 lets the customer know whether the product is available. Yet scrolling the catalog gives no indication about whether a product is actually in stock. they may want to wait if they know when the product will be available again. or anticipated receipts through purchases and production schedules. customers can still determine when a regularly ordered product will be available. This availability check within the product catalog is different from the IAC discussed in this chapter. already configured as part of the sales and distribution functionality within R/3. For this type of availability information to be accessible on the Internet. ]~~~ i}| Zz
z{
When the customer seeks material availability information. Although accessing this information requires a separate task outside the Online Store. The R/3 transaction CKAV runs the available-to-promise function. . you can verify that the data shown on the Internet matches what is in the R/3 System.Chapter 11: Available-to-Promise JRL The availability information displays as follows on the Internet: g~ A customer cannot use an e-mail address to log on and obtain ATP information. provided that the ATP configuration for the web includes all the stock included in the MRP list. Within the company. however. m~ o~ b}~ r \z ]
z ~ \~} l| k~~~ e kHL The stock requirements data in R/3 contains the same quantities displayed on the Internet. The customer does not see the R/3 screen. Use R/3 transaction MD04 to display the corresponding stock requirement list. ATP information is often only made available to business partners of a company who already have a relationship with the business and who already have customer numbers. JRM Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C The quantity of product already committed to a sales order is subtracted from available stock. we demonstrate how to take existing ATP information and make it available on the web. This section provides a high-level overview of what information is included in an ATP check. If a product is not available. is added to available stock. Date 07/31 07/31 08/10 Material 233 233 233 Inventory 100 -50 +200 250 Description Opening stock balance Committed: customer order Planned: production order ATP quantity . This chapter is not intended to be a thorough discussion of how ATP should be configured in your system. This data allows for a more accurate estimate of the delivery date than if only the unrestricted stock in inventory and material lead-time were checked. The ATP IAC uses this information to determine the planned availability date of the product required by the Internet customer. and how much stock is expected to be received or produced in the future. the date on which it is expected to be available is confirmed. fz b az~S Zz
z{
~FFi~ i|~}~ In the following sections. provided that ATP is configured to include this information. based on purchases and production orders. The ATP check in the example below is configured to determine how much stock is available. and how the Internet accesses the ATP rules. The product quantity expected to be placed into inventory. ZmiS a f| b~ b Zz
z{
~X The ATP check within the Sales and Distribution (SD) component verifies the availability of a product to be sold. Current stock level This screen shows dates associated with the events relating to product availability. how much has already been committed to another customer. You must: n Create the product catalog in R/3 (preconfigured if the Online Store preconfiguration is used in conjunction with the PCC. The configuration indicates which types of inventory. if a customer ordered 100 items on 08/01. “Creating the Online Store with the Catalog” on page 21. for details) Generate the product catalog data for the web server (see the Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide) Place the product catalog files on the web server (see the Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide) Ensure that the correct parameters are entered in the ITS user’s profile (preconfigured) n n n . commitments. The second checking rule used by the IAC is the checking rule for sales orders (value A). due to the current customer commitments and the receipt into inventory that is planned based on the scheduled production order completion date. ZmiS p| \z b n~} ~ b~~X In the configuration of the Internet Application Component (IAC) for available-to-promise. and receipts are included in the ATP calculation. fz~ ]zz kHL l Zmi The following sections describe the steps involved in setting up data in R/3 to support ATP.Chapter 11: Available-to-Promise JRN In the example above. Material Master Checking Rule Sales View: General/Plant Sales Order (A) Availability Check User Exit (optional) ATP Configuration The material master record contains a checking rule for the availability check in the Sales: General/Plant view. This checking rule can only be changed with a user exit. The ATP configuration occurs for the combination of the availability check and checking rule. this quantity could not be confirmed until 08/10. the same ATP logic used within R/3 is also used for the Internet. see chapter 3. To create the product catalog. you must manually place the product catalog files generated in the previous step on the web server. See chapter 14. Chapter 4. See the Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide for details. Otherwise. you must generate the product catalog data for the web server manually.JRO Configuration Guide | Release 4. “Creating the Online Store with the Catalog” discusses the Online Store and contains references to other chapters that discuss additional business issues surrounding the product catalog. The data files in the WGate directory structure of the ITS must be updated with the newly generated product catalog information. “Creating the Product Catalog” discusses the creation of the product catalog. `~~z~ ~ i}| \zz
]zz ~ p~{ l~~ To support the ATP configuration. Chapter 3. including pricing and creating customers. enter transaction WWM1 in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. i
z|~ ~ i}| \zz
_
~ ~ p~{ l~~ For the ATP configuration. you need to manually create the product catalog. The Java applet reads only this text-based version of the catalog. In our example. choose Logistics → Product Catalog → Product Catalog → Create).6C n Ensure that the customer exists in the R/3 System and has been assigned a password \~z~ ~ i}| \zz
kHL If you use the Online Store preconfiguration in conjunction with the PCC in a fresh installation. ^~ ~ \~| izz~~ Z~ ^~~} ~ bml n~@ i
~ The ITS user that is logged into the R/3 System in the background during the available-to-promise IAC must have the correct plant parameter in the user profile. for details on the ITS user. The data service files are located in the ITS directory on the web server. . the CATT procedure ZESHOP_PROD_CATALOG creates sample master data. “The ITS User: Logging on to R/3” on page 235. we used Microsoft’s Internet Information Server (IIS). See the Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide for details. The customer master record must already exist for the sales area being used for the Internet. The Internet user must be created using object type KNA1. If the ITS user parameter for the plant should not be used. which must be linked to an enhancement project using enhancement component W61V0001. “Customers in the Online Store” on page 119. you must verify the availability checking rule used for your products. “The ITS User: Logging on to R/3” on page 235. You must: g~ n n n n n Verify the availability checking rule for your products Check the default checking rule for the IAC Check the default ATP settings used by the IAC for insufficient stock Modify the Java applet configuration. The default rule delivered with the standard R/3 System may have been changed in your implementation. enter transaction SU05 in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. for details about the Internet user. choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business partners → Customer → Create → Complete). Zmi \z The following sections describe the steps involved in setting up ATP configuration. See chapter 7. ^~ ~ \~ ^ kHL z} az z iz} New customers may not register using the ATP IAC. choose Tools → Administration → User Maintenance → Internet User). see chapter 13. enter transaction SU01 in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. and instructions on how to make changes to the ITS HTML Business templates. See chapter 14. for details about customers in IACs. To create the Internet user. Our example. To create the customer master record.Chapter 11: Available-to-Promise JRP To double-check the ITS user’s profile parameters. logic to determine the plant must be coded into the user exit EXIT_SAPLW61V_001. enter transaction XD01 in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. The customer must already have a customer number and password. if desired Check the SAP Notes in the SAP Service Marketplace For changes that we deliver for the look and feel of the ATP functionality. uses the . o~ ~ Zz
z{
\~| k
~ r i}| For ATP configuration. “ITS Templates” on page 215. choose Tools → Administration → User Maintenance → Users). sales organization. Availability Checking Rule 02 (Individual requirements) All other columns are blank. enter transaction OVZ9 and choose Enter (or in the IMG. The example in our sample product catalog uses checking group 02. choose Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements → Availability Check → Availability Check with ATP Logic or Against Planning and choose next to Carry Out Control For Availability Check). choose Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately). To maintain the correct value in the material master record.JRQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. You can only change the checking rule used for the ATP IAC with the user exit EXIT_SAPLW61V_001. . which must be linked to an enhancement project using enhancement component W61V0001. you must check the default checking rule used by the IAC. which stipulates that individual requirements are generated during sales and delivery processing. enter transaction OVZ2 in the Command field and choose Enter (or in the IMG. The default rule delivered with the standard R/3 System may have been changed in your implementation. To verify the availability checking rule. The ATP service uses the checking rule A for sales and distribution. This configuration is performed for the combination of the material checking rule (02) and the sales order checking rule (A). This value must be populated in the Sales: general/plant view of the material master. Total Sales A (single records) Total Delivery A (single records) \~| ~ ]~z
\~| k
~ n~} { ~ bZ\ As you configure for ATP.6C availability checking rule 02.$&¶V GHIDXOW FKHFNLQJ UXOH JG In the Command field. and distribution channel. enter transaction MM02 in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. The Sales: General/Plant view must be maintained with your plant. mz &KHFNLQJ WKH . choose Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements → Availability Check → Availability Check with ATP Logic or Against Planning and choose next to Define Checking Groups). \~| ~ ]~z
Zmi l~ n~} { ~ bZ\ b|~ l| For ATP configuration. you must check the default ATP settings used by the IAC for insufficient stock. only unrestricted stock is included in the available quantity. g~ The inclusion of production orders in the availability checking rule above is not turned on in the standard-delivered R/3 System. Because dialog boxes are not supported by the IAC. the system automatically substitutes full delivery for these settings. the expected date of the goods receipt is used by ATP. determines how the system reacts when insufficient stock exists for a requirement entered by a customer. enter transaction OVZJ in the Command field and choose Enter (or in the IMG. In the Stocks group box. If purchase orders and production orders are included. If sales requirements are taken into account. the reserved stock for orders is subtracted from the available stock. choose Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements → Availability Check → Availability Check with ATP Logic or next to Define Default Settings). delivered with the standard R/3 System. Additionally.Chapter 11: Available-to-Promise JRR KG The Change View “Availability Check Control”: Details screen below shows an example of settings that may be used for the ATP check. for certain planning data to be included in ATP—such as requirements generated by sales order—MRP must be configured and requirements must be passed to MRP from the sales order item. The Replenishment lead time is not taken into account. This setting. the lead time would need to be maintained in one of the following views in the material master: n n n Purchasing MRP 1 MRP 2 The Receipts/Issues group box determines which types of documents are included in the ATP check. If it were taken into account. To check the IAC’s default settings for insufficient stock. Against Planning and choose . Blocked and reserved stock is excluded. The setting E ensures that even if only a partial quantity is available.HTML stores the applet parameters. The HTML Business template SAPMAVCK_1200. that quantity is already confirmed in the sales order. Sales Organization 0010 Distribution Channel 11 Division Fixed date and quantity 10 Availability Checking Rule E f} ~ czz Z
~ \z A Java applet executes the ATP functionality. We use setting E in our examples. The next table shows the changeable parameters. The following code calls the Java applet. Because a unique distribution channel 11 is used only for Internet orders in our preconfiguration. $33/(7 QDPH FDWDORJ$SSOHW DUFKLYH FDWDORJ]LS FRGHEDVH CPLPH85/ aQDPH FODVVHV aODQJXDJH . which indicates the delivery proposal is used in case of shortages. no conflict occurs with normal order entry within R/3.6C The configuration of the availability checking rule not only affects the ATP IAC.KII Configuration Guide | Release 4. but also the confirmation of available items when products in an Online Store order are confirmed. QWHUQHW 3$5$0 QDPH SURGXFWV YDOXH CPLPH85/ aQDPH GDWDPDWHULDOVW[W .C FRGH FDWDORJ$SSOHWFODVV ZLGWK KHLJKW PD\VFULSW! 3$5$0 QDPH FDEEDVH YDOXH FDWDORJFDE! ([SORUHU WR GRZQORDG WKH FDE ILOH ! 7HOOV . C! 3$5$0 QDPH KLHUDUFK\ YDOXH CPLPH85/ aQDPH GDWDKLHUDUFK\W[W . C! 3$5$0 QDPH EJ&RORU YDOXH &&&! The following parameters can be modified if desired: Parameter Product value Hierarchy value BgColor Description Value Location and name of the file that <wwwroot>/sap/its/mimes/ckav/<the contains the materials in each product me>/<language>/data/materials.txt C0C0C0 (grey) .txt group of the catalog Location and name of the file that contains the product catalog layout Background color of the tab in the window that displays the product catalog hierarchy and products <wwwroot>/sap/its/mimes/ckav/<the me>/<language>/data/hierarchy. “SAP Notes in the SAP Service Marketplace” on page 387.Chapter 11: Available-to-Promise KIJ For the following example. for informational notes related to this chapter. or red. . \~| ~ lZi g~ Information from SAP Notes is also essential to the configuration. SAP Notes. See appendix A. can be found online in the SAP Service Marketplace. formerly OSS Notes and SAPNet – R/3 Frontend Notes. the background color has been changed to FF0000. KIK Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C . & + $ 3 7 ( 5 JM \~ Z|| bz . In general. The following screens show what you see while displaying the customer account and A/R information. By providing this data on the Internet. The customer cannot change all this data online. . and subsequently whether the payment has cleared.6C h~~ Customers may wish to see their account information on the Internet. Additionally. This is an advantage especially for business partners that do not pay with credit cards. such as address and bank account information.KIM Configuration Guide | Release 4. we provide the following deliverables: n n Preconfiguration of the ITS look and feel Documentation on the functionality of the customer account information Internet Application Component (IAC) \~ Z|| bz The R/3 transaction IKA1 supports the customer account information procedure. after your accounts receivable (A/R) function has been configured. very little additional configuration is required to make account information available to your customers on the Internet. pz p~ ]~
~ In the Online Store preconfiguration. 24 hours a day. You may also wish to provide a telephone number on your web site that your customers can use to contact you. Limited reviewing functionality allows the customer to verify that your internal company records contain the correct information. is not available to your customer on the Internet. the customer may wish to determine whether they have been invoiced for their orders. The A/R line item information is available after invoices and clearing transactions have been processed within the R/3 System. If the customer wishes to make a change. Sensitive internal data. The data shown is sample data and is not delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration. feedback can be sent to you by e-mail directly from the customer account information function. such as a payment block. accounting clerks can spend less time looking up information that customers can access electronically. A list of all paid items that have cleared appears as follows: These invoices have cleared been through A/R. . A consolidated list of an A/R balance looks like this: These transactions include open and cleared items.Chapter 12: Customer Account Information KIN You can view a list of all invoiced items that have not been paid: These invoices have been released to accounting. but have not cleared yet. you can display either the open items or cleared items. The information on this list should match the information displayed on the web.6C m~ o~ b}~ r \z ]
z ~ \~} h~ b~ kHL The open item data in R/3 contains the same information displayed on the Internet.KIO Configuration Guide | Release 4. Depending on the selections made. Within the company. Transaction FBL5N displays the customer line items. A screen showing the open items appears as follows: Open items You can also display a list of cleared items. however. Cleared items . The customer does not see the R/3 screen. you can verify that the data shown on the Internet matches that in the R/3 System. A red appears beside open items and a green appears beside cleared items. we demonstrate how to make existing customer and A/R information available on the web.Bank . Web R/3 Customer Master . Once logged on. Internet customers must keep track of two passwords if they wish to access multiple IACs. but for which payment (clearing) has not yet been processed. bank account information. such as open items and cleared items. This password is not created through a . including their address and contact details. Because passwords are linked to the combination of customer number and object type. In addition. Cleared items are those accounting entries for which full payment has been processed. The password used for the customer account information is different from the password used for the other preconfigured IACs. the customer can display A/R line items. If a customer receives a reminder for a payment that has been delayed in the mail. a quick check on the web site can show the customer whether a payment has been received. g~ Open items are those accounting entries that have been invoiced. customers can display their own master data. The Internet user object type used for the other preconfigured sell-side IACs is KNA1.Acct.Cleared Items .Chapter 12: Customer Account Information KIP fz b az~S \~ z} Z|| k~|~z{
~ bz ~ b~~ In the following sections.Account Balance The customer logs on to this IAC with a customer number and password. This chapter is not intended to be a thorough discussion of how A/R should be configured in your R/3 System. and contact information for the accounting clerk assigned to them. The password for the customer account information IAC must be created manually in the R/3 System.Address . Clerk Customer Logon Accounts Receivable . The object type for the customer account information is BUS1007.Open Items . enter the number of the customer. Some companies believe that a second password for the customer account information allows for additional security for displaying financial information. The password can be made the same for all IACs. However. If the customer fields are not maintained. the data cannot be shown on the Internet. for details on the Internet user object types and passwords. if the modification in chapter 12. choose the sales organization in your company with which the customer interacts. See chapter 15. fz~ ]zz kHL l \~ Z|| bz The following sections describe the steps involved in setting up sales order tracking. {G In Company code. choose the distribution channel you use for doing business on the Internet. You must ensure that: n n All data is correctly entered into the customer master record The customer exists in the R/3 System and has been assigned a password ^~ Z
]zz b \~|
^~~} ~ \~ fz~ k~|} The first step to support the display of customer account information is to ensure that the correct data is entered into the customer master record.6C registration process on the Internet. customers often see the need for a second password as an inconvenience. including the customer account information. KG On the Display Customer: Initial Screen: zG In Customer. enter the customer’s company. “Internet Users: Passwords for Customers” on page 253. is applied. }G In Distribution channel.KIQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. enter transaction XD03 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business partners → Customer → Display → Complete). mz 9HULI\ WKH GDWD LQ WKH FXVWRPHU PDVWHU UHFRUG JG In the Command field. choose the division for which the customer has been created. “Modification: Changing the Customer Type for IKA1” on page 212. |G In Sales organization. ~G In Division. . {G Scroll down to the bottom of the screen. .Chapter 12: Customer Account Information G Choose KIR . LG On the Change Customer: General Data screen: zG The address data displayed on the Internet is maintained on this screen. . NG On the Change Customer: General data screen: zG Enter the bank information. {G Choose the Payment transactions tab.6C MG On the Change Customer: General Data screen: zG The telephone data displayed on the Internet is also maintained on this screen. {G Choose Company code data.KJI Configuration Guide | Release 4. Company code data button The bank information displayed on the Internet is maintained on this screen. You may also wish to keep the object types separate since the financial information accessible using the customer account information IAC may be sensitive. enter transaction XD01 in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. To create the Internet user. enter transaction SU05 in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. ^~ ~ \~ ^ ~ kHL l~ z} az z iz} If you wish to use object type KNA1 for the Internet user instead of BUS1007—to be more consistent with the other IACs— you can implement the modification documented in chapter 12. The customer master record must already exist for the sales area used on the Internet. The customer must already have a customer number and password. Note that this would be a modification and not a configuration change and thus would have to be maintained by your company in case of an upgrade. for details about customers in IACs.Chapter 12: Customer Account Information OG On the Change Customer: Company code data screen: zG Choose the Correspondence tab. for details about the Internet user. New customers are not allowed to register using the customer account information IAC. “The ITS User: Logging on to R/3” on page 235. See chapter 7. To create the customer master record. . choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business partners → Customer → Create → Complete). choose Tools → Administration → User Maintenance → Internet User). “Customers in the Online Store” on page 119. {G Enter the accounting clerk information. The Internet user must be created using object type BUS1007. you must ensure that the customer exists in R/3 and has been assigned a password. “Modification: Changing the Customer Type for IKA1” on page 212. KJJ The accounting clerk information displayed on the Internet is maintained on this tab. To support the display of customer account information. See chapter 14. g~ For additional information about the Internet user.KJK Configuration Guide | Release 4. You must configure the link between your e-mail system and the R/3 System (not preconfigured) g~ For changes that we deliver for the look and feel of the customer account information functionality. In the Internet Application Component (IAC) IKA1 (customer account information). Note that although the password can now be the same between this and other IAC services. see chapter 18. see chapter 14. For assistance on linking your e-mail to the R/3 System. f}|zS \z ~ \~ m~ bdZJ Changing this object type is not a configuration change— this is a modification to the R/3 System. enter transaction SE37 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. see chapter 13. iz \z~ The object type must be changed in two function modules.6C \~ Z|| bz \z The following sections describe the steps involved in setting up the customer account information configuration. In the Command field. The code modifications below allow you to change the customer object type for the Internet user from BUS1007 to KNA1 for the customer account information IAC. “EMail and Fax” on page 292. your customers will no longer need two different passwords to carry out different functions on your web site. . \~ ~ e [~~~ r ^Ffz
l~ z} kHL The link between your e-mail system and R/3 has not been preconfigured. Object KNA1 is used for all other preconfigured IACs. the object type for the Internet user is BUS1007. This type is inconsistent with the object type for the users in all other IAC services in the preconfigured sell-side functions and requires customers to maintain two different passwords. “The ITS User: Logging on to R/3” on page 235. Please thoroughly document and test this change if you choose to apply it. the customer still cannot log on to the customer account information transaction with an e-mail account in the standard R/3 System. If you choose to implement this modification. choose Tools → ABAP Workbench → Development → Function Builder). and instructions on how to make changes to the ITS HTML Business templates. Chapter 12: Customer Account Information [Zibx]^[mhkx\a^\diZllphk] )81&7.21 %$3.B'(%725B&+(&.'.3$66:25' KJL /RNDOH 6FKQLWWVWHOOH .03257.1* 9$/8( '(%725. . /.( 9$/8( 3$66:25'. 1* 9$/8( 5(7851.3257.( (. /.. '7<3(B /..21 &2167$176 .1* 2) '(/(7.1$ !!!!(1' 2) .21 !!!!%(*.16(57.B'(%725B&+$1*(3$66:25' /RNDOH 6FKQLWWVWHOOH .5(7851 6758&785( %$3.11.'\S REMHFW [Zibx]^[mhkx\aZg`^iZllphk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for informational notes related to this chapter. can be found online in the SAP Service Marketplace. SAP Notes. See appendix A.KJM Configuration Guide | Release 4. “SAP Notes in the SAP Service Marketplace” on page 387.6C \~| ~ lZi g~ Information from SAP Notes is also essential to the configuration. formerly OSS Notes and SAPNet – R/3 Frontend Notes. & + $ 3 7 ( 5 JN bml m~
z~ . “Prices in the Product Catalog” on page 79) Single sign-on Selection of different shipping methods (see chapter 5. or language) and have a two letter name. Themes are instances of Internet Transaction Server (ITS) services that differ only in their look and feel (appearance. . “Prices in the Product Catalog” on page 79) Display of the current content of the shopping basket.6.KJO Configuration Guide | Release 4. layout. refer to the SAP@Webstudio documentation by choosing R/3 library → SAP@Webstudio → HTML Business Language Reference → HTML Business Language Description → HTML Business Function Specification.6C h~~ This chapter explains the changes made to the Online Store templates and how you can adjust them according to your design plans. The changes made are based on the improved look and feel. and address maintenance (see appendix B. In Release 4. For more information on HTMLBusiness functions. default shipping type. “Add-On for the Shopping Basket” on page 403) Easier credit card data input Usage of a default credit card The inclusion of purchase order number and date entry for easier identification A new transaction to store personal data as default credit card. All new Online Store templates can be found in theme SG. Templates contain everything that is visible to the end user through a web browser. All templates are based on the standard templates of theme 99. all frequently used design elements such as the button functionality are designed using HTML Business functions. “Add-On for ATP in the Product Catalog” on page 391) n n n n n n n n HTML Business is an SAPspecific macro language that allows you to merge R/3 data dynamically into HTML Business templates. “Add-On for the Shopping Basket” on page 403) The saving and retrieval of the shopping basket (see appendix C. and the additional functionality of the services. including price (see appendix C. graphics. “Add-On for ATP in the Product Catalog” on page 391). and different taxes and special offers (see chapter 5. The main changes include: n n n n New frame design Language-independent buttons (based on R/3 language) An included style sheet to make changes on all templates globally A display of product availability (see appendix B. For this example.Chapter 13: ITS Templates KJP fz kHL l|~~ p~{ m~
z~ All HTML templates are generated through SAP@Webstudio from R/3 screens. SAP@Webstudio generates a file called saplwwcc1_8120. Not every function provided on the R/3 screens has to be used. The third graphic displays what the end user views through the browser. The second graphic shows
[email protected] with the basic appearance of the R/3 screen. and JavaScript. which generates the template code.html template and the stylesheet. the templates need to be published to the ITS server. we take the login procedure from transaction WW20. Those templates are then modified with SAP@Webstudio using HTMLBusiness. The R/3 screens are 4100 for the header frame and 8120 for the body frame. HTML. After modification. The first graphic demonstrates a service in R/3. The left side of the screenshot shows the structure of the folder and files. R/3 screen 4100 for the header R/3 screen 8120 for the login screen The generated template in SAP@Webstudio g~ The coding in the screenshot has already been modified for this example to include the ess_sg_functions. where they are accessible through a standard web browser. This template can then be modified to your needs. . With SAP@Webstudio you can: n n n Generate templates from the R/3 screen Import templates and files Publish them onto your ITS server We strongly recommend you know HTML. This is the login screen displayed in the browser. This tool handles the HTMLBusiness functions that are advanced functions of HTML.6C The header (screen 4100) does not use any buttons. we highly recommend you use SAP@Webstudio. .saplabs. Instead the images used provide the same functionality as buttons on the R/3 screen.com/its.KJQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. The following sections provide a brief overview about the SAP@Webstudio design. HTMLBusiness. lZiYp~{} h~~ You can download the complete documentation about SAP@Webstudio from www. and JavaScript if you are going to make any changes to the templates. g~ Notice that only three buttons from the original R/3 screen (8120) appear in the body frame. To change the coding of the templates. The SAP@Webstudio documentation can also be accessed in the R/3 Online documentation under R/3 Library → SAP@Webstudio → HTML Business Language Reference → HTML Business Language Description → HTML Business Function Specification. layout. l~|~ _
~ The service file contains the service description. language resources. or language). flow files (if applicable). If this information is incomplete at runtime. and Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension (MIME) files.Chapter 13: ITS Templates KJR lZiYp~{} l|~~ The following graphic gives you an overview about the SAP@Webstudio screen. Each service can be divided into one or more themes. Source code window Current project Publish file Included Java-Script functions Files in project HTML HTML Business Functionality Message window Comments Input from language-resource file Working with SAP@Webstudio involves different types of files: n n n n Service files HTML template files Language-resource files MIME files These different file types are described below. A typical service filename is ww20.srvc. the ITS may derive some details from the global service file. or require the user to enter logon information. Each theme has its own set of HTMLBusiness templates. In any case. but the functionality of the service is identical. Themes are instances of services that differ only in look and feel (appearance. there must be one service file for each application. In the SAP@Webstudio. themes are stored in subdirectories of the service directory. graphics. . which is the set of parameters that determines how a service runs. KKI Configuration Guide | Release 4. For each R/3 screen. A typical languageresource filename is ww20_en.htrc.6C The service files are located on the AGate. Instead of hard-coding the language-specific texts into HTMLBusiness templates. specify placeholders and store the text in the relevant languageresource file. For ease of maintenance. The MIME files are located on the WGate. A typical template filename is sapmwwmj_3420. At runtime. MIME files are optional. Like language resources. HTMLBusiness is an SAP-specific macro language. . not all templates use languageresource files since these files are not mandatory.html. The language files are located on the AGate. ezz~Fk~|~ _
~ Language resources are language-independent files used by the ITS to run a service in a particular language. sound. there must be one HTMLBusiness template. Each template contains standard HTML code and HTMLBusiness statements. However. the ITS looks for placeholders in the templates and replaces them with text from the language-resource file. and video elements included to enhance the visual appearance and effectiveness of your Internet applications. fbf^ _
~ Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension (MIME) files contain the image. which allows you to merge R/3 data dynamically into HTMLBusiness templates. The template files are located on the AGate. keep HTMLBusiness templates language-independent by creating language resources. amfe m~
z~ _
~ HTMLBusiness templates are used by the ITS to display application screens in a web browser. and buttons.Chapter 13: ITS Templates KKJ m~ l` m~
z~ All general design and navigation standards are stored in the service sg_global. Any changes you make to sg_ess_function. In the SG theme. we use two frames and on other screens we use three. the new templates look different than the standard-delivered templates. we explain the different screen items. called frame 3 and frame 4 in the templates. we used a special design to show you what is possible. The screen display uses frames. The body frame itself can contain one or two frames.html. you need to access the templates and change the coding. On some screens. In the following section. you do not need to access the HTML templates. as in the standard. Frame 1 is the header frame and frame 2 is the body frame. . Everything displayed on the templates can be changed to fit your needs. There is a central SG HTMLBusiness function library called sg_ess_function. background color. For some changes. provided that the names do not differ from those in the template.html will affect all templates. The most noticeable changes are the header. For other changes. Frame 1 header frame Frame 2 body frame Frame 3 left frame Frame 4 right frame m~ a~z}~ _z~ The header frame is built out of multiple tables with several different images that can be changed without accessing the source code. such as exchanging the company logo or navigation bar icons. You can replace those files on the ITS server with your own files. As you can see from earlier chapters. width) of the images. \z z bz~ To replace the upper-right SAP logo (called logo1. Not all images are stored in the same directory on the ITS server.KKK Configuration Guide | Release 4. The product catalog displays in frame 4.gif logo2. not all images that can appear are shown.gif To keep the delivered images. To change the other images. proceed in the same way by replacing the delivered images with new ones. Inserted table 1 (displays in yellow) Inserted table 2 (displays in green) Main table (displays in red) In the following graphic. You also need to be aware of the dimensions (height.gif myprofile.gif. overwriting the existing logo1. we highlight the table borders with different colors to demonstrate how the header is built. 1. Be careful to replace the correct files and give them exactly the same names.gif exit_navi. The shop overview and product categories display in frame 3.gif shops_navi. and copy it to the server in the correct directory. bgroundstripe. give it the same name (logo1.gif. we explain the displayed images.gif shoppingbasketempty_navi. The next time you call the service through your browser. Copy your new image or logo as logo1. 3. you must copy and rename the SG images.gif) with your own logo you must create an image.6C In the following graphic. the left frame. the new images will display. Otherwise you cannot access them anymore after you replace them with new ones. 2. m~ [} _z~ The body frame displays different shops and products. . but all of them reside under sg_global/sg. Select sg_global/sg/images/topnav. the right frame.gif shadow.gif logo1. Differences in the dimensions of new images may require additional changes to the HTML code.gif). Select the web root directory on the WGate portion of the ITS server. To change the background color. JavaScript. To do this.css style sheet provides additional unused parameters since it originates from the Employee Self-Service (ESS) templates.css in SAP@Webstudio (or any other editor). To change the appearance of colors and fonts.css. you have to change the templates. the threedimensional shadows remain tan. while others require more in-depth programming knowledge. ERG\ ^ IRQWIDPLO\ DULDOYHUGDQDVDQVVHULI IRQWVL]H SW EDFNJURXQGFRORU ()()( ` After making the changes.gif . These shadows are graphics with a color that matches the tan background color. you choose to change the background color to blue. The ess. Save them under the web root directory on the WGate portion of the ITSserver: 1. you should understand HTML. since these three programming languages are used to create the templates. for example. \z ~ [z|} \
~ m~
z~ Changing the background color of the templates can be tricky because of the three-dimensional shadows for the legend in the Online store. To change the appearance and functionality of the body frame. are simple to accomplish. and HTMLBusiness. save and publish the file to the ITS server.gif top_new.Chapter 13: ITS Templates KKL The images for the products are stored in the product catalog in R/3 and cannot be changed from the templates. Select sg_global → sg → images → bevels 2. Select one of the following: • • bottom_new. open the style sheet ess. Some changes. If. such as changing the background color. In the following sections. you can use the style sheet located on the AGate portion of the ITS server under sg_global → sg → style → ess. we provide two suggestions to resolve this issue: \~z g~ `z| You can create new background graphics that match your new color scheme. and change the value for the background color to the desired one. ”images/spacer. For the former. Do the same for the functions ‘Bottomshadow()’ and ‘Shadowbox()’. This function takes the original R/3 button text and displays it on the button in the HTML template.gif bottom_new. You can find other language files under theme 99 that are not adjusted to the new templates from theme SG yet.gif”)’ with ‘mimeURL(~service=”sg_global”.gif. 2.gif ^|z ~ L] `z| @lz|~bz~AB@ You also can modify the three-dimensional function graphics and exchange the bevel images with transparent GIFs to remove the three-dimensional effect: 1.gif. 3. “images/bevels/top_new. To avoid re-creating GIFs. The button consists of: n n n n The left border image A hyperlink (which is the button text that comes from R/3) with a background image A right border image Several JavaScript handlers .~language=””.html.~language=””. In the first cell of the second table row. and top_new. exchange ‘mimeURL(~service=”sg_global”. we implemented a dynamic button function.gif.gif”)’ 4. tables and headings are defined in the language-resource file ww20_en. On the AGate portion of the ITS instance. you have to maintain the individual language files yourself. select templates sg_global → sg → ess_sg_functions.htrc. Z|~|~ ~ [ To more easily add new functions or a different language to your templates. The buttons in the standard templates are static GIF images that need to be created in the same style for each new button and language. right_side_new.gif. replace the bevel image with the transparent gif bottom. Compare them to ww20_en. Go to the function ‘Topshadow’.htrc in the theme SG and add the missing entries to your specific language-resource file. For the latter. The templates are only maintained in English. replace the bevel with left_side_new.KKM Configuration Guide | Release 4. g~ This procedure removes all of the threedimensional effects from the templates. If you would like to use a different language. In addition to the style sheet fonts.6C top_new. we created the buttons in a different manner than those in the standard templates. To make changes. replace the words in the right column of the table next to the word currentbasketempty. . This view of the shopping basket contents appears in the same frame as the product hierarchy.Chapter 13: ITS Templates KKN Whenever the button text changes in R/3—for example. The style of the button can be changed in the same way as described with the images in the header frame. These words can be changed in the language-resource file ww20_en. we added functionality to continuously display the shopping basket’s current contents. Select the WGate portion of the web root directory in the ITS server. The only differences are: n n The images to build the button are stored in a different directory on the ITS server (sg_global/sg/images/button) The image in the middle is a background image Button as displayed in the browser: Button as built up in the table (we set the borders to viewable for this example): button_left. Select sg_global/sg/images/button. If the basket is empty. Copy your new images. button_right. The graphic below demonstrates what images are used for the buttons. an empty shopping basket appears with the words Shopping basket is empty. due to a different language—you do not have to change the template since the button generates dynamically.htrc.gif To change all buttons: 1. overwriting the existing files (they must have the same names). 3.gif button_tile. 2.gif \~ l [z~ To provide a better overview of the contents of the shopping basket. To set up the R/3 side of this shopping basket. To get to the shopping cart. One table is used for the shopping basket icon and text. see appendix C. See the next illustration for the names of the images. you can click the shopping cart icon or the words Current basket content. and another table for the actual items. \~z z} \z `z| You can create new graphics that match your color scheme.htrc. The shopping basket overview displays in the browser using multiple tables. Save them under the web root directory on the WGate portion of the ITS server: . “Add-On for the Shopping Basket” on page 403.KKO Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C If items are in the basket. a filled shopping basket icon displays with the words Current basket content. replace the words in the right column of the table next to the word currentbasket. To make changes. These words can be changed in the languageresource file ww20_en. Separate tables for the top and bottom image create the 3D effect. The table for the item description has an image as the background picture. Chapter 13: ITS Templates 1. Select sg_global → sg → images → bevels 2. Select curr_bask_top.gif or curr_bask_mid.gif or curr_bask_bottom.gif Table surrounding the whole shopping basket including the distance to the screen border KKP curr_bask_top.gif curr_bask_mid.gif Tables to display the shopping basket curr_bask_bottom.gif The customer can access the actual shopping basket screen to review the complete content by clicking on either the shopping cart icon or the heading. For the necessary changes on the R/3 side, refer to appendix C, “Add-On for the Shopping Basket” on page 403. \~} \z} ]zz b To make it easier for the customer, we simplified the input for credit card data. In the former version, you had to enter the expiration date in exactly the same manner as it was displayed in an input field next to your actual date input field. The expiration date input has been changed to a dropdown menu for the month and year. This method avoids improper data entry, converting the information automatically into the format required by R/3. Old data input for credit card information: Simplified input fields for credit card information: If customers store a default credit card in their profile, they can use the default credit card instead of entering the credit card data manually. KKQ Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C f i
~ The new My Profile functionality is a separate transaction (ZOSA) that allows customers to create and maintain their personal profiles. In this profile, individual customers can maintain their addresses, passwords, store multiple credit cards, and define a default credit card. In addition, a default shipping type can also be selected. To use the templates described in this section, you need to make changes to R/3. See appendix E, “Add-On for My Profile Service” on page 421, for information on what to adjust. All templates are stored in the directory zosa/sg. My Profile can be accessed from the home page link and from the header frame by choosing the My Profile icon. After users have logged on to the system, they do not need to log on to the profile since a temporary cookie for storing the logon information is used. See “Single Sign-On” on page 233 for a description of this functionality. To access the different features of this function, we created tabstrips. The functionality of the tabstrips comes from R/3 and is handled in template saplyeshop_account_1000.html. The tabstrips are build from different images that can be changed to meet your color scheme. The images to build the tabstrips are stored on the ITS server sg_global/sg/images/tabs. We deliver two color sets for the tabstrips, tan and blue. If you prefer a different color, use one of the sets and change the color using a graphic program. The two sets can be found in the directories sg_global/sg/images/tabs/blue and sg_global/sg/images/tabs/tan. These directories function as a storage place to use Chapter 13: ITS Templates KKR for modifications. The files actually used by the program are in the directory sg_global/sg/images/tabs. The following illustration lists the filenames for the tabstrips. g_forbak.gif g_bakbak.gif for_left.gif for_tile.gif bak_tile.gif t_backfor.gif g_bak_right.gif bak_left.gif g_for_right.gif If you would like to add tabstrips with additional functionality, you need to add that functionality to the template saplyeshop_account_1000.html. The picture below demonstrates how the okcode and the right image order of the tabstrips, active and inactive, is being handled in SAP@Webstudio. The okcode to be executed by clicking on tab Display the order for the tabs (active/inactive) Include for the tabstrip functionality from R/3 KLI Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C In addition, you may need to change the background color of the tabcards accordingly. These changes are made in the language-resource file, stored in the template directory zosa/sg/zosa_en.htrc. The default color is tan. Change the color code next to the entry tabbground to the same color as the active tabcolor (tabbground = # DED7C6). In the same file (zosa_en.htrc), you can also change the size of the tabcards under _tabcard_height and _tabcard_width. The delivered values for the size are height = 410 and width = 99%. Z||~ f i
~ My Profile can be accessed from the home page of the preconfigured Online Store by selecting My Profile. The image below shows the SAP-delivered home page. Your home page will probably look different. The name of the home page file is OnlineStore_en.html and it is located in the root directory of the WGate. My Profile access from the home page My Profile can also be accessed by clicking the My Profile icon in the header frame. . My Profile icon If you do not want a new window to open, for example, if you used an additional frame where you start all the services, you need to modify the JavaScript that opens the new window. This JavaScript can be found on every template where the link to the My Profile functionality exists. If you start the My Profile functionality from the header frame, a new window opens. To leave My Profile, the Exit button should always be used, because the Exit button ends the R/3 connection. Otherwise, the browser window closes but the R/3 transaction is still running and might slow down your system, depending on your timeout settings. Chapter 13: ITS Templates KLJ \z ~ _ Z}}~ g~ The screens for the registration page might look different throughout the book because some changes were made after the screenshots were taken. On the registration screen, we provide two different settings which depend on the salutation. If users select an individual salutation of Mr. or Ms., fields prompt them for a first and last name, their date of birth, and their address. The last name is the only mandatory field. The same applies to the registration screen in service ww20. Use the Exit button to leave My Profile. If a personal form of address is selected, the system asks for a first and last name and the date of birth. If users select Company as the form of address, they only get two input lines for the company and the address line. In this case, the first and last name and the date of birth are suppressed. If the Company form of address is selected, the system asks only for the company name but provides a second line for the name of the individual. These form-of-address selections help to avoid wrong input data in the case of a personal or company address. These changes reside in template saplwwcc1_8120.html, service zosa, and service ww20. The code checks if a company name is selected and refreshes the screen with the new values. To check if your R/3 settings in table TSAD3T are set to 0003 (company) for the form of address, enter transaction SM30 in the Command field and choose Enter. Then in the Table/view field, enter V_TSAD3 and choose Display or KLK Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C Maintain. The coding in the template checks for ‘if (WIC_CUSTOMERTITLE_KEY != "0003")‘. If your settings in R/3 are not 0003 for company, the functionality is not given. You can change your R/3 settings, but remember it can affect other areas or change the template coding. To change the code of template saplwwcc1_8120.html in service zosa and ww20, search in the template for the line ‘if (WIC_CUSTOMER-TITLE_KEY != "0003")‘ and change 0003 to the value that your company salutation has. Search for these lines and change 0003 to the desired value for the company salutation if you do not change it in R/3. The company value needs to be the same as the code in this template though. f
~ \~} \z} The templates are delivered with the option to store seven credit cards. If you want the option to store more, you need to make changes in the template. Keep in mind that adding more lines for credit cards might influence the height of the tab cards. . g~ After saving the card numbers, the input fields for the card type and card number become disabled and only the last four digits of the credit card number become visible. This effect occurs so the card type and number cannot be changed, only the expiration date. Chapter 13: ITS Templates KLL l
~ lFh The cookie is only stored in memory and not on the hard drive. It will be removed when the browser is closed. We implemented a cookie function into some templates so users only have to log on once during their current session. If users go to the next logon screen, they do not have to log on again, because their e-mail address (or customer number) and password are stored temporarily in a cookie. This cookie is only valid during the browser session and is removed from memory when the browser window is closed. Let us assume a user logged on to the Online Store successfully. The user now enters a different service that requires a logon. The template recognizes that a related cookie exists and takes the logon data from the cookie, places it into the input field on the screen, and proceeds automatically to the next screen. The table below shows the templates involved in single sign-on. Transaction Online Store (WW20) Sales Order Status (VW10) Available to Promise (CKAV) Template SAPLWWCC1_8120.html SAPMV45X_101.html SAPMAVCK_500.html The cookie function itself is stored in the service sg_global in the sg_ess_function.html template. KLM Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C & + $ 3 7 ( 5 JO m~ bml n~S e kHL KLO Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C h~~ Because the logic of the Internet Application Components (IACs) resides within R/3, a transaction within the system must be executed that sends information to the Internet. To start a transaction, an R/3 user with authorization to start IAC transactions must be logged on. From an overhead and security perspective, it is undesirable to create a regular R/3 user for each customer that wishes to make a purchase. Instead, a single R/3 user logs on to the system in the background for all customers that access the IAC from the web. This R/3 user is hidden from the customer. The customer is not aware that a logon to an R/3 System occurs in the background. A service file located in the directory structure of the ITS AGate stores the information for the R/3 System and ITS user. This R/3 user should only have limited authorizations, so that only the appropriate Internet transactions can be executed. During the setup of the ITS, a decision must be made whether a different R/3 user will be created for each IAC transaction, or whether the same R/3 user is used for all IAC transactions and services. pz p~ ]~
~ In the Online Store preconfiguration, we provide the following deliverables: n n n Preconfiguration of one generic ITS user Preconfiguration of one role for the generic ITS user Documentation about the functionality of the generic user for the ITS logon e h kHL n ~ bml bml n~ When a customer accesses an Internet Application Component (IAC) from the web browser, a request is sent to the ITS. When the initial request is received, the ITS must log on to the R/3 System to start a transaction within R/3. The service files in the ITS AGate store the user information for this generic ITS user. Each service file points to the appropriate transaction, or IAC, within R/3. which enhances the performance of the ITS. the customer should be given the opportunity to choose the preferred language. For example. It may be desirable to add a timeout parameter to the service file that controls how long a session remains open.Chapter 14: The ITS User: Logging on to R/3 KLP When the browser requests a service. when a user enters the Online Store from the Internet (service WW20).srvc for the ITS user information. Each hyperlink contains a different language specified as the ~language parameter in the URL. this timeout parameter should not be too short so a customer is not disconnected while browsing the store. In this way. To make this option available. The generic user remains logged on for the entire visit of the customer to the Online Store. the R/3 session closes within a designated time frame. The simplest solution is to create two (or more) buttons on the web site through which the customer can enter the store.srvc file is used for the logon. Each button has a hyperlink to the URL of the Online Store. If no user information is stored in the individual service file. the generic ITS user must also log on in the language chosen by the customer. the service file is checked for user information. ]~z
ezz~ z} izz~~ If your Online Store requires multiple languages. . a decision must be made to use a service-specific user or a global user. A timeout feature ensures that if a customer leaves the web site. the ITS checks the service file ww20. for each IAC. The language should not be specified in the service files. the user in the global. For customers who browse the Internet from home or work. Language English German URL http://<home URL>/scripts/wgate/ww20/!?~language=EN http://<home URL>/scripts/wgate/ww20/!?~language=DE . However. there may be distractions that cause them to leave their computer and return later to continue shopping. text variables referenced in the HTML Business templates on the web site in the Online Store also need to display in the specified language. After the customer chooses an Online Store.Currency ITS User parameters: . The descriptions of the Online Stores should be maintained in every language that the customer can choose.KLQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. currency. The date and decimal format displayed in the product catalog are determined by the parameters in the ITS user. Finally. The language specified in the URL determines the correct language-resource file that must be used. The product catalog variant determines the language and currency used for data display in the product catalog. how should the configuration look if a customer chooses a U.Date format http://<homeURL>scripts/wgate/ww20/!?~language=EN After the ITS user logs on to the R/3 System using the sample URL above. and the corresponding language-dependent MIME files must exist in the ITS WGate directory.Language . date. l|~z f
zz~ p~{ l~ For consistency. a list of the available Online Stores appears in the language specified in the URL. who logs on to start the service (transaction).S. setting? The language. The language used to log on by the ITS user should match the language specified in the Online Store configuration.Decimal format . and decimal format must all be . the language and currency are determined by the product catalog variant specified in the Online Store configuration. An appropriate language-resource file must exist in the ITS AGate directory.6C Link to Store URL Online Store 1 Product Catalog Variant: . currency. for example to a ZWW20 service. Each service starts the same transaction for the Online Store. It may be desirable to limit the list of Online Stores displayed based on the language chosen by making a change in the ITS templates. meaning a U. variant of the product catalog. using the URL shown above.Chapter 14: The ITS User: Logging on to R/3 KLR consistent. how should the configuration look? One solution is as follows: This solution requires the following data setup: n n Two different ITS users should be created—one with U. the other with German parameters. and texts in each language.S. WW20.S. parameters. using the correct defaults. but is assigned a different ITS user with the appropriate defaults. Each variant contains language. Online Store. The Online Store service needs to be copied on the ITS side. once U. Each web-accessible product catalog must have two variants maintained. should choose a U.S. and German web buttons can immediately start the appropriate Online Store. if a customer chooses German. At the same time. n n n If only one product catalog should be accessible from the web. . Each Online Store links to each product catalog/variant combination.S. is chosen.S. The list of Online Stores must be maintained in both languages (using the translation tool in the Online Store configuration). the U. The customer. 76 XVHU¶V DXWKRUL]DWLRQV JG In the Command field. such as limiting the sales area to which the ITS user has access. Creating this role ensures that the generic ITS user does not have access to perform internal company functions. enter the name of the role to be assigned to the ITS user. choose Tools → Administration → User Maintenance → Roles).KMI Configuration Guide | Release 4. The role YESHOP_ITS_USER has been preconfigured for you. Role YESHOP_ITS_USER is delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration. You may wish to change some of the authorizations. mz &UHDWH WKH UROH WKDW OLPLWV WKH JHQHULF . {G Choose Change. KG On the SAP R/3 screen: zG In Role. enter transaction PFCG and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. . You must: n n n n Create the role that limits the authorization of the generic ITS user (preconfigured) Create or change the user for the ITS general logon (preconfigured) Assign the ITS user to the role Place the ITS user into the appropriate service file fz~ ]zz e ~ bml n~ Zz \~z~ ~ k
~ z e ~ `~~| bml n~@ Zz The first step in configuring the logon to R/3 through the ITS is to create a role that limits the ITS user’s authorizations.6C The following sections describe the steps involved in setting up the ITS user. The following transactions are allowed: WW10 (IAC product catalog). These transactions generated the objects for which authorizations need to be determined. ZOSA (Online Store Account). are IACs included in the Online Store preconfiguration. In addition. VW01 (SD Scenario–Incoming Orders). VW10 (SD Scenario–Order Status). and XD03 are allowed (create. and display customer).Chapter 14: The ITS User: Logging on to R/3 LG On the next SAP R/3 screen: zG Review the role’s description. MG On the Menu tab: zG Review the allowed transactions. XD02. transactions XD01. WW20 (IAC Online Store). {G Choose the Authorizations tab. CKAV (Check availability). {G Choose the Menu tab. change. because they contain the objects required for the customers to be created through the Online Store registration process. KMJ A more detailed description of the role may be entered at the bottom of this tab frame. with the exception of VW01. . These transaction. and IKA1 (IKA–Customer account information). The Customer: Central Data authorization object is added manually. choose {G Choose The following authorization objects are generated based on the transactions that the ITS user should be allowed to run.KMK Configuration Guide | Release 4. The Classification System object was also added manually.6C NG On the Authorization tab. choose authorization data. Change OG On the Change role: Authorizations screen: zG If changes are made to these authorizations. . The table below documents the details of the preconfigured authorizations. . near the bottom of the screen. to support the scenario in which a customer is only allowed to display particular product groups within the catalog. but is not generated based on the transaction code. since it is required for the customer account information. to generate the authorizations. VW01. IKA1. XD01. WW10. XD02.Chapter 14: The ITS User: Logging on to R/3 KML The following authorizations are included in the preconfigured role: Authorization Cross-application Authorization Objects Authorization Check for Transaction Start Classification System Authorization for Class Types Financial Accounting Customer: Change Authorization Field group for Certain Fields Customer: Application Authorization Activity * (all) Create or generate Change Display Print Edit messages Display change documents Maintenance of payment cards Display of payment cards Confirm change * (all) Class type 011. ZOSA Detail Values Customer and Vendor Master Data Customer Account Authorization Activity Create or generate Change Display Authorization group * (all) Customer: Authorization for Company Codes Activity Create or generate Change Display * (all) Create or generate Change Display Display change documents Maintenance of payment cards Display of payment cards Confirm change Company code Customer: Central Data Activity Sales & Distribution Customer: Account Authorization for Sales Areas Activity Create or generate Change Display . XD03. VW10. 060 Transaction code CKAV. WW20. saplabs. Authorization group * (all) for online store Display/read * (all) Display/read Authorization: Product Catalog – Activity for product Layout Area catalog layout Authorization for group for layout Authorization: Product Catalog – Activity for product Maintenance catalog Authorization group * (all) product catalog \~z~ \z~ ~ n~ ~ bml `~~z
e The next step in configuring the R/3 logon through the ITS is to create or change the user for the ITS general logon.KMM Configuration Guide | Release 4.6A/B Guidebook. . You can find information about this guidebook at www. The steps below illustrate how to add the parameters to the ITS user.com/auth. see the Authorizations Made Easy 4.6C Authorization Detail Values Authorization group * (all) Customer: Authorization for Sales Organizations Activity Create or generate Change Display * (all) * (all) * (all) Create or generate Change Display * (all) Create or generate Change Display Print Edit messages * (all) * (all) * (all) Division Sales organization Distribution channel Sales Document: Authorization for Sales Document Types Activity Sales document type Sales Document: Authorization for Sales Areas Activity Division Sales organization Distribution channel Retailing Authorization for Starting Online Store For details about roles and authorizations. choose Tools → Administration → User Maintenance → Users). mz &UHDWH RU FKDQJH WKH XVHU IRU . enter the name of the user you wish to use for the ITS logon. . Fields necessary for regular users are not addressed. KG On the User Maintenance: Initial Screen: zG In User. you do not need to perform the following steps if you used this CATT. enter transaction SU01 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. {G Choose (or if the user already exists). The creation of the ITS User has been preconfigured for you when you run CATT procedure ZESHOP_ITSUSER as part of the installation procedure. This section discusses only the fields critical for the IACs.Chapter 14: The ITS User: Logging on to R/3 KMN Because these steps are configured automatically through the CATT procedure ZESHOP_ITSUSER during the installation process.76 JHQHUDO ORJRQ JG In the Command field. and when the customer’s credit card is charged.KMO Configuration Guide | Release 4. {G Choose the Parameters tab. {G Choose the Defaults tab. Preconfigured e-mail confirmations are sent when a customer creates an order from the Internet.6C LG On the Maintain User screen: zG An entry in the Internet mail address field is required for the e-mail confirmations to be sent to a customer. The Decimal notation used to display prices on the Internet comes from the default set on this screen. when a delivery is shipped. MG On the Defaults tab: zG Review the information on screen. The Date format used to display dates on the Internet comes from the default set on this screen. . The SAP Note (formerly OSS) 195318 discusses this parameter. setting this parameter should increase the performance of the ITS. The parameters for the sales area are used primarily for the sales order status IAC (VW10). enter the division you use for Internet orders. enter the distribution channel you use for Internet orders. However. enter the sales organization you use for Internet orders. }G For the WRK parameter. These default parameters are used for processing in certain IACs. In our tests using a new install of R/3 and the ITS. TechTalk . enter the plant for which you wish to do availability checking in the ATP service. it may be necessary to include the parameter ITS_PING_SWITCH_ON to the ITS user with a value of YES.Chapter 14: The ITS User: Logging on to R/3 NG On the Parameters tab: KMP zG For the VKO parameter. we did not find this parameter to be necessary for the functionality. |G For the SPA parameter. The plant parameter is used primarily for the available-to-promise IAC (CKAV). ~G Choose . {G For the VTW parameter. This setting suppresses the navigation menu when the ITS user logs on. Both the Parameters and Value columns are manually entered. Caution If you are upgrading from a previous release. mz $VVLJQLQJ WKH .KMQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. You need to determine whether you will create a different ITS user for each sell-side service. This role is assigned to the ITS user in the next step. {G Choose Change. Z ~ bml n~ ~ k
~ The next step in configuring the R/3 logon through the ITS is to assign the ITS user to a role. or use the same ITS user for all ITS services. which contains only authorizations for the sell-side Internet applications. Because these steps are configured automatically through the CATT procedure ZESHOP_ITSUSER during the installation process. The assignment of the ITS user to the correct role has been preconfigured for you when you run CATT procedure ZESHOP_ITSUSER as part of the installation procedure. and adds Get/Set parameters.76 XVHU WR WKH UROH JG In the Command field. enter transaction PFCG and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. A sample role.6C Caution CATT procedure ZESHOP_ITSUSER is run as part of the installation. you do not need to perform the following steps if you used this CATT. KG On the SAP R/3 screen: zG In Role. Additional security should be implemented. enter the delivered role YESHOP_ITS_USER. choose Tools → Administration → User Maintenance → Roles). The procedure creates the sample ITS user master record if it does not already exist. is delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration. . such as limiting this user to only the sell-side Internet applications. KMR MG On the Compare User Master Record dialog box. OG To verify that the assignments have been made. choose Complete compare. enter transaction SU01 in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. . {G Under User ID. choose Tools → Administration → User Maintenance → Users). enter the ITS user. NG Back on the previous screen.Chapter 14: The ITS User: Logging on to R/3 LG On the SAP R/3 screen: zG Choose the User tab. User compare. |G Choose }G Choose . choose . {G Choose . QG On the Maintain User screen: zG Choose the Roles tab. . |G Choose the Profiles tab.6C PG On the User Maintenance: Initial Screen: zG In User.KNI Configuration Guide | Release 4. {G Review the new role. enter the ITS user name. and password of the service file. A blank for the language allows the hyperlink from the web site to the IACs to define the language. If you used the Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide. The service file requires the parameters shown below for a customer to log on to R/3 when starting an IAC. i
z|~ ~ bml n~ ~ Zz~ l~|~ _
~ The final step to configuring the R/3 logon through the ITS is to place the ITS user into the appropriate service file. the default ITS user—stored in the global. Parameter Name ~client ~login ~password ~language The individual service files (such as ww20. See the ITS Installation Supplement which comes with the installation guide. Since these steps will be configured automatically through the CATT procedure ZESHOP_ITSUSER during the installation process you do not need to perform the following steps if you have used this CATT. but is passed from the URL. If these parameters do not exist there.srvc for the Online Store) are checked first for this logon information. this step has already been configured. You can maintain the client. Perform the maintenance of the parameters in the ITS administration station under MAIN (<SID>) → Configuration → Services → Global Services → Default R/3 User.Chapter 14: The ITS User: Logging on to R/3 RG On the Profiles tab. KNJ The icon indicates the profiles have been generated and activated. follow the steps below. the profile generated for the role appears.srvc file—is used instead. Value 300 ITS_USER ******** . login. The language is not entered as a parameter. If you want to maintain the file manually. “SAP Notes in the SAP Service Marketplace” on page 387. .6C \~| ~ lZi g~ Information from SAP Notes is also essential to the configuration.KNK Configuration Guide | Release 4. for informational notes related to this chapter. SAP Notes. See appendix A. formerly OSS Notes and SAPNet – R/3 Frontend Notes. can be found online in the SAP Service Marketplace. & + $ 3 7 ( 5 JP b~~ n~S iz} \~ . pz p~ ]~
~ In the Online Store preconfiguration. Documentation on the functionality of the Internet user for customers. This could include mail campaigns and phone calls. This customer ID may already exist in R/3. If customers are not allowed to register on the web site. See chapter 3. the Online Store should not be configured to allow logons using an e-mail address. their existing customer numbers should be used. When a customer registers on the web site. If customers already exist within R/3. as part of these transactions. a process must be put in place by which Internet users are created for these customers. In the configuration of the customer administration profile. This Internet user number is the same as the customer number. order. delivery. One of the biggest issues is whether an e-mail address has been maintained for the customers.6C h~~ A customer must have an ID before a purchase can be made through the Internet Application Components (IACs). This password is stored for an “Internet user. Order. If not.” which is created at the same time as the customer master record. consolidation of the two customers numbers can only occur in reporting. otherwise the customer registers in the Online Store and the ID is created at that time. An additional setting determines whether a customer can register online or must already have a customer ID before being allowed to make a purchase. The customer number is used to identify the Internet user.KNM Configuration Guide | Release 4. we provide the following deliverables: n n Data load program for Internet users. a campaign to obtain this information must be undertaken. If an existing customer creates a new customer number over the Internet. and so on. The only information stored in the Internet user is the password and validity period. The IACs validate the Internet user when the customer logs on. even if the logon is configured to use an e-mail address. A customer cannot log on to the R/3 System using the Internet user. the R/3 System creates a customer master record. or if existing customers should be allowed to order from the Internet. and billing confirmations cannot be sent out electronically without an e-mail address. If this e-mail address information does not exist. . Logic is included in each IAC to ensure that a customer can only see his or her own address. account status. a password is stored in an encrypted format. a determination is made on whether a customer must sign in before or after browsing the product catalog. “Creating the Online Store with the Catalog” on page 21 for additional information about the customer administration profile. In addition. . The customers do not log on to the R/3 System directly. A generic user logs on in the background. in the Online Store. is not an R/3 user.Chapter 15: Internet Users: Passwords for Customers KNN \~ z b~~ n~ When a customer registers on the web site for the first time. such as the sales order status check. Online registration is only possible if it is allowed in configuration by the customer administration profile. See chapter 14. then the Internet password is validated. the customer may log on with either an email address or a customer ID. for information about the generic user. Once the customer ID and password exist. Although several customers may be browsing the web site. The customer master record must exist for the sales area stored in the product catalog master data. The customer number is then used for two verifications. the customer number and Internet user are created. No manual intervention is necessary. the customer number must be found. logging on with an e-mail address is not supported. since the sales order will be created with this sales area. “The ITS User: Logging on to R/3” on page 235. regardless of the sales area. again. the configuration to allow a customer to log on with an email address is determined by a parameter in the service file. Only one Internet password is created for a customer. g~ In some services. such as the customer account information and availability IACs. if the customer logs on with an e-mail address. The Internet user. Because the Internet user is based on the customer number. but is simply used to store the password for the customer number. a series of validations takes place in the background of the IAC before the customer can place an order. If the customer exists. For example. In still other services. only one R/3 user is logged on. This option is determined in the customer administration profile. the following table shows that a different password (encrypted) is used for object type KNA1 (used by the Online Store. A password is associated with the combination of a customer number and Internet user type. As a result. . and most other sell-side IACs) and object type BUS1007 (used by the customer account information IAC). sales order status.6C An object type is associated with the Internet user. These object types are stored in table BFUSER_TYP. For example. The types delivered with the standard system include: Internet User Type APPLICANT BUS1006001 BUS1007 BUS1008 BUS1065 KNA1 PDOTYPE_PT SCUSTOMER Description Applicant Business partner employee Debitor Creditor Employee Customer Attendee Flugkunde (SAP Schulungen) – for SAP training courses The Internet users are stored in table BAPIUSW01.KNO Configuration Guide | Release 4. a different password can be associated with the same customer number for different object types. .. This difference could provide a level of security if your customer is a company.Chapter 15: Internet Users: Passwords for Customers KNP CLIENT 400 400 400 400 OBJTYPE KNA1 KNA1 KNA1 BUS1007 OBJID 1234567890 5566778811 9991231231 1234567890 PASSWORD BDC3238AB8651EF AAAAGB12F4G5R6T ALIK8675J11K1UZ HGD234HDS134GFT . . you need to create an Internet user for each customer (this step occurs automatically when customers register themselves on the Online Store). Also. However.. all e-mail addresses and passwords are casesensitive. in a consumer-oriented scenario. n .. The following table identifies the ITS service and Internet user type used for this service.... you may wish to implement the modification in chapter 12. you need to collect this information from them and enter it into the customer master records.. . Description Product catalog Online Store Sales Order Entry Sales Order Status Available-to-Promise Customer Account Information Internet User Object Type KNA1 KNA1 KNA1 KNA1 KNA1 BUS1007 Because the customer account information IAC uses a different object type. The following sections describe the steps involved in setting up Internet users: n If you configure an early logon for your customers.. Access to the account information should be limited. If you use e-mail logon for your existing customers. this difference may be confusing. since customers would need to keep track of multiple passwords for your site in order to access all the functionality you make available. If you decide that the customer type should be the same for all preconfigured services. .. . the password for the same customers may be different for ordering than for monitoring their address and financial data. ITS Service WW10 WW20 VW01 VW10 CKAV IKA1 The passwords PASS and SAP are not allowed for Internet users. “Customer Account Information” on page 212. QWHUQHW XVHU IRU H[LVWLQJ FXVWRPHUV JG In the Command field. KG On the Maintain Internet user screen: zG In ID. • {G Choose . g~ mz These steps can be performed using the Internet user data load program. zG In Type. BUS1007 if you are creating a customer for the customer account information service . This step may be performed manually.KNQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. You must use the customer number. choose Tools → Administration → User Maintenance → Internet User). See Data Load Program for Internet Users later in this chapter for details. enter the customer number. enter one of the following: • KNA1 if you are creating a customer for the Online Store. &UHDWH DQ . sales order status. It is also part of the data load program.6C b~~ n~ fz~ ]zz \~z~ z b~~ n~ ^ \~ Internet users that contain the password for customers must be created. even if you use e-mail addresses for logging on to the Internet services. sales order entry. product catalog. enter transaction SU05 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. and available-to-promise services. . since initializing all Internet user passwords the same way may be a security risk. g~ MG On the Information dialog box.Chapter 15: Internet Users: Passwords for Customers LG On the Restrict validity dialog box: KNR zG In Valid until. {G Choose Transfer. either enter a date to which the Internet user will be valid or leave the field blank. you can enter a new password for the Internet user. OG On the Change password dialog box: zG In New password. When customers initially log on to an Internet service for the first time. if you wish to change the password for the Internet user. NG On the Maintain Internet user screen. The password has been reset. such as INIT. you may not want to choose a generic password. For this reason. choose the Change password button. The password generates automatically. choose . {G Choose . they are not required to change the password. ^~ \~ ^Ffz
Z}}~ bz ~ \~ fz~ k~|} g~ These steps can be performed using the Internet user data load program. the sales area information is optional to change the e-mail address. “Customer Account Information” on page 212. you may wish to implement the modification in chapter 12. enter transaction XD02 and choose Enter (from the navigation menu. KG On the Change Customer: Initial Screen: zG In Customer. since this information does not change for each company code. }G Choose . See “Data Load Program for Internet Users” on page 261.KOI Configuration Guide | Release 4. since this information does not change for each sales area. . choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business partners → Customer → Change → Complete). entering the company code for the created customer is optional for changing the e-mail address. |G In Sales area. mz (QWHU FXVWRPHU HPDLO DGGUHVVHV LQWR WKH FXVWRPHU PDVWHU UHFRUG JG In the Command field.6C Caution The Online Store customer registration (service WW20) automatically creates the Internet user. This step may be performed manually. If the customer type should be the same for all preconfigured services. However. Customer e-mail address information must be entered into the customer master record. {G In Company code. The user type in this case is KNA1. for a customer to log on to the customer account information service (IKA1). the user type must be created as type BUS1007. or debitor. enter the customer number. but is also part of the data load program discussed later in this chapter. For each Internet user. 2. |G Choose . It checks if the customer numbers provided exist in the customer master. the Internet user is different than the R/3 user. KOJ ]zz ez} iz b~~ n~ As explained in the earlier sections of this chapter. Usually. . At each step. This data load program has been developed to create Internet users en masse for all qualifying existing customers. {G In E-mail. The load program creates an Internet user entry with object type KNA1. However. the data load program sets the initial password to init. 3. enter the e-mail address of the customer. the load program does sufficient validations to ensure that only correct data passes into the system. an Internet user is necessary to access any of the Internet Application Components (IACs) available in R/3. the load program logs an error and skips that entry.Chapter 15: Internet Users: Passwords for Customers LG On the Change Customer: General data screen: zG Scroll to the bottom of the Address tab. the Internet user is created in R/3 when a customer registers through any of the services available in the Online Store. The load program needs an input file with all the customers for whom an Internet user needs to be created. The load program goes through the following steps for every entry in the file: 1. an alternate solution is required to speed up the creation of Internet users. If not. By definition. for those companies who have implemented R/3 and already have customer master entries. in Object number. {G To launch the actual load program.6. .6C To further ease the loading experience. we recommend you use SXDA transaction. JG In the Command field. If you plan to use this load program several times. However. . MG On the File: _Transactions screen. for this object. we added this load program in the Data Transfer Workbench (transaction SXDA_OLD). LG On the Data Transfer Workbench screen: zG In Phys file name. KG On the first screen. choose |G Choose }G Choose . enter transaction SXDA_OLD and choose Enter. . mz 6WDUW WKH ORDG SURJUDP As of R/3 Release 4. choose . the transaction SXDA initiates the Data Transfer Workbench. enter 330. enter the filename that has the list of customers.KOK Configuration Guide | Release 4. we would recommend you use the SXDA_OLD transaction since it is simple and straightforward. For details about the Data Transfer Workbench. You can find information about this guide at www. enter the filename in which you want the system to log all error messages. the number would not be recognized and would log the error “…customer not found. choose Please note that the Customer number field must exactly match the R/3 System. For example. see the Data Transfer Made Easy Guidebook.” . in which the product catalog data has to be provided. If the value is 3000044. and information logged. {G Choose . |G To load.Chapter 15: Internet Users: Passwords for Customers KOL The program documentation of the ABAP report ZESHOP_IUSER_LOAD documents the details of the structures and format of the data to be provided. NG After reviewing the structures on the Generic structure editor screen. PG On the ZESHOP: Internet User Load program screen: zG In Internet Users: Input File. Take any necessary action. {G In Internet Users: Error File. warnings. the system asks you to confirm the filename. . enter that name in Phys file name under Application server.saplabs.com/dx. OG On the Data Transfer Workbench screen: zG After creating the input file. if the customer master has customer number 0003000044. choose twice. QG After completing the load process. then the load file also should have 0003000044. review the error file for all errors. see the table below: Description Name of load program Name of structure used for input file Technical Object ZESHOP_IUSER_LOAD YINTUSERS .KOM Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C For the technical details about the load program. 3$57 7+5(( \ m~||z
bz|~ . The chapters in “Part Three” focus on the settings that need to take place within the R/3 environment to handle such topics as security.6C iz h~~ Managing the technical infrastructure in an environment that includes ecommerce must take into account a variety of systems. and web server. Depending on the hardware and software chosen in an implementation. The following section focuses on the high-level landscape and integration issues between the different systems. integration to this system is required. Other portions of the landscape. We focus on the Internet Transaction Server (ITS). and must be integrated into the IAC solution. real-time authorizations must protect your company from accepting invalid credit cards. which is the key new component added to the system landscape when IACs (Internet Application Components) are implemented. some of the detailed processes may differ. a web server. If you allow credit card payments. R/3. are often already in place. the number of additional systems required depends on the complexity of the business processes in place and the service your customers expect from your company.KOO Configuration Guide | Release 4. and so on. . such as the R/3 System. this notification requires integration between the Internet. Furthermore. If taxes are to be calculated real-time using software external to R/3. if customers receive an e-mail confirmation when their orders and deliveries process. ITS server. and an e-mail server. For example. so our aim is to be impartial to different vendors. such as R/3. & + $ 3 7 ( 5 JQ bml bz
z z} \z b~ . sizing is even more important because of the potential for substantial traffic from the web. we discussed the logical layout of the landscape. we discuss the physical implementation of the components from chapter 1. Sizing issues must continually be reconsidered because: n n Decisions during the development phase of the project that significantly affected the sizing of the system might need revisiting. or how much equipment you need. you learn about some of the issues involved in the installation and configuration of the ITS. l Sizing the system.KOQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. Many variables must be considered. which in turn is grossly oversized for the rest of the year. n . In chapter 1.6C h~~ This chapter discusses issues related to the installation and configuration of the basic technical infrastructure in the Online Store preconfiguration.6D. advertising. acquisitions and mergers. In this chapter. is a major issue with every installation of software. and similar events could change sizing requirements. In this chapter. With a system that interfaces with the Internet. Because the real world is dynamic. We discuss some of the issues you should be aware of and plan for. some of these variables are difficult to estimate. We do not reprint installation instructions except where necessary. sizing must be done continuously whenever there are changes that could affect the system. A sizing that is correct in June may be grossly inadequate to handle the Christmas sales volume. You need to take into account: n n n n n There is no “magic formula” Expected web traffic Browsing versus purchasing ratio Benchmarks Sizing of the backend R/3 System One of the first things to realize is that no “magic formula” exists for sizing a system. for ITS Release 4. Unfortunately. The installation guide referenced in this chapter is the SAP@Web Installation Guide. New products. then you should design for the peak. The example to the left shows a few of these differences. Your marketing and sales departments must provide realistic estimates of expected web traffic. you spend more money for equipment than necessary. If you do not plan and size for the surge (or peak) of seasonal traffic. such as Christmas. the sizing effort should concentrate on the backend R/3 System first.Chapter 16: ITS Installation and Configuration Issues KOR ^~|~} p~{ mz| ^z
~ Estimating the web traffic is very similar to a restaurant manager trying to determine how many waiters to have on staff on a particular night. Seasonal traffic could be two to ten times the “nonseasonal” traffic. performance and customer response time will be slow. the customers become frustrated with slow service. or Mothers Day. The primary issue is to obtain a good estimate of the web traffic you expect to hit your site. If the majority of your business (revenue) is in a peak season. A business decision must be made on how to balance the requirement to handle peak traffic versus idle resources during the period (or valley) when traffic is low. Yet estimated web traffic affects all your sizing decisions. the customer gets fast service. you need to estimate the number of concurrent users that will connect to your site and browse or purchase products using the Online Store. . and thus. or more. With too few staff. such as Christmas. ^z
~ A grower of red roses would have its peak on Valentines Day. and a hotel or vacation resort may have its peak during the summer months. lost revenue. This dilemma is the “peaks and valley” concept. and as a result. whereas a tulip grower would have its peak on Easter. Specifically. has significant business and financial impact. Valentines Day. Microsoft Windows NT web and SAP ITS servers are relatively inexpensive compared to the backend R/3 servers. But the extra waiters stand around without anything to do. Seasonal traffic varies for different industries and even companies within the same industry. especially if it involves high-end or expensive UNIX servers and disk subsystems. Therefore. the response time for customer and internal user. will degrade because of extra traffic into the: n n n n Limited bandwidth network Web severs ITS Backend R/3 System The business impact of underestimating web traffic results in lost sales. If you underestimate the web traffic. l~zz
Another factor to consider in estimating web traffic is seasonal traffic. m~ [z|~} kHL l~ The single largest cost item is the effect on the backend R/3 System. in order of cost. Some customers might not return for repeat business. If too much staff is present. If you overestimate the web traffic. costing the restaurant their salary without the revenue of additional customers. The few waiters are overworked. Web traffic numbers are very difficult to estimate. A retail store may have its peak at Christmas. they write to the database.75 internal Sales and Distribution (SD) users (1: 0. The specific ratio of customers who browse versus purchase depends on the specific site. the backend R/3 System must be sized for 3. This case is not so taxing on the database. FI. n [~|z z} l Benchmarks are used to assist in sizing a new system. MM. a good estimate of web traffic is critical to size the backend R/3 System. m~ bml l~~ See the “ITS Environment Sizing” and “Sizing the ITS” sections of the ITS Tuning Guide.75). no physical disk access occurs. you must also consider other standard R/3 sizing issues. which requires physical disk access. query. or more) . two years. m~ [z|~} kHL l~ A major issue is how to size the backend R/3 System. A “rough” ratio for calculating load and sizing is 1. When browsers read from the R/3 database and the data is in one of the buffers or caches. When customers enter their orders.000 internal SD users).) Volume of transactions Background (batch) jobs that need to be run Number of items in the various master files Amount of history to keep (one year.000 (this number is equivalent to 3. This ratio has an effect on sizing as follows: n Customers who browse read from the R/3 database.6C [ o~ i|z kz The browsing versus purchase ratio is the number of web users who browse the catalog of items versus those who purchase items. the number of Sales and Distribution users) to the benchmark table and looking up the recommended sizing for acceptable performance. and the number of concurrent internal users is 300.KPI Configuration Guide | Release 4. When sizing the backend R/3 System. 4. Physical disk access takes more time than reading the data from the buffer or cache.6D for benchmark and sizing information on the ITS server. Some variables to consider include: n n n n n The different types of users and their needs (for example SD.0 external web user to 0. etc. Because of the potential large number of web customers and the probable situation that the number of web customers is many times the number of internal R/3 users. Customers who purchase need both read and write access to the R/3 database. CO.300 users. It is this disk-writing access that impacts performance. An estimate is made by comparing an input value (for example. ^z
~ If the expected number of concurrent external web users is 4. transactional. Please check with your UNIX vendor for availability. sizing is not a “one-time” event or task.” the detail or summary level for which they are configured For these variables and more. The sizing of the backend R/3 System primarily takes place with the hardware vendor.Chapter 16: ITS Installation and Configuration Issues n KPJ For the various “information systems. The AGate is currently being ported to LINUX. please go to the ITS home page at www. where the customer provides the necessary input. ngbqG Availability of individual UNIX versions depends on the various UNIX vendors porting the LINUX ITS to their version of UNIX. the Quick Sizer. This tool is available on SAPNet under the alias sizing. hardware vendors recommend a hardware configuration.saplabs. You can use the preliminary sizing tool. Therefore. It needs to be reviewed periodically or any time a decision is made that could affect sizing. a decision could be made that affects the sizing of the system.0\<sid>. the availability date for the LINUX AGate is still to be determined.com/its. (both the WGate and AGate) is currently only available for Microsoft Windows NT. the operating system of the web server is limited to the operating systems that the WGate is able to run on. bml k ]~| Other chapters make reference to <its_root>. Thus. Using experience with other customers. The default path of <its_root> is C:\SAP\ITS\2. the values are not fixed. f| p} gm The full Internet Transaction Server (ITS). during the development process. In fact. As of this writing. ebgnq z} ngbq ebgnqG The WGate is available on LINUX. . For current information and status. b~~ mzz| l~~ AbmlB h~z l~ The ITS WGate must be installed on the same computer as the web server. l
~ a The WGate and AGate can be installed together on a single server when performance. For further instructions. see the section “Dual Host Installation” in SAP@Web Installation Guide. By having both on a separate server. thus adding an additional layer of security to the AGate. and security. For further instructions. In this way. see the section “Single Host Installation” in SAP@Web Installation Guide.KPK Configuration Guide | Release 4. scalability. a firewall can be inserted between the WGate and AGate. Dual Host: Split the WGate and AGate. The installation of a second server is eliminated. scalability. and install on separate servers. in a testing environment). ]z
a The WGate and AGate can be installed on separate servers to enhance performance. or security is not an issue (for example. the processing requirements of the AGate are separated from the web server and the WGate. . thus saving cost and administration effort. there are two major options: n n Single Host: Install the WGate and AGate together on a single server.6C bz
z h In the installation of the ITS. Virtual ITS allows the use of a single computer for nonproduction systems where performance. and training systems. where two or more web servers are installed on a single computer. This keeps the administration instance separate from the production ITS instance. test. _
~ Z}z To make administration of files easier. Prerequisite: To install virtual ITS on a single computer. sandbox. The following diagram shows a virtual ITS on a single host installation. Each web server is addressable individually by the combination of an IP address and port number. QA. Each virtual ITS links to a virtual web server. This link is shown in the following diagram. scalability. Virtual ITS is recommended when installing the web-based ITS Administration tool. A virtual ITS can be made on both a single and dual host environment. This example is a development environment where the two ITS instances are for the DEV system (client 100) and the QAS system (client 100). we recommend the files for the various instances be separated by adding the following directories: F ?LWVSXE HVKB VLG!B FOLHQW! ZZZURRW VFULSWV GHYB (the home directory) (the scripts directory) VLG!B FOLHQW! . oz
p~{ l~~ An important item in a virtual ITS is the virtual web server. These systems would include development. a matching number of virtual web servers must be installed before the virtual ITS installations can begin.Chapter 16: ITS Installation and Configuration Issues KPL oz
bml A virtual ITS is a computer with more than one ITS instance installed. and security tend not to be issues. http://webserver:8001 or http://webserver:8002) . m ~| z {~S Web Server Web Server 1 Web Server 2 ITS Instance ITS instance 1 ITS instance 2 HTTP port 8001 8002 When you install virtual ITS on the same IP address.6C ZZZURRW VFULSWV TDVB VLG!B FOLHQW! ZZZURRW VFULSWV DGP (this is for the HTML administration tool) ZZZURRW VFULSWV These directories must be created at the operating system level before the IIS and ITS installations that require them. you need to specify the matching IP address as: http://<computer_name>:<http_port> (for example. in order to specify which web server to connect to. \~| z l~|| oz
p~{ l~~ With //web1:80 (port 80 is the default if you do not enter a port number) and //web1:8001.31 HTTP 80 80 ^z
~ When you install virtual ITS. m ~| z bi z}}~S Web Server Web Server 1 Web Server 2 ITS Instance ITS instance 1 ITS instance 2 Computer Name Webserver1 Webserver2 IP 128. or specify a different port for each web server (single NIC).128. the difference is the IP address. the difference is the port number.128. For the ITS install. When installing a virtual web server. you need to specify the web server using a unique IP and port number combination. You need to have either a different IP address for each web server (multiple Network Interface Cards or NICs). 80 versus 8001. see the section “Single Host Installation” in SAP@Web Installation Guide. With //web1:80 and //web2:80. it is not necessary to enter the port number in the URL (for example //webserver1).KPM Configuration Guide | Release 4. you need to specify the matching ports as: http://<computer_name>:<http_port> (for example. http://webserver1:80 or http://webserver2:80) If the default port 80 is used.128. web1 versus web2.30 128.128. 3. and manual 2. is installed from the Microsoft Windows NT 4. Perform postinstallation configuration. The web server for this documentation. the Microsoft Internet Information Server. Install the NT option pack and install the Microsoft IIS web server. For the instances. Create the virtual directory.com/its. SBX) 4.saplabs. Gather all required items. you must create a matching virtual web site for each virtual ITS instance you install. ADM) The live instance (for example. DEV) Additional instances (for example. create the web sites for: • • • The ITS administration instance (for example. SBX) 5. The last three tasks are repeated for each additional web server you create.0 Option Pack. and other information can be obtained from the ITS web site at: www. .Chapter 16: ITS Installation and Configuration Issues KPN bml bz
z i|~ To install a virtual ITS. bz
~ bml The ITS software. To create multiple web servers: n n n n n Create the required directory structure. DEV) Any additional instances (for example. \~z~ oz
p~{ l~~ f| bbl For our purposes. Install the ITS for: • • • The ADM instance The live instance (for example. Install the web server. Start the web site for the virtual instance. the following tasks need to be performed: 1. Add the web server for the virtual instance. IAC. documentation. • • Web server install program and instructions ITS install program. . n n Single-host Dual-host Please note. 3900 plus nine ports is 3900–3909. See the section “ITS Installation Requirements” in the SAP@Web Installation Guide. instance ESH is on port 3900: n n n n sapavw00_ESH 3900/tcp # automatically created by install sapavwmm_ESH 3901/tcp # automatically created by install In the next example. look in the services file: c:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\Services Look for the entry: sapavw00_<virtual ITS> ^z
~ In this example. instance ADM is on port 4000: sapavw00_ADM sapavwmm_ADM 4000/tcp 4001/tcp # automatically created by install # automatically created by install The ports you will use range from the port number in the services file to nine ports above that. n n Resetting password for the ITSADMIN user in the ITS administration instance. After installing the AGate. bz
z g~ ]z
a bml bz
z The AGate must be installed before the WGate. installation prerequisites must be met before the ITS can be installed.saplabs. For example. Changing the timeout parameters for the working ITS instances. you need to know what TCP ports the AGate is using.com/ess. Please see the SAP@Web Installation Guide for detailed installation steps. These parameters are • • ~usertimeout ~timeout The timeout parameters control how long the ITS retains a connection to the backend R/3 System when a web user is idle or has disconnected without properly logging out. to find the specific port number to enter. iz
z Two important postinstallation tasks exist. To install the WGate.KPO Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C The Employee Self-Service (ESS) manual can be ordered from www. Release 4. 2000. If users close their browser without logging out.6D. the work process associated with their activity remains running and is thus unusable to anyone else. ITS Tuning Guide. Walldorf.6D. SAP AG. 2000. If too many users close without logging out.Chapter 16: ITS Installation and Configuration Issues KPP Each ITS connection to R/3 uses a dialog work process. k~~~|~ SAP@Web Installation Guide. Walldorf. The ITS administration tool is used to change timeout parameters. . all the work processes could become used and the R/3 System could become unusable. Release 4. SAP AG. requiring a shutdown of the application servers that the ITS server connects to. KPQ Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C . & + $ 3 7 ( 5 JR bz|~ l~| . A firewall prevents something on the exposed side of the firewall from getting to the protected side of the firewall. giving you time to get out of the car. we discuss infrastructure security issues that affect installation for Online Store preconfiguration. SAP is not a network security company. the firewall prevents an engine fire from spreading quickly into the passenger compartment. In your car. For firewalls. This important information includes user IDs. A firewall only allows permitted network traffic (by protocol and port number) to pass from one segment to another. Please check various technical books for additional sources. passwords. . thus saving the ship from sinking. company financial information. ^z
~ In home construction.6C h~~ In this chapter. we provide basic information. but a network specialist needs to configure the firewalls. What we discuss in this chapter are the major security items you should consider. a wall constructed of a special material can slow down the spread of a fire. In ships. separating the Internet from your internal network. These issues include: n n Firewalls Encryption Sensitive data is located on and transmitted between the various components of your Online Store and the R/3 System. We leave the details of network security setup to specialists. We have not reviewed the books listed below. the watertight compartment restricts flooding in a ship to the one compartment that flooded.KQI Configuration Guide | Release 4. _~z
pz b z _~z
X A firewall separates network segments from each other. and more. h~ l|~ `~~z
_~z
bz SAP does not endorse any particular products. We provide the following listing for your convenience. This list shows just a few of the firewall books on the market. giving you time to get out of the house. The IP addresses are specific to your installation. Firewalls and Internet Security: Repelling the Wily Hacker. ISBN: 1565921240 (old but still useful for background information on firewalls) William Cheswick and Steven Bellovin. the attacker would be free to inflict immediate damage. according to a concept known as “defense-in-depth. i
z| ~ i~ _~z
You need to know where each firewall should be placed in relation to the various components. ^z
~ A medieval castle’s defense-in-depth is composed of the following sequential levels of security: n n n Moat Outer castle wall Inner castle wall If attackers pass through the moat. Firewalls: 24seven. (O’Relly. so an intruder penetrating one layer has to penetrate additional layers to get to the R/3 System. they still have to penetrate the outer castle wall. (Prentice Hall. This sequence of barriers gives the defenders more time to detect and prevent an attack. If the only defense is the moat. Firewalls: A Complete Guide. The pass-through parameters (protocol and port number) are required by network security personnel to configure the firewall. and what the pass-through parameters are for the firewalls. they still have to penetrate the inner castle wall. 1997). (McGraw-Hill. Zwicky. ISBN: 0070246459 __________ . 1995). ISBN: 020163466X) Marcus Goncalves. ISBN: 0071356398. (Sybex. 1999). once past the water barrier. Firewalls Complete (Complete Series). Brent Chapman and Elizabeth D. n n n n Marcus Goncalves and Vinicius Goncalves. (Osborne. a \~ r _~z
Firewalls should be installed in layers. ISBN: 0782125298. . (Addison-Wesley. If attackers get past the outer castle wall. In addition. Building Internet Firewalls.” What is a defense-in-depth? This concept is a defense where each firewall provides a layer of security. Mathew Strebe. 1999). the network specialist needs to know the IP address of the source system(s) and the target system(s). 1998). (2nd edition: July 2000. Protecting Your Web Site with Firewalls. ISBN: 0201633574.Chapter 17: Infrastructure Security n KQJ D. ISBN: 0136282075. 1994). This firewall may exist in companies that put their web servers outside a corporate firewall. a second firewall is not needed. The pass-through parameters are as follows: Protocol TCP/IP Ports xxxx . a firewall protects the web server. sent from the ITS AGate to the R/3 System.yyyy For the ports. . Ten ports are used for each ITS installation. so it should already exist in the system landscape. The second firewall should be installed between the ITS WGate and the ITS AGate. the default ports run from 3900–3909. separating the internal network from any external traffic. This firewall restricts access to the ITS AGate server from the web server. nine ports above the starting port number. this firewall may require a separate installation.KQK Configuration Guide | Release 4. If the ITS is installed on a single host. The pass-through parameters are as follows: Protocol HTTP HTTPS Ports 80 443 _~z
K Penetrating the second firewall (Firewall 2). as in a development environment. In most environments.6C _~z
J The first firewall should be installed between the Internet and the web server (see above). For example. Specific to the ITS. an invader could access sensitive transaction information. It represents the first layer of defense. xxxx is a starting port address (the default is 3900) and yyyy is the ending port number. such as user IDs and passwords. part of the standard R/3 installation. the same SAProuter used for the SAP service connection and internal users can also be used for the web connection. the port number depends on the installation. if the R/3 System number is 00.Chapter 17: Infrastructure Security KQL For virtual ITS installations. For example. If you use the SAProuter. also allows only certain protocols through particular ports. instance ADM is on port 4000 sapavw00_ADM 4000 # automatically created by install _~z
L Install the third firewall between the ITS AGate and R/3 System. For example: ITS ITS #1 ITS #2 The ITS install program looks in the services file for available ports before configuring the AGate and writes the port number that it configures into the services file. Ports 3900-3909 3910-3919 To find the specific port number for entry. after the AGate is installed. . The third firewall can be either another commercial firewall or the SAProuter. one can be installed to handle only the web traffic to R/3. The pass-through parameters are as follows: Protocol SAP GUI Ports 32xx For the ports. xx is the system number for the R/3 installation. This firewall restricts the network traffic from the ITS AGate server to R/3. If your network security policy requires a second SAProuter. Only SAP GUI protocol is allowed through this firewall. look in the services file: c:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\Services The entry to look for is: sapavw00_<virtual ITS> ^z
~ In this example. The SAProuter. instance ESH is on port 3900 n n sapavw00_ESH 3900/tcp # automatically created by install In the next example. the port would be 3200. KQM Configuration Guide | Release 4. from being viewed and used by unauthorized persons. secure one or two internal network links to: n n Prevent internal users from viewing customer or other sensitive data on the internal network. thus at risk of being tapped. you are securing the link between the web customer and your web server. Encryption has two goals: n n Protect the customer data on the Internet from being viewed by unauthorized parties. Protect the data within your network from being viewed by unauthorized parties. The encryption is done by using secure HTTP protocol or HTTPS from the customer’s browser. . for more information on outsourcing. This link goes over a possibly insecure WAN between the ASP and the customer. “Outsourcing” on page 295. where the web server and ITS AGate are outsourced and the rest of the system is located in-house. such as credit card data. If the Online Store preconfiguration is partially outsourced to an Application Service Provider (ASP).6C ^| For additional security. The data link is external to your facility. Protect data on the network from outside attacks that penetrate the firewalls. encryption can be implemented. You do this to protect the security of sensitive customer data. i~| ~ ]zz p r g~ Encrypt network traffic because: n n Sensitive data is being transmitted on an internal network and you want to prevent unauthorized internal personnel from accessing it. See chapter 19. i~| ~ \~ ]zz ~ b~~ When you protect customer data on the Internet. the link between the ITS WGate and ITS AGate could be encrypted. To protect data within your network. The above diagram shows where encryption can be implemented for an Online Store’s system landscape. Release 4. SAP AG.6D. Walldorf. The network links can be secured using encryption such as secure network communications (SNC) between the: n n ITS WGate and ITS AGate ITS AGate and R/3 System See the online documentation for more information about SNC at: SAP Library → Basis Components → Security (BC-SEC) → Secure Network Communications (SNC) k~~~|~ SAP@Web Installation Guide. 2000.Chapter 17: Infrastructure Security KQN Encryption can be done using various commercial encryption programs to encrypt the message on one side and then decrypt it when it gets to the destination. . KQO Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C . & + $ 3 7 ( 5 KI b~z| m}Fiz \~ . Others such as direct and dial-up phone connections or physical disk and CD-ROM updates would not go through the firewall. When we state that the installation of third-party components is part of the R/3 installation project.6C h~~ In this chapter. and freight calculation can be connected to the vendors in various ways. and freight calculation) and how they fit into the system landscape with the network firewalls. g~ Not all components fit into the firewalls as shown above. Those such as credit card verification. tax calculation. tax calculation. we mean that it is not an additional system installation specifically for the Online Store preconfiguration component. credit card verification. . These four components are: n n n n Credit card verification Tax calculation Freight calculation E-mail and fax Third-party products that interface with R/3 fill specialized needs beyond the scope of R/3. we discuss four of the other components to which the Online Store preconfiguration interfaces. These third-party products aid the Online Store preconfiguruation by performing needed tasks—all while the web customer remains online. These installations need to be interfaced and configured as part of the initial configuration of the Sales and Distribution (SD) module.KQQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. The above diagram shows the additional components (e-mail. With a verification and authorization component. The customer can then use a different card. the customer can be immediately informed before the sales process is complete. g~ In future releases. and return to complete the order. This immediate verification reduces manual authorization handling and prevents product shipment if the bank does not honor the charge. use the alias CSP (for Complementary Software Providers) for a list of vendors who are certified for this interface. Many popular vendors are already certified or are in process of certification. or an always-on connection if you are a company with significant credit card transactions. the web customer’s credit card can be checked while the customer is online.Chapter 18: Interfacing with Third-Party Components KQR \~} \z} o~|z z} Zz Credit card verification and authorization services allow you to process credit card orders online. If any authorization problems occur. “Credit Card Authorizations and Settlement” on page 167. For more information on interfacing for credit cards. the web customer can save the order. . state = California. see chapter 9. without having to reenter the order from the beginning. Your network connection to the verification and authorization service must be either dial-up (on demand) for limited traffic. On SAPNet. mz \z
|
z The two options for calculating tax are: n n Calculating tax within R/3 Using an external third-party tax calculation package Third-party tax calculation packages calculate sales tax based on the web customer’s tax jurisdiction (for example. The credit card verification and authorization software must be installed on a separate computer and connected to R/3 over the network. The SD module is configured to interface and R/3 is configured to communicate with the credit card verification system. city = Palo Alto) and add the appropriate sales tax to the order. resolve the issue with their bank. You set up these configurations during the R/3 installation. l~ ~ \~} \z} b~z|~ SAP has defined an interface—CA-PCI (Payment Card Interface)—with which you can achieve seamless integration with any third-party software or service that supports this interface. if a credit card is declined. county = Santa Clara. We recommend you consult with your accountants or tax department to determine if Internet sales are taxable for you. and others peak over 8%. see chapter 5. At 8%. and an even more significant portion of the gross margin. _~ \z
|
z A freight calculation component allows your Online Store to calculate freight charges based on the item being ordered and adds the freight charge to the order. Some states have no sales tax. you would have to either: n n Make a second charge to the web customer’s credit card. see chapter 5. the sales tax could be a significant portion of the sale. Similar to taxes. either at the time of sale or after the product is packed and ready for shipping. The penalties for not paying these taxes. while still online. they may not return to your site. This configuration occurs during the original R/3 installation project. “Tax Calculation” on page 87. if you do not compute the freight at the time of sale. could be severe. If the sales tax is not computed at time of sale. The SD module can interface with external tax packages. paying the tax out of the gross margin might turn the sale into a loss. The tax packages also prepare the tax reports for the various tax jurisdictions. For more information on tax calculation. If a customer is charged twice. but R/3 must be configured to communicate with a particular external tax package. wherever due. you have to either: n n Make a second charge to the web customer’s credit card for freight Pay the freight out of the gross margin of the sale For more information on freight calculation. . “Freight Calculation” on page 86. in terms of who you have to pay and how much.6C Sales tax rates differ based on where the customer is located (their tax jurisdiction). including freight. If the margin is small. The ability to calculate the freight charge and add it to the sales order allows the web customer to get the complete cost.KRI Configuration Guide | Release 4. p~ \z
|
z~ _~ At two times you can calculate and charge freight. Pay the tax out of the gross margin of the sale An open question remains as to whether sales over the Internet are taxable by various states. g~ We have not made use of the XSI interface in this release but hope to provide solutions around it in the subsequent releases. An adjustment would need to be made to the order. \z~ _~ Z~ iz|~} l Z}zz~G After the purchase is packed. all in one transaction. ezG The packaging overhead (such as packing materials. The shipping cost may dramatically affect the price of the order and may result in late order cancellations.Chapter 18: Interfacing with Third-Party Components Z m~ lz
~ KRJ Z}zz~G Assessing freight at the time of sale allows the freight charge to be presented to the web customer and charged to their charge card at the time of purchase. Your employees can enter data into a freight company’s terminal or web page to determine the exact freight charge. we recommend you look at this interface and consider the solutions that can be developed around it. b~G Charging freight at the time of sale requires that the material master record for each item be maintained with the data required to calculate the freight charges (such as weight. SAP created the Express Shipping Interface (XSI) interface specification for integrating the freight service provider solutions. The installation of a freight system is often done as a part of the R/3 installation. and shipping restrictions). size of box. measured. ezG Your customer must deal with an updated bill. size. or a second charge made against the web customer’s charge card. l~ n ~ l~ _~ \z
|
z The R/3 System needs to be configured to interface with particular freight vendors and their freight calculation packages. Meanwhile. you can: n n n Generate the tracking number per service provider Print the labels using the templates provided in the system Pull in the freight rates from flat files to the condition tables using the ALE IDocs . Each freight calculation package has its own processes to interface with their company and update their rate tables. b~G This method of assessing freight is an after-the-fact calculation. and orders packed into more than one box) sometimes does not get calculated into the freight calculation. At this point the unknown variables of packaging overhead are no longer unknown. and weighed. a more accurate freight charge can be assessed. Thus the actual freight may be different from what you charged the customer. With the help of this interface. R/3 documents. Many other scenarios are possible and need to be considered based on your company’s communication policy. This integration gives tremendous capability to the R/3 System. and finally goes to SAPconnect layer. and sendmail™. Microsoft Office™ documents. and fax bitmaps) can be transmitted in both directions. and address management. for example. Topcall™.KRK Configuration Guide | Release 4. making use of SAPscript. message control. SAP provides two different technologies: n n SAPcommunications – The communication server is a stand-alone software suite that connects to R/3 through CPI-C links SAPconnect – It uses the RFC technology of R/3 and expects the application software to provide the RFC server. However. ^Ffz
z} _z E-mails and faxes come under the topic of business communication. enabling R/3 applications and users to send and receive documents from a communication server mailbox. SAP has developed a technical layer to allow easy and open integration with popular third-party messaging application software such as Microsoft Exchange™. Microsoft Exchange Connector.6C n Send out the manifest using the ALE IDocs or XML documents using the Business Connector. . please note that in this release. Attachment files (for example. b~z lZi|~ z} f| ^|z~ n lZi|~| The illustration below explains the interactions between different components of SAP systems. and Microsoft Exchange. In this chapter. we discuss one solution using SAPconnect. The document starts at the application side. through the Internet or as a fax. we focus on the outbound flow of business documents. Documents can also be sent and received in the R/3 System through other connectors connected to the server. connects to various supported messaging applications. the SAPconnect layer makes use of RFC protocol. and exchanges business documents as shown below. The integration requires the: n Availability of Microsoft Exchange with appropriate SMTP mail gateway software (the installation of Microsoft Exchange and its setup to send emails is outside the scope of this document) Installation of SAP Exchange Connector software Creation of an RFC destination in SAP Maintenance of the user master with Internet e-mail address Configuration of the SAPconnect software n n n n .Chapter 18: Interfacing with Third-Party Components KRL After the document arrives at the SAPconnect layer. you should have already decided on: n n n Program IDs for the Exchange Connector services RFCin and RFCout RFC username for RFCin service Routing address patterns such as *.org.6C bz
lZi ^|z~ \~| The SAP Exchange Connector connects the Microsoft Exchange server to the R/3 System. and message transport between the Microsoft Exchange server and SAPconnect.com. During the installation of the connector.KRM Configuration Guide | Release 4. the R/3 System’s communications interface. There are two options for installing the SAP Exchange Connector. The SAP Exchange Connector controls message receipt.de . *. or *. message conversion. You can install on either: n n A separate computer system under Microsoft Windows NT workstation/server (variant A) A Microsoft Exchange Server itself (variant B) Please use the online documentation of SAP Exchange Connector: SAP Library → Basis Components → Basis Services / Communication Interfaces (BC-SRV) → Communication Interfaces (BC-SRV-COM) → BC-SAP Exchange Connector The online documentation explains all aspects of the Exchange Connector installation and its relationship with Microsoft Exchange. Ensure at the time of installation that the system administrator has global authorizations. & + $ 3 7 ( 5 KJ h| . There are several reasons to outsource the system. In that case.6C h~~ Outsourcing involves locating some or all of your computing equipment at a third-party hosting company. such that each is only bearing a portion of the cost. the cost for the service is billed monthly. One reason for outsourcing is the financial savings you get from managing your cash flow. you face significant upfront cash outlay. and related equipment. Outsourcing is a way for smaller companies to reduce the cost of running and maintaining a complex system landscape. Outsourcing is not a new phenomenon. and you kept the installation in-house. networks. the savings would decrease because you would be duplicating infrastructure you already have. the backup generator at the ASP would not be an additional benefit. ASPs operate and maintain the servers. having existed since the early days of computing in the form of time-sharing and data processing service bureaus. you would have to purchase and install a generator. ^z
~ If you already have a backup power generator of sufficient output to handle the additional equipment. In an ASP situation. The price of the specialized equipment and personnel is not borne by you alone. These costs are spread among the various other customers of the ASP. p h|~X Outsourcing is a business decision. the generator at the ASP would be a benefit. This hosting company is also known as an Application Service Provider (ASP). If however you did not have a backup power generator. The two primary reasons are: n n Financial cost savings Difficulty in finding and keeping the specialized personnel required to operate and maintain the system _z|z
lz g~ A leasing arrangement can also reduce the initial cash outlay.KRO Configuration Guide | Release 4. avoiding a large upfront cash outlay for equipment purchase. They are responsible for system upkeep to an agreed-upon level specified in a service-level agreement (SLA). . if you outsource. Note that cost savings apply where all or most of the infrastructure does not exist and must be put in place. If you purchase all the equipment to run in-house. If adequate infrastructure already exists. ^z
~ One Database Administrator (DBA) could support three or four small customers. ^z{
^~ e|z There are three options for equipment location.Chapter 19: Outsourcing KRP i~~
For certain specialized skills. financially justifying such hiring and attracting such a person could be difficult. who would otherwise not be fully utilized. finding personnel at the level you need could be difficult. A small company may have difficulty justifying and staffing a full web and R/3 organization. You would still have access to the pool of expertise that an ASP would have to maintain your in-house data center. Con You need to finance the purchase of the equipment. where the ASP essentially takes over your IT operation Pro Con The equipment is onsite where you have You need to finance the purchase of the physical control over it and the data. economies of scale that a shared data center would have. There might be security issues with your equipment and data being outside of your physical control. Your equipment can reside: n Onsite. The pro and con discussions assume that the specific R/3 and Online Store preconfiguration equipment must be acquired. Security issues of having equipment and The resource sharing benefits would be data physically outside of your facility minimal. This arrangement would save each customer the full cost of a DBA. Not all ASPs provide you with all options. essentially. People with this kind of specialized skill might demand a high salary. Each person would either be underworked or have to fill many roles to keep busy full time. . as there would not be the and control are eliminated. you are renting space at the ASP facility for your equipment) Pro You would save because of the infrastructure that exists at the ASP. For a small company. equipment and required infrastructure. but with your own equipment (You would own the equipment located at the ASP. n Offsite. An ASP allows you to have access to these skilled people and share the cost with other customers of the ASP. Wgate. and AGate Everything izz
h|~ § p~{ l~~ z} p`z~ In this system landscape option. equipment and data being out of your physical control. You would save on the equipment and infrastructure that exists at the ASP.KRQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. only the web server is outsourced. the web server and the ITS WGate get outsourced to the ASP. The WAN link between the WGate (at the ASP) and the AGate (at the customer site) is potentially an unsecured link. i{
~ z} b~ The problem with a partial outsource of the web server and WGate may be security. l~ ez}|z~ h|~ h You can also consider outsourcing from a system landscape perspective. There are three options: n n n Partial – web server and WGate Partial – web server. deciding exactly what is outsourced. At ASP Dual Host Web Server AGate svr At Customer R/3 Firewall 3 Firewall 1 Web Server Web Customer WGate Firewall 2 Internet WAN Encryption Links Encrypted Links With minimal outsourcing.6C n Offsite. Everything else is kept in-house. The data going over this link should be encrypted to reduce your exposure. ASP-provided equipment (You would be renting the equipment from the ASP) Pros Cons You do not have to finance the purchase There might be security issues with your of equipment. AGate . ITS WGate. while the R/3 System is kept in-house.Chapter 19: Outsourcing KRR izz
h|~ § p~{ l~~E p`z~E z} Z`z~ In this system landscape option. The data going over this link should be encrypted to reduce your exposure. The web server and the ITS are outsourced. ITS AGate. The WAN link between the AGate (at the ASP) and the R/3 System (onsite) is potentially an unsecured link. At ASP Dual Host Web Server AGate svr At Customer R/3 Firewall 3 Firewall 3 Firewall 3 Internal Users Internal Network Firewall 1 Web Server Web Customer WGate Firewall 2 Internet AGate WAN Encryption Links This option is called full outsourcing. the entire system (web server. At ASP Dual Host Web Server AGate svr At Customer R/3 Firewall 3 Firewall 1 Web Server Web Customer WGate Firewall 2 Internet AGate WAN Encryption Links Encrypted Links This landscape option is known as medium outsourcing. an additional network issue becomes how to connect your users to the R/3 System at the ASP. With either of the two . the web server and the ITS WGate and AGate are outsourced to the ASP. where the web server. i{
~ z} b~ g~G With full outsourcing. h| ^~ With this system landscape option. ITS. and R/3 itself) is outsourced to the ASP. and R/3 Systems are all outsourced. i{
~ z} b~ The problem with this partial outsource is again security. ” Web Techniques. The following table shows the different options: Web Server/WGate Onsite. This setup poses security risks to your data. August 1999. you should look at your situation and evaluate which of the different outsource options make best business sense for you. issue 8. “The Challenge of Web Hosting. August 1999. Direct operating system access may be required to perform certain tasks.6C partial options. check with your legal and sales departments. all your data is at a site outside your immediate influence and control.LII Configuration Guide | Release 4. . the network connection was not an issue as the R/3 System was in-house. You are completely reliant on the security of the ASP to secure your data. or you must e-mail the files to the ASP who then copies the files into the appropriate locations. Yvonee Lee. page 57-59. l~|G On a fully outsourced system. You may need to access the operating system yourself.” Web Techniques. your equipment Offsite. “Designing a Data Center. You may need to work through such issues with the ASP. page 46-55. your equipment Offsite. you need FTP access into the operating system. h~ izG Running programs other than R/3 on this remote equipment may require operating system access or access of a different kind. `~~z
i{
~ z} b~ Before outsourcing. you need to decide if it makes actual business sense to outsource. volume 4. With the reasons and options for outsourcing discussed in this chapter. or have the ASP perform the required tasks. To get images for your products into the ITS WGate. volume 4. You may have contracts (such as defense departmentrelated contracts) which have clauses that prohibit or prevent you from outsourcing all or part of your system. If you decide to outsource. rented equipment n/a X X Web Server/WGate + AGate n/a X X Everything X X X k~~~|~ Justin Newton. issue 8. & + $ 3 7 ( 5 KK l~ Z}z [~ iz||~ lZi h
~ l~ . Best Practices for SAP Online Store is no different. we refer you to three specific sources of documentation.saplabs. This chapter also discusses two other system administration topics: n n Document management of images for the web site Upgrading the ITS lZi lz}z} ]|~z Rather than restate material documented elsewhere.LIK Configuration Guide | Release 4. ITS Administration • • • Installing and Starting ITS Administration User Management ITS Instance Monitoring ITS Configuration Parameters Log Files n ITS Administration in R/3 • Maintaining Internet Users n ITS Service Parameters . You need to ensure you system is administered and monitored so your web customers have reasonable response time.6C h~~ Every system needs to be administered and maintained to keep it running well. We discuss the HTML-based ITS Administration tool that comes with the ITS and makes monitoring and managing the ITS easier. including: n n n R/3 Online help ITS Administration Guide ITS Tuning Guide The online help documentation for the ITS can be found by choosing: SAP Library → Basis Components → Frontend Services (BC-FES) → ITS/SAP@Webstudio (BC-FES-ITS) → ITS Administration Guide g~ Under ITS Administration Guide you find the following topics: n In addition to the online documentation is the installation guide for the ITS SAP@Web Installation Guide. In this chapter. we do not repeat information published in the SAP standard documentation.com/its. which is available for download from the ITS web site at www. We also discuss system monitoring and some of the items that need to be monitored. and configure the ITS instances using a web interface. See the installation process for a virtual ITS in the “SAP@Web Installation Guide. Release 4. since the URL is not intuitive.com/its. control. As with all default passwords.Chapter 20: System Administration for Best Practices for SAP Online Store LIL The ITS Administration Guide. The information in the online documentation and the ITS Administration Guide is more extensive than what we could include in this guide.saplabs. Use the default user ID itsadmin and the default password init. Release 4.6D (283 pages) and ITS Tuning Guide. See the procedure to change the password in the online documentation: SAP Library → Basis Components → Frontend Services (BC-FES) → ITS/SAP@Web Studio (BC-FES-ITS) → ITS Administration Guide Then choose ITS Administration Guide → ITS Administration → User Management → Changing the Password . bz
z We recommend you install the ITS Administration tool as a separate virtual ITS specifically for this tool.” Also see the online documentation: SAP Library → Basis Components → Frontend Services (BC-FES) → ITS/SAP@Web Studio (BC-FES-ITS)→ ITS Administration Guide Then choose ITS Administration Guide → ITS Administration → Installing and Starting ITS Administration e h ~ bml Z}z m
Log on to the ITS Administration tool with the following URL: http://<host-name>:<port>/scripts/wgate/admin/! For example: http://itssvr:8001/scripts/wgate/admin/! We recommend you bookmark the URL to the ITS Administration tool. with the advantage that you can stop other ITS instances whenever you need.6D are available for download from www. Such a setup is easier to administer. We recommend you review that documentation and familiarize yourself with it for easier reference. change them as soon as possible after the installation. bml Z}z p~{ b~z|~ The ITS Administration tool is an HTML-based administration tool used to monitor. 6C n ~ bml Z}z m
g~ See the online documentation for detailed information on using the ITS Administration tool. you need to use the standard Microsoft Windows NT monitoring tools or other tools to monitor the server where the web server and WGate are installed. User management • • Managing users Changing passwords n ITS instance monitoring • • • • Monitoring the ITS instances Starting and stopping the ITS instance Monitoring ITS performance Reviewing the log files n ITS configuration • • • • ITS configuration parameters Setting up file security Setting up network security Displaying ITS service templates When you “flush log files. n Other ITS maintenance tasks • • Flushing log files Clearing the template cache n Monitoring system information f Like any system. The major functions of the ITS Administration tool are: n With the ITS Administration tool. about where the AGate is installed). and network infrastructure) for the following: Issue System problems Security Questions n n n n Are the systems running properly? Are there any processing errors? Has there been a security breach? Is someone trying to break into your system? . A work-around is to install a third ITS instance as a single-host installation on the web server. ITS server. R/3. you monitor and administer the server where the AGate component of the ITS is installed (see chapter 16. The ITS developers are aware of this issue. You need to monitor the various components of your Online Store (web server. The ITS Administration tool on the third instance would then be able to administer the system with the web server and WGate. On a dual host installation. “ITS Installation and Configuration Issues” on page 267. It does not mean flushing the data from the files.LIM Configuration Guide | Release 4. you need to monitor the Online Store systems. The purpose of this action is to get the log data from the cache (volatile memory) into the log file (nonvolatile memory or storage).” this process flushes the log information from the cache (memory) to the log file. if the number of active sessions is 61. and any others) should be reviewed on a regular basis. Specific references for monitoring: Reference ITS Definition ITS Administration Guide ITS Tuning Guide See the online documentation for ITS Instance Monitoring: SAP Library → Basis Components → Frontend Services (BC-FES) → ITS/SAP@Web Studio (BC-FES-ITS) → ITS Administration Guide Then choose ITS Administration Guide → ITS Administration → ITS Instance Monitoring R/3 See the guidebook System Administration Made Easy (Release 4. Network security Operating system Work with your network security specialist. A specific reference point is the “normal” number of sessions active. R/3. This number is an indicator that you may need to investigate why the number of active sessions has increased. “Normal” is usually specific to your installation. firewalls. but you are 74% above the “normal” number of sessions (35). If any security problems or security breaches occur. you want to minimize the problem by minimizing the amount of time that you are unaware of the problem. Your web server See the documentation (or various third-party books) for your web server. Reference points are necessary to assess and define “normal” conditions. For monitoring. .Chapter 20: System Administration for Best Practices for SAP Online Store LIN Issue Performance Questions n n n What is the load on the system? Is performance adequate or is it below a desired threshold? Where is the performance bottleneck? How many sessions are active at once? What is the traffic pattern of web customers? How many users are accessing your system? What is the CPU usage? What is the memory usage? What is the disk usage? Statistics n n n n ^z
~ n n A definite reference point is the maximum number of sessions available. for example 35. l~| The security logs of all systems (web server. and others are specific to your installation. for example 64. Some of these reference points are definite. you have not reached the maximum number of sessions (64). but preferably several times a shift. By “regular” we mean at least daily. you need reference points. routers.6A/B). Following the maximum and normal values above. See the Microsoft Windows NT documentation and various third-party NT administration books. Define the action to take when that character string is found (for example.6C Zz~} Z
~ For automated alerts. every five minutes). we recommend using a phone modem connection to the paging company rather than e-mail. we said that estimating (or guessing) web traffic with any accuracy is very difficult. 2. . see chapter 23. The ITS Administration tool provides statistics related to the ITS. web traffic must be monitored and compared to original estimates to determine if the system sizing must be adjusted to handle the actual web traffic.). Because of this problem. “update terminate”). Although some components can be scaled easily. If the system sizing must be adjusted. New problems could be programmed into the script to generate an alert page. due to the many links that an e-mail message must go through to reach the paging company. other components might present more challenges (in terms of time. effort. A pager alert reduces considerably the duration of time that you are unaware of a security problem. i~z|~ z} lz| In chapter 16. In general. such as: n n n Sessions used versus maximum number of sessions Workthreads used versus maximum number of workthreads CPU% usage p~{ l~~ Like any system. For an automated alert. the web server must be monitored on a regular basis for problems and performance issues. various security logs and scripts still need to be reviewed periodically. programming can occur as follows: 1. you may need all the lead-time you can get. page the necessary personnel).LIO Configuration Guide | Release 4. cost. _~z
e Work with your network specialist to learn where the firewall logs are located and how to read them. Even with a pager alert. Define a particular string of characters that the script would recognize as a problem (for example. For more information on gathering statistics. etc. Please review the documentation for your specific web server to see what and how different monitoring tasks should be performed. we recommend that you program a system monitor (or script) to review the contents of the various security logs regularly (for example. This program should generate a pager alert if a problem is found. “E-Business Analysis” on page 373. the phone company is more reliable than e-mail. For timely notification of alerts. nz}~ The ITS must be upgraded before you upgrade the R/3 System to either the same release to which you are upgrading or to a higher release. document management refers to the publishing and managing of graphic images for your web page. “ITS Templates” on page 215. for more information on SAP@Webstudio. If not. To publish. However all controls are now manual. the images of your products. you normally do not have access to the directories at the operating system level. For your Online Store preconfiguration. you must make sure that the files are changed in all the ITS servers in sync. one option is to go through source control. the ITS is backward compatible but not forward compatible. The ASP has to copy or move the files into the appropriate directories for you. change control discipline is required. Document management is the tracking and management of documents. . This step is part of the SAP@Web Studio process: Choose SAP Library → Basis Components → Frontend Services (BC-FES) → ITS/SAP@Web Studio (BC-FES-ITS) Then choose SAP@Web Studio → ITS Service Publishing Please see chapter 13. the wrong images could appear when a web customer looks at a page. A second option bypasses source control. Like the SAP GUI. most importantly. Bypassing is done primarily for images. When graphics are copied to the web server. images. The graphics on the production system should be the same as that on the QA system and the development system.Chapter 20: System Administration for Best Practices for SAP Online Store LIP ]|~ fzz~~ g~ If the system has been outsourced. If you have scaled the ITS. or the customer will see something different if they connect through a different ITS. 6C .LIQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. & + $ 3 7 ( 5 KL i~z|~ . Measure relevant performance statistics. . Performance is important because if system performance is poor. i~z|~ m i|~ Performance tuning of the Online Store preconfiguration utilizes the standard problem solving process. As a prerequisite. the response time for both the web customer and internal R/3 user is long. We recommend you review that documentation and familiarize yourself with it for easier reference.LJI Configuration Guide | Release 4. resulting in customer dissatisfaction. The ITS Tuning Guide. and scale your Online Store preconfiguration. • • Quantify the picture to determine whether you really have a problem. To analyze the performance: 1. The information in the ITS Tuning Guide is more extensive than what we could include in this guide. This chapter covers different performance issues and helps you decide how to define and improve performance.6C h~~ In this chapter. we discuss the various ideas and options for improving the system performance of the Online Store preconfiguration. Release 4.com/its. Create reference points so you can tell when performance is improving or worsening.saplabs. we refer you to specific source documentation.6 D is available for download from www. you must have performance statistics for comparison to determine if you indeed have a problem. lZi lz}z} ]|~z Rather than restate material documented elsewhere. Customers might wait for content. Evaluate the new performance against the reference performance. 6. DSL. you may need to “undo” whatever you did. Although each group can be further broken down to fine-tune the target. Look for the bottleneck. disk I/O and network I/O on the server. 7. not the problem itself. This step requires research using various tools to find the root problem. or other high-speed connections to their ISP. competing for disk space. cable. mz~ \~ When thinking about performance. 3. you are interested in general performance issues for each target group. As a vendor selling on the web. Repeat the cycle as needed until the performance is satisfactory or is economically unjustifiable to continue. Most customers do not have ISDN. 5. Did the performance improve or did it worsen? If it got worse. Measure the relevant performance statistics again. . The data transfer rate of a modem connection is typically much slower than the connections that a business has. Then test the performance of your web page by accessing it as a consumer would. the characteristics of your target web customer should drive the design of your web site. but there is a limit to how long they will wait before becoming dissatisfied. Evaluate the alternatives to eliminate or reduce the bottleneck. i~z|~ \~ Consumers normally have modem access to Internet Service Providers (ISPs). Web pages with lots of data and high-resolution graphics take longer to load over the phone line. the question is “performance for who”? Ask yourself: who are your target customers? The primary web customer groups are consumers and businesses. For example. 4. Be aware that what you see might only be a “symptom” of the problem. You need to work with your marketing department to determine the maximum allowable wait time for web site design. Eliminate the bottleneck.Chapter 21: Performance LJJ 2. because someone is using the ITS server as a “fileserver” to store large files that are frequently accessed. using a modem. system performance may be slow. 6C If you design your web site specifically for the current 56k analog modems. Businesses normally have high-speed connections to their ISP or directly to the Internet. then the amount of web page data is not much of an issue. If the business customer has to wait. and be ready to change when a sufficient percentage of your customer base or target market has highspeed Internet access. the amount of data on a web page has less impact on the load time than for consumers.LJK Configuration Guide | Release 4. performance improvements depend on the amount of data sent to the web customer over the Internet. `z| With graphics. page size. such as graphics. However. Because of the high-speed connection. and the faster they can do it. balancing the speed of loading the page with content. p~{ iz~ i~z|~ In this section. The issue is bandwidth. finding the right chair and ordering it may take more than 20 minutes. If a vendor’s web site takes several minutes to load long pages full of pictures. you must keep the amount of data to a practical minimum. i~z|~ [~~ ^z
~ A buyer in the purchasing department is looking for a chair. How fast is the connection between the web customer and their ISP? In order to improve the speed that a web page loads. in the business world. many consumers do much of their web surfing at work where the Internet access is much faster. To minimize the data size of the web page: n Reduce the amount of graphics on the page • • Display images on demand. . the less work backs up on their desk. you need to monitor the technology and market. If your target customers are other businesses. time is money. and traffic. Use thumbnails of images that the web customer can click on to get a full-size graphic. Click on the text name of an item to display the graphics. The buyer’s company may switch to vendors with faster web sites where the buyer can complete the search and place an order in a few minutes. Your customers should have a sufficiently fast connection. People have more and more work to do. rather than put all the full-size images on the page. we discuss some of the specifics that affect the performance of a web page. they may switch to a vendor with a faster web site. Because of the slow performance using a standard telephone line modem at home. . At that point. iz~ l~ Another way to improve web page performance is to reduce the page size. deep color image. If your system is not adequately sized for the traffic you get. some pages using HTTPS and some pages HTTP mz| Traffic has a direct influence on performance. l~| Internet security is a serious concern for any e-commerce site. Rather than have a web page many screens long. The numbers indicate the resource usage. Implementing HTTPS also affects the design of your web site. a serious performance impact results from this additional security. you start losing customers. the response time for the web customers increases to an intolerable amount. Smaller pages load faster. This impact must be considered in sizing your systems. the greater the effect on performance.000 colors. protocol HTTP HTTPS WGate 1 5 AGate 5 5 The above table shows that implementing HTTPS has a significant performance impact on the web server. have the web user click on the smaller and lower color depth image to get a full size. Browser-based security in the form of secured HTTP (HTTPS) can be implemented. The more traffic on the web site. although the customer has more pages to go through.Chapter 21: Performance n LJL Lower the graphics resolution or color depth of images on the page Most web applications do not need to show an item with a color depth of over 65. The following table shows the relative performance impact on the WGate and AGate for HTTP and HTTPS. However. You must either: n n Design the entire site using HTTPS Use a combination of protocols. break up the page into several smaller pages linked to a higher-level page. If this depth is required. memory. if you have 4.000 concurrent web customers browsing or buying. This logon group separates the Internet-generated traffic from the internal users of the R/3 System at the application-server level. the web traffic that will access your online store. This amount can be a significant number. because such usage adds unnecessarily to the server’s workload. but you are dependent on this number to size your system. The first level of sizing would be to provide a dedicated logon group of application servers to interface to the ITS. Also look for ITS servers that are using processing. . For example. and disk space.000 internal SD users. consider replacing the NIC with a 100baseT card (your network must be able to support 100baseT). is to accurately estimate the web traffic that will hit your site. in addition to the internal load. Estimating web traffic is extremely difficult. and more specifically. “ITS Installation and Configuration Issues” on page 269. The backend R/3 System must be appropriately sized for this load. Such “excess baggage” should be removed from the web or ITS servers and moved to another server.LJM Configuration Guide | Release 4.75 internal SD users. Check the servers and look for programs or services that do not need to be running on the web. as discussed in chapter 16. Your current ITS server has two CPUs and the provision to increase to four processors. you must keep track of: n n Total volume of web traffic Browse versus buy customers l~ \z l ~ [z|~} kHL l~ A single Online Store web user is roughly equivalent to 0. Consider adding the additional two processors. l|z
^z
z~ ~ \~ l~~ ^z
~ Imagine your CPU utilization at peak hours is steady at over 95%.6C The problem. this amount is equivalent to approximately 3. We recommend you do not use the ITS servers as general file servers. Programs and other tasks may have been added to the server that diminish server performance. Again we go back to the issue of getting a good estimate of concurrent web traffic. If the existing Network Interface Card (NIC) is a 10baseT card. For performance. The cost of upgrading older equipment may not make business sense anymore. the equipment should be replaced with current technology. you might consider upgrading the server itself. Is the performance of the server components significantly slower. such as processor or memory (RAM). Current servers can be configured with more than 2GB of RAM and memory speed over 100MHz. In this case. 2 GB or more of RAM. can be scaled. l|z
~ l~ We discuss various options to scale the performance of the system. and the memory is the slower 66MHz. Otherwise.Chapter 21: Performance LJN nz}~ ~ l~~ Determine if any performance component. not a virtual ITS for a nonproduction system. you will see little or no improvement in performance. Scaling applies to the scaling of the production system. You can: n n n n n Separate the WGate from the AGate Scale the WGate Scale the AGate Scale R/3 Have a dedicated R/3 System Be sure to scale the component that is causing the bottleneck. The options for scaling the WGate and AGate assume that the existing hardware is maximally configured—four processors. slower equipment creates more of a performance bottleneck than can be worked around. At that point. Perhaps the memory in your server can be increased to only 512MB. k~
z|~ ~ l~~ There comes a point where the old. Determine if the existing server is dated. or does it have considerable limitations that can be overcome by current products? ^z
~ Your current ITS server has a single 166MHz Pentium® which is significantly behind the current top CPU speed for Intel-based servers. . sap. Web customers are usually unaware when they are routed to a web server other than the URL they entered. the WGate and AGate are installed on separate servers. When the customer enters a web site URL (such as www. If CPU utilization is consistently high. On a dual host installation. www1.com). This distribution shifts the processing load of the web server and the AGate onto separate servers. In this configuration. you need to monitor the web server and WGate server with other tools. such as the standard NT administration tools. The ITS Administration tool monitors the system where the AGate is installed.sap. or high during peak periods: . separating the WGate and AGate separates the web server from the AGate. as HTTPS significantly increases the processor load on the web server. The DNS Round Robin masks the web server landscape from the web customer.com).6C l~zz~ ~ p`z~ ~ Z`z~ One option for scaling is separating the WGate from the AGate. multiple web servers and WGates are linked to a single AGate. l|z
~ ~ p`z~ Another option for scaling involves the WGate.LJO Configuration Guide | Release 4. This separation is beneficial when HTTPS is used. The following illustration shows the dual host ITS installation. Because the WGate must be installed on the same computer as the web server.sap. In this configuration.com or www2. You should watch the CPU utilization of the web and WGate server. the DNS Round Robin routes the web customer to the next available web site (for example. you may be running out of sessions. that means you are probably hitting 100% during periods of higher activity because so little ceiling remains. . b~ Keep in mind that change control is important. Otherwise. The web pages and images must be maintained identically on both web servers.Chapter 21: Performance n n LJP Above 80% would be a warning point Above 90% you are probably CPU-bound If utilization averages 90% or more. Indicators of AGate bottleneck include: n Sessions If the used or maximum number of sessions is the same or close. the WGate can only communicate with one AGate. multiple web servers with their own WGate and AGate are linked to a single R/3 application server. n Work threads If the used or maximum number of threads is the same or close. Every AGate requires a separate web server. or high during peak periods: • • Above 80% would be a warning point Above 90% would be when you are probably CPU-bound. because currently. n CPU utilization of the AGate server that is consistently high. you may be running out of work threads. web customers see different pages or images depending on the web server to which they are connected. l|z
~ ~ Z`z~ Another option for scaling involves the AGate. In this configuration. As with sizing the R/3 System. the session is lost. In this configuration. you can determine when you need to add additional application servers to the logon group. ^z
~ Month-end processing would create significant load on the backend R/3 System. b~ Additional application servers do not address a bottleneck problem at the database server. Data cannot be transferred between web servers. or web customers will see different pages or images depending on the web server to which they are connected. Other logon groups would exist for the internal R/3 users. By monitoring the CPU utilization of the application servers. .LJQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. l|z
~ kHL Another option for scaling involves the R/3 System. the AGate or AGates are configured to link to a logon group of multiple R/3 application servers dedicated to web customers. There is no failover capability to move the web customer’s session from one path to another. If an AGate server crashes. The request from one user must always be directed to the same web server where that user started the session. there is no way to move the session from web server A to web server B. This activity could then affect response time for your web customers. In other words. The web pages and images must be maintained identically on both web servers.6C b~ Keep in mind that change control is important. Additional application servers can be added to the logon group as needed to handle further processing requirements. work with your hardware vendor to determine the R/3 application server configuration needed to support your needs. Release 4.Chapter 21: Performance LJR ]~}|z~} kHL An R/3 System can be dedicated to web service.saplabs.com/its.. This option would address the problem of a bottleneck at the database server. This configuration separates internal processing requirements from external (web) processing requirements. l|z
lz Many of the scaling methods can be combined in different configurations. such as the following combination: In the above diagram. b~ Dedicating an R/3 System is an expensive option as the production system is essentially duplicated. .6 D (Palo Alto. scaling methods are used to: n n n Separate the WGate and AGate Scale the AGate Scale R/3 with application servers The ability to combine scaling methods allows you to tailor the configuration to your needs. Available for download from www. 2000). k~~~|~ ITS Tuning Guide. This dedicated R/3 System would be coupled to the main R/3 System using ALE. CA: SAP Labs Inc. 6C .LKI Configuration Guide | Release 4. 3$57 )285 ] k~ . Companies require up-to-date.6C iz h~~ As an increasing number of businesses begin to integrate an online storefront with their traditional offline stores. we asked our focus group several questions in the following areas: n n n n Customer profile Data mining and trends Sales transactions Technical-related issues We broke down the questions by category and ranked them by level of importance by our focus group in the tables below. Alongside the reporting requirements. see their web site at www. We surveyed our Best Practices for SAP Online Store focus group to gather feedback on the reporting requirements most significant to their company’s web-related business needs.LKK Configuration Guide | Release 4. Tealeaf Technology™. The integration of an Internet solution has opened a vast amount of reporting requirements on the web. a spin-off from SAP. provides the solutions for capturing and providing insights to your customer’s online shopping experience. For more information on Tealeaf Technology. we have evolved from the mainframe reports toward real-time online queries and ad hoc reports that can be produced electronically. aggregated information that presents the sales activity captured from their online store in comparison to sales generated through traditional channels. in conjunction with outside web-intelligence technologies. . the ability to review and analyze the incremental sales resulting from their web presence is imperative.tealeaf. In regards to e-commerce reporting. To achieve these reporting objectives. Fortunately. Through SAP-standard reporting tools and Tealeaf™ software. Our goal is to provide you with the reporting methods which enable you to: n n Analyze customer behavior in order to improve product offerings and markets Combine customer behavior data with the customer’s order in order to gain a more complete analysis Web statistics provide valuable information on your customer’s online shopping experience and site success. business eleaders responsible for justifying a company’s Internet investment can evaluate which distribution channel sales result from and how successful their online store is.com. to analyze correlations. we indicated with which reporting method you could best extract the data. you can use R/3 reports. ” and require the necessary reports which facilitate the decision making.5 22 .5 22 19.Part Four: Reporting LKL Who are the people visiting the online store and how often do they browse versus purchase? The results of the customer-oriented questions. For the 80%. can be found in the table below: Customer-Oriented Questions What % of all my customers are visiting the site and ordering product? What % of all my customers are visiting the site and checking the product availability? Which customer or group of customers uses the site most often? Which % of all my customers are visiting the site? Which % of all my customers are visiting the X site and getting order status? Number of times each ID purchased How many ID’s were from the same company? Number of times each ID entered a site X X R/3 Reporting X If ATP X X X X X X Tealeaf Auditor Vote (%) on Importance 35. in their order of significance.5 23. what products are they looking at? Identify the effects of price changes/discounts For the “look but do not buy. Business managers are often curious about the “what” and “why.5 19 13 12 The customer’s buying behavior and purchasing patterns can be examined through analytical report processing such as trend analysis and advanced queries. The results of the data mining analytical questions can be found in the following table: Data Mining Analytical Questions 80% look but do not buy.” what products are they looking at most? For the “look but do not buy.5 28.” what price ranges are they looking at? R/3 Reporting Tealeaf Auditor Vote (%) on Importance X X X X 31 30 25. 5 X X 16.5 15.” what products are added to the shopping basket but not bought? What path did visitors take through the web site? What. and respond to any problems the customer may .5 14 11. in general. affecting the desirability of the web site.5 What is the average number of dollars going X through the site for the product? What items are most commonly ordered over the Internet? Top 100? Average dollars spent per Web order vs. network traffic and the load on servers has increased. is the behavior of customers related to purchase? R/3 Reporting Tealeaf Auditor Vote (%) on Importance X 21.5 28 25 24. or has the Internet reached a new customer base and expanded market share? The results of the sales transaction questions can be found in the table below: Sales Transaction Questions R/3 Reporting Tealeaf Auditor Vote (%) on Importance 30.LKM Configuration Guide | Release 4. non-Web order What % of total customer orders is taken over the web site? What is the average value of order? What is the quantity of each item? What is the average number of line items per order? X X X X X X With more and more people using the Internet today. Companies need the capability to analyze peak times.5 What is the impact of introducing an online storefront? Are the company’s regular customers now buying online.5 19. know the number of hits to their site receives.6C Data Mining Analytical Questions For the “look but do not buy. accurate information regarding all facets of their organization. As companies expand their businesses by blending sales efforts through Internet channels. .5 15. the ability to analyze the contribution of the web site and its effect on business is crucial.5 22 16.5 To stay competitive in today’s fast-paced world. The results of the technical-related questions can be found in the table below: Technical Questions What is my peak user load and when does it usually occur? How many customers fill the cart but do not complete an order? How many people tried to access the site but could not get through security? How many people are not making it through registration? What is the average response time per page for the customers? How much time is it taking a person per line item to create a new order? Where are the people dropping off in registration? What is the average length of time that a user holds a session on the site? X R/3 Reporting Tealeaf Auditor Vote (%) on Importance X X X X X X X 30. For example. decisions to develop a new product line or revise the business plan are based on the analysis of integrated information flowing through a company’s enterprise software system.Part Four: Reporting LKN experience. companies require access to timely.5 26 26 26 25. LKO Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C . & + $ 3 7 ( 5 KM lz
~ Z| k~ . and S703 for the purpose of analyzing the Internet sales. Therefore. period of time. a comprehensive suite of reports and tools are accessible to help companies extract real-time information. in two categories: • Document Analysis – To view a list of sales orders. integrating an Internet channel into your business strategy creates additional reporting requirements for analysis. Also note that the PCC already has active info structures S700. .6C h~~ With the integration of Best Practices for SAP Online Store with your R/3 System. all orders placed through the web site are immediately passed through and stored in your R/3 System. Zz
b~~ lz
~ kHLS k~ ]~ e lz
~ h}~ By running the list of sales orders report. backorders. If you have an existing R/3 System and are implementing the Online Store. you can view the sales documents. In addition to your traditional sales channel. If you need to further modify or configure any info structure. the distribution channels 10 (Retail channel) and 11 (Internet channel) are already delivered.LKQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. With your Online Store being tightly integrated to the backend R/3 System. we recommend you enter the distribution channel which identifies Internet sales transactions when executing your standard Sales Information System (SIS) reports. you can query R/3 by specifying criteria such as sold-to party. blocked sales orders. In a fresh installation. To distinguish the sales generated from your Online Store versus those from other channels (such as retail or direct). and web order number. you need to create a new distribution channel for Internet sales under your organizational structure. incomplete sales documents. and list of all outbound deliveries Statistical Analysis – Reports based on standard info structures and user-defined info structures • n Configure the self-defined info structures. that were generated through the Internet sales channel. sorted by sold-to party. then you can refer to “Configuration of SelfDefined Information Structures” on page 364. S701. if you implement the Online Store preconfiguration together with the Preconfigured Client (PCC). In this chapter you learn how to: n Analyze the most frequently used R/3 Internet sales. or sales office. b|
~~ lz
~ ]|~ If the required fields are not filled out when creating a web sales order. sales employee. A delivery block indicator can block the delivery of a pending sale that has been entered into R/3 as a web order. product (material). the order documents are converted to incomplete sales documents. . along with the corresponding value. The incomplete sales documents report displays all incomplete sales documents and allows users to change the orders and complete them. e Z
h{} ]~
~~ Run a list of outbound deliveries report to review the current delivery status of the web sales order. The report also provides the invoiced sales activity associated with each order. a month). Typical reasons for a delivery block include: n n n n The customer postpones or changes the shipping date The product did not pass a QA check Export papers are missing The company decides to accept a returning customer’s order even though the credit card was not authorized and performs manual follow-up with the customer [z|}~ A backordered sales order report shows all the sales placed over the Internet that are set for delivery.Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports LKR [
|~} lz
~ h}~ Sometimes it is necessary to block shipment of a confirmed Internet sales order. The analysis provides information by customer. The report displays: n n The delivery document created for the ship-to party and the picking date of that order List of goods issued and their dates of delivery b| h}~ k~ The incoming order analysis from the Sales Information System (SIS) provides information on incoming Internet orders over a period of time (for example. but are currently backlogged. sales organization. The system creates the report based on the confirmed and backlogged sales documents. forwarding agent. the net value of the billing item stated in the document currency) over a period of time (a month). and sold-to party. product (material). or sales office. sales employee. you can use multiple selection and drilldown criteria to evaluate the invoiced sales data.LLI Configuration Guide | Release 4. . l i The shipping point analysis is based on data that has been updated from the creation of the delivery note of the Internet order.6C b|~} lz
~ k~ The invoiced sales report analyzes the invoiced Internet sales (for example. With this report. or monthly basis. from data aggregated based on a daily. Zz
z{
~ k~S j| k~~~|~ The following sections summarize the most frequently used R/3 Internet sales reports along with their corresponding menu paths in the following two categories. region. The analysis provides information by shipping point. route. sales organization. n n Document analysis Statistical analysis The sections that follow demonstrate with step-by-step instructions how to execute the various reports. These examples acquaint you with the reporting capabilities of R/3. and destination country. The analysis can be run according to customer. This report can be used to answer questions such as: n n Who delivers in what way (freight forwarding)? What was the route? m~ lz
~ k~ A]z
E p~~
E f
B The territory sales report lists all the sales activity generated from your Online Store and can be analyzed by country. weekly. The reports in the table below enable you to evaluate and review the transaction data within the Sales and Distribution (SD) module that results from the sales activity of your Online Store. key figures. Reports are executed against standard and user-defined information structures that store the aggregated data by characteristics. Report Name Incoming Order Report Menu Path Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales Information System → Standard analyses→ Customer Transaction: MCTA Invoiced Sales Report Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales Information System → Standard analyses → Customer Transaction: MCTA . and time periods. Transaction: VA05 List of Blocked Sales Orders Information Systems → Logistics → Sales and Distribution → SD Documents → Orders → Blocked sales orders Transaction: V.02 List of All or Open Deliveries Information Systems → Logistics → Sales and Distribution → SD Documents → Deliveries → Deliveries List Transaction: VL06F lz|z
Zz
Online drilldown and standard analysis on aggregated transaction data is available through the Sales Information System (SIS). you can call up reports that are directly linked to tasks in R/3. Statistical reports in the table below enable you to analyze the results of your Internet sales and traditional retail sales. Report Name List of Sales Orders Menu Path Information Systems → General Report Selection → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Orders → List of sales orders.14 List of Backorder Information Systems → General Report Selection → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Orders → Display Backorders Transaction: V.Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports LLJ ]|~ Zz
Within each application area of the R/3 System.15 List of Incomplete Sales Documents Information Systems→ General Report Selection → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Orders → Incomplete Orders Transaction: V. LLK Configuration Guide | Release 4. enter transaction VA05 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. weekly. This range is based on the date the sales orders were created.6C Report Name Shipping Report Menu Path Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales Information System → Standard analyses → Shipping point Transaction: MCTK Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales Information System → Standard analyses → user-defined info structures → Territory Sales (daily. |G Under Selection criteria. weekly. 4000002). monthly) Transaction: MCSI Territory Sales Report (daily. enter the document date range (for example. monthly) ]|~ Zz
e lz
~ h}~ mz /LVW . {G In Document date. }G Choose . ~G Choose Organizational data.QWHUQHW VDOHV GRFXPHQWV E\ VROGWR SDUW\ JG In the Command field. choose Information Systems → General Report Selection → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Orders → List of Sales Orders). KG On the List of Sales Orders screen: zG Enter a Sold-to party or Material number (for example. . select All orders. 09/17/2000 to 11/16/2000). {G In the Columns box. {G In Distribution channel. {G To change the layout of the list. . choose This screen shows the basic list of all sales orders without display variants. enter the sales organization you use for Internet orders (for example. . |G Choose . 11 from the Preconfigured Client). 0010 from the Preconfigured Client). select the fields you do not want to see in the report and choose to hide the selected fields. enter the distribution channel you use for Internet sales (for example. NG On the Change layout dialog box: zG Choose the Columns tab. select the fields you wish to display and choose to move the fields to the Columns box.Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports LG On the Organizational Data dialog box: LLL zG In Sales organization. |G In the Column set box. MG On the List of Sales Orders screen: zG Choose . If you wish to view only a specific range of sales orders or sales document types. ~G When finished with your selections. . set the data filter by choosing .6C }G If you wish to select aggregation for some of the fields. select the checkbox provided in the aggregation column under .LLM Configuration Guide | Release 4. choose . OG The report appears according to the selected criteria. {G Choose .Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports PG On the Define filter criteria dialog box: zG Under Column set. select Sales document type. to move the selection to the Filter criteria box. LLN QG On the Determine values for filter criteria dialog box: zG In Sales document type. YWB). enter the sales document type you need (for example. . {G Choose |G Choose . LLO Configuration Guide | Release 4.Items screen. To view the standard layouts: zG Choose Settings →Display variants → Choose {G To view the list of sales orders by partner and items. you can sort the columns by selecting any column and choosing (sort in ascending order) or (sort in descending order). .6C RG The List of Sales Orders By partner . .Schedule lines screen now shows the list only for the sales document type YWB. JIG You can also view the list in the standard layouts provided in the system. JJG On the List of Sales Orders By partner . select the variant 1SAP. |G Choose Copy. The document flow for the selected web order appears. choose Environment → Document flow. . {G Choose Display document. LLP JLG On the Document Flow screen: zG To display an individual sales document. select a line (for example. e-Shop Web Order 137). {G To view additional document information and master data. 137).Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports JKG To view the document flow of any sales document: zG Select the document number (for example. QWHUQHW VDOHV RUGHUV LQ WKH )DVW GLVSOD\GRFXPHQW RYHUYLHZ PRGH JG In the Command field.6C JMG On the SAP R/3 screen. [
|~} lz
~ h}~ mz 'LVSOD\ EORFNHG . 0010 for sales organization and 11 for Internet orders). the displayed sales document appears. KG On the Sales Orders / Contracts Blocked for Delivery screen: zG In the Organization data group box. . enter transaction V. {G In the List criteria group box. choose Information Systems → Logistics → Sales and Distribution → SD Documents → Orders → Blocked orders).14 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. you can limit your search to Internet sales by entering the Sales organization and Distribution channel associated with Internet sales (for example. select Fast display/document overview.LLQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. {G To branch into the document. choose Disp. choose LLR Fast display/document overview LG On the Sales Orders / Contracts Blocked for Delivery report: zG Select a sales order (for example.Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports |G To execute the report. This screen shows all sales orders with a delivery block. 166). doc. . 0010 for sales organization and 11 for Internet orders).LMI Configuration Guide | Release 4. you can limit your search to Internet sales by entering the appropriate Sales organization and Distribution channel associated with Internet sales (for example.6C MG The Display e-Shop Web Order <XXXXX>: Overview screen shows the standard function Display order (transaction VA03). The Delivery block field shows the reason for the blocked sales order. ]
z [
|~} lz
~ h}~ { \~ z} fz~z
mz 'LVSOD\ EORFNHG VDOHV RUGHUV E\ FXVWRPHU DQG PDWHULDOV JG On the Sales Orders / Contracts Blocked for Delivery screen: zG In the Organization data group box. . enter 3 in List variant (for Customer and material) to view detailed information. {G In the List criteria group box. Sales order 142 is blocked due to a credit limit. choose LMJ KG This screen shows all sales orders blocked by customer and materials.Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports |G To execute the report. Blocked sales orders by month Blocked sales orders by customer (shipto party) Blocked sales orders by material . LMK Configuration Guide | Release 4. 0010 from the Preconfigured Client). The list display of web-placed backorders can be viewed by timeframe. enter transaction V. . shipping point (ShP). }G To execute the report. choose . |G In the List criteria group box. {G To sort the documents in ascending order. {G In Distribution channel. specific customer.6C [z|}~ mz g~ 'LVSOD\ WKH EDFNRUGHUV XVLQJ )DVW GLVSOD\GRFXPHQW RYHUYLHZ JG In the Command field. place the cursor in the row of the document. choose .15 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. select Fast display/document overview. enter the distribution channel you use for Internet sales (for example. 11 from the Preconfigured Client). KG On the Backorders screen: zG In Sales organization. LG The next screen shows backorder documents listed by goods issue date (GIDate). 140). and ship-to party. choose Information Systems → General Report Selection→ Sales and distribution → Sales → Orders→ Display Backorders). or specific product. enter the sales organization you use for Internet orders (for example. zG To drill down to an individual backorder document (for example. . Viewing the details of any action that might have been taken in shipping on the Shipping tab. {G You can research the backorder by: • • Reviewing the document flow. select the document number and choose Display document. MG On the SAP R/3 screen: zG The desired backorder information appears.Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports LML |G To view the sales document. LMM Configuration Guide | Release 4. 0010 for sales organization and 11 for Internet orders). make certain Fast display/document overview is deselected. }G To execute the report. limit your search to Internet sales by entering the appropriate Sales organization and Distribution channel associated with Internet sales (for example. choose Information Systems → General Report Selection→ Sales and distribution → Sales → Orders→ Display Backorders). enter transaction V. choose .15 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. KG On the Backorders screen: zG Under Organizational data. |G Leave List variant blank.6C ]
z mz
oz
~ [z|}~ z iz|
z f mz 'LVSOD\ WKH WRWDO YDOXH RI WKH EDFNRUGHUV IRU D SDUWLFXODU PRQWK JG In the Command field. {G In the List criteria group box. Choose Customers to produce a column listing by order number.Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports LG The next screen shows the value of the backorders per month. customer. . zG Select any month (for example. material. If you chose Customers. {G Choose one of the following buttons: • • LMN Choose Material to produce a column listing by order number. and GI date. the next screen shows backorders by material. the next screen shows backorders by customers. and GI date. value. value. November 2000). If you chose Material. enter 3 in List variant to display customer and material information. choose Display document. 0010 for sales organization and 11 for Internet orders).LMO Configuration Guide | Release 4. enter transaction V. limit your search to Internet sales by entering the appropriate Sales organization and Distribution channel associated with Internet sales (for example. {G In the List criteria group box.6C MG After either choice. NG The SAP R/3 screen allows you to view the details of an individual document.15 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. ]
z mz
oz
~ [z|}~ i~ f \~ z} fz~z
mz 'LVSOD\ WKH WRWDO YDOXH RI EDFNRUGHUV SHU PRQWK IRU FXVWRPHUV DQG PDWHULDO JG In the Command field. KG On the Backorders screen: zG In the Organizational data group box. choose Information Systems → General Report Selection→ Sales and distribution → Sales → Orders→ Display Backorders). . 02 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. b|
~~ lz
~ ]|~ mz 'LVSOD\ DOO LQFRPSOHWH . choose LMP . LG The next screen shows backorders by customer and material per month. choose Information Systems → General Report Selection → Sales and distribution →Sales → Orders→ Incomplete Orders). .Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports |G To execute the report. enter transaction V.QWHUQHW VDOHV GRFXPHQWV JG In the Command field. }G To execute the report. enter the Sales organization you use for Internet orders (for example. select all types of incompleteness you wish to analyze. Order 57). |G In Distribution channel. 0010 from the Preconfigured Client). {G In the Organizational data group box. choose .6C KG On the Incomplete SD Documents screen: zG In the Incompleteness group box. LG The next screen shows the list of incomplete sales documents. enter the distribution channel you use for Internet sales (for example. 11 from the Preconfigured Client). To edit a document. select the sales order number (for example. The matrix indicates the reasons for the incompleteness. .LMQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. {G To save the changes to the order. {G Choose Complete data. e Z
h{} ]~
~~ mz 'LVSOD\ DOO GHOLYHULHV IRU D VSHFLILF VKLSWR SDUW\ JG In the Command field. LMR NG The screen for the missing data appears: zG Enter the missing data (in this example. choose . . Payer). select the item of the order you wish to complete (for example. choose Information systems → Logistics → Sales and distribution → SD Documents → Deliveries → Deliveries List). the address of the payer). OG Back on the Sales Order Processing screen: zG Process the rest of the incomplete data.Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports MG On the Sales Order Processing screen: zG Under Item. {G Choose . enter transaction VL06F and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. {G To change the layout. 0010 for sales organization and 11 for Internet orders).Outbound Deliveries screen: zG In the Organization data group box.6C KG On the General Delivery List . enter a date range (for example. {G In the Time data group box. LG On the List of Outbound Deliveries screen: zG The list of outbound deliveries appears using the date selection entered above. limit your search to Internet sales by entering the appropriate Sales organization and Distribution channel associated with Internet sales (for example.LNI Configuration Guide | Release 4. |G To execute the report. . choose . 11/09/2000 to 11/25/2000) in Delivery date. choose . Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports LNJ MG On the Define Display Variant: Free selection . Load date).Header view dialog box. you can eliminate or add other fields to change the layout of the basic output list: zG Under Hidden fields. select a desired field from the field list (for example. this report shows the output based on the additional field (in this example. Copy. NG On the List of Outbound Deliveries screen. {G Choose |G Choose to move the field to Column Content in the left frame. the Load date field). . Sales group. Sales organization. Forwarding agent. Sold-to party Material. The data stored in SIS is an aggregated subset of the data stored for your transactions and is collected and stored in information structures by characteristics. Division Distr. Distribution channel Shipping point/receiving point. Sales office. Distribution channel. consolidate. Material Info Structure S001 S002 S003 S004 S005 S006 . Sales district. and utilize data from Sales and Distribution (SD) processing. and you have the option to execute your analysis based on any of the standard information structures. Distr. These structures form the data basis for the respective standard analysis of the same name. Destination country Sales organization.LNK Configuration Guide | Release 4. Division. Distr. Material. key figures. channel. this guide provides examples of statistical analysis from data updated in the customer information structure. Division. channel. Sales organization. Sales organization. If the information structures have not been activated. Sales employee. Reports based on: n n Standard info structures User-defined info structures k~ [z~} lz}z} b l|~ g~ Verify settings in the IMG for updating the SD information structures (transaction OMO1). Menu Option Customer Sales office Sales organization Material Shipping Point Sales employee For Reporting Sold-to party. and time periods. Division Sales organization. please inform your system administrator. The SIS reports in R/3 are organized into the following two categories. Please note that the following is only one example.6C lz|z
Zz
S lz
~ bz l~ The Sales Information System (SIS) is a flexible reporting tool within R/3 that allows you to collect. Sold-to party. channel. Material. The information structures shown in the table below are available in SIS as standard information structures. Route. SIS standard analyses provides an interactive analysis and drilldown feature for the data stored in these structures based on the key figures you want to analyze. For the purpose of demonstration. |G To execute the report.Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports LNL b| h}~ k~ mz /LVW DQG DQDO\]H WKH ERRNHG RU LQFRPLQJ . 0010 from the Preconfigured Client). KG On the Customer Analysis: Selection screen: zG In the Characteristics group box. choose . key figures to be displayed. choose Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales information system → Standard analyses → Customer). to select additional key figures or change their sequence. 10/2000 to 11/2000) in Month. .QWHUQHW RUGHUV IRU D WZRPRQWK SHULRG JG In the Command field. LG On Customer Analysis: Basic List screen. choose Edit → Choose Key figures. g~ A period is determined by the date an ordered item is changed or deleted. enter the Sales organization you use for Internet orders (for example. This screen shows data based on the standard defaults for drilldown. enter a date range (for example. {G In the Period to analyze group box. enter transaction MCTA and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. and other layout settings. zG For example. . select Incoming orders qty. {G Choose column. The Pool column lists all available key figures.6C MG On the Choose Key figures dialog box: zG In the Pool column to the right. |G Choose . to move the fields from the Selection criteria column to the Pool OG On the Customer Analysis: Basic List screen: zG On the application toolbar. {G On the Switch drilldown dialog box. {G Choose column. choose Switch drilldown. to move the field to the Selection criteria column from the Pool The Selection criteria column lists the key figures selected for display. to delete key figures Sales and Credit memos.LNM Configuration Guide | Release 4. select them in the Selection criteria column. select Distribution channel. NG Continue to change the selection criteria. Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports |G Choose LNN . The following extract functions are available on the toolbar to further analyze the shown data: n Sorting: • • Ascending Descending n n n Top N/Last N Times series (periods in columns) Graphics . key figures to be displayed. g~ This screen shows data based on the standard defaults for drilldown. and other layout settings. PG The Customer Analysis: Drilldown screen shows data grouped by distribution channels. The columns in this table correspond to the key figures chosen in step 4a. 0010 from the Preconfigured Client). enter a date range (for example. 11 from the Preconfigured Client). 10/2000 to 11/2000) in Month. KG On the Customer Analysis: Selection screen: zG In the Characteristics group box. {G In Distribution channel. |G In the Period to analyze group box.QWHUQHW VDOHV RI WKH ODVW WZR PRQWKV JG In the Command field. choose Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales Information System → Standard Analyses → Customer).LNO Configuration Guide | Release 4. enter the distribution channel you use for Internet sales (for example. choose .6C b|~} lz
~ k~ mz /LVW DQG DQDO\]H WKH LQYRLFHG . enter transaction MCTA and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. . enter the Sales organization you use for Internet orders (for example. }G To execute the report. key figures to be displayed. choose Edit → Choose Key figures. the key figure Invoiced quantity is inserted and key figures Incoming orders and Incoming order qty are removed from the selection criteria list. and other layout settings. . to select additional key figures or change their sequence. g~ This screen shows data based on the standard defaults for drilldown. choose In this example. MG On the Choose Key figures dialog box: zG In the Pool column. . elect the fields you want to analyze.Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports LNP LG On the Customer Analysis: Basic List screen. {G Choose to transfer fields from the right side of the screen to the Selection criteria column. |G To execute the report. 6C NG The Customer Analysis: Basic List screen shows how the above changes result in a different analysis. enter transaction MCTK and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu.LNQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. KG On the Shipping Point Analysis: Selection screen: g~ A period is determined by the date an order item is entered or changed. From this screen. zG In the Period to analyze group box. choose . you can drill down further or switch to other characteristics.QWHUQHW VKLSSLQJ DFWLYLW\ IRU D WHQZHHN SHULRG JG In the Command field. enter the ten-week period you wish to analyze (for example. choose Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales information system → Standard analyses → Shipping point). l k~ mz /LVW DQG DQDO\]H . {G To execute the report. . 2/2000 to 4/2000). sales district) Weekly reporting of sales by territory (country. region. sales district) m~ lz
~ k~ A]z
E p~~
E f
B mz 'LVSOD\ .Weekly sales For Reporting Daily reporting of sales by territory (country. and other layout settings. choose Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales information system → Standard analyses → User-defined info structures).Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports LNR LG The Shipping Point Analysis: Basic List screen shows data based on the standard defaults for drilldown. region. Menu Option S700 .Monthly Monthly reporting of sales by territory sales (country. region.QWHUQHW VDOHV E\ WHUULWRU\ IRU D JLYHQ SHULRG JG In the Command field.Accelerated Internet Selling . enter transaction MCSI and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. k~ [z~} n~F]~~} bz l|~ In addition to the standard information structures. self-defined information structures have been created that allow you to analyze data resulting from Internet sales. Please note this is only one example and you have the option to execute your analysis on any of the selfdefined information structures below. .Daily Reporting). this chapter provides an example of statistical analysis executed against the information structure S700 (Accelerated Internet Selling . key figures to be displayed.Accelerated Internet Selling . For the purpose of demonstration. sales district) S702 .Accelerated Internet Selling .Daily sales S701 . info structure S700 . enter a date range in the Day and to fields (for example. LG The Standard analysis for info structure <XXXXX>: Selection screen prompts you for selection criteria: zG In the Characteristics group box. enter the Sales organization you use for Internet sales (for example. |G To execute the report. {G In the Period to analyze group box. 0010 from the Preconfigured Client). 10/20/2000 to 11/22/2000). choose .LOI Configuration Guide | Release 4. double-click on the appropriate line (for example.AS Daily Sales). to select a particular report.6C KG On the Info structure dialog box. Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports LOJ MG On the Standard analysis for info structure <XXXXX>: Basic List screen, to analyze Internet sales activity, double-click on the sales organization (for example, myPCC Sales Org). NG On the Standard analysis for info structure <XXXXX>: Drilldown screen, doubleclick on the distribution channel Internet. OG To analyze Internet sales activity for a particular country, double-click on a Ctry sold-to party (for example, USA). LOK Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C PG To analyze Internet activity for a particular region (or states), double-click on a Region (for example, CA). QG To analyze Internet activity for a particular sales office, double-click on a Sales office (for example, myPCC Sales Office). RG To analyze Internet activity for a particular higher level customer, doubleclick on any Higher level customer (for example, SAP Labs). Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports LOL JIG To analyze Internet activity for a Sold-to party belonging to the higher-level customer, double-click on the sold-to party’s name (for example, Peter Smith). JJG To analyze the material, double-click on the Material (for example, Accelerated Internet Selling). JKG The new screen shows information relevant to your search. For detailed information on these topics, refer to the online documentation provided in the SAP R/3 System or to the Reporting Made Easy guidebooks which can be downloaded from the web site www.saplabs.com/rme. LOM Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C \z l~
F]~~} bz l|~ The configuration steps listed below are for creating user-defined information structures that support the reporting requirements of the Online Store. Information structures S700, S701, and S702 have been delivered with the preconfiguration. If you use the Online Store preconfiguration in conjunction with the Preconfigured Client (PCC) in a fresh installation then you need not configure the information structures. If you do not use the PCC, then the steps given below should be used as reference. The steps involved in setting up self-defined information structures are to create: n n n n n n n Additional fields in the append structures tables VBAK, LIKP, and VBRK (preconfigured) Additional fields in the table MCVKENNZ1 (preconfigured) A field catalog (preconfigured) Information structures (preconfigured) Update rule 1 (preconfigured) Update rule 2 (preconfigured) Activate update for information structures (preconfigured) \~z~ Z}}z
_~
} Z~} l|~ mz{
~ o[ZdE ebdiE z} o[kd mz &UHDWH DGGLWLRQDO ILHOGV LQ WKH DSSHQG VWUXFWXUHV WDEOHV 9%$. /,.3 DQG 9%5. This task has been preconfigured for you. The fields in the append structures tables VBAK, LIKP, and VBRK have been created for the Online Store preconfiguration for building the field catalogs to create the information structures. Table Name ZESHOPVBAK Component ZESHOPKUNR Data Element ZKUNNR Field Label Higher Level Customer Region (State, Province, County) Higher level customer Domain Name KUNNR ZESHOPVBAK ZESHOPREG REGIO REGIO ZESHOPLIKP ZESHOPKUNR ZKUNNR KUNNR Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports LON Table Name ZESHOPLIKP Component ZESHOPREG Data Element REGIO Field Label Region (State, Province, County) Domain Name REGIO ZESHOPVBRK ZESHOPKUNR ZKUNNR Higher Level Customer KUNNR \~z~ Z}}z
_~
} ~ mz{
~ f\od^ggsJ This step has been preconfigured for you. The additional fields in table MCVKENNZ1 have been created so that user-defined field names can be used in reporting. mz &UHDWH DGGLWLRQDO ILHOGV LQ WKH WDEOH 0&9.(11= JG In the Command field, enter transaction SE11 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu, choose Tools → ABAP Workbench → Development → ABAP Dictionary). KG On the Dictionary: Initial Screen: zG In the Database table, enter the table name MCVKENNZ1. {G Choose Display. LG On the Choose Append for Table MCVKENNZ1 screen, choose Append structures. MG On the dialog box, choose Choose. NG On the Dictionary: Display Structure screen, enter the table name as desired and create the required fields. Below are the fields created in the append structure ZESHOP_MCVKENNZ1:ZESHOP_ADDITIONAL_FIELDS. Component ZESHOPTAX ZESHOPFREI ZESHOPDISC ZESHOPPROM ZESHOP_GROSS ZESHOPTOTV ZESHOPHLCU Data Element ZESHOP_TAXE ZESHOP_FREI ZESHOP_DISC ZESHOP_PROM ZESHOP_GROSS ZESHOP_TOTVALUE ZESHOP_HLEVCUST Field Label Taxes Freight Discounts Promo Price Gross Price Total Value Higher Level Customer Domain Name WERTV7 WERTV7 WERTV7 WERTV7 WERTV7 WERTV7 WERTV7 LOO Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C Component ZESHOPCRME ZESHOPINV ZESHOPRET Data Element Field Label Domain Name ZESHOP_CRMETOTV Total Credit Memo Value WERTV7 ZESHOP_INVSALES ZESHOP_TOTREVAL Invoiced Sales Total Returns Value WERTV7 WERTV7 \~z~ z _~
} \zz
This step has been preconfigured for you. To define information systems using self-defined information structures, the user must clearly recognize which type of information can be used for the Logistics Data Warehouse. Field catalogs, which define a group of relevant fields from the application, guarantee that this information can be easily recognized. mz &UHDWH D ILHOG FDWDORJ To view the field catalog ZEKF (E-Shop key figures) or ZECH (E-Shop characteristics), enter transaction MC18 (to create) or MC20 (to display) in the Command field and choose Enter (or in the IMG, choose Logistics - General → Logistics Information System [LIS] → Logistics Data Warehouse → Data Basis → Field Catalogs and choose next to Maintain Self-Defined Field Catalogs). Below are screenshots of field catalogs ZECH and ZEKF: Field catalog ZECH Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports LOP Field catalog ZEKF \~z~ bz l|~ This step has been preconfigured for you. New self-defined information structures need a four-character name, usually between S501 and S999. mz &UHDWH LQIRUPDWLRQ VWUXFWXUHV JG To view the information structures S700, S701, and S702, enter transaction MC21 (to create) or MC23 (to display) in the Command field and choose Enter (or in the IMG, choose Logistics - General → Logistics Information System [LIS] → Logistics Data Warehouse → Data Basis → Information Structures and choose next to Maintain Self-Defined Information Structures). KG In Info struct. (information structure), specify both a name and description for the information structure you wish to create, and assign the structure to an application. Self-defined information structures S700 (Internet Sales - Daily Update), S701 (Internet Sales - Weekly Update), and S702 (Internet Sales - Monthly Update) are delivered in the preconfiguration of the Online Store. LOQ g~ Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C Below is a screenshot of information structure S700. The units of key figures should be 01 for quantities and 32 for currencies. These settings allow conversion of the units during standard analysis. \~z~ n}z~ k
~ J This step has been preconfigured for you. Update rules help to determine how characteristics and key figures are updated from the sales transactions. For example, update rules consist of the source field, requirements, formulas, and events that trigger the update. After you define the update rules, the corresponding update programs are automatically generated. mz &UHDWH XSGDWH UXOH To view the update rules for info structure S700 and update group (stats) 1, enter the transaction MC24 (to create) or MC26 (to display) in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the IMG, choose Logistics General → Logistics Information System (LIS) → Logistics Data Warehouse → Updating → Updating Definition → Specific Definition Using Update Rules and choose next to Maintain Update Rules). Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports LOR The table below shows the primary settings included in the preconfigured update Rules for key figures of information structure S700 and update group 1 (sales). . Key Figure Order quantity Gross Price Promo Price Discounts Freight Taxes Total Order Value Orders:Cost Open orders qty Open orders qty Delivery quantity Invoiced quantity Invoiced Sales Invoiced Sales Cost Event VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VA VC VC VD VD VD Update Type A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Source table and source field name MCVBAP-KWMENG MCVBAP-KZWI1 MCVBAP-KZWI2 MCVBAP-KZWI3 MCVBAP-KZWI4 MCVBAP-KZWI5 MCVBAP-KZWI6 MCVBAP-WAVWR MCVBAP-OAUME MCLIPS-APOAUME MCLIPS-LFIMG MCVBRP-FKIMG MCVBRP-NETWR MCVBRP-ERDAT Table for date & date field MCVBAP-VDATU MCVBAP-VDATU MCVBAP-VDATU MCVBAP-VDATU MCVBAP-VDATU MCVBAP-VDATU MCVBAP-VDATU MCVBAP-VDATU MCVBAP-ERDAT MCLIPS-APERDAT MCLIKP-WADAT MCVBRK-FKDAT MCVBRK-FKDAT MCVBRP-ERDAT The Update rules for characteristics can be seen by choosing the Rules for characteristics button. The following screen shows the rules for characteristics for the key figures Order quantity, Gross Price, Promo Price, Discounts, Freight, Taxes, Total Order Value, Orders:Cost, and Open orders qty (orders). LPI Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C The following screen shows the rules for characteristics pertaining to the key figures Open order qty (delivery) and Delivery quantity. The following screen shows the rules for characteristics pertaining to the key figures Invoice quantity, Invoiced Sales, and Invoiced sales:cost. \~z~ n}z~ k
~ K mz &UHDWH XSGDWH UXOH This step has been preconfigured for you. The update rules for your selfdefined info structures have been set for update group 2 (returns, return deliveries, and credit memos). To create the update rules, use transaction MC24, delete all the key figures pertaining to the update group 1, and create the update rules for the key figures pertaining to the update group 2. The update rules for the key figures for infostructure S700 are given below: Total credit memo value. . or no update).Chapter 22: Sales Activity Reports LPJ Key Figure Returns qty Event VA Update Source table and Type source field name A A A A A A Table for date & date field Formula 100 100 100 100 100 100 MCVBAP-KWMENG MCVBAP-VDATU MCVBAP-KZWI6 MCVBAP-WAVWR MCVBRP-FKIMG MCVBRP-KZWI6 MCVBRP-WAVWR MVCBAP-VDATU MCVBAP-VDATU MCVBRK-FKDAT MCVBRK-FKDAT MCVBRK-FKDAT Total Returns Value VA Returns Cost Credit Memos qty Total Credit Memo Value Credit memos cost VA VD VD VD The following screen shows the characteristics for the key figures Returns qty. weekly. Updating is triggered by an event in a logistics application (such as a sales order). synchronous. monthly) and by changing the updating method (for example. asynchronous. You can change how the information structure updates by changing the period of time (such as daily. The following screen shows the characteristics for the key figures Credit memos qty. An event is a point in time when information is created that requires recording. Total Value. and Credit memos:cost: Z|z~ n}z~ b l|~ This step is preconfigured for you. and Returns Cost. collective. and all have been set for asynchronous update (a document update is made separately from the statistics update).6C mz $FWLYDWH XSGDWH IRU LQIR VWUXFWXUHV To view the settings for updating the info structures S700. . select Sales and Distribution and choose Choose). On the Choose activity dialog box. The screenshot above shows the update parameters for the self-defined information structures associated with the Online Store. enter transaction OMO1 in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the IMG. S701. and S702.LPK Configuration Guide | Release 4. A posting period has been allocated to the appropriate information structure. choose Logistics .General → Logistics Information System [LIS] → Logistics Data Warehouse → Updating → Updating Control and choose next to Activate Update. & + $ 3 7 ( 5 KN ^F[~ Zz
. marketing campaigns can target the customer and products. such as GIFs or JPEGs). For example. such as traffic increases over time and which of the static pages are visited the most often. Marketwave’s Hit List Commerce Suite 4. when and where are customers dropping off. and profitability on the site. Sales and marketing want to know how to increase customer attraction. we look at what currently is available in the market to answer such questions: n n Log statistic tools – This software analyzes the logs written by the webserver that recorded hits. excluding or including hits to binary files. your IT department wants to know about the health of the site. These tools track the number of hits. whether the server is fast enough to handle the peak requests or whether there are dead links on the web site.0. Furthermore. visitor sessions.6C h~~ Different groups in an organization have different questions they want answered by web site statistics.0. e lz| m
Some off-the-shelf tools are available to analyze web server log files.51. and WebManage Technologies’ NetIntellect 4. the magazine Network World Fusion compares three web server log analysis tools: WebTrends Log Analyzer 4. Be sure to familiarize yourself with the product’s assumptions before using one of these products. E-business analysis products – This software tracks and analyzes complete online customer interactions. and how often do customers put items into the shopping baskets but do not buy? By analyzing products that create interest but are not purchased. including what the customer sees and clicks (such as data served from backend systems) and how the site responds. retention. which is good to know when deciding whether to use new web technology. In an article published in July of 1999. Such tools provide a good overview of your web site’s general trends. such as how many requests have failed and how many hits have been cached by the server. web tracking tools offer a list of technical statistics. . In this chapter. and page views a web site gets over a period of time. The article describes how the different products come to different hit results because they base their counting on different assumptions (for example. For example. conversion. These tools also give you information about what browser and operating system your visitors are using. and downloads.LPM Configuration Guide | Release 4. most requested pages. 12% 3. It shows the most requested pages of that site.asp 10 http://pal100619/iisadmin/iitool.asp 8 http://pal100619/iisadmin/iibody.asp 5 http://pal100619/iisadmin/blank. the bigger questions are about business value. and so on. The table below shows the results of a sample log: Most Requested Pages Pages 1 http://pal100619/iisadmin/ 2 http://pal100619/iisadmin/iisnew. The most viewed page is a dynamically created one: iistat.asp 7 http://pal100619/iisadmin/iimnu. and current availability— all pulled from different sources.asp 9 http://pal100619/iisadmin/iis. ^F[~ Zz
Aside from the number of hits. and layout affect customer response? .asp 3 http://pal100619/iisadmin/iihd.56% 17. the detailed text. Dynamic pages allow for the most upto-date information.84% This table shows the results of running a log statistic tools against one of our test installations. stay as they are (for example. The problem with such tools starts when you want to analyze more than just general hits.48% 1.asp 4 http://pal100619/iisadmin/iistat. promotions.12% 5. It is impossible to know what products the customers looked at. We cannot tell what the content of this page was at the time it was called. For example. since all of these pages are created dynamically by the ITS.Chapter 23: E-Business Analysis LPN g~ Dynamic pages are created from different components at the moment of the request.28% 2. the current price.htm 6 http://pal100619/iisadmin/iisrvls. on the other hand.2% 3. the page with company address information or driving directions). Static pages.asp. the price and other details of the product available at the time. The list of most visited pages in the Online Store does not necessarily give you useful information. the request for more details on a product is answered by creating a page that contains a picture.94% 1. including: n n n n What products are customers looking at? If they drop off and leave.41% 5.28% 6. when and where does this happen in the shopping process? What influences conversion from first-time to repeat customers? How do changes in content.asp Views 7 2 4 28 2 10 8 8 5 6 % of Total Views 4. which products are the most selected ones. services. companies gain a clearer perspective of visitor shopping habits and preferences for different product offerings. Tools and reports show what attracts customers to the web site. In “E-business analysis tools are key for dot-coms. what we are really interested in is customer behavior.com. Password and credit card information should not be divulged. forecast demand.” Mark Hammond gives examples of companies that successfully improved their sales by using business intelligence tools to analyze customer behavior. which would increase junk email. For example. and enable managers to analyze sales. E-business analysis tools provide more than information on the number of hits received by the site. Such analyses also allow a company to correlate the current buying behavior of customers in their online store with their prior interactions. Such tools capture the data.6C n Are customers returning to your site repeatedly? Which customers? Which ones are the most profitable? In short. optimize marketing initiatives. allowing the company to focus on all aspects of the customer relationship. TeaLeaf Technology™ focuses on providing ebusiness analysis. Many customers are concerned about their information being sold. This tracking includes not only what is happening on the web server. By monitoring user interaction on the web site. It is important to let the customer know what your policies are with regard to their personal information.tealeaf. Such analysis is not an easy task. an event such as putting an item into a shopping baskets is defined and captured . Companies are able to respond quickly to trends in the marketplace with products that maximize profits and increase their return on e-investment. E-business analysis tools give companies reporting and analysis capabilities to track visitor and customer trends. and content. and how to encourage customer conversion and return visits. The TeaLeaf™ TeaCommerce™ solution tracks complete online customer interactions. The privacy of the online customer also must be protected. New marketing campaigns encourage return visits and purchases by their customers. For general information about TeaLeaf Technology™ visit their web site at www. and tailor the site based on customer trends. PC-Week Online has an article covering that subject. Finally—especially in Europe—laws protect the privacy of personal transactions. such as when and where in the process shopping baskets are abandoned. m~ m~ze~z l
A new spin-off from SAP. The volumes of data must be captured and brought to a manageable size.LPO Configuration Guide | Release 4. This information can help a company to better understand what draws customers to their online store. but also any relevant events on the SAP R/3 side. sites. the results can be analyzed directly or transferred into the SAP Business Information Warehouse (BW). saving the basket. This complete capture can go across multiple applications. much like a digital slide show Customized business and IT reporting Integration with third-party reporting and analysis tools. by the software. . are synchronized to gather the complete online user experience. which include data served up to the web site from R/3. to locate usability problems or get insight into the customer’s buying behavior.Chapter 23: E-Business Analysis LPP g~ An event is any specific action or process taken by the customer or system that can be identified or recorded. Business events relevant to online customer interactions include viewing product details. The results are saved in the TeaLeaf Data Store. placing a product into the shopping basket. such as SAP BW fz b az~ h~~ The following graphical explains the TeaCommerce solution. the Tealeaf data can be combined with R/3 Sales and Distribution (SD) data for a more complete analysis of customers and the effectiveness of the Internet sales channel. and web application errors. In SAP BW. From there. The results from the web site capture. You can also replay a session step-by-step. similar to a digital slide show. and sessions. servers. The TeaCommerce solution includes: n n n n n Individual and aggregate clickstream analysis Business event data capture Visual replay of complete online user interactions. You can also replay the complete online customer experience with the TeaLeaf RealiTea Viewer™.6C The customer experience is captured from the web server and application server. But it can also capture data coming from external applications. n .LPQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. This wealth of information can then be analyzed by the predefined TeaLeaf ClariTea™ reports. using the ITS Capture API. The data can also be transferred into SAP BW. The below diagram shows how Tealeaf fits into the architecture used by the Online Store. which allows IT and customer service to trouble-shoot problems with the web site. records customer interactions with the Online Store. Tealeaf. The captured data is stored in the TeaLeaf Data Store. This storage can be done on a separate server so the impact on the web and the ITS is kept to a minimum. The primary changes include: n n Tealeaf objects define the business events to be captured and reside in R/3.6D code level 3 and later. which in this case is an R/3 System. (The ITS Capture API is contained in ITS Release 4. along with the IAC logic and SAP master data.) Request and response files that capture the customer experience are written and stored in the Tealeaf Data Store. the TeaLeafenhanced AGate stores it in a TeaLeaf response file and inserts the business event data into the previously created TeaLeaf request file. a pair or TeaLeaf request and response files are generated and propagated down the TeaLeaf Capture Pipeline. Before sending the generated HTML page back to the browser. For each interaction between AGate and the R/3 System. is sent back to the AGate. With that. A customer puts an item into the shopping basket. The web server interprets this event and sends a request to the ITS server’s AGate.Chapter 23: E-Business Analysis LPR The diagram below illustrates the points at which Tealeaf captures the customer information. it is a tracked event. TeaLeaf—using the ITS Capture AP—stores the ITS context. Before forwarding the request to the R/3 System. together with the response from the general R/3 System. the total customer experience gets captured. including the form fields passed from the web page in a TeaLeaf request file. . The R/3 System checks if this event is listed as a “TeaLeaf Business Event. The customer uses the browser and places it into the shopping basket. This information.” Because we want to know about visitors of our web site that put items into their shopping basket. not only on the browser but also the relevant events on the R/3 side. The TeaLeaf pipeline is a series of components that provides functionality such as filtering. A sample TeaLeaf request file with output of an event can be seen with product details. the transports for the TeaLeaf Event Framework can be downloaded together with the transports for the Online Store preconfiguration. and moving it to another location. Please contact TeaLeaf directly for the entire solution at www. . TeaLeaf. These requests and responses are written into a compressed data format using the TeaLeaf Capture Pipeline. the user action. 2. Create the event framework in SAP R/3. ]~
~ As a service.com. 3. The response file stores the HTML page dynamically generated by the ITS.LQI Configuration Guide | Release 4. and all data captured by the event. records each request from the web browser (the user) and records the response from the ITS (the generated HTML page).tealeaf. a b p Three steps are necessary for the TeaLeaf solution to work properly: 1. The figure below displays the product details captured in a sample request file. Modify the SAP Online Store program.6C The request file stores the ITS context. Activate the ITS Capture API to connect to the TeaLeaf Capture Pipeline. compressing data. using the ITS Capture API. Z|z~ ~ bml \z~ Zib You must activate the ITS Capture API to activate the data capture. VIEW_PRODUCT DEFINE_CUSTOMER CHECKOUT_BASKET NAME_BASKET USE_BASKET SAVE_BASKET DROP_BASKET ABANDON_BASKET SEARCH_STRING REGISTER_USER LOGIN g~ The TeaLeaf configuration tables store the identification of the event (program name. function code. These tables and the logic all reside in the TeaLeaf namespace. These tables also give you the flexibility to add additional events. Before PAI: Is it a framework event? Before PBO: Is it a framework event? After PBO: Is it a framework event? Before PAI: Is PAI data needed? Save SAP System Variables (SY) Call Event Handler Routine Insert Data into ITS context Export PAI Data to Memory . and message number combination). ITS Sends Data to Dynpro PAI: Process User Input PBO: Prepare New Screens Return Screen to ITS Process after input (PAI) means after customer input. and process before output (PBO) means before outputting the results to the web site. Tealeaf has already predefined the most common business events. TeaCommerce (Version 1.Chapter 23: E-Business Analysis \~z~ ^~ _z~ lZi kHL LQJ The events for customer actions are defined in TeaLeaf tables in the R/3 System.0) comes with the following preconfigured events: n n n n n n n n n n n n n n ADD_TO_BASKET DROP_FROM_BASKET MODIFY_BASKET_ITEM PLACE_ORDER. Examples of data include product number. To display and edit the contents of these tables. the Tealeaf solution has its own namespace /tealeaf/ where the modules and tables are stored. An event may be viewing the detailed information of a product. enter transaction SM31 in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the menu bar. and identifies the details of the event handler used for processing the data capture. choose System → Services → Table maintenance → Extended table maintenance). /TEALEAF/CUST_B /TEALEAF/CUST_C /TEALEAF/CUST_D /TEALEAF/CUST_E . This table contains the applications for which you wish to capture events. A catch-all for all messages that are not defined explicitly is also available. The following table lists all the routines. and specifies the location of data files in a non-ITS environment. or the data that should be written to the log file for each event. This table defines the events you wish to capture on your web site. This table defines the properties of an event. price. modules. and choose Display. which allow you to turn the capture of events on and off. This table defines the characteristics.LQK Configuration Guide | Release 4. or placing it into the shopping basket. The five TeaLeaf configuration tables include: Configuration Table /TEALEAF/CUST_A Purpose This table contains the global parameters. The relevant application for all events we discuss is SAP_ONLINE_STORE. such as the program. screen. To prevent conflict with customer developments or SAP standard. which trigger an event. and message number. function code.6C The above graphic displays where in the process the TeaLeaf solution checks for relevant events and what is written into the TeaLeaf Data Store. and unit of measure. and tables the TeaLeaf solution adds to the R/3 System: Object /TEALEAF/<SYS_INCLUDE> /TEALEAF/<SYS_MODULE> /TEALEAF/PROCESS_EVENT /TEALEAF/SAVE_SESSION_INFO /TEALEAF/CUST_x tables /TEALEAF/ONLINE_STORE_EVENTS Purpose Data definitions and form routines for event processing Process before output (PBO) and Process after input (PAI) modules Function module to dispatch handler routine Function module to insert SAP data into ITS context Event framework customizing tables Subroutine pool for standard event handler routines The five tables delivered as part of the TeaLeaf solution allow you to configure the events you wish to track. Each event is associated with an application. Enter the name of the table in the Table/view field. datamation. “When the hits just keep on coming.com/reviews/1122rev.html n Thomas Powell.” Datamation. “Targeting on buyer—or a million. you must modify the program SAPMWWMJ and the flow logic of two collection screens.2459218.zdnet. “Shades of Gray: Privacy and Online Marketing.html n Beth Stackpole. “Data Mining on the Web. www. www.00.shtml n Dan R.” Network World.com/news/special_reports/privacy.html n Bradley Shimmin.nwfusion.” Network World Fusion.com.” PC Week Online. Greening.webtechniques.” ECommerce Times.com/reviews/0712rev2.com/archives/2000/01/greening/ n Mark Hammond. July 1999.com/pcweek/stories/news/0. 28 August 2000. www. 13 March 2000. Please contact Tealeaf Technology directly for information on making these changes. 22 November 1999.com/dataw/0003web1.4153.nwfusion. k~~~|~ n Randi Barshack. www.” Web Techniques.ecommercetimes.Chapter 23: E-Business Analysis LQL f} ~ h
~ l~ For the TeaLeaf solution to work properly in an R/3 System. www. “E-business analysis tools are key for dot-coms. “Tracking the Web in real time.html . March 2000. January 2000. www. 6C .LQM Configuration Guide | Release 4. 9( ^ Z~}~ .3$57 ). LQO Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C . you may need to apply one or more SAP Notes found on the SAP Service Marketplace to get the R/3 System functionality to work correctly. The list of SAP Notes below—formerly OSS Notes and SAPNet R/3 Frontend Notes—is not intended to be a comprehensive list. but represents the notes most commonly required during an Online Store implementation. providing you with configuration recommendations.$ 3 3 ( 1 ' . . many notes have been written for informational purposes. . For the Internet Application Components (IACs). Z lZi g~ ~ lZi l~|~ fz~
z|~ h~~ During an implementation of the Online Store. but may be valuable for customers who wish to use the Online Store in such a scenario. This note describes the required product catalog structure for displaying products. 135661 Description This note describes how to customize the euro. 138684 99816 113481 139471 190536 169091 212783 Description This note describes the configuration necessary for prices to be displayed on the Internet. 91481 i}| \zz
b~z i|~~ The IAC for the product catalog called from a procurement application is WW30. This note describes the required configuration for the data carrier. or when a one-time customer is used. so that all products can be displayed.LQQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. This note lists all data required for creating the product catalog. It also provides an update program that verifies all settings are correct and makes any missing entries. h
~ l~ Note The IAC for the Online Store is WW20. This note is required when the product catalog should be displayed in multiple currencies. This IAC has not been preconfigured. The correct tax calculation requires the user exit for tax jurisdiction code determination to be in place (the user exit is preconfigured). This note corrects a problem with the tax calculation when a different delivery address is entered. Note 172340 Description This note describes the parameters that need to be passed when the product catalog is called from the BBP (business-to-business procurement) application.6C i}| \zz
Note The IAC for the product catalog is WW10. and describes why customer number ranges must be internal. . This note contains additional information about customizing the euro. This note describes an error encountered in creating customer numbers. This note allows subtotals from the pricing procedure to be passed to the Internet. so that price breakouts can be displayed in the Online Store. The customer and password combination are verified before displaying orders. This note allows partner determination based on the customer hierarchy to be configured in SD. This note discusses how the availability check should be configured to obtain the desired results on the quotation screen. This note discusses the Y2K date format for shipping data. 188482 143145 206887 .Appendix A: SAP Notes in the SAP Service Marketplace LQR Note 196608 213898 187143 150650 315142 197819 210298 314819 197511 Description This note enables the screen display of the region (state) field for the sold-to customer just prior to placing the order. This problem only occurred when the order number was specified during the initial order selection. This note corrects a problem with saving consumers when personal data is not maintained. 179338 182633 Description This note adds the display of the region (state) field. This note discusses the URL length for the sales order status. This note corrects a security issue in which a customer could display another customer’s order. This note enables the screen display of the region (state) field for the ship-to customer just prior to placing the order. This note corrects an error in which the wrong customer is displayed when multiple customers have the same e-mail address but different passwords. This note corrects the partner determination in orders when consumers are used in the Online Store. This note solves an error in the address management of the one-time customers created from the Online Store. This note allows partner determination based on the customer hierarchy to be performed in the Online Store. lz
~ h}~ lz Note The IAC for the sales order status is VW10. The URL cannot exceed 132 characters. This note allows partner determination based on the customer hierarchy to be performed in the Online Store. 0. .6. This note provides a technical overview of IACs and lists other SAP Notes that are available to solve specific problems. This note discusses a get/set parameter for the ITS user in 4. Note 168837 Description This note discusses reasons why the ATP IAC does not work with Netscape Navigator 4. 99166 86334 195318 183845 Description This note describes the get/set parameters required in the ITS user master record that support the IACs. `~~z
Note These notes apply to multiple IACs.LRI Configuration Guide | Release 4. after going through an upgrade.6C Zz
z{
~FFi~ The IAC for the available-topromise check is CKAV. This note provides general recommendations on where to find information about ITS. the availability of products does not display while browsing the product catalog. For information about the Online Store. or the threshold quantity is not maintained.” by adding new values for the threshold code and threshold description. “Creating the Online Store with the Catalog” on page 21. The Online Store preconfiguration uses the following icons: n (green) – Available quantity is greater than the threshold quantity. We provide a different Internet Application Component (IAC) for this functionality. . n The availability status is based on the new product-specific field Threshold quantity in the material master. the Online Store preconfiguration includes the capability to display product availability. yellow = fast moving item. An icon indicates whether the item is currently in stock (green = in stock. .$ 3 3 ( 1 ' . Stock availability for the products in the Online Store displays on two web pages in the Online Store: n This enhancement could easily be extended to assign some meaning to the threshold quantity of the material master. Due to customer requests. such as “this product ships normally in 3–4 weeks. On the product detail page. [ Z}}Fh Zmi ~ i}| \zz
h~~ In the standard Online Store. red = out of stock). the availability displays as the available quantity in stock. see chapter 3. status icons display the availability. On the product listing page. or equal to.6C n n (yellow) – Available quantity is greater than 0 and lower than. You must make two decisions with regards to the availability check: n n Displaying the availability for one plant or across all plants Using a static or a dynamic availability check \~ ^~~|~S ]
z i}| Zz
z{
~ h
~ l~ For browsing the product catalog in the Online Store. Traffic light icon . and the threshold in the material master record. the type of availability check. (red) – Available quantity is zero.LRK Configuration Guide | Release 4. you can display the availability of the product in two ways: n n As a “traffic-light” icon As the actual quantity in stock The quantity is determined based on the parameter settings for the plants. the threshold quantity. Appendix B: Add-On for ATP in the Product Catalog LRL The detail screen of the product displays the quantity remaining in stock. the delivery plant is copied from the reference customer. In the case of the availability information. if you choose to display the availability of a product across all of your plants while browsing the catalog. the system looks for the information in the material master record. the R/3 System may determine that an item you show as in stock is actually unavailable in the delivery plant. The system initially looks for the delivery plant information in the customer master record. a standard user exit and corresponding enhancement project are transported. the order g~ The transports for the Online Store preconfiguration do not include changes to the standard programs of the Online Store. At the time the customer places the order in the standard Online Store functionality. All other “hooks” into the standard material master data structure and workflow must be created manually. Keep in mind that when individual customers register on the Internet. Because the plant information is copied. a determination is not made as to which plant is closest to the customer. . and can enter this plant based on the customer’s location. Internally. this result means that the item is available in another plant. Instructions are provided in the Installation Guide. If it is not maintained there. Quantity in stock h ]
z Zz
z{
]
z ~ Zz
z{
h~ i
z Z| Z
i
z You must decide whether to display the availability of the product using the delivery plant or across all your plants. If the order quantity could not be confirmed. Internally. Customer orders are accepted independent of the stock availability. For this reason. the availability check is based on only the delivery plant. the customer is not provided with a delivery date when placing the order in the Online Store. A finer distinction is possible in a scenario in which you sell to business partners with whom you have a business relationship. the following situations should be considered: n Are most products produced at only one plant or multiple plants? If most of your products are produced at only one plant. (local) plant? On the other hand. .S. while consumers generally visit another web site if the product is not currently in stock. or on the availableto-promise quantity configured in the Sales and Distribution component (SD). a cross-plant availability check may not make sense. The ATP stock is based on the default ATP rule configured in SD (dynamic check). if all your plants are located in different cities in Texas. When determining whether to show product availability while browsing the catalog. n n n n z lz| z ]z| Zz
z{
\~| You must also decide whether to base the availability check on the quantity of material remaining in stock at the time the order is placed. and so on. The default rule is also used for the ATP service.6C is proposed to a sales agent using workflow. it will be more important to process a delivery check based on ATP rules and a delivery date the customers enter. and as discussed in chapter 11. and another plant in Asia. How often do you expect the sales agent to contact the customer with an updated delivery date? The response time is very important for customers ordering on the Internet. How far apart are your plants? If you have one plant in the U. ATP is also the check used at the time the customer places the order through the Online Store. Within this rule. and so on? If all of your plants are in Europe. “Available-to-Promise” on page 191. you may determine the quantities included in the availability calculation. and a customer orders a product in the U. and another in Europe. the following situations should be considered: n Are most of your customers business partners or consumers? For business partners. there is less of an impact than if you have one plant in the U.S. a cross-plant check would allow the customer to receive the product more quickly. be cost-prohibitive? Would the time it takes to ship the product be longer than producing the item in the U. planned receipts based on purchases and production schedules. shipping documents. based on the plant in which the product is available. how will this impact your taxes.LRM Configuration Guide | Release 4.S. without a cost impact for freight on your company.S. customs. Are your plants in different countries? If you do a cross-plant check. In making the determination of which plants should be used to show availability of products while browsing the catalog. would shipment of a product from Asia to the U. The responsibilities of the sales agent should then include contacting the customer with a firm delivery date..S. The quantity of material is based on the unreserved stock in inventory (static check). The ATP rule can be configured to include reservations on inventory from other customers. Are the products fast-moving? If there is a high probability that product availability may change in the course of a day because of high demand. The following table entries are delivered: Char (parameter) PCAT_BROWSER_STOCK_AGGREGATE PCAT_BROWSER_STOCK_DYNAMIC PCAT_BROWSER_STOCK_DYNAMIC_RULE PKAT_BROWSER_DEBUG + (value) N Y 02 Y Description (not in table) Aggregate across plants? Dynamic check? Checking rule to use if ATP is used Allows debugging through the ITS . has all the necessary preconfiguration parameters with default values. n n b
~~z ~ f}|z The implemented extensions to SAP standard: n n n n n n Use Online Store preconfiguration parameters (preconfigured) Use the delivery plant in the appropriate master data Extend the material master with the Threshold quantity field Calculate and transfers the stock availability to the web pages for display (preconfigured) Use a workflow for orders that could not be confirmed (preconfigured) Modify the ITS templates to work with the modifications (preconfigured) m~ h
~ l~ i~|z izz~~ The table ZESHOP_CFGPARAMS. How often do you expect the sales agent to contact the customer with an updated delivery date? The response time is very important for customers ordering on the Internet. you may wish to use ATP since the orders placed by other customers are taken into account during the processing of the availability information. a complex ATP calculation does not make sense and only reduces performance of your Online Store.Appendix B: Add-On for ATP in the Product Catalog n LRN How long is the lead time on obtaining (buying or producing) your products? If the lead time is short. delivered with the Online Store. ^z
~ In the ZESHOP_CFGPARAMS table. sales organization. In the Table/view field. Set parameter PKAT_BROWSER_ORDER_TYPE1 to value YWO for your Online Store preconfiguration order type. You can also run the install wizard. set the PKAT_BROWSER_STOCK_AGGREGATE to value Y if you want to aggregate the stock availability across all plants. then choose the Shipping tab. Set parameter PKAT_BROWSER_STOCK_DYNAMIC to value Y if the available quantity should be calculated dynamically based on checking rule A or whatever is specified under parameter PKAT_BROWSER_STOCK_DYNAMIC_RULE. and so on. m~ ]~
~ i
z ~ Zz~ fz~ ]zz If the availability check should occur for only one plant. or N if the unrestricted-use stock should be used. in the Command field. enter the plant from which most products will be delivered for this customer. and distribution channel used for your Internet business. In the Command field. If you use additional order types. Then run the program ZESHOP_WIZARD. To enter the delivery plant in the material master. In the Delivering plant field. choose Logistics → Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately). Data 1 view. enter transaction XD02 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. set PKAT_BROWSER_ORDER_TYPE2 with appropriate value. enter transaction MM02 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Business Partners → Customer → Change → Complete). Enter the customer number and sales area. In the Delivering plant field. enter transaction SM30 and choose Enter (or from the menu bar. enter transaction SA38 and choose Enter (or from the menu bar. enter ZESHOP_CFGPARAMS and choose Maintain. Enter the plant. first in the customer master record and then in the material master record To enter the delivery plant in the customer master. in the Command field. choose System → Services → Table maintenance → Extended table maintenance). as documented in the Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide. Choose Sales area data in the customer master. Choose the Sales: Sales Org. in the Command field. choose System → Services → Reporting).6C Char (parameter) PKAT_BROWSER_ORDER_TYPE1 PKAT_BROWSER_ORDER_TYPE2 + (value) YWO YWRE Description (not in table) First order type used for selling on the Internet Second order type used for selling on the Internet To change the values in this table. the plant is determined by finding the delivery plant entered in the master data. or to value N if you want the stock availability to reflect only the main delivery plant of the customer. enter the plant from which this product will be delivered most often for your Internet business. .LRO Configuration Guide | Release 4. mz $GG D WKUHVKROG TXDQWLW\ ILHOG WR WKH PDWHULDO PDVWHU JG Extend the material master table MARA by creating an append structure that holds the new field for threshold quantity. When the stock reaches the threshold value or drops below it.General → Material Master → Configuring the Material Master → Here’s How [Quick Guide Using an Example]). In the Command field. choose Logistics – General → Material Master → Configuring the Material Master → Define Structure of Data Screens for Each Screen Sequence). See the online documentation in the IMG to configure the material master. a green light appears. The Threshold quantity field is added to the material master and allows you to enter the threshold value.Appendix B: Add-On for ATP in the Product Catalog LRP ^~} ~ fz~z
fz~ ~ m~
} jz _~
} g~ In the Online Store preconfiguration. choose Tools → ABAP Workbench → Utilities → Enhancements → Project Management). we provide structure ZAMARA and data element ZTRES. If no threshold value is entered. The Online Store preconfiguration includes enhancement project YE_PC. a yellow icon appears. The project is active in the Online Store preconfiguration. KG See the Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide for step-by-step instructions. KG Include the new field in the material master maintenance transaction by creating and inserting a new subscreen for the screen container BASIC DATA. enter transaction OMT3B and choose Enter (or in the IMG. . enter transaction CMOD and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. Choose Logistics . Project YE_PC Enhancement WOSX0001 WOSX0002 n Function Exit EXIT_SAPMWWMJ_001 EXIT_SAPMWWMJ_002 Include ZXWOSU01 ZXWOSU02 SAP enhancement WOSX0001 with function module EXIT_SAPMWWMJ_001 is available to transport the quantity of the unrestricted-use stock to the product detail screen of the Online Store. The changes made to implement the user exit are described below. \z
|
z~ z} mz l| Zz
z{
p~{ iz~ ]
z Two user exits provided in WW20 are used that allow additional fields to display in the product list and in the detail view of the product catalog. mz $GG WKH VWUXFWXUH DQG VXEVFUHHQ WR WKH PDWHULDO PDVWHU JG In the Command field. simply deactivate the enhancement project. ZTRES is based on the domain MENG13V and references the basic unit of measure MARA-MEINS. The modification delivered with the Online Store includes the structure and subscreen used to extend the material master. You may choose to add the delivered structures elsewhere in the material master. To deactivate the user exit. If the unrestricted-use stock is checked. determine ship-to party through customer hierarchy using function call SD_PARTNER_DETERMINATION (see function VIEW_KUAGV on how this function can be used). From the navigation menu.6C n SAP enhancement WOSX0002 with function module EXIT_SAPMWWMJ_002 is available to determine the stock availability status icon and to transport it to the product-listing screen of the Online Store. If it is not available. See online documentation about SAP enhancements. available through enhancement parameter PI_PRODUCT-UNIT. determine main delivery plant: n Read product catalog using function call ADV_MED_READ to retrieve sales organization and reference customer. If the delivery plant information is not maintained in the customer master. n . The configuration parameter PKAT_BROWSER_STOCK_DYNAMIC determines how the available quantity is calculated. If no delivery plant has been specified in the ship-to customer master. the customer master in the product catalog basic data is used. convert the stock quantity using function call MATERIAL_UNIT_CONVERSION. If a customer has logged on and enhancement parameter PI_CUSTOMER has been specified. If parameter value requests main plant only. available through enhancement parameter PI_TWICOSTORE-KUNNR. a function call to BAPI_MATERIAL_AVAILABILITY is made. If the SD setting for ATP is checked. is different from the material master base unit of measure. ]~z
~} ]~| Determine stock parameters: n Read table ZESHOP_ZFGPARAMS for the delivery plant aggregation indicator PCAT_BROWSER_STOCK_AGGREGATE. choose Tools → ABAP Workbench → Utilities → Enhancements. the quantity LABST is read from MARD. the delivery plant is read from the material master record linked to the product catalog. If PI_CUSTOMER is not specified. use the delivery plant from the material master. Use only positive quantities without decimals. n n Calculate unrestricted-use stock for the material master: n n n Read the threshold quantity ZTRES and the basic unit of measure MEINS from the material master MARA. If the unit of display specified in the layout area of the product catalog. use the delivery plant specified in the material master. If the delivery plant of the material master is to be used as main delivery plant.LRQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. read the delivery plant from the reference customer master specified in the Online Store profile. read DWERK from MVKE. If no customer-specific delivery plant is available. Check function module: We provide the check function ZSWE_CHK_DPLANTSPLIT_WF_REQD. If it is not an Online Store order. Templates SAPMWWMJ_3420 and SAPMWWMJ_4260 must be modified to display the available quantity. Convert the available stock quantity to a character field according to the display unit of measure and with no leading zeros. Please ensure that the right agents are assigned as per your organizational structure. Transport the context space per screen or web page using macro FIELD-TRANSPORT. based on the availability of the product ordered at the specified delivery plant. If you want to display the new fields on the SAP screens for debugging purposes. If a received order cannot be fulfilled from the associated delivery plant. p
i|~ z n|~} h}~ This scenario makes use of SAP Workflow. Set the context fields per product using macro FIELD-SET. Because these routines are processed frequently. by determining the main delivery plant and the available or threshold quantities) by storing the results from the database in the internal program buffer and refreshing these only when needed. This check function determines whether to proceed with the workflow. . These changes are delivered with the HTML Business templates in the Online Store preconfiguration. we recommend you reduce database accesses (for example. and SAPMWWMJ_4260. Restrict processing to Online Store orders: We restrict sales document type of the sales order to parameters PCAT_BROWSER_ORDER_TYPE% in table ZESHOP_ZFGPARAMS. raise ANY_EXCEPTION. you need to make changes to the layout and flow logic of these screens and to the screen structures WIC_PRODUCT and WIC_DETAIL. g~ The new fields are now available for the HTML template but are not displayed yet. These agents are the ATP administrators who have authority to change the sales order delivery plants. Transfer availability flag and quantity to the web pages: n n n Determine the stock availability flag by comparing available and threshold quantities. SAPMWWMJ_3430. a standard task has been provided that triggers a work item to the designated ATP Administrator. These changes are modifications without SAP-provided user-exits. The HTML Business templates delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration already contain these modifications. The HTML templates must be enhanced with HTML Business commands.Appendix B: Add-On for ATP in the Product Catalog LRR The new fields are not displayed on the SAP screens SAPMWWMJ_3420. The following changes must be made in the templates: n n Template SAPMWWMJ_3420 must be modified to display the status icon. ]~z
l~||z Standard task provided: We provide standard task 90100003 that sends a message to the assigned agent. changes have been made in the ITS templates. along with a legend that describes the icons. . The called function checks for each order item VBAP to see if it can be confirmed by comparing the cumulated ordered quantity KWMENG with the cumulated confirmed quantity KBMENG. expecting the sales order number I_VBELN as input and returning a table O_VBAP with unconfirmed order items.6C Determine the unconfirmed order items: n The new custom function module Z_YESHOP_ATP_CHECK is called. If KBMENG is smaller than KWMENG. the system returns the item in the parameter table O_VBAP to the calling program. If the order has no unconfirmed items.MII Configuration Guide | Release 4.HTML SAPMWWMJ_3430. The following files are modified to support the availability logic: Template SAPMWWMJ_3420.76 WHPSODWHV The following changes have been made in the HTML Business templates: n n In template SAPMWWMJ_3420. In template SAPMWWMJ_3430.HTML WW20_EN. the quantity is added to the display of the detail information. the function returns an empty table O_VBAP and the program raises ANY_EXCEPTION. the traffic light icons appear. the system brings up the sales order in change mode and has the VBAPD-EPMEH field checked for all items that need to be reviewed for unconfirmed quantities.HTML.HTML. workflow is not triggered as no action needs to be taken. e-mails go out to all agents assigned to the task. In these cases. After the workflow starts.HTRC mz Change Display traffic-light icons in product list Display quantity in product detail screen Variables for descriptions of the quantity and icons 0RGLILFDWLRQV LQ WKH . For the first processor of the work item. n n n f}~} bml m~
z~ p ~ f}|z For the availability of products to be displayed on the quotation screen. Appendix B: Add-On for ATP in the Product Catalog MIJ mz 0RGLILFDWLRQV LQ WKH ODQJXDJHUHVRXUFH ILOH The file ww20_en.htrc is the language-resource file that contains values for the language-specific variables used for the IACs. The following variables have been added to support the availability logic: Parameter _3420_header_stock _3430_stock notinstock instock stock_trashhold Value Availability In stock Out of stock In stock Critical amount in stock . 6C .MIK Configuration Guide | Release 4. . \ Z}}Fh ~ l [z~ h~~ This appendix provides a detailed functional description and step-by-step instructions concerning the technical changes for two add-on functionalities we provide: n n Displaying the current basket content Saving the current shopping basket The first enhancement displays the current contents of the shopping basket in the left frame. This enhancement allows users to see an overview of the items in their basket and the total price of their selections. .$ 3 3 ( 1 ' . 6C Current basket content The second add-on function gives shoppers the choice of saving the current shopping basket and retrieving it at a later time. . including the total price. The shopping basket always displays while the customer browses the product groups. The retrieve shopping basket icon The save shopping basket icon \~ ^~~|~S ]
z \~ l [z~ \~ The display of the shopping basket gives the user the ability to view what items have been added to the shopping basket.MIM Configuration Guide | Release 4. However. You can go to the shopping basket by choosing the shopping basket icon or header text. The customer might not have logged in. or chosen a shipping method for freight calculation. A running total displays when the user adds products to the shopping basket. . the freight and tax are not calculated in the window. provided a shipping address for the tax calculation.Appendix C: Add-On for the Shopping Basket MIN This shopping basket only displays a message when it does not contain any items. b|
}~ iz e| ]
z ~ l [z~ This include program contains the logic to maintain an internal table that contains all the items a customer places into the shopping basket.HTML WW20_EN.” n}z~ ~ bml m~
z~ p ~ f}|z For the functionality to display the shopping basket. see chapter 13. ^~} ~ h
~ l~ iz b|
}~ i|~ ]
z ~ l [z~ The following program and screen needed to be changed: n n SAPMWWMJ SCREEN 3000 of program SAPMWWMJ See the Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide for instructions on making these modifications. For more information about this shopping basket. The following files are modified to support the display of the shopping basket: Template SAPMWWMJ_3310. “ITS Templates” on page 215. the sections “Current Shopping Basket” and “Changing Graphics. Extend the Online Store program to include processing for displaying the shopping basket. changes need to be made to the ITS templates.6C b
~~z ~ f}|z To implement this functionality. the following modifications to the SAP standard system are necessary: n n n Run the include program with the logic to display the shopping basket (available in the transport).HTRC Change Added the display of the shopping basket Variable for descriptions of the basket . Update the ITS templates to work with the modifications (preconfigured). This internal table contains the relevant fields displayed in the basket window.MIO Configuration Guide | Release 4. f}|z ~ ezz~Fk~|~ _
~ The file ww20_en.htrc is the language-resource file that contains values for the language-specific variables used for the IACs.HTML has been modified to include the display of the shopping basket. wish-list functionality. The following variables have been added to support the basket texts: Parameter currentbasket currentbasket_empty totalin Value Current basket content Shopping basket is empty Total in lz ~ l [z~ The store-and-retrieve shopping basket functions could also be the base for an enhancement that enables a userspecific.Appendix C: Add-On for the Shopping Basket f}|z ~ bml m~
z~ MIP Template SAPMWWMJ_3310. the customer must be logged in. This functionality is common on many web sites. without needing to repeat a search to find the desired products. the logon screen is called by the enhancement. and allows customers to return to your shop at a later time to place an order. The functionality of saving the shopping basket allows customers to: n n n Save a shopping basket Retrieve a saved shopping basket Replace a saved shopping basket (when a customer saves a shopping basket. If the customer is not logged in when calling these functions. \~ ^~~|~S lz z} k~~ ~ l [z~ For the save-and-retrieve shopping baskets to work. Users can store their shopping baskets and retrieve them at a later session. all old items in the basket are replaced by the new items) . The icon indicates that the shopping basket shown below can be saved. When the customer chooses to save the basket on the previous screen.6C g~ Items added to a basket are overwritten when the customer retrieves a saved basket. The icon allows the customer to retrieve a shopping basket. . the customer is prompted to log on before the shopping basket can be saved. If the customer is not logged on. the message on the screen below indicates that the items have been saved in the customer shopping basket.MIQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. The customer can continue shopping. The same icon is used here to allow the customer to retrieve the saved basket. the saved items can be retrieved by choosing the shopping basket icon. To retrieve a saved shopping basket. The retrieved shopping basket appears. the items are overwritten when the customer retrieves a saved basket. If a customer has already placed items into the basket. .Appendix C: Add-On for the Shopping Basket MIR g~ After the customer enters the store. the customer goes to the shopping basket. Although a message displays saying that the shopping basket is empty. the template has been modified to allow the customer to retrieve the shopping basket on the following screen by clicking the icon. the following modifications to the SAP standard system are necessary: n n n n Add the new custom table to store the shopping basket in R/3 (part of the transport). the selection of the functions RETRIEVE or STORE. and unit of measure. m~ \ mz{
~ l~ ~ l [z~ lZi The custom table ZYESHOP_BASKET works as the repository for the shopping baskets.MJI Configuration Guide | Release 4. Run the program that maintains the SAP shopping basket table (part of the transport). The structure of the table is as follows: Field Name Key Field Type For evaluation purposes additional fields could be added as appropriate. Input parameters are customer ID. MANDT KUNNR WMINR MATNR MEINH MENGE_D AREA ITEM ERDAT ERZET X X X X X MANDT KUNNR WMINR MATNR MEINH MENGE_D Data Type Length Decimal Short Text CLNT CHAR CHAR CHAR UNIT QUAN 3 10 10 18 3 13 10 10 8 6 3 Client Customer number Product Catalog number Material Number Unit of Measure for display Quantity Layout Area number Layout area item identifier Creation Date Creation Time LAYPOSNR NUMC LBPID ERDAT ERZET NUMC DATS TIMS Z iz fzz ~ lZi l [z~ mz{
~ This function module has been preconfigured for you. Nonkey fields are basket quantity. and creation information. The function module reads or updates the table entries. catalog layout identification. material ID.6C b
~~z ~ f}|z To implement the functionality. product catalog ID. Update the ITS templates to work with the modifications (preconfigured). Extend the SAP Online Store program to include processing for the storeand-retrieve shopping basket function. and a table parameter based on the structure of the shopping basket table. Key fields are customer ID. . product catalog ID. . Generic articles and components are currently not processed. For the STORE function. For the function RETRIEVE. n n ^~ ~ l~ z} k~~~ l [z~ _| Two code changes must be made to incorporate the add-ons into the Online Store. select the stored shopping basket data from table ZYESHOP_BASKET based on KUNNR and WMINR and pass it onto the table parameter O_BASKET. check the data consistency of table parameter O_BASKET. n}z~ ~ bml m~
z~ p ~ f}|z For the functionality to be available for saving and retrieving the shopping basket. For the function STORE. These types of materials can only be used in an ISRetail installation. The following programs must be changed: n n SAPMWWMJ MWWMJF03_USER_COMMAND_4000 See the Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide for instructions on making code changes. changes need to be made in the ITS templates. and insert the new data.HTML Change Save and retrieve the shopping basket Retrieve the shopping basket ]~z
~} ]~| ~ _|z
*HQHUDO )ORZ /RJLF n The flow logic for the new function code processing for ZBRO (the retrieve shopping basket) and ZBSA (the store shopping basket) is modeled after the SAP standard function code QUOT in USER_COMMAND_4000. check also the data consistency of the input table O_BASKET. The customer and product catalog should exist in SAP and the requested function can only be RETRIEVE or STORE. The following files are modified to support the saving and retrieving of the shopping basket: Template SAPMWWMJ_4220. delete any existing shopping basket data for KUNNR and WMINR. This step has been preconfigured for you.HTML SAPMWWMJ_4210.Appendix C: Add-On for the Shopping Basket ]~z
]~| With function module Z_YESHOP_BASKET_MAINTAIN: n MJJ Check the input parameter. Otherwise. This routine can be modeled after BASKET_ITEM_ADD. Determine the customer number. process the customer logon first. Store the requested function code as the next action to be performed. If the new shopping basket contains no items. Process the customer function codes and skip the SAP standard processing of the customer function codes in USER_COMMAND_SAPLWWCC.6C n n Check that the program runs in sales order status without errors. . n )XQFWLRQ &RGH =%52 3URFHVVLQJ n n n Retrieve the stored shopping basket for the customer and the product catalog using function call to Z_YESHOP_BASKET_MAINTAIN. only that it next processes the new function codes instead of the SAP standard ones as defined in CUSTOMER_SAPLWWCC_LEAVE. set the empty basket screen SAPMWMMJ_4210.MJK Configuration Guide | Release 4. &XVWRPHU 3URFHVVLQJ n n n Prepare the logon by initializing the customer processing and set the logon screen SAPLWWCC_8120 for FRAME_2. including the reread of the item to: • • • Retrieve pricing data using BAPI_PRODCAT_GETITEM and BAPI_PRODCAT_GETPRICES Propose the requested delivery date using OSTORE_REQDATE_PROPOSE Format quantities Increase index and counters n n g~ • n The HTML template SAPMWMMJ_4100 must be enhanced with HTML Business commands to display and invoke these function codes. If the customer has not logged on yet. and that the user invokes the function code from inside the shopping basket. and then continue with the function code processing. Filter out products from the stored basket that are no longer available in the current catalog and update the stored basket items with the current catalog layout identification. set shopping basket screen SAPMWMMJ_4220 for FRAME_2. Fill the new shopping basket based on the stored basket. This routine is modeled after SAP standard. Issue a message that the stored shopping basket has been retrieved. This number is either the logon customer ID or the one-time customer reference number. Retrieve the current product catalog items using function call to BAPI_ADV_MED_GET_ITEMS. Delete the current shopping basket. But it could be enhanced so that the stored and current shopping basket are merged (for example. after the users select items of the stored basket they want to bring over into their current basket). the retrieve function overwrites any existing shopping basket in the current session. The store-and-retrieve function. currently available only on the shopping basket page. or SAPMWWMJ_4220. However. At this time. SAPMWWMJ_4210.Appendix C: Add-On for the Shopping Basket )XQFWLRQ &RGH =%6$ 3URFHVVLQJ n MJL Fill current shopping basket items into parameter table O_BASKET and call function Z_YESHOP_BASKET_MAINTAIN for updating the SAP table. could however be implemented for other pages too (for example. the stored shopping basket could be automatically retrieved and displayed right after logon). n Tips & Tricks . Inform the user that the shopping basket has been stored. and set screen SAPMWWMJ_4220 for FRAME_2. these functions can be triggered on the appropriate SAP screens by typing the function code into the Command field and choosing Enter. The new function codes do not display as buttons on the SAP screens SAPMWWMJ_4100. 6C .MJM Configuration Guide | Release 4. In our enhancement. is generated. followed by the current time stamp.$ 3 3 ( 1 ' . the system-generated purchase order (PO) number is not appropriate. even if the customer has not left the store to place the order. the standard PO number. described above. If the user does not enter a purchase order number. The PO data is held for the duration of one order creation and initialized for the next order. The current date defaults as Purchase order date. In the standard R/3 System. the fields Purchase order number and Purchase order date are open for input on the Internet and transferred to the order. the Online Store generates the PO number WWW. ] Z}}Fh i|z~ h}~ ^ h~~ For many business-to-business scenarios. \~ ^~~|~S ^ i|z~ h}~ g{~ The PO number may be entered by the customer on the screen that displays the contents of the shopping basket and allows the customer to request a quotation. . but this can be overwritten. . is an optional field.MJO Configuration Guide | Release 4. If a PO number is entered.6C Purchase no. Purchase order number and date . the PO number and PO date are not displayed. the number and date display on the screen that contains the customer-specific quotation. If no PO number is entered. The current date defaults as the purchase order date. To display the order. enter transaction VA03 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. and choose below. The purchase order number and date transfer to the R/3 sales order. choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order to display the screen → Display). in the Command field. if a PO number is not entered. neither PO field displays. . As on the previous screen. Purchase order number and date The PO number transfers into the order created in R/3. and a PO number is entered.Appendix D: Add-On for Purchase Order Entry MJP After the order is confirmed. Enter the order number. both the PO number and PO date display. • If the user has entered a value for the PO number. • e ~ l{~ ~ h
~ l~ iz This step has been preconfigured for you if you followed the instructions in the Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide. m~~ l{~ i|~ ~ i|z~ h}~ ]zz The three subroutines do the following. the global variables clear. Linking subroutines to the Online Store program involves modifying the appropriate flow logic and source code of all required programs. . Store the data in global variables. If the user input is not a valid date. The routine that sets the PO data has to be included in the PBO flow logic of the common carrier screen or the order and quotation subscreen. Update the ITS templates to work with the modifications (preconfigured). issue a warning message and propose today’s date in the correct format. use SAP standard WWW and current time. n Pass the data to the order creation BAPI. • • • If the date is initial. like the PO number explained above.MJQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. today’s date is used.6C b
~~z ~ f}|z This functionality requires the following changes to SAP standard: n n n Use the three subroutines to process the purchase order data (part of the transport). n n The routine for retrieving the PO data needs to be called when the carrier screen for quotation and order is being processed after input. Link the subroutines to the Online Store programs. Otherwise. n Retrieve user input from the web. • • • Retrieve the PO data from the web and convert the date into its internal format using CONVERT_DATE_TO_INTERNAL. Transfer the purchase data from the global variables to the web. n Transfer the PO data to the web. At subscreen 4235. then this PO number has to be assigned to a PO number field in the sales document header structure. order confirmation. The purchase order date has to be assigned to a PO date field in the sales document header structure. In the Command field. n n n n n SAPMWWMJ MWWMJTOP MWWMJF03_USER_COMMAND_4000 MWWMJF03_QUOTATION_CREATE MWWMJF03_ORDER_CREATE n}z~ ~ bml m~
z~ p ~ f}|z For the PO number and date to be passed from the Internet to the R/3 sales order. Form ZZ_PURCHASE_DATA_GET is being called in USER_COMMAND_4000 at the beginning of the block that processes the function code. delivered with the preconfiguration transports. documents the detailed code. ZZ_PURCH_DATA_SET has been created as a module in the PBO flow logic of screen SAPMWWMJ_4000 right before the module FIELD_TRANSPORT. choose Tools → ABAP Workbench → Development → User Interface → Screen Painter). This step has been preconfigured for you. Note that these changes to the function modules are not configuration changes. Thoroughly document and test these changes if you choose to apply them. you must activate and generate the programs. In the Command field. ^z
~ Subroutines ZZ_PURCHASE_DATA_GET. These changes are modifications to the R/3 System. The following programs must be changed to incorporate the purchase order field functionality into your Online Store. which is delivered with the preconfiguration transports. ZZ_PURCH_DATA_SET and ZZ_PURCHASE_DATA_FILL have been created in include ZMWWMJFZY. enter transaction SE38 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. f} ~ Zz~ _
e| The detailed code is documented in the Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide. After saving your modifications. The flow logic of screen 4000 in program SAPMWWMJ must be changed. Form ZZ_PURCHASE_DATA_FILL has been included at the beginning of form QUOTATION_CREATE and ORDER_CREATE. enter transaction SE51 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. choose Tools → ABAP Workbench → Development → ABAP Editor). changes need to be made in the ITS templates. f} ~ l|~ \}~ Z
k~~} iz The Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide. The programs specified in this step have been created for you. Five programs must be changed.Appendix D: Add-On for Purchase Order Entry n MJR The routine that fills the internal structures of the sales document BAPI is included in the routines for creating a quotation and an order. . MKI Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C The following files are modified to support the PO number and date logic: Template SAPMWWMJ_4220.HTML SAPMWWMJ_4230.HTML SAPMWWMJ_4235.HTML WW20_EN.HTRC Change Enter the purchase order data Display the p.o. number and date Display the p.o. number and date Variables for descriptions of the purchase order data f}|z ~ bml m~
z~ The following changes have been made in the HTML Business templates: n n Allow the entry of the purchase order number and purchase order date, defaulting the current date, in template SAPMWWMJ_4220.HTML. In templates SAPMWWMJ_4230 and SAPMWWMJ_4235, display the PO number and date if the PO number is not zero f}|z ~ ezz~Fk~|~ _
~ The file ww20_en.htrc is the language-resource file that contains values for the language-specific variables used for the IACs. The following variables have been added to support the PO logic: Parameter _4230_footnote _optional _purchno _purchdate _colon Value *) optional Purchase no. Purchase date : $ 3 3 ( 1 ' , ; ^ Z}}Fh f i
~ l~|~ h~~ g~ For further discussion on the My Profile service, see chapter 13, “My Profile” on page 228. The My Profile service is a new Internet Application Component (IAC) that gives customers the ability to maintain their personal data. Customers can set a default credit card number and default shipping mode. The new service can be called directly from a web page on your corporate web site. My Profile link from web page MKK Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C My Profile can also be called from within an existing IAC, such as the Online Store. The My Profile icon from within the Online Store g~ The transaction for My Profile is ZOSA. When the service is called, a new window opens. The new window ensures that if the service is called from within the store, the Online Store session is not interrupted. g~ See chapter 7, “Making It Happen: Customers in the Online Store” on page 124, for details on the different types of customers available in the Online Store. The My Profile service has been created to consolidate the management of customer information. The customer can register or log on, maintain address data, change the account password, obtain a password reminder, maintain credit card information, and maintain a default shipping method. To use the entire functionality of this service, a full customer master record must be used for your Internet business. If a consumer is used, no sales area data is maintained, so no shipping method can be stored. If a one-time customer is used, no master record exists since customer data is stored within the sales order, so the My Profile service should not be used. Appendix E: Add-On for My Profile Service MKL ^z{
~ ~ f i
~ l~|~ g~ The preconfiguration of the ITS templates for the My Profile service are discussed in chapter 13, “My Profile” on page 228. To enable the My Profile service, you need to make changes to the following programs, modules, and screens: n n n n n n n n SAPMWWMJ MWWMJF03_USER_COMMAND_4000 MWWMJF01_USER_COMMAND_1000 MWWMJF03_SUPPORTED_PAYMENT_TYP MWWMJF03_ORDER_CREATE MWWMJO30_FILL_CCARD_TYPE-SCREE SCREEN 4220 FUNCTION MODULE SD_CCARD_READ_DB See the Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide for instructions on making these modifications. After saving your modifications, you must activate and generate the programs. The new components (function groups YESHOP_CCARD and YESHOP_ACCOUNTS) contain the transaction logic for the My Profile service and have been preconfigured for you. MKM Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C $ 3 3 ( 1 ' , ; _ f|~
z~ n
~ h~~ In this appendix, we explain two utilities we developed for internal use from which you could benefit. The following sections explain how to: n n n n Get data from the frontend to the application server using FTP Change the screen field text Change messages Display the delivery address on the Internet, even when it is the same as the billing address s_mi`^m The ZFTPGET program is useful for getting data from the frontend to the application server. In tasks such as data transfer, loading a large file to the application server is desirable. Although the Data Transfer Workbench has similar functionality, it works only for those objects and formats supported by the workbench. Therefore, it is useful to have a generic utility—the ZFTPGET MKO Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C program—to upload files to the application server. This program does not perform extensive authority checks on whether the user can write to the target folder. mz 8VH =)73*(7 WR ORDG GDWD IURP WKH IURQWHQG WR WKH DSSOLFDWLRQ VHUYHU g~ JG In the Command field, enter transaction SE38 and choose Enter. KG On the ABAP Editor: Initial Screen: zG In Program, enter the report name ZFTPGET. {G Select Text elements. |G Choose . For security purposes, the ZFTPGET program only uploads in text mode. LG On the ZFTP Program screen: zG In PServer Source File, enter the source file on the presentation server (parameter SFILENM). {G In AServer Destination File, enter the path on the application server where the file needs to be copied (parameter DFILENM). Appendix F: Miscellaneous Utilities |G Choose MKP . The file uploads from the presentation server to the application server. _~
} m~ f}|z During the development process, we noticed that many choices of field text wording for the standard Online Store IACs could have been better. These texts are directly used in the buttons in HTML templates. g~ To learn how field text is handled in the preconfigured Online Store templates, see “Architecture of the Buttons” on page 224. You might want to modify the text, and SAP allows modification of these texts to better suit your requirements. However, if you are building a German web site and need to change the text, then it is not possible to change this text since German is the original source language of development. Therefore, if you are building a German web site, you need the following report. mz 0RGLI\ WKH ILHOG WH[W IRU *HUPDQ ZHE VLWHV JG In the Command field, enter transaction SE38 and choose Enter. MKQ Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C KG On the ABAP Editor: Initial Screen: zG In Program, enter the report ZFIELD_TEXT_CHANGE. {G Choose . g~ LG On the ZESHOP – Translation Program for Field display text screen: zG In Program Name, enter the module pool name. {G In Screen Number, enter the screen number. |G In Field Name, enter the field name as shown in the F1 technical help. }G In Display Text, enter the new text you want for this field. ~G Choose . Currently, we only support changes using DE (German) because for all other languages, standard SAP provides a change-of-text capability. It is much better to use the standard method because it is CTS-enabled. The changes made by this report are transportable. Appendix F: Miscellaneous Utilities MKR a \z~ f~z~ To change messages, you first need to locate the message class for the messages. Perform the following steps. mz &KDQJH PHVVDJH WH[W JG To locate the message class, double-click on the message. Message in the status bar KG On the Help - SAP R/3 dialog box, choose Technical Info. LG On the Technical Information dialog box: zG Appl. area tells you the message class. Below that is the message number. {G Choose twice. Within the Appl. area field is the message class, which in this case is W+ and the message number is 304. MG To change the message text, enter transaction SE91 in the Command field and choose Enter. . OG On the Customer Modif.: Different Original and Logon Language dialog box. {G Choose Change. in logon lang.MLI Configuration Guide | Release 4. choose Maint. PG On the Display Messages: Class <XX> screen. enter the message class. change the message according to your needs. All the messages relevant for the message class appear.6C NG On the Maintain Message Class screen: zG In Message class. KG On the transactional screen. . (or To learn how field text is handled in the preconfigured Online Store templates. see “Architecture of the Buttons” on page 224. |G Choose twice. LG On the Help -SAP R/3 dialog box: zG Choose Technical info (or F-9). {G Note the program name and screen number. place you cursor in a field and choose F-1).Appendix F: Miscellaneous Utilities MLJ a \z~ ~ m~ ~ [ mz g~ &KDQJH WKH WH[W RQ D EXWWRQ JG Locate the program name and screen number of the button you want to change. MG In the Command field. enter transaction SE80 and choose Enter. {G Enter the program name in the entry field. List box with which you select Program . ~G Double-click on the screen you want to change.MLK Configuration Guide | Release 4.6C NG On the Object Navigator screen: zG Use the list box to select Program. choose G The overall screen name changes after you double-click on the screen in step 5e. }G Under Object name. |G Choose . Choose Layout. next to the Screens line. check with your administrator. Change password). . }G If the system asks for the object access key and you do not have one.Appendix F: Miscellaneous Utilities OG On the Screen Painter: Display Screen <XXXXX>: MLL zG Double-click on the button you want to change (for example. PG On the Screen Painter: Attributes dialog box. |G Choose . Enter the object access key and proceed. {G The Screen Painter: Attributes dialog box appears. enter the new button text in Text. the delivery address is the same as the bill-to address. choose activate.6C QG Back on the Screen Painter: Display Screen <XXXXX>.MLM Configuration Guide | Release 4. to save and ]
z ~ [
Fm Z}}~ z ~ ]~
~ Z}}~ In most cases. see the Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide. the following program and screen must be changed: n n MWWMJF05_CUSTOMER_ADDRESS_READ MWWMJF03_MODIFY_SCREEN_4230 To implement these code changes. . To display the bill-to address as the delivery address. . All other procedures can only be tested manually because the data comes from the Internet. Use the Online Store Made Easy: Business Processes for Demos and Testing guide to manually test the preconfiguration. . only the new sales document flow can be tested. For the Online Store preconfiguration. if you are using the Online Store preconfiguration in conjunction with the Preconfigured Client (PCC) Validate the preconfiguration We use the CATTs to guarantee the quality of what was preconfigured within R/3.$ 3 3 ( 1 ' . The test catalogs have been developed to: n n Install master data into your system. organized into test catalogs. ` b}| \~FZ}~} m~ m
A\ZmmB h~~ The Online Store preconfiguration includes a set of Computer-Aided Test Tools (CATTs). We provide two test catalogs. 10. if you change the configuration. the CATTs may run with some errors. 13. Running CATTs in foreground mode is a good way to become familiar with new business processes and to discover what the preconfiguration lets you do. and can rerun the CATT as often as you like. Create a price. 12. Create a customer master. 4. Post the payment. 11. 9. Create a material master.6C Additional CATT procedures are delivered that are not included in the catalogs. Release the credit block from the return order. The CATT ZESHOP_SALES_TAXABLE performs these steps automatically by invoking R/3 transactions. 3. pz b z \ZmmX To illustrate what a CATT is. 6. 2. just after the installation. Create a promotional price. and then driving the transactions with menu or icon button input equivalents (BDC OK codes). These CATTs should be run manually during the installation process. Create the credit memo.MLO Configuration Guide | Release 4. you actually see the entire process. See the Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide for details on these CATT procedures. consider a basic Sales and Distribution (SD) sales process in R/3 with the following steps: 1. However. They also expect PCC organizational structures and customizing to be present. populating screen fields. You can change field values as the CATT runs. Deliver the order. Bill the order. screen by screen. Print the invoice. in cases in which the Online Store preconfiguration is not used in conjunction with the PCC. . 8. 5. Create an order. l~ m d [~~ r i|~~} All the CATTs in this document run with the properly installed Online Store preconfiguration implemented in conjunction with the PCC. 7. CATTs are especially sensitive to customizing that changes screen sequences and field selections. Create a return delivery. If you run the CATT in Foreground mode. Create a return order. ^~| ~ m~ \zz
The Online Store preconfiguration CATTs have been organized into test catalogs from which you can run individual CATTs. Of these transactions. must be entered as the parameters before running these CATTs. such as condition types. This install catalog should only be run when the Online Store preconfiguration is used in conjunction with the PCC. The problem should not recur. e-Shop: Install Catalog (use only with the PCC) consists of the installation CATTs that create master data required to complete the configuration. The Online Store preconfiguration comes with two test catalogs: n g~ For details about the CATT procedures that should be run when the Online Store preconfiguration is used as an add-on to existing configuration. they do not run normally. see the Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide. such as condition records. when the Online Store preconfiguration is used as an add-on. some only generate the screens (if run manually).Appendix G: Introduction to Computer-Aided Test Tools (CATTs) MLP The first time some transactions are invoked in a newly installed system. see the Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide. calling the first screen is enough) and then rerun the CATT. but not if the transaction is called from a CATT. such as the sales area. Caution Many of the CATTs discussed in the Online Store preconfiguration Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide can be run individually even when the Online Store preconfiguration is used as an add-on to existing configuration. manually call up the transaction (often. based on Online Store preconfiguration transports. groups of CATTs. the CATTs that create the sample master data. they generate a screen. Rather. However. or the entire catalog. as shown at right. n . If the error persists. because of the potential conflicts when screens have been modified in the course of an implementation. or with a modified PCC. The CATTs delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration expect the date format to be MM/DD/YYYY and the decimal notation to be period. try to rerun it. should not be run. If one of the CATTs results in an error. such as the product catalog. This catalog also creates sample data. CATTs are sensitive to the user default date and decimal formats that you set under System → User profile → Own data. This catalog should only be run when the Online Store preconfiguration is used in conjunction with the PCC. e-Shop: Test Catalog (use only with the PCC) consists of all the test processes that can be run automatically with no user interaction. For details about this catalog. such as a product catalog. The organizational structures used in your company. The CATTs you run are those that install master data. . use field. {G Choose . KG On the Test Organizer: Test catalog processing screen. in the Test catalog LG On the Find test catalogs dialog box: zG In Title. You can also choose to leave this field blank to display all catalogs. enter e-Shop:* to find all test catalogs delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration. enter transaction STWB_1 and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu.6C m~ h
~ l~ m~ \zz
mz 5XQ D WHVW FDWDORJ JG In the Command field. choose Tools → ABAP Workbench → Test Workbench → Test Organizer → Manage test catalog).MLQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. NG Back on the Test Organizer: Test catalog processing screen. Test Case. {G Choose This action creates master and transactional data. . PG On the Start CATT test cases Local dialog box: zG Under Processing mode. OG On the Display test catalog e-Shop: Test Catalog (use only with the PCC!) screen: zG Place your cursor on the top node if you want to execute the entire test catalog or on individual nodes. {G Choose . double-click on the line e-Shop: Test Catalog (use only with the PCC!). choose . select Background.Appendix G: Introduction to Computer-Aided Test Tools (CATTs) MLR MG On the Find structure dialog box. Never run this in a future production client. If the factory is closed.S. The test CATTs create master data. Some of the CATTs in the test catalog will not run properly on weekends or public holidays as defined in the factory calendar for the U. ZPCCXD01_CREATE_CUSTOMER). choose Tools → ABAP Workbench → Test → Test Workbench → SCAT – CATT Extended). Run it several times in foreground and background and view the log at the end of the session to see what information it contains. a blue log indicates that the test catalog has been run successfully. {G Choose . enter transaction SCAT and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. ^~| z \Zmm The following sample CATT session helps you to become familiar with CATT transactions by creating a vendor. enter the name of the CATT to test (for example. the SD module will not allow deliveries.MMI Configuration Guide | Release 4. Never run them in a production environment. KG On the Computer Aided Test Tool: Initial Screen: zG In Test case.6C QG On the final screen. mz ([HFXWH DQ LQGLYLGXDO &$77 SURFHGXUH JG In the Command field. . The log data is written like a short log. choose the execution options and assign values for the CATT’s parameters. the transaction continues to run in dialog so that corrections can be made. When the CATT is finished. This transaction displays only errors and runs without dialog until the first error.Appendix G: Introduction to Computer-Aided Test Tools (CATTs) MMJ LG On the CATT: Execute Test case ZPCCX01_CREATE_CUSTOMER screen. Background Errors |G Under Variants. The CATT parameter values cannot be changed during processing. zG Under Log Type. but the log tree is not automatically displayed. }G In the Parameter value column. make your selection from the following: Log Type Long Short Result During the execution. select W/o. After that first error. . make your selection from the following: Processing Mode Foreground Result The transaction flow appears on the screen where the input values are visible. before you run the CATT. change the CATT parameter’s default values before you run it. test-run errors are displayed in Long. no log data is written during the process. W/o (log type without display) {G Under Processing mode. If the test run is error free. The log tree only displays the test run that was started and the import and export parameters of the specific test modules. the system writes log data that is displayed in a log tree. The parameter values are not hard-coded and can be changed. . The dialog box at the bottom right contains the function code recorded in the CATT procedure. You can still make changes.MMK Configuration Guide | Release 4. NG Continue to enter through all the following screens. Choose to continue moving through both screens and dialog boxes. MG On the Create Customer: General data screen: zG Review the default data you just entered. {G Choose when you finished any changes on this screen.6C ~G Choose . enter the CATT procedure ZESHOP_FREIGHT_CARRIERS in the Test case field. mz ([HFXWH D &$77 ZLWK YDULDQWV JG On the Computer Aided Test Tool: Initial Screen: zG In Test case. MML ^~| z \Zmm ozz The following sample CATT session helps you to become familiar with variants in CATT procedures by creating a series of vendors for the freight carriers. {G Choose .Appendix G: Introduction to Computer-Aided Test Tools (CATTs) OG The final screen shows a log of a successful CATT. KG On the CATT: Execute Test case ZESHOP_FREIGHT_CARRIERS screen. choose Goto → Variants → Edit. . MG On the CATT: Maintain variant 01 for test procedure ZESHOP_FREIGHT_CARRIERS screen: zG The parameters are filled in for the variant. and choose .6C LG On the CATT: Maintain variants for test procedure ZESHOP_FREIGHT_CARRIERS screen: zG The list of variants displays.MMM Configuration Guide | Release 4. NG On the CATT: Execute Test case ZESHOP_FREIGHT_CARRIERS screen: zG Under Processing mode. {G Place your cursor on the first variant. {G Choose twice. select All. select Background. . Each variant creates a different vendor. {G Under Variants. . The vendor number created for the freight carrier is exported.Test Plan Log for Run 00001510 REP_SAPMSCAT screen. the log appears with the log of the last variant expanded.Appendix G: Introduction to Computer-Aided Test Tools (CATTs) |G Choose MMN . OG On the CATT . In the field New original system. Description Master Data . 3.MMO Configuration Guide | Release 4. enter transaction SE38 and choose Enter. this CATT is a simple mechanism to keep track of all the high-level CATTs included in the transport. which you run when Best Practices for SAP Online Store is used in conjunction with the PCC. Tips & Tricks In the Command field. Since not all CATT procedures are used in a catalog. The installation guide comes with the download file containing the transports. CATT Procedure Configuration ZESHOP_PRICE_DET ZESHOP_CUSTOMER_HIERARCHY Configures the pricing procedure determined for Internet orders. . Configures the customer hierarchy type and corresponding partner functions. Some of these CATT procedures create configuration data. \Zmm z z ¡mz a~
~¯ The provided CATT procedure ZESHOPXXXX consolidates all procedures transported as part of the Online Store preconfiguration. See the Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide for details. The customer hierarchy type is used for business scenarios in which multiple employees from one company make purchases in your store. Choose 2. enter the transport request number with which you imported the CATTs. choose Tools → ABAP Workbench → Test → Test Workbench → Test Organizer → Manage test catalog). 4. in the Program field. To access the catalog. In the field Request/task. while others create sample master data. enter report RDDTADI7 and choose .6C \Zmm i|~}~ ]~
~~} ~ h
~ l~ i~|z Do not run CATT procedures that create master data in a production environment! The following CATT procedures are delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration. enter your <SID>. To own the CATTs delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration: 1. \Zmm ~ bz
z \zz
The following table summarizes all CATT procedures contained in the installation catalog. enter transaction STWB_1 in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu. To access the catalog. and documents. Creates vendor master records for the freight carriers for which order tracking is configured. the CATT adds the appropriate Get/Set parameters. Creates a sample product catalog. enter transaction STWB_1 in the Command field and choose Enter (or from the navigation menu.Appendix G: Introduction to Computer-Aided Test Tools (CATTs) MMP CATT Procedure ZESHOP_ITSUSER Description Creates the generic ITS user for logging on to the ITS if it does not exist. products. which determine the pricing for the type of delivery selected by the customer. which you run when Best Practices for SAP Online Store is used in conjunction with the PCC. Creates the classification system data that provides the functionality for limiting access to a catalog based on the customer ID. ZESHOP_INCOTERMS ZESHOP_OUTPUT_RECORDS ZESHOP_CLASSES ZESHOP_FREIGHT_CARRIERS ZESHOP_ONETIME_CUST ZESHOP_PROD_CATALOG ZESHOP_MULT_PASSWORDS \Zmm ~ m~ \zz
The following table summarizes all CATT procedures contained in the Test Catalog. Creates the Incoterms. Creates the condition records that allow e-mail to be sent for the order types used for the Online Store. including the basic data. choose . reference customer. structure. Creates the customer master records used in a customer hierarchy. If this user already exists. Creates the customer master record used as a reference for the Online Store that uses one-time customers. when multiple employees of a company make purchases in your store. please create your own product catalog. See the Online Store Made Easy: Installation Guide for details. “Creating the Product Catalog” on page 51. delivery.MMQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. Creates the layout of the product catalog. CATT Procedure ZESHOP_SALES_TAXABLE Description Process flow that creates a sales order. Creates the basic data of the product catalog. Process flow as described above. Uses the sales document types delivered for the consumer scenarios. CATT Procedure ZPCCTOOL_MASTER_DATA Description Creates the customer master record of the reference customer in the basic data of the product catalog and for consumers. and invoice. The CATT cannot anticipate changes to field settings and values that normally occur during an implementation. Assigns the customer master as the reference for consumers. and then returns the items.6C Tools → ABAP Workbench → Test → Test Workbench → Test Organizer → Manage test catalog). Process flow as above. The CATT that creates the sample product catalog should only be run if you are using the Online Store preconfiguration in conjunction with the PCC in a new implementation. The sale in this process is taxable. Process flow for the business sales document types as above. including the shop and product group levels. The installation guide is delivered with the download file that contains the transports. If you are not using the Online Store preconfiguration with the PCC. This CATT should only be run if the Online Store preconfiguration is used in conjunction with the PCC. s^lahixikh]x\ZmZeh`G This CATT creates the sample product catalog. ZESHOP_CONSUMER ZESHOP_PROD_CAT_BASIC ZESHOP_PROD_CAT_LAYOUT ZESHOP_PROD_CAT_BASIC . The sale in this process is not taxable. This CATT should never be run in a productive environment. The sample products include documentation and guidebooks developed for the Made Easy guidebook series. The structure of the product catalog is discussed in detail in chapter 4. but the sale is not taxable. The sale in this process is taxable. The sales document types are the ones delivered for the business scenario. Creates the basic data of the product catalog. ZESHOP_SALES_RETURN ZESHOP_SALES_TAXABLE_BUS ZESHOP_SALES_RETURN_BUS \Zmm ~ i}| \zz
The following CATT procedure provides you with a sample product catalog. keeping in mind the requirements in the step-by-step instructions. This CATT is called two times. This CATT is called eight times.6 guidebook product group. This CATT is called six times. This CATT is called ten times. once for each product created.Appendix G: Introduction to Computer-Aided Test Tools (CATTs) MMR CATT Procedure ZESHOP_PROD_CATALOG_MATS Description Creates the master data for the 4. once for each product created. Creates the master data for the technical documents product group.5 guidebook product group. Creates the master data for the 4. Assigns the guidebooks to the layout for the 3.0 guidebooks. Assigns the guidebooks to the layout for the 4.5 guidebooks. Creates the master data for the HR documents product group. Creates the master data for the 3. This CATT is called one time.6 guidebooks.0 guidebook product group.x guidebook product group. once for each product created.x guidebooks. This CATT is called five times. ZESHOP_PROD_CAT_LAYOUT_3X ZESHOP_PROD_CATALOG_MATS ZESHOP_PROD_CAT_LAYOUT_HR ZESHOP_PROD_CATALOG_MATS ZESHOP_PROD_CAT_LAYOUT_TECH . Assigns the guidebooks to the layout for the 4. once for each product created. once for each product created. Assigns the guidebooks to the layout for the technical documents. ZESHOP_PROD_CAT_LAYOUT_46 ZESHOP_PROD_CATALOG_MATS ZESHOP_PROD_CAT_LAYOUT_45 ZESHOP_PROD_CATALOG_MATS ZESHOP_PROD_CAT_LAYOUT_40 ZESHOP_PROD_CATALOG_MATS Assigns the guidebooks to the layout for the 4. Assigns the guidebooks to the layout for the HR documents. Creates the master data for the 4. once for each product created. CATT Procedure ZPCCTOOL_MASTER_DATA Description Creates the material master record of the product that will be assigned to the product catalog. Creates the sales order text that will be copied from the material master into the product catalog. which allows you to limit customer access to the catalog. if required. CATT Procedure ZESHOP_ONETIME_CUST Description Creates a one-time customer master used as a reference for the Online Store in which only one-time customers are used. “Limiting Access to Product Groups Within a Product Catalog” on page 99. This CATT should only be run if the Online Store preconfiguration is being used in conjunction with the PCC. Creates the price for the product that will be assigned to the product catalog. Creates an additional document that will be linked to the product. Creates the document to be linked to the product. The method of using classification as an authorization mechanism is discussed in detail in chapter 6. Links the created documents to the material master record. . Creates a sales price for the product that will be assigned to the product catalog. if required. The document contains the references to the image files for display on the web. ZPCCVK31_PRICE_COND_MATERIAL ZPCCVK11_SALES_PRICE_MAT ZESHOP_DMS ZESHOP_DMS_ONEDOC ZESHOP_PROD_CATALOG_MM02_DOCS ZESHOP_PROD_CATALOG_MM02_TEXT s^lahixhg^mbf^x\nlmG This CATT creates the reference customer for stores using one-time customers. The document contains the references to the data file for display on the web.6C s^lahixikh]x\ZmZeh`xfZmlG This CATT creates the master data for the products in the product catalog and is called from CATT procedure ZESHOP_PROD_CATALOG.MNI Configuration Guide | Release 4. This CATT should only be run if the Online Store preconfiguration is being used in conjunction with the PCC. \Zmm i}| \zz
Zz The following CATT procedure provides you with the master data in the classification system. Adds the new partner functions to the existing partner procedure determination rules for delivery documents. see chapter 8. to be used for the customer hierarchy. s^lahix\nlmhf^kxab^kZk\arG This CATT creates the configuration for the business partner scenario. Creates the partner determination procedure YWB. This must be done in a separate step due to technical difficulties with the CATT procedure. 0012. YB. Adds the sold-to partner to the partner determination procedure. ZESHOP_VOPA_DELIVDOC ZESHOP_VOPA_BILLDOC . the characteristic is assigned Creates the class that may be linked to the product catalog layout. Adds the new partner functions to the existing partner procedure determination rules for billing documents. the characteristic is assigned ZESHOP_CLASS \Zmm f
~ ^
~~ i|z The following CATTs support the scenario in which multiple employees in the same company purchase from your store. Assigns partner function YA to hierarchy type Y. A CATT is used instead of a transport to ensure that existing customer hierarchy configuration is not overwritten. “Multiple Employees Making Purchases for One Corporation” on page 143. and YD. CATT Procedure ZESHOP_CHAR ZESHOP_CLASS Description Creates the characteristic that defines the type of customer Creates the class that may be linked to the customer master. and assigns it to order type YWB. and YWEB. Creates the partner functions YA. YC.Appendix G: Introduction to Computer-Aided Test Tools (CATTs) MNJ s^lahix\eZll^lG This CATT creates the classes used to limit the access to the product catalog. Assigns the newly created partner functions to the account groups 0001. CATT Procedure ZESHOP_OVH1_CH_TYPE ZESHOP_VOPA_CUSTHIER ZESHOP_VOPA_CUSTHIER_AG ZESHOP_OVH1_CH_TYPE_2 ZESHOP_VOPA_SLSORDER ZESHOP_VOPA_SLSORD_SP Description Creates the hierarchy type used for the customer hierarchy. For information about this scenario. Creates the Internet user for the customer master records just created. must be performed manually. using the last name of the customer. please create your own customer master records. Displays the documentation that provides the instructions for creating the customer hierarchy.6C CATT Procedure ZESHOP_OVH2_AG ZESHOP_OVH3_CUSTHIER ZESHOP_OVH4_AUART Description Assigns the account groups to hierarchy type Y. The last step. The CATT that creates the sample customer master records should only be run if you are using the Online Store preconfiguration in conjunction with the PCC in a new implementation. ZESHOP_CREATE_INET_CUSTOMERS ZESHOP_CUSTHIER_DISC ZESHOP_CUSTHIER s^lahix\k^Zm^xbg^mx\nlmhf^klG This CATT creates the master data for the employees that will be linked the company. The password is automatically generated. for which each of the employees is eligible.MNK Configuration Guide | Release 4. . CATT Procedure ZPCCTOOL_MASTER_DATA Description Creates the customer master that represents the company to which the employees are linked. Creates a discount for the company. Pricing is discussed in detail in chapter 5. This CATT should never be run in a productive environment. CATT Procedure ZPCCTOOL_MASTER_DATA Description Creates the customer master that represents the company to which the employees are linked. Creates the employees which will be linked to the company. “Prices in the Product Catalog” on page 79. creating the actual hierarchy. This CATT cannot anticipate changes to field settings and values that normally occur during an implementation. since there are technical problems in creating the hierarchy with a CATT procedure. keeping in mind the requirements in the step-by-step instructions. Assigns the customer hierarchy type to sales order type YWB. ZESHOP_INET_USER ZESHOP_INET_USER_CHPW \Zmm z l lz
~ h}~ i|~\Zmm i| The following CATT procedures assist you in pricing the products in your product catalog. using the customer master records that were just created. s^lahixfnemxiZllphk]lG This CATT creates sample customers that use a customer hierarchy. Assigns the sales area used for Internet processing to hierarchy type Y. If you are not using the Online Store preconfiguration with the PCC. Changes the password for the customers. This CATT should only be run if the Online Store preconfiguration is used in conjunction with the PCC. two-day shipping. The CATT is run once initially before reading the variants. This CATT cannot anticipate changes to field settings and values that normally occur during an implementation. The default document pricing schema is X. This scenario is explained in detail in chapter 10. In order to facilitate changing the variants. if required. pricing procedure ZWAXUS should be assigned. you need to enter your own sales area as parameters. CATT Procedure ZPCCTAX_OVKK Description Assigns the pricing procedure. do not enter a value for the freight carrier name and search term in the import parameters. the first run-through of the CATT creates a “generic” freight carrier that can be copied to create others. . using variants for each carrier. When executing the CATT. “Sales Order Status” on page 179. and standard shipping. This CATT should never be run in a productive environment. The Incoterms allow this calculation for overnight shipping. The following CATT is for the scenario to display customer orders and link to the carrier web site for tracking. For taxes with an external package. s^lahix_k^b`amx\Zkkb^klG This CATT creates the vendor master data used to demonstrate the sales order status tracking with URL links. keeping in mind the requirements in the step-by-step instructions. please create your own vendor master records. For internal taxes.Appendix G: Introduction to Computer-Aided Test Tools (CATTs) MNL s^lahixikb\^x]^mG This CATT assigns the pricing procedure used to calculate taxes for the product catalog and orders received through the Internet. Six variants exist for this CATT. Y2D. based on the parameters entered at runtime s^lahixbg\hm^kflG This CATT facilitates the calculation of sample freight rates and creates the master data (rates) that can be used to demonstrate the freight calculation. the pricing procedure parameter should be set to ZWAJUS. one for each vendor. If you are not using the Online Store preconfiguration in conjunction with the PCC. CATT Procedure ZPCCTOOL_MASTER_DATA Description This CATT creates the vendor master for six freight carriers. CATT Procedure ZESHOP_INCOTERMS Description Creates the master data for the three delivered Incoterms: YST. and YOV \Zmm lz
~ h}~ lz The CATT that creates the sample vendor master records should only be run if you are using the Online Store preconfiguration in conjunction with the PCC in a new implementation. If you are not using the Online Store preconfiguration with the PCC. S. CATT Procedure ZPCCVV11_ORDER_OUTPUT Description Creates the output condition type that designates the sales document type. parameters are assigned that will be necessary for the IAC services to function correctly Adds the e-mail address to the user master of the ITS user ZESHOP_ITSUSER_EMAIL \Zmm z l lz
~ h}~ i|~ ~ h
~ l~ The following CATTs create SD master data. If the user does not exist. a delivery is shipped. The activity group is not assigned and must be done in a manual step. The generic ITS user is explained in detail in chapter 14. This CATT is run twice. . CATT Procedure ZPCCTOOL_CHECKUSER ZPCCSU01_01 Description Determines whether the ITS user already exists. The Online Store configuration is described in chapter 3. which allows the confirmation e-mail to be sent to the customer when an order is created. defaults for number and date displays. delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration. and the invoice is processed. which usually occurs if the Online Store preconfiguration is used in conjunction with the PCC’s optional ESS configuration. If the user already exists.6C \Zmm ~ bml n~ The following CATT creates the generic ITS user that logs on to R/3 when a customer accesses a sell-side IAC. “Creating the Online Store with the Catalog” on page 21. ZPCCVV21_SHIPPING_OUTPUT Creates the output condition type that designates the delivery type. that generates a confirmation e-mail to the customer when the sales order from the Internet is created. delivered with the standard R/3 System. for the two different order types delivered with the preconfiguration. and test the new sales document types delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration. “The ITS User: Logging on to R/3” on page 235. that generates a confirmation e-mail to the customer when the delivery is shipped.MNM Configuration Guide | Release 4. the user ID must be in capital letters If the user does not already exist. it is created. an e-mail address and the appropriate get/set parameters are added to the user master record. s^lahixhnminmxk^\hk]lG This CATT creates the master data for the output types. s^lahixbmlnl^kG This CATT creates the generic user that should be used to log on to ITS. this CATT creates the ITS user with U. delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration. the customer master record. and again to create the conditions for the credit memo. for the two different billing types delivered with the preconfiguration. s^lahixlZe^lxmZqZ[e^G This CATT tests the sales document flow of the document types delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration for the consumer scenario. the first time to create the output conditions for the billing document for the invoice/receipt. The sales in this procedure is taxable. CATT Procedure ZPCCTOOL_MASTER_DATA Description Creates the material master of the product to be sold. that generates a confirmation e-mail to the customer when an invoice. This CATT is run twice. and the price of the product Creates a percentage discount for the product using the material pricing group Creates a sale price for the product Creates a discount for the customer Creates an order with the newly created product and customer Creates the delivery and posts the goods issue for the order Creates the invoice for the order based on the delivery document Prints the invoice for the document Finds the billing amount from the invoice header to facilitate the payment process Posts the incoming payment for the invoice Creates a return order with reference to the invoice Creates the return delivery document and posts the goods receipt Releases the sales order with credit block Change the credit block in the sales order Create the credit for the return ZPCCVK11_CREATE_ZDP1 ZPCCVK11_SALES_PRICE_MAT ZPCCVK11_CREATE_K007 ZPCCVA01_STD_ORDER ZPCCVL01N_DELIVERY ZPCCVF01_BILLING ZPCCVF03_ISSUE_BILLING_DOC ZPCCTOOL_VBRK ZPCCFBZ1_PAYMENT2 ZESHOPVA01_YWRE ZPCCVL01N_RET_DELIVERY ZPCCVKM3_RELEASE_SO ZPCCVA02_SO ZPCCVF01_BILLING . or credit memo is processed.Appendix G: Introduction to Computer-Aided Test Tools (CATTs) MNN CATT Procedure ZPCCVV31_BILLING_OUTPUT Description Creates the output condition type that designates the billing type. This CATT is run twice. receipt. This CATT is the same as the CATT ZESHOP_SALES_RETURN. This procedure is similar to ZESHOP_SALES_TAXABLE. but is run for the order type used for the business partner scenario. CATT Procedure ZPCCTOOL_MASTER_DATA Description Creates the material master of the product to be sold.6C s^lahixlZe^lxmZqZ[e^x[nlG This CATT is the same as the CATT ZESHOP_SALES_TAXABLE. and the price of the product Creates a percentage discount for the product using the material pricing group Creates a sales price for the product Creates a discount for the customer Creates an order with the newly created product and customer Creates the delivery and posts the goods issue for the order Creates the invoice for the order. but it is run for the order type used for the business partner scenario.MNO Configuration Guide | Release 4. but the sale is not taxable. . s^lahixlZe^lxk^mnkgG This CATT tests the sales document flow of the document types delivered with the Online Store preconfiguration for the consumer scenario. the customer master record. based on the delivery document Prints the invoice for the document Finds the billing amount from the invoice header to facilitate the payment process Posts the incoming payment for the invoice Creates a return order with reference to the invoice Creates the return delivery document and posts the goods receipt Releases the sales order with credit block Change the credit block in the sales order Create the credit for the return ZPCCVK11_CREATE_ZDP1 ZPCCVK11_SALES_PRICE_MAT ZPCCVK11_CREATE_K007 ZPCCVA01_STD_ORDER ZPCCVL01N_DELIVERY ZPCCVF01_BILLING ZPCCVF03_ISSUE_BILLING_DOC ZPCCTOOL_VBRK ZPCCFBZ1_PAYMENT2 ZESHOPVA01_YWRE ZPCCVL01N_RET_DELIVERY ZPCCVKM3_RELEASE_SO ZPCCVA02_SO ZPCCVF01_BILLING s^lahixlZe^lxk^mnkgx[nl. saplabs. and XiTechnologies.saplabs.trintech. . Information about certified partners that provide credit card authorization and clearing processing (in alphabetical order): CyberCash.com/ www.com/ www.saplabs. PaylinX. plus software and documentation downloads. Web site Topic www.com/ www.com/ www. which may be used in conjunction with Best Practices for SAP Online Store. Can also download ITS Administration Guide.com www.com/e-commerce Information about sell-side Internet scenarios (choose Selling from SAP’s e-commerce site) www.6D (283 pages) and ITS Tuning Guide.com/pcc/ Information about Employee Self-Service (ESS).saplabs.com/ess www.vertex.6D (57 pages) www. Release 4. Information about certified external tax packages (in alphabetical order): Taxware and Vertex.trustmarque.com/ www.com/ecom.cybercash.5()(5(1&(6 p~{ l~ J5HIHUHQFHV The links below provide additional information on topics related to Best Practices for SAP Online Store.xitcorp. Trintech. You can obtain the Online Store preconfiguration from the web site www. Information about the Preconfigured Client. Release 4.com/ www.paylinx.sap.com/its Information about the Internet Transaction Server (ITS).taxware. TrustMarque. Marcus Goncalves. “Learning Curve . ISBN: 0201633574. Norton. MA. 28 August 2000. (Harvard Business School Press. Kaplan and Dr. 1999). Employee Self-Service information and book. Boston. 1999. “The SAP Online Store. (Sybex. “E-Reality Sets In: Separating E-Fact from E-Fiction for the Second Phase of E-Business. Jeff Sweat. 1998).Savy Companies Apply the Painful Lessons Learned from Implementing Enterprise Resource Planning Software to Next-Generation Applications. Dr. (Osborne. Firewalls: A Complete Guide.saplabs. Howard Rubin.6B. “Enterprise Application Ongoing Support Costs Unveiled. Firewalls: 24seven. (Prentice Hall.” META Group Research.com/ www.sap. n n n n n n n Firewalls Complete (Complete Series). 1999. Material # 51007411 (Walldorf. (O’Relly.com Topic Shop for SAP-brand merchandise and educational items in the SAPshop.tealeaf. Management/Measurement and Benchmarking. 1997). 1996). Release 4. The Balanced Scorecard. Building Internet Firewalls. 1999). Zwicky. __________ . November 1999. Mathew Strebe. n n n n . Firewalls and Internet Security: Repelling the Wily Hacker.” META Group Research. William Cheswick and Steven Bellovin. Robert S. (2nd edition: July 2000).6C Web site shop. (Addison-Wesley. 1999). Dr. 1994). 2 August 1999.” Informationweek. 1999. Company that offers web statistics solutions.com/ess www. Marcus Goncalves and Vinicius Goncalves. (McGraw-Hill. “Electronic Commerce: Strategy Formulation. Brent Chapman and Elizabeth D. D. Protecting Your Web Site with Firewalls. SAP AG. SAP@Web Installation Guide. David P. “Shades of Gray: Privacy and Online Marketing. h~ k~~~|~ n n n Randi Barshack. 1995).” META Group Research.” ECommerce Times.MNQ Configuration Guide | Release 4.” SAP AG White Paper. See Available to promise Authorization objects ITS users 242 Authorizations creating activity group to limit generic ITS user 240–243 credit card verification 289 limiting access to product catalog 103–116 product groups. 207 Activity groups ITS user assigned to 248–251 limiting authorizations of generic ITS user 240–243 Address. 284. See Application service provider ATP. A Accelerated Internet Selling (AIS) available reports 330–332 links for preconfiguration 457 system administration 302 Account groups customer hierarchy 163 determine for customers 163 internal number assignment 140 Internet customers 132 Account information 204 configuration 212 customer exists in R/3 and has password 211 data in customer master record 208–211 data in R/3 for sales order tracking 208 passwords 207. 208 viewable over the web 205. 318 HTML templates 220 language-resource file 220 scaling 317 separate from WGate 316 Application service provider 284. See AGate ASAP 14 project plan for Online Store add-on 13 project plan for SMBs 15 ASP. 296 types for images 33 Application Gateway. IP 281 AGate 2. 7. 189. 285.K . limiting access 100–118 Automated alert 306 Availability check 192. 207 Accounts receivable assignment to payment card types 171 viewable over the web 204. 392 across all plants 393 displaying in Online Store 392 dynamic 394 entering delivery plant in master data 396 one plant 393 static 394 threshold quantity 391 . 315.1'(. 282. 212 Business-to-business procurement 388 Button architecture 224–225 . 211. Online Store install 437 CATTs. configuration 42 Bill-to address.MOI Configuration Guide | Release 4. 331. displaying as delivery address 434 Blocked sales orders 331. third-party. 197–201 creating the product catalog 196 customer number and password 196. 28 B Backend R/3 sizing 314 Background color 223 Backorders report 329. object type 207. 338–341 Body frame 222 Browsing versus purchasing ratio 270 BUS1007. See Third-party products Computer-aided test tools (CATTs) 435 definition 436 executing a CATT 440 executing the test catalogs 437 executing with variants 443 installation catalog 446 ITS user 454 multiple employees purchasing 451 overview 435 ownership 446 procedures delivered with online store preconfiguration 446 product catalog 446 sales order processing support 454 sales order status 453 sensitivity to change 436 transport helper 446 Condition records. 243 Cleared items displaying Internet data in R/3 206 Color background 223 depth 313 Components. 318 Characteristics customer types 103–106 modifying filtering logic for product catalog 117 Checking rule availability check 195 default used by IAC 198–199 verifying for products 197 Class (type 011) 106–108 Class (type 060) 111–112 Classification system 101. 342–347 total per month 346–347 total value for month 344–346 using Fast Display/Document Overview 342–343 Bandwidth 312 Bank information 210 BAPIs product catalog data load 78 Benchmarks. See Computer aided test tools CBS. 197 default checking rule used by IAC 198–199 default settings used by IAC for insufficient stock 199–200 implementing modifications 395 java applet configuration 200–201 overview 192 parameters for ITS user’s profile 196 product availability 192 product catalog enhancement 391 product catalog for web server 196 setting up data in R/3 195–197 stock requirements list 193–194 Button text changing 431–434 C CA-PCI (Payment Card Interface) 289 Catalog. sizing 270 Best practice 14 Billing types. See Certified business solutions Certified business solutions (CBS) 15 Change control 317. 242. creating 26. 399 updating ITS templates 400 Available-to-promise (ATP) 19 availability checking rule for products 197 checking inventory 194 configuration 195.6C transporting information to web pages 397. 255 ATP configuration 196 class (type 011) 106–108 configuration to support Online Store 130–142 create a reference 127 customer class 108–110 e-mail address information 260 ensuring data entered correctly 208–211 Online Store preconfiguration 124 CyberCash 457 . 140. 255 password assignment 187. 207. 146–149 number ranges 131. 205. 70–75 product presentation profile 34–35 quotation and order profile 37 sales document types 39–41 sales order status 187 SAPscript forms 49 system 314 technical infrastructure 268 workstation applications 73–74 Confirmations. 207. 94 product catalog 33–50. high-speed 311 Consumer master record displaying in R/3 122 Cookie for single sign-on 233 Corporation. 289 certified processing vendors 170 field configuration 227 see also Payment card setting up interface 289 settlement 169–170. e-mail 246 billing 47–49 delivery 45–47 orders 43–45 Connections. 388 numbers 187. 36. 36. 212 administration profile 23. 175–176 Customer account groups 132. create as sold-to party 149–152 Country selection profile 35 CPI-C links 292 CPU utilization 317. 163 account information 19. 255 as Internet users 255 behavior 376 characteristics 117 class. 160. 175–176.Index MOJ Condition type ZDP1 94 Configuration application types for images 33 billing types 42 communication with credit card processing software 172–177 country selection profile 35 customer administration profile 36 data carrier 72–73 firewall 281 item category 41 limited access to product groups 116–118 number ranges 70 Online Store 37–39 output determination 43–49 payment card 171–172 pricing 90–98 pricing procedures 43. 172. 208. 131. 318 Credit card authorization 169. linking to customer master records 108–110 data in customer master record 208–211 data in R/3 for sales order tracking 208 discounts 85 e-mail address into customer master record 260 logon with e-mail 189 multiple passwords for one customer 144. 211 processing shopping basket 412 profile 421 target 311 tax jurisdiction code 141 type characteristic 103–106 verifying in R/3 121–123 Customer hierarchy 144 account groups 163 assigned to Internet sales order type 164 configuration 158–165 create 155–156 create customer hierarchy type 158 discount pricing 148–149 master data setup 149–157 multiple passwords 146–149 new partner functions 159 sales areas allowed 164 Customer master records 187. 204. 170 German text changes 427–428 Graphics 312 3D 224 background color 223 . See Domain name service Document analysis. 49 Employees create as Internet sold-to parties 152–154 creating Internet users 154 Encryption 285 Equipment location 297 Estimated web traffic 269 Euro 388 Express Shipping Interface (XSI) 291 F Faxes. 398 processing 181 status 180 type 188 verifying address in R/3 121 Discounts corporations 157 customer hierarchy 148–149 customers 85 products 87 DMS. 425 loading large file to application server 425 loading the product catalog 75–78 Defense-in-depth 281 Delivery bill-to address identical 434 date 192 document 180. See Document Management System DNS.6C D Data transfer data load program 76. 185. integration with R/3 and online store 292 Field catalog.MOK Configuration Guide | Release 4. 290 after packed for shipping 291 incoterms 96 setting up the system 291 time of sale 291 Freight carriers 183. 316 Dynamic check 394 integration with R/3 and online store 292 orders 43–45 SAPscript forms 45. 89. modifying 118 Financial savings 296 Firewalls 280 configuration 281 logs 306 placing 281 Frame body 222 header 221 Freight calculation 86–87. creating 366 Field text modification 427–428 Filtering logic. 182. reporting 331 Document Management System (DMS) creating documents in 55–58 Domain name service (DNS) 316 Dual host 272 ITS installation 276. 188 defining URLs 182 FTP 300 E E-business analysis 375 Tealeaf Technology 376–383 tools 376 E-mail confirmations 246 billing 47–49 delivery 45–47 G General flow logic 411 General ledger (G/L) accounts 169. 396. 47. 261 Data Transfer Made Easy Guidebook 263 Data Transfer Workbench 262. 189 documents 182 list of all or open deliveries 331 partner determination type 162 plant 393. 356–358 Invoices.Index MOL changing image on ITS template 222 creating and changing 226 creating new 223 document management 307 H Header frame 221 High-speed connections 311 HTML Business 216. 316 I IACs. 238 components 7 configuration 304 dual host installation 272. 275–277 instance monitoring 304 link 457 logging on to R/3 236 . See ITS Internet users creating 154 customer ID 254 customers 255 data load program 261 estimating web traffic 270 for existing customers 258 generic 255 IAC transactions 236 overview 254 R/3 user logs 236 Invoiced sales report 330. 347–349 Incoterms chosen from Internet 97 creating rates for 89 freight calculation 96 ITS templates 97–98 reference customer 89 Information structures activate update 372 configuration of self-defined 364–372 creating 367 field catalog 366 standard reporting 352 update rules 368 user-defined reporting 359 Infrastructure security 280 Install catalog. 275–277 technical infrastructure 268 Internet application components (IACs) xxiv. 331. 236 available to promise (ATP) 195 checking default checking rule 198 customer account information (IKA1) 212 customer ID 254 default ATP settings for insufficient stock 199–200 Online Store 22 R/3 System 236 sales order status 180. 220 HTML templates 217. Online Store 437 Installation dual host ITS installation 276 ITS 272. 276 how it works 9 IACs 236 installing 272. 220 background color 223 body frame 222 button architecture 224–225 changing an image 222 creating and changing graphics 226 header frame 221 single sign-on 233 HTTPS performance 313. 18. 187 Internet service provider (ISP) 311 Internet Transaction Server. 331. viewable over the web 204 IP address 281 ISP. 353–355 Incomplete sales documents 331. See Internet application components IIS. See Internet service provider Item category assigning to return sales document type 42 configuration 41 ITS <its_root> 271 AGate 7. See Microsoft Internet Information Server Implementation project planning 12 Incoming order report 329. 238 modifying 401.MOM Configuration Guide | Release 4. object type for Internet users 187. See ITS users virtual ITS 273 WGate 7 WGate directory 238 ITS Administration tool CPU utilization 316 functions of 304 installation 303 logging in 303 using 304 ITS templates background color 223 body frame 222 button architecture 224–225 changing an image 222 creating and changing graphics 226 credit card data input 233 header frame 221 incoterms modification 97–98 mapping R/3 screens to web templates 217 overview 216 price breakouts 96–97 service file 219 SG templates (themes) 221 shopping basket 406 single sign-on 233 updating to work with modifications 400. 407. 419–420 updating to work with the modifications 411 ITS users assigning to activity group 248–251 correct parameters in profile 187 creating activity groups that limit authorizations of generic ITS user 240 creating or changing for general logon 244–247 overview 236 placing into appropriate service files 251 profile 183. 420 Layout areas linking layout class to 113–116 Layout class linking to layout areas 113–116 LINUX 271 Log statistic tools 374 Logon creating or changing ITS user 244–247 sales order status 189 Logon groups 314. 212 L Language choice 237 Language-resource file ITS AGate 220.6C maintenance tasks 304 modification for customer logon with e-mail 189 operating system 271 overview 2. 318 M Master data 435 creating customers 126–130 customer hierarchy 149–157 Material master adding data for product catalog 59–62 adding structure and subscreen 397 checking rule for availability check 195 extending with threshold quantity field 397 Material pricing group 94 Merchant ID 176 Message text changing 429–430 . 6 parameters for user’s profile 196 root directory 271 single-host installation 272 system administration 302–304 user management 304 user profile parameters 32 users. 187 J Java applet configuration 200–201 JavaScript 217 K KNA1. 331.Index MON Microsoft Exchange integration with SAPoffice using SAPconnect 292 SAP Exchange Connector 294 Microsoft Internet Information System (IIS) creating multiple web servers 275 Microsoft Project 14 MIME files 220. 100 setting up 22 Tealeaf Technology modifications 383 technical components 6 technical sequence. 400 viewing 82–83 viewing inside R/3 145 Outbound deliveries list of 329. 238 Monitoring. 349–351 Output determination billing confirmation 47–49 delivery confirmation 45–47 orders 43–45 SAPscript forms 49 Output type e-mail billing confirmation 30–32 e-mail delivery confirmation 28–30 e-mail order confirmation 26–28 . See Net present value Number ranges configuration 70 Internet customers 131 Number. AIS systems 304–305 Multilanguage web sites 238–239 Multiple employees customer numbers 144 Multiple passwords. customer 187. 353–355 Order tracking 181 Orders unconfirmed 399. one customer 146–149 My Profile 228–232. 212 Offsite ASP-provided equipment 298 own equipment 297 One-time customers 120. 212 KNA1 187. 255 O Objects BUS1007 207. ATP 192 available reports 330–332 computer-aided test tools (CATTs) 446 configuration 37–39 creating customers 126–130 credit card authorizations and settlement 168 customer hierarchy 146–149 customer master records 124. 130–142 implementing modifications 418 install catalog 437 ITS 7 linking subroutines 418 parameters 395 preconfiguration scenarios 24 pricing 80 product availability 392 product catalog 52. 211. 421 N Net present value (NPV) 14 Netscape Navigator 390 Network Interface Cards (NICs) 274 Network traffic 280 NPV. ITS 9 test catalog 437 WGate 7 Onsite equipment 297 Open items verify the Internet data in R/3 206 Order report incoming 329. 125 creating 129 customer types 124 displaying in R/3 122–123 master data 126 settings in customer administration profile 131 Online Store 19 accessing 24–25 account information viewable 204 AGate 7 ASAP project plan 13 availability information. MOO Configuration Guide | Release 4. 457 CATTs 435 Pricing configuration 90–98 creating 26. See Procurement cards PCC. 84–85 configuration 43. 53 accessing 55 ATP enhancement 391 basic data 88 configuration 70–74 create class for customer master records 106–108 creating 25 creating class (type 060) 111–112 creating in R/3 196 data load 75–78 document type configuration 70–71 filtering 101–102 generating data for web server 196 incoterms 89 integration to procurement 388 limiting access 103–116 link customer class to customer master records 108–110 link layout class to layout area 113–116 master data creation 62–69 modifying filtering logic 117 placing files on web server 196 pricing 84–87 . WGate.6C Outsourcing everything 299 full 299 medium 299 minimal 298 overview 296 problems 300 P Page size 313 Partial outsource web server and WGate 298 web server. 87 customer hierarchy 148–149 discount 94 discounts for corporations 157 R/3 master data 87–89 Pricing procedures 43. 306 traffic 313 tuning process 310 web page 312 Port numbers virtual ITS 274 Preconfigured Client (PCC) 183. See Preconfigured Client Performance businesses 312 consumers 311 graphics 312 overview 310 page size 313 statistics 310 system administration 305. 94 product catalog and internet order type 95 subtotals 90–91 without PCC 90 ZWAJUS 91 ZWAXUD 93 ZWAXUS 92 Procurement cards (P-cards) 171 Product availability 192 displaying in Online Store 392 Product catalog 19. and AGate 299 Partner functions assigning to customer account groups 160 billing header 162 customer hierarchy 159 delivery partner determination type 162 Internet order type 161 partner determination procedures 160 Partner type CR 188 Pass-through parameters 281 Passwords displaying customer account information 211 multiple for one customer 146–149 PaylinX 457 Payment card categories 171 configuration 171–172 interface 170 See also Credit card Payments clearing viewable over the web 204 P-cards. 331. 270 user ID 177 verifying Internet customer created 121–123 Reference customer 125 creating 127 creating master record 26 Internet registration 121. 34 configuration 34–35 filter criteria 117 Profiles customer administration 23 ITS user 187 product presentation 23 quotation and order 23. 353–355 incomplete sales documents 329. 100–118 linking products 59 product catalog structure 54 Product presentation profile 23. 126 linking to consumer default 129 linking to product catalog 127–128 Registration. 347–349 invoiced sales report 330. 124. 346–347 blocked sales orders 329. 331. 37 Project planning for complete implementation 12 for e-commerce add-on 13 overview 12 Protecting data customer 284 network 284 Purchase orders changing numbering system 415 entry by customer 415 ITS template changes 419–420 processing with subroutines 418 technical enhancement for entry of numbers 415 viewing inside R/3 145 Purchasing multiple purchasers from one corporation 144 Q Quotation and order profile 23. 332–337 requirements 322–325 shipping point 330 shipping report 358–359 standard info structures 352 . 172 destination 172–175 RFCin and RFCout 294 technology 292 Replace servers 315 Reporting available reports 330–332 backorders 329. Internet user 255 Remote Function Call (RFC) 170. 338–341 document analysis 331 importance of online sales reports 322 incoming order report 329. 356–358 list of all outbound deliveries 329. 349–351 list of deliveries 331 list of sales orders 328. 37 R R/3 master data Online Store 25–32 pricing master data 87–89 product catalog 55–69 R/3 System cleared items. 331. verifying Internet data 206 pricing master data 87–89 scaling 318 setting up sales order tracking 208 sizing backend 269.Index MOP pricing procedure 95 reference customer 127–128 structure 53–54 table creation 76–78 variant 23. 344–346. 331. 331. 331. displaying Internet data 206 configuration 18 consumer master record 122 dedicated to web service 319 delivery address 121 displaying one-time customer Internet data 122– 123 ensuring customer exists and has password 211 logging on using ITS 236 open items. 342–343. 238 Product groups assigning to 54 limiting access 100. 332. 338–341 customer hierarchy type 164 list of. 38 SD. report 329. See Sales and distribution Seasonality 269 Secured HTTP 313 Security 304 automated alert 306 firewall logs 306 infrastructure 280 logs 305 Selling to business partners scenario 24.6C statistical analysis 331–332. 347–349 list by sold-to party 332–337 Sales Information System (SIS) 352 Sales order status 19. report 329. displaying deliveries 349 . 331. 332. 331. 38 Selling to consumers scenario 24.MOQ Configuration Guide | Release 4. 359–363 user-defined info structures 359 Resolution 313 Return on investment 14 Returns sales document type assigning item category to 42 RFC. 38 Sell-side 18 Server evaluation 314 Service files ITS users 251 vw10. report 328.srvc 190 Service-level agreement 296 Sessions 317 Settlement account 172 Shipping point report 330. 331. See Remote Function Call (RFC) ROI. 332–337 tracking 208 Sales report invoiced 330. See Return on investment S Sales and Distribution (SD) 18 Sales areas customer hierarchy type 164 Sales documents configuration types 39–41 creating partner determination procedures 160 incomplete. 331. 359–363 Sales tax calculation 289 SAP Business Information Warehouse (BW) 377 SAP Exchange Connector installing 294 see also SAP business connector SAP notes 387 SAP@Webstudio 217 document management 307 overview 218 screen 219 SAPcommunications 292 SAPconnect 292 integration of SAPoffice and Microsoft Exchange 292 see also SAP business connector SAPoffice integration with Microsoft Exchange using SAPconnect 292 SAProuter 283 SAPscript forms 49 billing confirmation 49 delivery confirmation 47 order confirmation 45 Scaling 314 AGate 317 R/3 318 summary 319 systems 315 WGate 316 Scenarios multilanguage web sites 238–239 selling to business partners 24. 352 territory sales report 330. 38 selling to consumers 24. 188 configuration 187 logon method 189 overview 180 tracking 183 Sales order type assigning the output determination 45 Sales orders blocked. 358 Shipping report 358–359 Ship-to party. 356–358 territory 330. 188. 396 ZESHOP_ZFGPARAMS 398. See Total cost of ownership Tealeaf Technology 322. 352 Statistics performance 310 system administration 305. 187 updating with data load program 76 ZESHOP_CFGPARAMS 395. sales order 188 Stock insufficient.Index MOR Shopping basket current 225–226 custom table that stores basket 410 customer processing 412 detail specifications 411 extension for store and retrieve 411 general flow logic 411 include program for displaying basket 406 including processing 406 maintaining the table 410 modification implementation 410 retrieving 407. 187. default ATP settings 199–200 requirements list. customer’s 141 Taxes 87 TCI. 419–420 Templates. 411 Target customer 311 Tax calculation 289 Tax jurisdiction code. 15 SMB. 376–383 create event framework in R/3 381–382 graphical representation 377. 306 Status. See Total cost of implementation TCO. displaying in R/3 193–194 transporting availability to web pages 397. 184. 378 installing AGate 380 modifying online store 383 process 379–380 Technical infrastructure 266 installation and configuration 268 ITS installation 275–277 sizing 268 Templates ITS. See also ITS Templates and HTML templates . See Small and midsized business Sold-to party creating corporation 149–152 creating employees 152–154 list sales documents by 332–337 Source code modifying SAPMWWMJ 419 SpaceImage () 224 Static check 394 Statistical analysis. 413 O_VBAP 400 payment card configuration 171 TCAURL 182. 399 unrestricted-use 398 Subroutines linking to Online Store 418 processing purchase order data 418 Subtotals 90–91 System administration monitoring 304–305 performance and statistics 306 SAP standard documentation 302. updating 400. 409 saving 407 update ITS templates for modifications 411 updating ITS templates to work with modifications 406 Single host installation 272 Single sign-on 233 Sizing 268 backend R/3 System 270 benchmarks 270 browsing versus purchasing ratio 270 web traffic 269 Small and midsized business (SMBs) 14. 310 upgrades 307 web server 306 System configuration 314 System landscape outsource options 298 T Tables account group settings 132 BFUSER_TYP 256 customer types 106 MARA 397 O_BASKET 411. reporting 331–332. 189 TCAVAR 182. 399 ZYESHOP_BASKET 410. 419. 187. 338 V. 231. 427. 187. 359–363 Test catalog Online Store 437 Text button text changes 431–434 message text changes 429–430 Third-party products 288 credit card verification services 289 e-mail and fax 292 freight calculation 290 tax calculation 289 Threshold quantity 391 extending material master 397 Timeout parameters 237 Tools e-business analysis 376 ITS administration 316 web site statistics 374 Total cost of implementation (TCI) 14 Total cost of ownership (TCO) 14 Tracking number 182 sales order status 183 Traffic 313 Transactions allowable 241 CKAV 193. 258 SXCA_OLD 76 SXDA 58. 340. 248 SA38 396 SCAT 440 SE11 365 SE37 117. 346 V/08 43 V/25 49 V/30 44 V/32 44 V/34 45. 426. 212 SE38 97. 111 CMOD 141. 353. 447 SU01 32.14 331. 332 VD07 129 . 197. 145. 141 OVZ2 198 OVZ9 198 OVZC 131 OVZJ 199 PFCG 240. 197. 198. 46 V/40 47 V/G7 45. 211. 262 SXDA_OLD 262 V. 249 SU05 154.15 331.6C Territory sales report 330. 446 SE51 419 SE71 50 SE80 431 SE91 429 SM30 188. 332. 446. 47. 372 OMT3B 397 OV87 171 OVH1 159 OVH2 164 OVH3 164 OVH4 165 OVTO 132. 49 VA01 181 VA03 122.02 331. 356 MCTK 332.MPI Configuration Guide | Release 4. 241 MC18 366 MC20 366 MC21 367 MC23 367 MC24 368. 347 V. 396 OBD2 163 OD00 70 OMO1 352. 390 CL02 106. 397 CT04 103 CT11 106 CV01N 55 FBL5N 206 FCC1 169 FCC4 170 FCCR 170 IKA1 204. 358 MD04 193 MM02 59. 359 MCTA 331. 212. 370 MC26 368 MCSI 332. 344. 241. 189. 342. 396 SM31 382 STWB_1 438. 245. 417 VA05 331. 118. 217. 150. 315 scaling 316 separate from AGate 316 Windows NT 4. See E-business analysis Web traffic administration statistics 305 backend R/3 System 269 estimating 269 seasonality 269 WGate 2. 241. 181. 282. 422 Trintech 457 TrustMarque 457 Users Internet. 7. 196 WWM2 113. 349 VOFA 42 VOPA 159. 161. 152. 197. 284. 389 WCPC 33 WW10 52. 400 UNIX 271 Unrestricted-use stock 398 Update ITS templates 411 Update rules 368 Upgrades 307 servers 315 URLs defining freight carrier 182 length 389 linking to Online Store 24 multiple languages 237–240 variables read from the delivery document 189 User exit. credit cards 289 Virtual ITS 273 Virtual web server 273 W WAN 284 Web gateway. 211. 162. 241 XK01 183 ZOSA 228. 62.Index MPJ VDH1N 155 VK31 26. 127 XD01 26. See ITS users V Value-added reseller 15 Vendor master 183 for each freight carrier 183 Verification. 241 XD02 108. 241 WW30 388 WWM1 26. 396 XD03 208. 241. 187. 160. 260. 127. 285. tax jurisdiction code 141 . 388 WW20 23. 130. 241 VW10 241. See Internet users ITS. See WGate Web page performance 312 Web server gateway. 188 VOV4 42 VOV8 39 VV11 26 VV21 28 VV31 30 VW01 181.0 Option Pack 275 Work threads 317 U Unconfirmed orders 399. 157 VL03N 185 VL06F 331. See WGate Web servers creating multiple on Microsoft IIS 275 generating product catalog data 196 overview 6 placing product catalog files 196 system administration 306 virtual 273 Web site statistics importance of reporting 322 overview 374 references 383 tools 374 Web site statistics. create for unconfirmed orders 399 Workstation applications.6C Workflow. loading data 425–426 . configuration 73–74 X XiTechnologies 457 XSI interface specification 291 Z ZFTPGET program.MPK Configuration Guide | Release 4.